eastern district police station - anne arundel county, md€¦ · neta ats – acceptance testing,...

Anne Arundel County, Maryland

Department of Public Works

Bureau of Engineering

Eastern District Police Station Pasadena Road

Pasadena, Maryland 21122

PROPOSAL # F507600 PROJECT # F507601

Project Manual – Volume 2 (Div. 15 & 16)

Architect WGM Architects

One Annapolis Street, Suite 100

Annapolis, Maryland 21401

(410) 841-6787

(410) 841-5523 (fax) Civil Engineer Kibart, Inc.

901 Dulaney Valley Road, Suite 300

Towson, Maryland 21204

(401) 494-1111

(401) 494-1112 (fax)

Structural Engineer The Watkins Partnership

3032 Mitchelville Road, Suite 202

Bowie, MD 20716

(301) 249-0974

(301) 249-0976 (fax) MEP Engineers Bay Engineering, Inc.

190 Admiral Cochrane Drive, Ste. 175

Annapolis, Maryland 21401

(410) 897-9290

(410) 897-9295 (fax)

Bureau of Engineering January 15, 2013

WGM Project No. 28103.01

This page intentionally left blank.

EASTERN DISTRICT POLICE STATION 28103 - 1 28103.01 January 15, 2013

SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS DIVISION 0 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Pages 00850 Drawing List 3 DIVISION 1 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Pages

See Volume 1 DIVISION 2 – SITE CONSTRUCTION

See Volume 1 DIVISION 3 – CONCRETE

See Volume 1 DIVISION 4 - MASONRY

See Volume 1 DIVISION 5 – METALS

See Volume 1 DIVISION 6 - WOOD AND PLASTICS

See Volume 1 DIVISION 7 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION

See Volume 1 DIVISION 8 - DOORS AND WINDOWS

See Volume 1 DIVISION 9 – FINISHES

See Volume 1 DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES

See Volume 1 DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT

See Volume 1 DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS

See Volume 1

EASTERN DISTRICT POLICE STATION 28103 - 2 28103.01 January 15, 2013

DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION

See Volume 1 DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING SYSTEMS

See Volume 1 DIVISION 15 – MECHANICAL

15055 Common Motor Requirements 4 15050 Common Work Results for Plumbing 14 15051 Common Work Results for HVAC 14 15060 Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 11 15061 Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment 10 15071 Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing and Piping and Equipment 8 15072 Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment 12 15075 Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 6 15076 Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment 6 15080 Mechanical Insulation 6 15105 Pipes and Tubes for Plumbing Piping and Equipment 25 15106 Pipes and Tubes for HVAC Piping and Equipment 20 15110 General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping 11 15111 General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping 10 15127 Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping 5 15184 Refrigerant Piping 9 15400 Plumbing Equipment 11 15600 Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning 22 15725 Variable Frequency Drives 7 15800 Air Distribution 10 15900 Instrumentation and Control for HVAC 47 15947 HVAC Piping Systems Cleaning and Treatment 6 15948 Plumbing Piping Systems Cleaning and Treatment 4 15949 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for Plumbing 6 15950 Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC 8 15955 Leak Testing, Air Distribution and Duct Systems 2 DIVISION 16 – ELECTRICAL

16050 Common Work Results for Electrical 24 16060 Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems 9 16120 Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables 8 16130 Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems 14 16140 Wiring Devices 6 16230 Packaged Generator Assemblies 20 16440 Low Voltage Electrical Distribution 17 16460 Low Voltage Transformers 8 16480 Low Voltage Controllers 9 16495 Transfer Switches 10 16500 Lighting 16 END OF SPECIFICATIONS TABLE OF CONTENTS

EASTERN DISTRICT POLICE STATION 00850 - 1 DRAWING LIST 28103.01 January 15, 2013

SECTION 00850 – DRAWING LIST G100-Cover Sheet G101-Building Statistics/Life Safety Plan G102-U.L. Listings C100-Cover Sheet C101-Environmental Constraints Plan C102-Demolition Plan C103-Site and Utility Plan C104-Grading & Storm Drain Plan C105-Sediment Erosion Control Plan C105a-Sediment Erosion Control Plan C106-Sediment Erosion Control Plan C107-Sediment Erosion Control Details & Specifications C108-Storm Drain Drainage Area Plan C109-Proposed Overall Storm Water Management Plan C110-Existing & Proposed Drainage Area Plan C111-Outfall Analysis Plan C112-Details & Specifications C113-Details & Specifications C113a-Striping and Signage Plan and Details C114-Storm Water Management Permeable Pavement Details & Specifications C115-Stormfilter Plan Details & Specifications C116-Undergrond Stone/Pipe Attenuation Trench Plan, Details & Specifications C117-Rain Garden, Landscape Infiltration Plans, Details & Specifications C118-Micro-Bioretention Plan, Details & Specifications C119-Profiles C120-Profiles C121-Profiles C122-Landscape Plan C123-Forest Conservation Plan C124-Onsite/Offsite Sewer Plan C125-Offsite Sewer Plan C126-Offsite Sewer Plan C127-Traffic Control Plan C128-Storm Water Management Boring Plan C129-Road Improvement Plan and Details C130-Road Improvement Sections C131-Road Improvement Sections C132-Retaining Wall Plan and Details C133-Retaining Wall Elevation A100-Building Column Grid A101-First Floor Plan A102-Second Floor Plan A103-First Floor Plan (Partial) A104-First Floor Plan (Partial) A105-First Floor Plan (Partial) A106-First Floor Plan (Partial) A107-Second Floor Plan (Partial) A108-Second Floor Plan (Partial) A111-Roof Plan A121-First Floor Reflected Ceiling Plan A122-Second Floor Reflected Ceiling Plan A130-Finish Plans A201-North & East Elevation A202-South & West Elevation A301-Building Section A302-Building Section A303-Building Section A304-Building Section


A501-Wall Sections A502-Wall Sections A503-Wall Sections A504-Wall Sections A505-Wall Sections A506-Wall Sections A507-Wall Sections A520-Enlarged Details A521-Enlarged Details A522-Enlarged Details A523-Enlarged Details A550-Plan Details A560-Casework Details A601-Door Schedules A602-Storefront Elevations A603-Finish Schedules A604-Partition Types A701-Interior Elevations A702-Interior Elevations A703-Interior Elevations A704-Interior Elevations A705-Interior Elevations A706-Interior Elevations S101-Foundation Plan S102-Second Floor Framing Plan S103-Roof Framing Plan S200-Column Schedule S201-Sections S202-Sections S203-Sections S301-Typical Details S302-Typical Details S401-General Notes M0.1-Mechanical Cover Sheet M1.1-First Floor Plan – Mechanical M1.2-Second Floor Plan – Mechanical M1.3-First Floor Plan – Mechanical Piping M1.4-Second Floor Plan – Mechanical Piping M1.5-Roof Plan – Mechanical M2.1-Part Plan – Mechanical M3.1-Heating System Piping Schematic M4.1-Mechanical Details M4.2-Mechanical Details M4.3-Mechanical Details M5.1-Mechanical Schedules M5.2-Mechanical Schedules P0.1-Plumbing Cover Sheet P1.1-Sub Slab Plan – Sanitary P1.2-First Floor Plan – Sanitary P1.3-Second Floor Plan – Sanitary P1.4-First Floor Plan – Domestic Water P1.5-Second Floor Plan – Domestic Water P1.6-Roof Plan – Domestic Water P2.1-Part Plan – Plumbing P3.1-Domestic Water and Sanitary Riser P4.1-Plumbing Details P4.2-Plumbing Details


E0.1-Electrical Cover Sheet E1.1-Site Plan - Electrical E2.1-First Floor Plan - Lighting E2.2-Second Floor Plan - Lighting E3.1-First Floor Plan - Power E3.2-Second Floor Plan - Power E3.3-Roof Plan - Electrical E4.1-Parts Plan - Electrical E5.1-Power Riser E6.1-Details - Fire Alarm E6.2-Details - Electrical E6.3-Details - Electrical E6.4-Details - Electrical E7.1-Schedules – Electrical E7.2-Schedules – Panels E7.3-Schedules – Panels E7.4-Schedules – Panels

EASTERN DISTRICT POLICE STATION 15055 - 1 COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS 28103.01 January 15, 2013

SECTION 15055 - COMMON MOTOR REQUIREMENTS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section, and all sections of Division 15.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section covers motor requirements for all plumbing and HVAC equipment.

B. This Section includes basic requirements for motors. It includes motors that are factory-installed as part of equipment and appliances as well as field-installed motors.

C. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Section “Common Work Results for Plumbing.” 2. Section “Common Work Results for HVAC.” 3. Section “Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.” 4. Section “Identification for HVAC piping and Equipment.” 5. Section “Plumbing Equipment.” 6. Section “Heating Ventilating and Air Conditioning”

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Bearing Manufacturers Association:

1. ABMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings, 1990 (R2000).

B. National Electrical Manufacturers Association:

1. NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators, 2006.

C. International Electrical Testing Association:

1. NETA ATS – Acceptance Testing, 2007. 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit catalog data for each motor furnished loose. Indicate nameplate data, standard compliance, electrical ratings and characteristics, and physical dimensions, weights, mechanical performance data, and support points.

B. Test Reports: Indicate procedures and results for specified factory and field testing and

inspection. 1.5 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum five years experience.

B. Testing Agency: Company who is a member of the International Electrical Testing

Association and specializing in testing products specified in this section with minimum five


years experience. 1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Lift only with lugs provided. Handle carefully to avoid damage to components, enclosure, and finish.

B. Protect products from weather and moisture by covering with plastic or canvas and by

maintaining heating within enclosure.

C. For extended outdoor storage, remove motors from equipment and store separately. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 REQUIREMENTS FOR MOTORS

A. General: Requirements below apply to motors covered by this Section except as otherwise indicated.

1. Motors Larger than 1/2 HP: 3-phase. 2. Motors 1/2 HP and Smaller: Single-phase. 3. Frequency Rating: 60 Hz. 4. Voltage Rating: Determined by voltage of circuit to which motor is connected for

the following motor voltage ratings (utilization voltages): a. 120 V Circuit: 115 V - motor rating. b. 208 V Circuit: 200 V - motor rating. c. 240 V Circuit: 230 V - motor rating. d. 480 V Circuit: 460 V - motor rating.

5. Minimum service factor shall be 15% and shall apply at frequency and utilization voltage at which motor is connected. Provide motors, which will not operate in service factor range when supply voltage is within 10 percent of motor voltage rating.

6. Capacity: Sufficient to start and operate connected loads at designated speeds in indicated environment, and with indicated operating sequence, without exceeding nameplate ratings. Provide motors rated for continuous duty at 100 percent of rated capacity.

7. Temperature Rise: Based on 40°C ambient except as otherwise indicated. 8. Enclosure: Open dripproof, unless otherwise specified. Provide screen over

slots, where slots will permit passage of human extremities. 9. Provide adjustable motor slide base for belt driven equipment. Include adjusting

bolts and locknuts.

B. Three-phase Motors

1. General: Squirrel-cage induction-type conforming to the following requirements except as otherwise indicated.

2. National Electrical Manufacturers Association NEMA Design Letter Designation:”B.”

3. Multi-Speed Motors: Separate winding for each speed. 4. Minimum motor efficiencies shall be as follows:

HP Percent Efficiency, Minimum 1 and less 84.0 1 ½ 85.5 2 86.5 3 89.5


5 89.5 7 1/2 91.0 10 91.7 15 92.4 20 93.0 25 93.6 30 94.1 40 94.5 50 94.5 60 95.0 75 and larger 95.4

5. Variable Speed Motors for Use With Solid-State Drives: Energy efficient, squirrel-cage induction, design B units and ratings, characteristics, and features coordinated with and approved by drive manufacturer. Motors shall be labeled to indicate that they are provided with inverter duty capability in accordance with the National Electrical Manufacturers Association NEMA MG-1, Part 31.

6. Bearings: Double-shielded, prelubricated ball bearings suitable for radial and thrust loading of the application. Provide bearings without plugs for grease fittings.

7. Rugged Duty Motors: Totally enclosed with 1.25 minimum service factor. Provide motors with regreasable bearings and equipped with capped relief vents. Insulate windings with nonhygroscopic material. External finish shall be chemical resistant paint over corrosion resistant primer. Provide integral condensate drains.

8. Motors for Reduced Inrush Starting: Coordinate with indicated reduced controller type and with characteristics of driven equipment load. Provide required wiring leads in motor terminal box to suit control method.

9. All motors shall be provided with manufacturer’s stamped nameplate, to include all pertinent and capacity data.

C. Single-phase Motors

1. General: Conform to the following requirements except as otherwise indicated. 2. Energy Efficient Motors: One of the following types as selected to suit the starting

torque and other requirements of the specific motor application. a. Permanent Split Capacitor. b. Split-Phase Start, Capacitor-Run. c. Capacitor-Start, Capacitor-Run.

3. Shaded-Pole Motors: Use only for motors smaller than 1/20 hp. 4. Internal Thermal Overload Protection for Motors: Protection shall automatically

opens the power supply circuit to the motor, or a control circuit arranged for external connection. Protection operates when winding temperature exceeds a safe value calibrated to the temperature rating of the motor insulation. Provide device that automatically resets when motor temperature returns to normal range except as otherwise indicated.

5. Bearings: Belt connected motors and other motors with high radial forces on motor shaft shall be ball bearing type. Sealed, prelubricated sleeve bearings may be used for other single phase motors.

2.2 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL

A. Test motors in accordance with National Electrical Manufacturers Association NEMA MG 1, including winding resistance, no-load speed and current, locked rotor current, insulation high-potential test, and mechanical alignment tests.


2.3 BEARING PROTECTION RING

A. All motors driven by a variable frequency PWM drive shall include a maintenance free, circumferential, conductive micro fiber shaft grounding ring to discharge shaft currents to ground.

B. Provide AEGIS SGR Bearing Protection Ring as manufactured by Electro Statis Technology.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. General: The following requirements apply to field-installed motors.

1. Install motors in accordance with manufacturer’s published instructions and the following: a. Direct Connected Motors: Mount securely in accurate alignment.

Connect to driven equipment with coupler of appropriate type and material for the given duty. Coupler shall be selected for high and range of motor application.

b. Belt Drive Motors: Use adjustable motor mounting bases. Align pulleys and install belts. Use belts identified by the manufacturer and tension belts in accordance with manufacturer recommendations.

3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Inspect and test in accordance with the International Electrical Testing Association - NETA ATS, 2007.

3.3 Install Bearing Protection Ring in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

END OF SECTION

EASTERN DISTRICT POLICE STATION 15050- 1 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING 28103.01 January 15, 2013

SECTION 15050 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR PLUMBING PART 1 GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this and the other sections of Division 15.

B. Motors shall comply with Division 15: Section “Common Motor Requirements.”

C. Variable Frequency Drives shall comply with Division 15: Section “Variable Frequency Drives.”

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements, as well as the following basic mechanical materials and methods:

1. Submittals. 2. Coordination drawings. 3. Record documents. 4. Operation and Maintenance manuals. 5. Rough-ins. 6. Mechanical installations. 7. Cutting and patching. 8. Concrete equipment base construction requirements. 9. Equipment nameplate data requirement. 10. Labeling and identifying mechanical systems and equipment is specified in

Section “Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.” 11. Non-shrink grout for equipment installations. 12. Field-fabricated metal and wood equipment supports. 13. Installation requirements common to equipment specification Sections. 14. Touchup painting and finishing.

1.3 ACRONYMS

A. The following list of abbreviations are utilized within the specifications and are provided as a reference:

ADA - American Disability Act AGA - American Gas Association ANSI - American National Standards Institute ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials AWS - American Welding Society AWWA - American Water Works Association BOCA - Building Officials and Code Administrators CS - Commercial Standard CSA - Canadian Standards Association IBR - Institute of Boiler and Radiator Manufacturers IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IMC - International Mechanical Code IPC - International Plumbing Code MOSHA - Maryland Occupational Safety and Health Administration


MSSP - Manufacturers Standards Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry NEC - National Electrical Code NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association NFPA - National Fire Protection Association OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Administration TEMA - Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association UL - Underwriters' Laboratories

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Products: Items purchased for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken from previously purchased stock. The term product includes the terms material, equipment, system, and terms of similar intent.

B. Substitutions: Changes proposed by Contractor in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction required by the Contract Documents.

1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Design Requirements: Contract drawings are generally diagrammatic and do not indicate all offsets, fittings, transitions, access panels and other specialties required.

1. Furnish and install all items as may be required to fit the work to the conditions encountered.

2. Arrange piping, equipment and other work generally as shown on the contract drawings, providing proper clearances and access.

3. Where departures are proposed because of field conditions or other causes, prepare and submit detailed shop drawing submittal for approval in accordance with Submittals specified below.

4. Subject to the provisions of Division 1, Architect may make reasonable changes in location of equipment piping up to the time of rough-in or fabrication.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with Section "Submittal Procedures."

B. Shop Drawings and Product Data:

1. Clearly identify all submittals: a. Indicate intended application, location, etc. b. Each submittal shall indicate the associated specification section, and

paragraphs. Do not combine product data and shop drawing submittals from different spec sections into a single submittal package, even though they may be the same distributor, vendor or part of a single material order.

c. Clearly indicate the exact type, model number, size and special features of the proposed item.

d. Include catalog spec sheets to completely describe proposed equipment. e. Factory order forms only showing the required capacities are not

acceptable. f. Identify all options furnished to meet specifications. g. If product is within system supplying fixture intended to dispense potable

water for human consumption, including drinking and cooling, submittals shall indicate that product is “lead free”, containing not more than a weighted average of 0.25% lead with respect to the wetted surfaces.

h. Solder and flux for soldered joints in potable water piping shall be “lead


free”, containing not more than 0.2% lead. i. The Architect shall not select equipment ratings and/or options.

Submittals not properly marked shall be returned without review.

C. Product Substitutions: Comply with requirements of Division 01.

D. Comparable Products Submission:

1. Document each request for a proposed comparable product with supporting data substantiating compliance of proposed product with Basis-of-Design product.

2. Use the attached “Comparable Product Submittal Form” in addition to the requirements specified herein.

3. Comparable products will not be reviewed without completion of the attached form.

E. Closeout Submittals:

1. Record Drawings: Prepare record documents in accordance with the requirements in Section "Closeout Procedures." In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, indicate the following installed conditions: a. Mains and branches of piping systems, with valves and control devices

located and numbered, concealed unions located, and with items requiring maintenance located (i.e., traps, strainers, expansion compensators, tanks, etc.). Valve location diagrams, complete with valve tag chart. Refer to Section “Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment." Indicate actual inverts and horizontal locations of underground piping.

b. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent building lines.

c. Approved substitutions, Contract Modifications, Responses to Contractor’s Request for Information, and actual equipment and materials installed.

d. Record the locations and invert elevations of underground installations. 2. Operation and Maintenance Data: Prepare operation and maintenance data in

accordance with Section "Closeout Procedures." In addition to the requirements specified in Division 01, include the following information for equipment items: a. List of systems and equipment requiring service manuals. b. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations,

performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replacement parts.

c. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions.

d. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions.

e. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules. f. Systems and Equipment test reports.

3. Commissioning Report

F. Color Selection: Color of finishes shall be as selected by the Architect. Submit colors of factory finished equipment for acceptance prior to ordering.

G. Products and Materials:


1. Submit complete descriptive data for all materials as follows: a. Material specifications. b. Data sheets. c. Samples. d. Capacity ratings. e. Performance curves. f. Operating characteristics. g. Catalog cuts. h. Dimensional drawings. i. Wiring diagrams. j. Installation instruction. k. Any other information necessary to indicate compliance with contract

documents. l. Lead Free, for potable water service.

2. Edit submittal data specifically for application to this project. 3. Submit actual operating conditions and characteristics for all equipment. 4. Catalogs or catalog cuts are not acceptable unless the particular item and all

relative data has been marked in such a manner as to be clearly defined. 5. Color of finishes shall be as selected by the Architect. Submit colors of factory

finished equipment for acceptance prior to ordering. 6. No mechanical item shall be fabricated, purchased, delivered to the site or

installed, until reviewed by the Architect. a. After the proposed materials have been approved, no substitution will be

permitted except where approved by the Architect. 7. Provide the following shop drawing and product data submittals in addition to

submittals required under individual specification sections.

Items and Systems:

Drains - Floor, Roof, Etc. Pipes, Valves, Fittings and Accessories Thermometers and Gauges Thermal Insulation Materials Back Flow Preventors Expansion Compensators Expansion Tanks Flexible Connections Cleanouts Pressure Relief Valves Pipes, Guides, Sleeves, Anchors and Supports Piping Equipment Supports Pipe Leakage Reports Plumbing Fixtures Balancing Reports Brazing and Soldering Procedures Lubricants and Instructions Record and Information Booklet Piping Cleaning Materials Gas fired Water Heaters Sump Pump Recirculation Pumps Any other equipment requested by the Architect.

1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) Requirements: All equipment containing electrical components and provided under Division 15 shall bear the Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL)


label, as a complete packaged system.

1. Equipment not provided with a UL label shall be tested in the field, certified and provided with a listed label at the installer’s expense. a. Field testing shall be performed by a testing agency approved by the

authority having jurisdiction. b. Provide services of a UL recognized, independent Electrical Testing

Laboratory (ETL) to provide field inspection and testing. Provide and ETL Label on all such equipment.

B. Fire Safe Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, materials shall conform to UL, National

Fire Protection Agency (NFPA) or American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) standards for fire safety with smoke and fire hazard rating not exceeding flame spread of 25 and smoke developed of 50.

1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Comply with Section “Product Requirements”:

1.9 SEQUENCING

A. Coordinate mechanical equipment installation with other building components.

B. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction to allow for mechanical installations.

C. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

D. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installation of large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building.

E. Coordinate connection of electrical services.

F. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies.

G. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors where mechanical items requiring access are concealed behind finished surfaces.

H. Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completing covering and painting where devices are applied to surfaces. Install identifying devices prior to installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

1.10 DISCREPANCIES

A. Where discrepancies occur between the drawings and specifications or within either document itself, the item or arrangement of better quality, greater quantity or higher cost shall be included in the contract price. The Architect shall decide on the item and manner in which the work shall be provided, based on the design intent of the documents.

1.11 ELECTRONIC CAD DOCUMENTS

A. Requests for electronic CAD documents will be accommodated to the contractors and


installers upon their completion of Kibart’s Electronic Document Release of Liability Form and payment for time and expense for document preparation.

1. Kibart’s document preparation fee is as follows: a. Two hundred and fifty dollars ($250.00) for the first five (5) drawings. b. Fifty dollars ($50.00) for each drawing thereafter.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with Contract Documents that are undamaged and new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, safety guards, and other devices and details needed for complete installation and intended use and effect.

2. Standard Products: Where available, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. Where products are accompanied by the term as selected, Architect will make selection.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term match sample, sample to be matched is Architect's.

5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products.

B. General Compliance Requirements: Compliance requirements for individual products, as

indicated in Contract Documents, are multiple in nature and may include generic descriptions, performance requirements, compliance with reference standards, conformance with graphic details and other similar forms and methods of indicating requirements, all of which must be complied with.

C. Procedures for Selecting Products: Contractor's options for selecting products are limited by Contract Document requirements, and are not controlled by industry traditions or procedures experienced by Contractor on previous construction projects.

D. Products specified by Reference Standards, Codes and Regulations: Select from among products, which can be shown to comply with referenced documents.

E. Products specified by Naming Products and Manufacturers: Select from among products listed.

F. Products specified by Naming One Manufacturer's Product as the Basis-of-Design with Reference to Other Manufacturers: Select either the specified Basis-of-Design product or an approved comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers.

1. Comply with provisions in Comparable Products Article to obtain approval for use of a comparable product by one of the named manufacturers.

G. Products specified by Naming One Manufacturer's Product and Indicating Option of

Selecting Comparable Products by stating or Approved Equivalent or similar language: Select either the specified product or an approved comparable product.

1. Comply with provisions in Comparable Products Article to obtain approval for use of a comparable product by one of the named or un-named manufacturers.


H. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and, matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether proposed product matches satisfactorily.

I. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase as selected from manufacturer's standard colors, patterns, textures or similar phrase, select a product that complies with other specified requirements. Architect will select color, pattern, and texture.

1. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase standard range of colors, patterns, textures or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items.

2. Full Range: Where Specifications include the phrase full range of colors, patterns, textures or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes both standard and premium items.

2.2 COMPARABLE PRODUCTS

A. Where Basis-of-Design products are specified by name, submit the following, in addition to other required submittals, to obtain approval of a comparable product by one of the named manufacturers:

1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. Use the attached Comparable Products Submittal Form in addition to requirements listed herein.

2. Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with the Basis-of-Design product in the Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, serviceability, visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.

3. Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty. 4. List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and

addresses and names and addresses of architects and owners, if requested. 5. Samples, if requested.

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 PREPARATION

A. Interface With Site Utility Companies:

1. Contact MISS UTILITY prior to any excavation or underground work. 2. Contact local utility companies (gas, water, sewer, etc.) immediately upon award

of contract. Do not install related equipment until fully coordinated with appropriate utilities.

3. Provide all construction schedules, dates of requested services, outage windows, equipment locations, etc. necessary for utility work.

4. Gas Utility: a. Coordinate service entrance equipment and related layout with gas

company prior to ordering or installing any equipment or systems. b. Furnish and install all incoming concrete pads, sleeves, connections, etc.

5. Water and Sewer Utilities: a. Coordinate flow, usage and pressure requirements with local water and

sewer authorities as necessary to obtain services.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of mechanical systems, materials, and equipment. Comply with the following requirements:

1. Coordinate mechanical systems, equipment, and materials installation with other building components.

2. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. 3. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during

progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations. 4. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in

poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.

5. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building.

6. Where systems, materials and equipment are intended for overhead installation, and where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials, and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.

7. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service.

8. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved submittal data, including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, refer conflict to the Architect.

9. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components.

10. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. Extend grease fittings to an accessible location.

11. Install access panel or doors where units are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Section "Access Doors” and within this section.

12. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems required to be installed at a specified slope.

B. Rough-In

1. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected.

2. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 2 through 16 for rough-in requirements.

C. Housekeeping and Equipment Pads

1. Construct pads of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger than supported unit in both directions. Follow supported equipment manufacturer's setting templates for anchor bolt and tie locations. Use 3000-psi (20.70MPa), 28-day compressive strength concrete and reinforcement bars as specified in Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."


D. Erection of Metal Supports and Anchorage

1. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.

2. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code -Steel”, 2001.

E. Erection of Wood Supports and Anchorage

1. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorage to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.

2. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members.

3. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.

F. Grouting

1. Install nonmetallic non-shrink grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors. Mix grout according to manufacturer's printed instructions.

2. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout. 3. Provide forms for placement of grout, as required. 4. Avoid air entrapment when placing grout. 5. Place grout to completely fill equipment bases. 6. Place grout on concrete bases to provide a smooth bearing surface for

equipment. 7. Place grout around anchors. 8. Cure placed grout according to manufacturer's printed instructions.

G. Lintels

1. Lintels shall be provided for openings in masonry, brick, concrete, etc. walls to accommodate work of this division. a. Lintels shall be provided under this division when not being provided

under other divisions. Lintels shall be approved by the Architect.

H. Boilers

1. Installation of boilers, water heater, and all other pressure vessels shall be made in compliance with the State of Maryland Pressure Vessel and Safety Act and CSD-1.

3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. General: Perform cutting and patching in accordance with Section "Execution Requirements." In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, the following requirements apply:

1. Protection of Installed Work: During cutting and patching operations, protect adjacent installations.

B. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of mechanical equipment and materials required to:

1. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work. 2. Remove and replace defective Work.


3. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract Documents.

4. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing. 5. Install equipment and materials in existing structures. 6. Upon written instructions from the Architect, uncover and restore Work to provide

for Architect observation of concealed Work.

C. Cut, remove and legally dispose of selected mechanical equipment, components, and materials as indicated, including but not limited to removal of mechanical piping, heating units, plumbing fixtures and trim, and other mechanical items made obsolete by the new Work.

D. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled to be removed.

E. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas.

F. Patch finished surfaces and building components using new materials specified for the original installation and using experienced Installers. Installers' qualifications refer to the materials and methods required for the surface and building components being patched.

3.4 PAINTING AND FINISHING

A. Refer to Section "Interior Painting” for field painting requirements.

B. Damage and Touch Up: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.

C. Do not paint manufacturer's labels or tags.

3.5 PENETRATION OF WATERPROOF CONSTRUCTION

A. Coordinate the work to minimize penetration of waterproof construction, including roofs, exterior walls and interior waterproof construction.

B. Furnish and install drains, curbs, vent assemblies, sleeves, flashing, etc. specifically designed for application to the particular construction. Install system in accordance with the roofing manufacturer's instructions.

3.6 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING

A. General

1. Perform all necessary excavation, for installation of work under Division 15, in accordance with Division 2.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean surfaces prior to application of insulation, adhesives, coating, and paint.

B. Provide factory applied finish where specified.

C. Protect all finishes, and restore all finishes to their original condition if damaged as a result of work under Division 15.


D. Remove all construction marking and writing from exposed equipment, piping and building surfaces.

E. General: General cleaning during construction is required by the General Conditions and included in Section Temporary Facilities.

F. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to the condition expected in a normal, commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's instructions.

G. Remove all mechanical clipping, wiring, nuts, bolts, etc. left on top of ceilings and ceiling tiles.

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Protect work, material and equipment from weather and construction operations before and after installation.

B. Properly store and handle all materials and equipment.

C. Cover temporary openings in piping and equipment to prevent the entrance of water, dirt, debris, and other foreign matter.

3.9 LUBRICATION

A. All bearings, motors and all equipment requiring lubrication shall be provided with accessible fittings.

B. Before turning over the equipment to the Owner, provide the following:

1. Fully lubricate each item of equipment. 2. Provide 1 year's supply of lubricant for each type of lubricant. 3. Provide complete written lubricating instructions, together with diagram locating

the points requiring lubrication.

C. Motors and equipment shall be provided with grease lubricated roller or ball bearings with Alemite or equal extended grease fittings and drain plugs.

3.10 ELECTRICAL WORK

A. It is the intent to provide a complete and operational system. The work between Division 15 and 16 is complementary and is meant to produce a single and operating system. Contractor shall make its own determination as to the distribution of responsibility among the various trades.

B. All electrical work performed under Division 15 shall be provided in accordance with Division 16.

3.11 PROVISIONS FOR ACCESS

A. Furnish and install adequate access to all plumbing components. The following list shall be used as a guide only:

1. Plumbing equipment. 2. Valves.


3. Cleanouts. 4. Traps.

B. Access shall be adequate as determined by the Architect.

C. Refer to contract drawings where panels have been specifically located.

D. Provide additional panels for adequate access as indicated in paragraph A above.

E. Where access is by means of liftout ceiling tiles or panels mark each panel using small color-coded or numbered tabs. Provide an index chart for identification. Place markers in corner of tile.

3.12 OPERATION OF EQUIPMENT

A. Clean all systems and equipment prior to initial operation for testing and balancing.

B. Do not operate equipment unless all proper safety devices or controls are operational.

C. Provide all maintenance and service for equipment, which is operated during construction.

D. Where specified and otherwise required, provide the services of a manufacturer's factory trained service organization to start the equipment.

E. Do not use mechanical systems for temporary services during construction unless authorized in writing by the Architect.

1. Where such authorization is granted, temporary use of equipment shall not limit or otherwise affect warranties or guarantees of the work.

F. Upon completion of work, clean and restore all equipment to new conditions and replace

all filters.

3.13 DEMONSTRATION

A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of equipment and systems to Owner’s personnel a minimum two (2) weeks prior to date of final inspection.

1. For equipment requiring seasonal operation, perform instructions for other seasons at the same time.

2. Training period shall be performed within 1 - two week period.

B. Use operation and maintenance manuals and video as basis of instruction. Review contents of manual and video with personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.

C. Demonstrate the following:

1. Start up. 2. Operation. 3. Control. 4. Adjustment. 5. Trouble shooting. 6. Servicing. 7. Maintenance. 8. Shutdown.


D. Provide at least 8 hours straight time instruction to the operating personnel.

1. This instruction period shall consist of not less than five-8 hour days. 2. Time of instruction shall be designated by the Owner. 3. This instruction shall be in addition to instructional requirements of specific

equipment specified elsewhere in Division 15. 3.14 WALL AND FLOOR PENETRATION

A. All penetrations of partitions, walls and floors by piping or conduit under Division 15 shall be sealed and caulked. Provide U.L. listed fire stopping systems at penetrations through fire rated walls.

3.15 EQUIPMENT PROVIDED UNDER ANOTHER DIVISION AND BY OTHERS

A. Make all system connections required to equipment furnished and installed under another division and by others.

B. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate all necessary data from the equipment supplied under other Divisions.


COMPARABLE PRODUCT SUBMITTAL FORM

Table of Compliance (Sample)

Shop Drawing and Product Data Submittal The Contractor shall prepare a Table of Compliance Form similar in format to the sample shown below to facilitate and expedite the Shop Drawing and Product Data Review. Failure to comply with this requirement will be basis for rejecting the Submittal. The Table of Compliance Form will list and compare the performance parameters as the submitted equipment to that listed on equipment schedule and specifications as basis of design. All non-compliance items (differences) must be explained in full, indicating their impact, if any, on maintainability, durability, energy use, operating costs, code compliance and environmental considerations.

(Sample) TABLE OF COMPLIANCE

EQUIPMENT: _______________________ SPEC. SECTION: _______________________ BASIS OF DESIGN SAMPLE ITEMS

DRAWINGS SUBMITTED EXPLANATION

Flow (Cfm Or Gpm) Ext. Static Press. Head (Ft.) Electrical Requirements Cooling Capacity Heating Capacity Discharge Air Temp. Filter Type & Eff. Equipment Eff. (Eer) Sound Data Weights Etc. Specifications:

A. Quality assurance compliance (ARI)

(ASHRAE) (AMCA) (UL)

B. Specifications: List each and every specification paragraph

C. Etc. Other:

END OF SECTION

EASTERN DISTRICT POLICE STATION 15051 - 1 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC 28103.01 January 15, 2013

SECTION 15051 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR HVAC PART 1 GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this and the other sections of Division 15.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements, as well as the following basic mechanical materials and methods:

1. Submittals. 2. Coordination drawings. 3. Record documents. 4. Operation and Maintenance manuals. 5. Rough-ins. 6. Mechanical installations. 7. Cutting and patching. 8. Concrete equipment base construction requirements. 9. Equipment nameplate data requirement. 10. Labeling and identifying mechanical systems and equipment is specified in

Section “Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment.” 11. Non-shrink grout for equipment installations. 12. Field-fabricated metal and wood equipment supports. 13. Installation requirements common to equipment specification Sections. 14. Touchup painting and finishing.

1.3 ACRONYMS

A. The following list of abbreviations are utilized within the specifications and are provided as a reference:

AABC - Associated Air Balance Council ADA - American Disability Act ADC - Air Diffusion Council AGA - American Gas Association AMCA - Air Moving and Conditioning Association ANSI - American National Standards Institute ARI - Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air

Conditioning Engineers ASME - American Society of Mechanical Engineers ASTM - American Society for Testing and Materials AWS - American Welding Society AWWA - American Water Works Association BOCA - Building Officials and Code Administrators CS - Commercial Standard CSA - Canadian Standards Association IBR - Institute of Boiler and Radiator Manufacturers IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers IMC - International Mechanical Code IPC - International Plumbing Code


MOSHA - Maryland Occupational Safety and Health Administration MSSP - Manufacturers Standards Society of the Valve and Fittings

Industry NEC - National Electrical Code NEMA - National Electrical Manufacturers Association NFPA - National Fire Protection Association OSHA - Occupational Safety and Health Administration SMACNA - Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National

Association TEMA - Tubular Exchanger Manufacturers Association UL - Underwriters' Laboratories

1.4 DEFINITIONS


B. Substitutions: Changes proposed by Contractor in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction required by the Contract Documents.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Comply with Section "Submittal Procedures."

B. Shop Drawings and Product Data:

1. Clearly identify all submittals: a. Indicate intended application, location, etc. b. Each submittal shall indicate the associated specification section, and

paragraphs. Do not combine product data and shop drawing submittals from different spec sections into a single submittal package, even though they may be the same distributor, vendor or part of a single material order.


d. Include catalog spec sheets to completely describe proposed equipment. e. Factory order forms only showing the required capacities are not

acceptable. f. Identify all options furnished to meet specifications. g. The Architect shall not select equipment ratings and/or options.

Submittals not properly marked shall be returned without review.

C. Product Substitutions: Comply with requirements of Division 01.

D. Comparable Products Submission:

1. Document each request for a proposed comparable product with supporting data substantiating compliance of proposed product with Basis-of-Design product.



E. Closeout Submittals:


1. Record Drawings: Prepare record documents in accordance with the requirements in Division 1 Section "Closeout Procedures." In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, indicate the following installed conditions: a. Ductwork mains and branches, size and location, for both exterior and

interior; locations of dampers and other control devices; filters, boxes, and terminal units requiring periodic maintenance or repair.

b. Mains and branches of piping systems, with valves and control devices located and numbered, concealed unions located, and with items requiring maintenance located (i.e., traps, strainers, expansion compensators, tanks, etc.). Valve location diagrams, complete with valve tag chart. Refer to Section “Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment." Indicate actual inverts and horizontal locations of underground piping.

c. Equipment locations (exposed and concealed), dimensioned from prominent building lines.

d. Approved substitutions, Contract Modifications, Responses to Contractor’s Request for Information, and actual equipment and materials installed.

e. Record the locations and invert elevations of underground installations. 2. Operation and Maintenance Data: Prepare operation and maintenance data in

accordance with Section "Closeout Procedures." In addition to the requirements specified in Division 01, include the following information for equipment items: a. List of systems and equipment requiring service manuals. b. Description of function, normal operating characteristics and limitations,

performance curves, engineering data and tests, and complete nomenclature and commercial numbers of replacement parts.

c. Manufacturer's printed operating procedures to include start-up, break-in, and routine and normal operating instructions; regulation, control, stopping, shutdown, and emergency instructions; and summer and winter operating instructions.

d. Maintenance procedures for routine preventative maintenance and troubleshooting; disassembly, repair, and reassembly; aligning and adjusting instructions.

e. Servicing instructions and lubrication charts and schedules. f. Systems and Equipment test reports.

3. Commissioning Report.

F. Color Selection: Color of finishes shall be as selected by the Architect. Submit colors of factory finished equipment for acceptance prior to ordering.

G. Products and Materials:

1. Submit complete descriptive data for all materials as follows: a. Material specifications. b. Data sheets. c. Samples. d. Capacity ratings. e. Performance curves. f. Operating characteristics. g. Catalog cuts. h. Dimensional drawings. i. Wiring diagrams. j. Installation instruction. k. Any other information necessary to indicate compliance with contract

documents. 2. Edit submittal data specifically for application to this project.


3. Submit actual operating conditions and characteristics for all equipment. 4. Catalogs or catalog cuts are not acceptable unless the particular item and all

relative data has been marked in such a manner as to be clearly defined. 5. Color of finishes shall be as selected by the Architect. Submit colors of factory

finished equipment for acceptance prior to ordering. 6. No mechanical item shall be fabricated, purchased, delivered to the site or

installed, until reviewed by the Architect. a. After the proposed materials have been approved, no substitution will be

permitted except where approved by the Architect. 7. Provide the following shop drawing and product data submittals in addition to

submittals required under individual specification sections.

Items and Systems

Pipes, Valves, Fittings and Accessories Thermometers and Gauges Fans Automatic Temperature Control System Thermal Insulation Materials Pumps Duct Heating Coils Expansion Compensators Flexible Connections Dampers Manual Air Vents Pressure Relief Valves NIST Calibration Sheets Pipes, Guides, Sleeves, Anchors and Supports HVAC Equipment Supports Grilles, Registers, Diffusers Baseboard Unit Heaters Variable Frequency Drives Sheet Metal Ductwork Layout Duct Leakage Test Reports Duct Sealing System Balancing Reports Roof Top Units Welder’s Certificates Brazing and Soldering Procedures Lubricants and Instructions Record and Information Booklet Piping Cleaning Materials Variable Air Volume Boxes Boilers Hydronic Unit Heater Hydronic Cabinet Unit Heaters Any other equipment requested by the Architect.


A. Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) Requirements: All equipment containing electrical components and provided under Division 15 shall bear the Underwriter’s Laboratory (UL) label, as a complete packaged system.

1. Equipment not provided with a UL label shall be tested in the field, certified and provided with a listed label at the installer’s expense. a. Field testing shall be performed by a testing agency approved by the


authority having jurisdiction. b. Provide services of a UL recognized, independent Electrical Testing

Laboratory (ETL) to provide field inspection and testing. Provide and ETL Label on all such equipment.

B. Fire Safe Materials: Unless otherwise indicated, materials shall conform to UL, National

Fire Protection Agency (NFPA) or American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) standards for fire safety with smoke and fire hazard rating not exceeding flame spread of 25 and smoke developed of 50.


A. Comply with Section “Product Requirements”:

1. Deliver, store, and handle products according to manufacturer's recommendations, using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, and loss, including theft.

2. Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project Site and to prevent overcrowding of construction spaces.

3. Coordinate delivery with installation time to assure minimum holding time for items that are flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.

4. Deliver products to Project Site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing, unpacking, protecting, and installing.

5. Inspect products upon delivery to ensure compliance with Contract Documents and to ensure that products are undamaged and properly protected.

6. Store products in manner that will facilitate inspection and measurement. 7. Store materials in a manner that will not endanger project structure. 8. Store products subject to damage by elements above ground, under cover in a

weather tight enclosure, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation. 9. Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity,

ventilation, and weather protection requirements for storage. 1.8 SEQUENCING

A. Coordinate mechanical equipment installation with other building components.

B. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of construction to allow for mechanical installations.

C. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

D. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Coordinate installation of large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building.

E. Coordinate connection of electrical services.

F. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies.

G. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors where mechanical items requiring


access are concealed behind finished surfaces.

H. Coordinate installation of identifying devices after completing covering and painting where devices are applied to surfaces. Install identifying devices prior to installing acoustical ceilings and similar concealment.

1.9 DISCREPANCIES

A. Where discrepancies occur between the drawings and specifications or within either document itself, the item or arrangement of better quality, greater quantity or higher cost shall be included in the contract price. The Architect shall decide on the item and manner in which the work shall be provided, based on the design intent of the documents.

1.10 ELECTRONIC CAD DOCUMENTS

A. Requests for electronic CAD documents will be accommodated to the contractors and installers upon their completion of Kibart’s electronic document release of liability form and payment for time and expense for document preparation.

1. Kibart’s document preparation fee is as follows: a. Two hundred and fifty dollars ($250.00) for the first five (5) drawings. b. Fifty dollars ($50.00) for each drawing thereafter.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with Contract Documents that are undamaged and new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, safety guards, and other devices and details needed for complete installation and intended use and effect.

2. Standard Products: Where available, provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects.

3. Where products are accompanied by the term as selected, Architect will make selection.

4. Where products are accompanied by the term match sample, sample to be matched is Architect's.

5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish salient characteristics of products.

B. General Compliance Requirements: Compliance requirements for individual products, as

indicated in Contract Documents, are multiple in nature and may include generic descriptions, performance requirements, compliance with reference standards, conformance with graphic details and other similar forms and methods of indicating requirements, all of which must be complied with.

C. Procedures for Selecting Products: Contractor's options for selecting products are limited by Contract Document requirements, and are not controlled by industry traditions or procedures experienced by Contractor on previous construction projects.

D. Products specified by Reference Standards, Codes and Regulations: Select from among products, which can be shown to comply with referenced documents.



F. Products specified by Naming One Manufacturer's Product as the Basis-of-Design with Reference to Other Manufacturers: Select either the specified Basis-of-Design product or an approved comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers.

1. Comply with provisions in Comparable Products Article to obtain approval for use of a comparable product by one of the named manufacturers.

G. Products specified by Naming One Manufacturer's Product and Indicating Option of

Selecting Comparable Products by stating or Approved Equivalent or similar language: Select either the specified product or an approved comparable product.

1. Comply with provisions in Comparable Products Article to obtain approval for use of a comparable product by one of the named or un-named manufacturers.

H. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established

Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and, matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether proposed product matches satisfactorily.

I. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase as selected from manufacturer's standard colors, patterns, textures or similar phrase, select a product that complies with other specified requirements. Architect will select color, pattern, and texture.

1. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase standard range of colors, patterns, textures or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items.




1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work. Use the attached Comparable Products Submittal Form in addition to requirements listed herein.




PART 3 EXECUTION


3.1 PREPARATION

A. Interface With Site Utility Companies:

1. Contact MISS UTILITY prior to any excavation or underground work. 2. Contact local utility companies (gas, water, sewer, etc.) immediately upon award

of contract. Do not install related equipment until fully coordinated with appropriate utilities.

3. Provide all construction schedules, dates of requested services, outage windows, equipment locations, etc. necessary for utility work.

4. Gas Utility: a. Coordinate service entrance equipment and related layout with gas

company prior to ordering or installing any equipment or systems. b. Furnish and install all incoming concrete pads, sleeves, connections, etc.

5. Water and Sewer Utilities: a. Coordinate flow, usage and pressure requirements with local water and

sewer authorities as necessary to obtain services. 3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Sequence, coordinate, and integrate the various elements of mechanical systems, materials, and equipment. Comply with the following requirements:

1. Coordinate mechanical systems, equipment, and materials installation with other building components.

2. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. 3. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in other building components during

progress of construction, to allow for mechanical installations. 4. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and sleeves to be set in

poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.

5. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of mechanical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Give particular attention to large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building.

6. Where systems, materials and equipment are intended for overhead installation, and where mounting heights are not detailed or dimensioned, install systems, materials, and equipment to provide the maximum headroom possible.

7. Coordinate connection of mechanical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service.

8. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved submittal data, including coordination drawings, to greatest extent possible. Conform to arrangements indicated by the Contract Documents, recognizing that portions of the Work are shown only in diagrammatic form. Where coordination requirements conflict with individual system requirements, refer conflict to the Architect.

9. Install systems, materials, and equipment level and plumb, parallel and perpendicular to other building systems and components.

10. Install mechanical equipment to facilitate servicing, maintenance, and repair or replacement of equipment components. As much as practical, connect equipment for ease of disconnecting, with minimum of interference with other installations. Extend grease fittings to an accessible location.

11. Install access panel or doors where units are concealed behind finished surfaces. Access panels and doors are specified in Section "Access Doors”.

12. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems


required to be installed at a specified slope.

B. Rough-In

1. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the requirements of the actual equipment to be connected.

2. Refer to equipment specifications in Divisions 2 through 16 for rough-in requirements.

C. Housekeeping and Equipment Pads

1. Construct pads of dimensions indicated, but not less than 4 inches (100 mm) larger than supported unit in both directions. Follow supported equipment manufacturer's setting templates for anchor bolt and tie locations. Use 3000-psi (20.70MPa), 28-day compressive strength concrete and reinforcement bars as specified in Section "Cast-in-Place Concrete."

D. Erection of Metal Supports and Anchorage

1. Cut, fit, and place miscellaneous metal supports accurately in location, alignment, and elevation to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.

2. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1, "Structural Welding Code -Steel”, 2001.

E. Erection of Wood Supports and Anchorage

1. Cut, fit, and place wood grounds, nailers, blocking, and anchorage to support and anchor mechanical materials and equipment.

2. Select fastener sizes that will not penetrate members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tight connections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood members.

3. Attach to substrates as required to support applied loads.

F. Grouting

1. Install nonmetallic non-shrink grout for mechanical equipment base bearing surfaces, pump and other equipment base plates, and anchors. Mix grout according to manufacturer's printed instructions.

2. Clean surfaces that will come into contact with grout. 3. Provide forms for placement of grout, as required. 4. Avoid air entrapment when placing grout. 5. Place grout to completely fill equipment bases. 6. Place grout on concrete bases to provide a smooth bearing surface for

equipment. 7. Place grout around anchors. 8. Cure placed grout according to manufacturer's printed instructions.

G. Lintels

1. Lintels shall be provided for openings in masonry, brick, concrete, etc. walls to accommodate work of this division. a. Lintels shall be provided under this division when not being provided

under other divisions. Lintels shall be approved by the Architect. 3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING

A. General: Perform cutting and patching in accordance with Section "Cutting and


Patching." In addition to the requirements specified in Division 1, the following requirements apply:

1. Protection of Installed Work: During cutting and patching operations, protect adjacent installations.

B. Perform cutting, fitting, and patching of mechanical equipment and materials required to:

1. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work. 2. Remove and replace defective Work. 3. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract

Documents. 4. Remove samples of installed Work as specified for testing. 5. Install equipment and materials in existing structures. 6. Upon written instructions from the Architect, uncover and restore Work to provide

for Architect observation of concealed Work.

C. Cut, remove and legally dispose of selected mechanical equipment, components, and materials as indicated, including but not limited to removal of mechanical piping, heating units, ductwork, and other mechanical items made obsolete by the new Work.

D. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled to be removed.

E. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas.

F. Patch finished surfaces and building components using new materials specified for the original installation and using experienced Installers. Installers' qualifications refer to the materials and methods required for the surface and building components being patched.

3.4 PAINTING AND FINISHING

A. Refer to Section "Interior Painting” for field painting requirements.

B. Damage and Touch Up: Repair marred and damaged factory-painted finishes with materials and procedures to match original factory finish.

C. Do not paint manufacturer's labels or tags.

3.5 PENETRATION OF WATERPROOF CONSTRUCTION

A. Coordinate the work to minimize penetration of waterproof construction, including roofs, exterior walls and interior waterproof construction.

B. Furnish and install drains, curbs, vent assemblies, sleeves, flashing, etc. specifically designed for application to the particular construction. Install system in accordance with the roofing manufacturer's instructions.

3.6 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILLING

A. General

1. Perform all necessary excavation, for installation of work under Division 15, in accordance with Division 2.


3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean surfaces prior to application of insulation, adhesives, coating, and paint.

B. Provide factory applied finish where specified.

C. Protect all finishes, and restore all finishes to their original condition if damaged as a result of work under Division 15.

D. Remove all construction marking and writing from exposed equipment, ductwork, piping and building surfaces.

E. General: General cleaning during construction is required by the General Conditions and included in Section Temporary Facilities.

F. Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface or unit to the condition expected in a normal, commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Comply with manufacturer's instructions.

G. Remove all mechanical clipping, wiring, nuts, bolts, etc. left on top of ceilings and ceiling tiles.

3.8 PROTECTION

A. Protect work, material and equipment from weather and construction operations before and after installation.

B. Properly store and handle all materials and equipment.

C. Cover temporary openings in piping, ductwork and equipment to prevent the entrance of water, dirt, debris, and other foreign matter.

3.9 LUBRICATION

A. All bearings, motors and all equipment requiring lubrication shall be provided with accessible fittings.

B. Before turning over the equipment to the Owner, provide the following:

1. Fully lubricate each item of equipment. 2. Provide 1 year's supply of lubricant for each type of lubricant. 3. Provide complete written lubricating instructions, together with diagram locating

the points requiring lubrication.

C. Motors and equipment shall be provided with grease lubricated roller or ball bearings with Alemite or equal extended grease fittings and drain plugs.

3.10 ELECTRICAL WORK

A. It is the intent to provide a complete and operational system. The work between Division 15 and 16 is complementary and is meant to produce a single and operating system. Contractor shall make its own determination as to the distribution of responsibility among the various trades.


B. All electrical work performed under Division 15 shall be provided in accordance with Division 16.

3.11 PROVISIONS FOR ACCESS

A. Furnish and install adequate access to all HVAC components. The following list shall be used as a guide only:

1. Mechanical equipment. 2. Valves. 3. Dampers and operators. 4. Filters. 5. Heating and air conditioning units. 6. Controls. 7. Cleanouts. 8. Automatic temperature control panels. 9. Coils.

B. Access shall be adequate as determined by the Architect.

C. Refer to contract drawings where panels have been specifically located.

D. Provide additional panels for adequate access as indicated in paragraph A above.

E. Where access is by means of liftout ceiling tiles or panels mark each panel using small color-coded or numbered tabs. Provide an index chart for identification. Place markers in corner of tile.

3.12 OPERATION OF EQUIPMENT

A. Clean all systems and equipment prior to initial operation for testing and balancing.

B. Do not operate equipment unless all proper safety devices or controls are operational.

C. Provide all maintenance and service for equipment, which is operated during construction.

D. Where specified and otherwise required, provide the services of a manufacturer's factory trained service organization to start the equipment.

E. Do not use mechanical systems for temporary services during construction unless authorized in writing by the Architect.

1. Where such authorization is granted, temporary use of equipment shall not limit or otherwise affect warranties or guarantees of the work.

F. Upon completion of work, clean and restore all equipment to new conditions and replace

all filters.

3.13 DEMONSTRATION

A. Demonstrate operation and maintenance of equipment and systems to Owner’s personnel a minimum two (2) weeks prior to date of final inspection.

1. For equipment requiring seasonal operation, perform instructions for other seasons at the same time.


2. Training period shall be performed within 1 - two week period.

B. Use operation and maintenance manuals and video as basis of instruction. Review contents of manual and video with personnel in detail to explain all aspects of operation and maintenance.

C. Demonstrate the following:

1. Start up. 2. Operation. 3. Control. 4. Adjustment. 5. Trouble shooting. 6. Servicing. 7. Maintenance. 8. Shutdown.

D. Provide at least 40 hours straight time instruction to the operating personnel.

1. This instruction period shall consist of not less than five-8 hour days. 2. Time of instruction shall be designated by the Owner. 3. This instruction shall be in addition to instructional requirements of specific

equipment specified elsewhere in Division 15. 3.14 WALL AND FLOOR PENETRATION

A. All penetrations of partitions, walls and floors by ducts, piping or conduit under Division 15 shall be sealed and caulked. Provide U.L. listed fire stopping systems at penetrations through fire rated walls.

3.15 EQUIPMENT PROVIDED UNDER ANOTHER DIVISION AND BY OTHERS

A. Make all system connections required to equipment furnished and installed under another division and by others.

B. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to coordinate all necessary data from the equipment supplied under other Divisions.




Shop Drawing and Product Data Submittal The Contractor shall prepare a Table of Compliance Form similar in format to the sample shown below to facilitate and expedite the Shop Drawing and Product Data Review. Failure to comply with this requirement will be basis for rejecting the Submittal. The Table of Compliance Form will list and compare the performance parameters as the submitted equipment to that listed on equipment schedule and specifications as basis of design. All non-compliance items (differences) must be explained in full, indicating their impact, if any, on maintainability, durability, energy use, operating costs, code compliance and environmental considerations.




Flow (Cfm Or Gpm) Ext. Static Press. Head (Ft.) Electrical Requirements Cooling Capacity Heating Capacity Discharge Air Temp. Filter Type & Eff. Equipment Eff. (Eer) Sound Data Weights Etc. Specifications:

A. Quality assurance compliance (ARI)

(ASHRAE) (AMCA) (UL)

B. Specifications: List each and every specification paragraph

C. Etc. Other:

END OF SECTION

EASTERN DISTRICT POLICE STATION 15060- 1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 28103.01 January 15, 2013

SECTION 15060 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawing and general provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section and the other Sections of Division 15.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Contractor General Requirements:

1. Incorporate in construction pipe hangers and supports to manufacturer’s

recommendations utilizing manufacturer’s regular production components, parts, and assemblies.

2. Comply with maximum load ratings with consideration for allowable stresses prescribed by ASME B31.1 or MSS SP-58.

3. Provide support, guides and anchors that do not transmit unacceptable heat and vibration to building structure.

4. Installation of pipe hangers and supports shall be based upon the overall design concept of the piping system. The support system shall provide for an control the free movement of piping including its movement in relation to that connected equipment.

5. Provide for vertical adjustments after installation of supported material and during commissioning, where feasible, to ensure pipe is at design elevation and slope.

B. Section Includes:

1. Pipe hangers and supports. 2. Hanger rods. 3. Inserts. 4. Flashing. 5. Mechanical sleeve seals. 6. Formed steel channel. 7. Firestopping relating to plumbing work. 8. Firestopping accessories. 9. Equipment bases and supports.


1. Section “Cast-In-Place Concrete”: Execution requirements for placement of concrete housekeeping pads specified by this section.

2. Section “Through-Penetration Firestop Systems”: Product requirements for firestopping for placement by this section.

3. Section “Common Work Results for Plumbing”. 4. Section “General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping”. 5. Section “Expansion Fittings and Loops for plumbing Piping”. 6. Section “Refrigerant Piping”. 7. Section “Mechanical Insulation”. 8. Section “Interior Painting”: Product and execution requirements for painting


specified by this section. 9. Section “Pipes and Tubes for Plumbing Piping and Equipment”: Execution

requirements for placement of hangers and supports specified by this section. 10. Section “Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment”:

Product and execution requirements for vibration isolators. 1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Terminology used in this Section is defined in Manufacturer’s Standardization Society Specification - 90, “Valve and Fittings Standards,” 2000.

1.4 REFERENCES

A. American Society of Mechanical Engineers:

1. ASME B31.1 - Power Piping. 2. ASME B31.5 - Refrigeration Piping. 3. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping.

B. ASTM International:

1. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

2. ASTM E119 - Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 3. ASTM E814 - Test Method of Fire Tests of Through Penetration Firestops. 4. ASTM E1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire-Resistive Joint Systems.

C. American Welding Society:

1. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.

D. FM Global:

1. FM - Approval Guide, A Guide to Equipment, Materials & Services Approved By Factory Mutual Research For Property Conservation.

E. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry:

1. MSS SP 58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer. 2. MSS SP 69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application. 3. MSS SP 89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices.

F. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:

1. UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 2. UL 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 3. UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops. 4. UL 2079 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems. 5. UL - Fire Resistance Directory.

G. Intertek Testing Services (Warnock Hersey Listed):

1. WH - Certification Listings. 1.5 SUBMITTALS


A. General: Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. Product data for each type of hanger and support.

C. Submit pipe hanger and support schedule showing manufacturer's Figure No., size,

location, and features for each required pipe hanger and support, including loads.

D. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified under the "Quality Assurance" Article.

E. Shop drawings for each type of hanger and support, indicating dimensions, weights,

required clearances, and methods of component assembly.

F. Submit following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specifications:

1. Shop drawings of items. 2. Complete description of products to be supplied including product data,

dimensions materials of construction and specifications. 3. Installation instructions for each product. 4. Layout of piping to be isolated including vertical risers showing:

a. Support points. b. Weight at support points.

5. Steel rails, steel base frames, and concrete inertia bases showing all steel work, reinforcing, vibration isolator mounting attachment method and location of equipment attachment bolts.

6. Special details at large scale and other necessary information to convey understanding of work.

G. Submission of samples may be requested for each type of hanger device. After approval,

samples shall be returned for installation at job site. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Qualify welding processes and welding operators according to AWS D1.1 "Structural Welding Code - Steel,” 2001.

1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for

welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.

B. Qualify welding processes and welding operators according to ASME "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code," Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications."

C. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 13, “Installation of Sprinkler Systems,” 1999, for

hangers and supports used as components of fire protection systems.

D. Listing and Labeling: Provide hangers and supports that are listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 “Definitions.”

1. UL and FM Compliance: Hangers, supports, and components include listing and

labeling by UL and FM where used for fire protection piping systems.

E. Licensed Operators: Use operators that are licensed by powder-operated tool manufacturers to operate their tools and fasteners.

F. Supply and install incidental materials needed to meet requirements, even if not expressly


specified or shown on drawings without claim for additional payment.

G. Verify correctness of equipment model numbers and conformance of each component with manufacturer's specifications.

H. Should any rotating equipment cause excessive noise or vibration, rebalance, realign or

do other remedial work to reduce noise and vibration levels. Excessive is defined as exceeding manufacturer's specifications for unit in question.

1.7 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with a minimum of five years documented experience.


A. Comply with Division 1, Section “Product Requirements” for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products.

B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification.

C. Protect from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and damage, by storing in original packaging.

1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Section “Product Requirements”: Environmental conditions affecting products on site.

B. Do not apply firestopping materials when temperature of substrate material and ambient air is not in accordance with the manufacturer’s installation procedures.

C. Maintain manufacturer’s required temperature before, during, and after installation of firestopping materials for minimum periods of time as required by the manufacturer.

1.10 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS

A. Structural Steel: ASTM A 36/A 36M, “Carbon Structural Steel,” 2001, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and galvanized.

B. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, “Track Bolts and Nuts,” 2000, steel,

hex-head, track bolts and nuts.

C. Washers: ASTM F 844, “Standard Specification for Washers, Steel, Plain (Flat), Unhardened for General Use,” 2005, steel, plain, flat washers.


D. Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, “Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-

Cement Grout (Nonshrink),” 2001, non-shrink, nonmetallic.

1. Characteristics include post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement-type grout that is non-staining, noncorrosive, nongaseous and is recommended for both interior and exterior applications.

2. Design Mix: 5000-psi (34.5MPa), 28-day compressive strength. 3. Water: Potable. 4. Packaging: Premixed and factory-packaged.

2.2 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hangers, Supports, and Components: Provide factory-fabricated products as manufactured by B-Line, AITT Grinnel, Pipe Shields, Inc., or Michigan Hanger. Basis of Design shall be B-Line.

1. Components include galvanized coatings where installed for piping and

equipment that will not have a field-applied finish. 2. Pipe attachments include nonmetallic coating for electrolytic protection where

attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

B. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: 100-psi (690kPa) average compressive strength, waterproofed calcium silicate or treated lumber inserts, encased with sheet metal shield. Insert and shield cover entire circumference of pipe and are of length indicated by manufacturer for pipe size and thickness of insulation.

C. Powder-Actuated Drive-Pin Fasteners: Powder-actuated-type, drive-pin attachments with pull-out and shear capacities appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. Fasteners for fire protection systems include UL listing and FM approval.

D. Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pull-out and shear capacities

appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. Fasteners for fire protection systems include UL listing and FM approval.

E. Upper attachments to structures shall have an allowable load not exceeding 3 of the

failure (proof test) load but are not limited to the specific methods indicated.

F. Horizontal Non-Insulated Waste, Vent and Storm Water Piping Hangers:

1. Two inch and smaller: Figure No. B3170. 2. Two and one-half inch and larger: Figure No. B3100.

G. Horizontal Non-Insulated Copper Piping Hangers:

1. Two inch and smaller: Figure No. B3104 CT. 2. Two and one-half inch and larger: Figure No. B3104 CT.

H. Insulated Horizontal Piping Hangers: Cold and Hot Water (Domestic)

1. Two inch and smaller: Figure No. B3108 with metal shield, Figure No. B3151. 2. Two and one-half inch and larger: Figure No. B3108 with metal shield, Figure No.

B3151.

I. Vertical Piping Riser Clamps:


1. Copper Pipe: Figure No. B3373CT. 2. Steel Pipe: Figure No. B3136 and B3137.

J. PVC and Piping:

1. Figure No. B3106 with No. B3106V channel, plastic-coated. 2. For piping 1 inch and smaller, use continuous support system only.

K. Hangers for Brass Piping or to Eliminate Electrolytic Action:

1. Figure No. B3104C.

L. Beam Clamps and Attachments:

1. For bolt-on locations to structure, Figure Nos. B3291, B3036, or B3050. 2. Welded beam attachments, Figure No. B3083.

M. Concrete Inserts:

1. For concrete spot inserts at single locations for casting into structure, Figure No.

B3014 for predetermined rod size and Figure No. B2500 for universal use. 2. For continuous slot concrete insert at multi-locations for casting into structure,

Figure No. B2505.

N. Brackets:

1. For equipment and piping adjacent to walls or steel columns, Figure Nos. B3066, B3063 and B3067 depending on weight to be supported.

O. Pipe Rests:

1. For pipes close to floor where no expansion provision is required, Figure No.

B3088T base stand with B3093 adjustable pipe saddle support.

P. Hanger Rods:

1. Hanger rod, Figure No. B3205. 2. Continuous threaded rod, Figure No. ATR. 3. Eye rods, Figure No. B3210 or B3211, depending on load supported.

Q. Trapeze Hangers - Direct Mounting Hangers:

1. Grinnell, Figure No. 46.

R. Protection Saddles:

1. Cast iron pipe, insulated, Figure No. B3108 with metal shield, Figure No. B3151. 2. For high temperature steel pipe, insulated, No. B3160, B3161, B3162, B3163,

B3164, or B3165.

S. Pipe Roll Stands:

1. For support of pipe where axial movement is encountered: Figure No. B3117SL where no vertical adjustment is required; and Figure No. B3118SL where vertical adjustment is required.


T. Horizontal AWWA Piping (Flanged or Bell-spigot) Hangers:

1. Cast iron pipe, Figure No. B3102. 2.3 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT

A. Sealants for acoustical purposes shall be one of following non-setting sealants:

Acoustical sealant .............................................................................. D.A.P. BR – 96 ............................................................................................... Pecra Acoustical sealant ............................................................................ Tremco Acoustical sealant .............................................................................. U.S.G. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter affecting bond of firestopping material. Install damming materials to arrest liquid material leakage.

B. Remove incompatible materials affecting bond.

C. Drilling or cutting of structural members shall be as detailed / directed by structural engineer.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Comply with MSS SP-69, “Pipe Hangers and Supports C Selection and

Application,” 1996, and SP-89, “Pipe Hangers and Supports -- Fabrication and Installation Practices,” 1998. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure. Piping shall be supported independently from equipment connections. Supports shall not interfere with removal of equipment.

B. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping supported together on

field-fabricated, heavy-duty trapeze hangers where possible.

C. Install supports with maximum spacings complying with MSS SP-69, “Pipe Hangers and Supports C Selection and Application,” 1996, and as specified in Section Building Services Piping.

D. Where pipes of various sizes are supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers

for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers.

E. Install building attachments within concrete or to structural steel. Space attachments

within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69,”Pipe Hangers and Supports C Selection and Application,” 1996. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts in new construction prior to placing concrete. Install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

F. Install powder-actuated drive-pin fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and

completely cured. Use operators that are licensed by powder-actuated tool manufacturer.


Install fasteners according to powder-actuated tool manufacturer's operating manual. Do not use in lightweight concrete slabs or in concrete slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.

G. Install mechanical-anchor fasteners in concrete after concrete is placed and completely

cured. Install according to fastener manufacturer's written instructions. Do not use in lightweight concrete slabs or in concrete slabs less than 4 inches (100 mm) thick.

H. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers,

and other accessories.

I. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapezes: Field-fabricate from ASTM A 36, “Carbon Structural Steel,” 2001, steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D-1.1, “Structural Welding Code - Steel,” 2001.

J. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems, permit

freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

K. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and

stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

L. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 "Building Services Piping" is not exceeded.

M. Insulated Piping: Provide continuous insulation and vapor barrier through hangers and

supports. Comply with the following installation requirements.

1. Riser Clamps: Attach riser clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps projecting through insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ASME B31.9. Insulate clamps on piping with insulation and vapor barrier.

2. Saddles: Install protection saddles MSS Type 39 where insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with segments of insulation that match adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Shields: Install MSS Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields span an arc of 180 degrees (3.1 rad) and have dimensions in inches (mm) not less than the following:

NPS (Inches) LENGTH (Inches) THICKNESS (Inches) 1/4 to 3 1/2 12 0.048

4 12 0.060 5 and 6 18 0.060 8 to 14 24 0.075 16 to 24 24 0.105

4. Pipes 4 Inches (200 mm) and Larger: Include treated wood inserts. 5. Insert Material: Length to equal to the length of the protective shield.

N. Conform to the table below for maximum spacing of supports and rod sizes:

1. Steel and Copper Pipe:


Nom. Pipe Size – In.

Steel Pipe Max. Span – Ft.

Copper Tube Max. Span – Ft.

Min. Rod Dia. – In.

Up to 3/4 7 5 3/8 1 7 6 3/8

1 1/4 7 7 3/8 1 1/2 9 8 3/8

2 10 8 3/8 2 1/2 11 9 1/2

3 12 10 1/2 3 1/2 13 11 1/2

4 14 12 5/8 (1/2 for copper) 5 16 13 5/8 (1/2 for copper) 6 17 14 3/4 (5/8 for copper) 8 19 16 3/4 (3/4 for copper) 10 22 18 3/4 (3/4 for copper) 12 23 19 3/4 (3/4 for copper)

a. Support vertical steel pipe and copper tube at each floor. 2. Drain Piping:

Pipe Material Horizontal In Feet Vertical In Feet Cast-Iron Soil Pipe 5 15 PVC Plastic Pipe 4 4

a. Support plastic pipe and tubing in accordance with manufacturer’s recommendations.

b. Support cast-iron piping at each hub.

O. Equipment Supports:

1. Fabricate structural steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or support equipment above floor.

2. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and concrete bases. Make a smooth bearing surface.

P. Metal Fabrication:

1. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for pipe and equipment

supports. 2. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field-weld connections

that cannot be shop-welded because of shipping size limitations. 3. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for manual shielded metal-arc

welding, appearance and quality of welds, methods used in correcting welding work, and the following: a. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength

and corrosion resistance of base metals. b. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. c. Remove welding flux immediately. d. Finish welds at exposed connections so that no roughness shows after

finishing, and so that contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.

Q. Painting:


1. Touching Up: Clean field welds and abraded areas of factory paint and paint exposed areas immediately after erection of hangers and supports. Use same materials as used for factory painting. Comply with SSPC-PA 1 requirements for touching up field-painted surfaces. a. Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum dry film thickness of 2.0

mils (0.05 mm). 2. Touching Up: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections,

and abraded areas of factory paint on miscellaneous metal is specified in Section "Interior Painting."

3. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and apply galvanizing-repair paint to comply with ASTM A 780.

R. Field Quality Control

1. Licensed Engineer's Report: Prepare hanger and support installation report.

Include seal and signature of Registered Engineer, licensed in jurisdiction where Project is located, certifying compliance with specifications.

3.3 APPLICATIONS FOR HANGER AND SUPPORT

A. Specific hanger requirements are specified in the Section specifying the equipment and systems.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69, “Pipe Hangers and Supports C Selection and Application,”

1996, for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping specification Sections.

3.4 INSTALLATION - EQUIPMENT BASES AND SUPPORTS

A. Provide housekeeping pads of concrete, minimum 3 ½” thick and extending 4” beyond supported equipment.

B. Using templates furnished with equipment, install anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment.

C. Construct supports of steel members. Brace and fasten with flanges bolted to structure.

D. Provide rigid anchors for pipes after vibration isolation components are installed. Refer to Section “Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing and Equipment.”

3.5 INSTALLATION - FLASHING

A. Provide flexible flashing and metal counterflashing where piping penetrates weather or waterproofed walls, floors, and roofs.

B. Flash vent and soil pipes projecting 3 inches minimum above finished roof surface with lead worked 1 inch minimum into hub, 8 inches minimum clear on sides with 24 x 24 inches sheet size. For pipes through outside walls, turn flanges back into wall and caulk, metal counter-flash, and seal.

C. Flash floor drains in floors with topping over finished areas with lead, 10 inches clear on sides with minimum 36 x 36 inch sheet size. Fasten flashing to drain clamp device.

D. Seal floor drains and floor sinks watertight to adjacent materials.


E. Adjust storm collars tight to pipe with bolts; caulk around top edge. Use storm collars above roof jacks. Screw vertical flange section to face of curb.


A. Inspect installed firestopping for compliance with specifications and submitted schedule.

3.7 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.

3.8 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to

achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Adjust for pipe alignment and final equipment connections. Flexible connections shall not be used for adjustment of alignment.

END OF SECTION

EASTERN DISTRICT POLICE STATION 15061- 1 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 28103.01 January 15, 2013

SECTION 15061 - HANGERS AND SUPPORTS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawing and general provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary

Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section and the other Sections of Division 15.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Contractor General Requirements

1. Incorporate in construction pipe hangers and supports to manufacturer’s recommendations utilizing manufacturer’s regular product components, parts, and assemblies.

2. Comply with maximum load ratings with considering for allowable stresses prescribed by ASME B31.1 or MS SP-58.

3. Provide support, guides and anchors that do not transmit unacceptable heat and vibration to building structure.

4. Installation of pipe hangers and supports shall be based upon the overall design concept of the piping system. The support system shall provide for and control the free movement of piping including its movement in relation to the connected equipment.

5. Provide for vertical adjustments after installation of supported material and during commissioning, where feasible, to ensure pipe is at design elevation and slope.

6. Provide all stainless steel supports and hangers for all supports exposed in Muffle Room.


1. Pipe hangers and supports. 2. Hanger rods. 3. Inserts. 4. Flashing. 5. Equipment curbs. 6. Sleeves. 7. Mechanical sleeve seals. 8. Formed steel channel. 9. Firestopping relating to HVAC work. 10. Firestopping accessories. 11. Equipment bases and supports.


1. Section “Common Work Results for HVAC.” 2. Section “General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping.” 3. Section “Mechanical Insulation.” 4. Section “Cast-In-Place Concrete”: Execution requirements for placement of

concrete housekeeping pads specified by this section. 5. Section “Through-Penetration Firestop Systems”: Product requirements for


firestopping for placement by this section. 6. Section “Interior Painting”: Product and execution requirements for painting

specified by this section. 7. Section “Pipes and Tubes for HVAC Piping and Equipment”: Execution

requirements for placement of hangers and supports specified by this section. 8. Section “Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment”:

Product and execution requirements for vibration isolators. 1.3 REFERENCES


1. ASME B31.1 - Power Piping. 2. ASME B31.5 - Refrigeration Piping. 3. ASME B31.9 - Building Services Piping.

B. ASTM International:

1. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.

2. ASTM E119 - Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 3. ASTM E814 - Test Method of Fire Tests of Through Penetration Firestops. 4. ASTM E1966 - Standard Test Method for Fire-Resistive Joint Systems.

C. American Welding Society:

1. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code - Steel.

D. FM Global:

1. FM - Approval Guide, A Guide to Equipment, Materials & Services Approved By Factory Mutual Research For Property Conservation.

E. Manufacturers Standardization Society of the Valve and Fittings Industry:

1. MSS SP 58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design and Manufacturer. 2. MSS SP 69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application. 3. MSS SP 89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices.

F. Underwriters Laboratories Inc.:

1. UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 2. UL 723 - Tests for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 3. UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops. 4. UL 2079 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems. 5. UL - Fire Resistance Directory.

G. Intertek Testing Services (Warnock Hersey Listed):

1. WH - Certification Listings. 1.4 DEFINITIONS


A. Terminology used in this Section is defined in Manufacturer’s Standardization Society Specification 90, “Valve and Fittings Standards,” 2000.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data for each type of hanger and support, including load capacity.

C. Submit pipe hanger and support schedule showing manufacturer's Figure No., size,

location, and features for each required pipe hanger and support.

D. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified under the "Quality Assurance" Article.

E. Shop drawings for each type of hanger and support, indicating dimensions, weights,

required clearances, and methods of component assembly.

F. Submit following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specifications:


dimensions materials of construction and specifications. 3. Installation instructions for each product. 4. Layout of piping and ductwork to be isolated including vertical risers showing:

a. Support points. b. Weight at support points. c. Isolator type. d. Static deflection expected under actual load. e. Specified static deflection. f. Additional deflection to solid under actual load. g. Ratio of spring height under load to spring diameter.



G. Submission of samples may be requested for each type of vibration isolation device.

After approval, samples shall be returned for installation at job site. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE


1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for

welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.


C. NFPA Compliance: Comply with NFPA 13, “Installation of Sprinkler Systems,” 1999, for

hangers and supports used as components of fire protection systems.


D. Listing and Labeling: Provide hangers and supports that are listed and labeled as defined

in NFPA 70 “Definitions.”

1. UL and FM Compliance: Hangers, supports, and components include listing and labeling by UL and FM where used for fire protection piping systems.

E. Licensed Operators: Use operators that are licensed by powder-operated tool

manufacturers to operate their tools and fasteners.

F. Supply and install incidental materials needed to meet requirements, even if not expressly specified or shown on drawings without claim for additional payment.

G. Verify correctness of equipment model numbers and conformance of each component

with manufacturer's specifications. 1.7 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with minimum five years documented experience.


A. Comply with Division 01, Section “Product Requirements” for transporting, handling, storing, and protecting products.

B. Accept materials on site in original factory packaging, labeled with manufacturer's identification.

C. Protect from weather and construction traffic, dirt, water, chemical, and damage, by storing in original packaging.

1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Section “Product Requirements”: Environmental conditions affecting products on site.

B. Do not apply firestopping materials when temperature of substrate material and ambient air is below 60°F (15°C).

C. Maintain this minimum temperature before, during, and for minimum 3 days after installation of firestopping materials.



PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MATERIALS



B. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, “Track Bolts and Nuts,” 2000, steel,

hex-head, track bolts and nuts.

C. Washers: ASTM F 844, “Standard Specification for Washers, Steel, Plain (Flat), Unhardened for General Use,” 2005, steel, plain, flat washers.

D. Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, “Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-

Cement Grout (Non-shrink),” 2001, non-shrink, nonmetallic.



2.2 HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. Hangers, Supports, and Components: Provide factory-fabricated products as manufactured by B-Line, ITT Grinnel, Pipe Shields, Inc., or Michigan Hanger. Basis of Design shall be B-Line.

1. Components include galvanized coatings where installed for piping and

equipment that will not have a field-applied finish. 2. Pipe attachments include nonmetallic coating for electrolytic protection where

attachments are in direct contact with copper tubing.

B. Thermal-Hanger Shield Inserts: 100-psi (690kPa) average compressive strength, waterproofed calcium silicate or treated lumber inserts, encased with sheet metal shield. Insert and shield cover entire circumference of pipe and are of length indicated by manufacturer for pipe size and thickness of insulation.

C. Mechanical-Anchor Fasteners: Insert-type attachments with pull-out and shear capacities

appropriate for supported loads and building materials where used. Fasteners for fire protection systems include UL listing and FM approval.

D. Install rigid round, rectangular, and flat oval metal duct with support systems indicated in

SMACNA “HVAC Duct Construction Standards,” Tables 4-1 through 4-3 and Figures 4-1 through 4-8.

E. Support horizontal ducts within 2 feet of each elbow and within 4 feet of each branch

intersection.

F. Support vertical ducts at a maximum interval of 16 feet and at each floor.

G. Upper attachments to structures shall have an allowable load not exceeding 3 of the failure (proof test) load but are not limited to the specific methods indicated.

H. Horizontal Non-Insulated Copper Piping Hangers:

1. Two inch and smaller: Figure No. B3104 CT. 2. Two and one-half inch and larger: Figure No. B3104 CT.


I. Insulated Horizontal Piping Hangers: Reheat Water, refrigerant piping:

1. Two inch and smaller: Figure No. B3108 with metal shield, Figure No. B3151. 2. Two and one-half inch and larger: Figure No. B3108 with metal shield, Figure No.

B3151.

J. Vertical Piping Riser Clamps:

1. Copper Pipe: Figure No. B3373CT. 2. Steel Pipe: Figure No. B3136 and B3137.

K. Beam Clamps and Attachments:

1. For bolt-on locations to structure, Figure Nos. B3291, B3036, or B3050. 2. Welded beam attachments, Figure No. B3083.

L. Concrete Inserts:

1. For concrete spot inserts at single locations for casting into structure, Figure No.

B3014 for predetermined rod size and Figure No. B2500 for universal use. 2. For continuous slot concrete insert at multi-locations for casting into structure,

Figure No. B2505.

M. Brackets:

1. For equipment and piping adjacent to walls or steel columns, Figure Nos. B3066, B3063 and B3067 depending on weight to be supported.

N. Pipe Rests:

1. For pipes close to floor where no expansion provision is required, Figure No.

B3088T base stand with B3093 adjustable pipe saddle support.

O. Hanger Rods:

1. Hanger rod, Figure No. B3205. 2. Continuous threaded rod, Figure No. ATR. 3. Eye rods, Figure No. B3210 or B3211, depending on load supported.

P. Trapeze Hangers - Direct Mounting Hangers:

1. Grinnell, Figure No. 46.

Q. Protection Saddles:

1. Cast iron pipe, insulated, Figure No. B3108 with metal shield, Figure No. B3151. 2. For high temperature steel pipe, insulated, No. B3160, B3161, B3162, B3163,

B3164, or B3165.

R. Pipe Roll Stands:

1. For support of pipe where axial movement is encountered: Figure No. B3117SL where no vertical adjustment is required; and Figure No. B3118SL where vertical adjustment is required.


2.3 ACOUSTICAL SEALANT


Acoustical sealant ................................................... D.A.P. BR – 96 .................................................................... Pecra Acoustical sealant ................................................. Tremco Acoustical sealant .................................................. U.S.G.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PREPARATION

A. Clean substrate surfaces of dirt, dust, grease, oil, loose material, or other matter affecting bond of firestopping material. Install damming material to arrest liquid material leakage.

B. Remove incompatible materials affecting bond.

C. Drilling or cutting of structural members shall be as detailed / directed by structural engineer.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Comply with MSS SP-69, “Pipe Hangers and Supports C Selection and Application,” 1996, and SP-89, “Pipe Hangers and Supports -- Fabrication and Installation Practices,” 1998. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments as required to properly support piping from building structure. Piping shall be supported independently from equipment connections. Supports shall not interfere with removal of equipment.

B. Arrange for grouping of parallel runs of horizontal piping supported together on

field-fabricated, heavy-duty trapeze hangers where possible.

C. Install supports with maximum spacings complying with MSS SP-69, “Pipe Hangers and Supports C Selection and Application,” 1996, and as specified in Section Building Services Piping.

D. Where pipes of various sizes are supported together by trapeze hangers, space hangers

for smallest pipe size or install intermediate supports for smaller diameter pipes as specified above for individual pipe hangers.

E. Install building attachments within concrete or to structural steel. Space attachments

within maximum piping span length indicated in MSS SP-69, ”Pipe Hangers and Supports C Selection and Application,” 1996. Install additional attachments at concentrated loads, including valves, flanges, guides, strainers, expansion joints, and at changes in direction of piping. Install concrete inserts in new construction prior to placing concrete. Install reinforcing bars through openings at top of inserts.

F. Install hangers and supports complete with necessary inserts, bolts, rods, nuts, washers,

and other accessories.


G. Heavy-Duty Steel Trapezes: Field-fabricate from ASTM A 36, “Carbon Structural Steel,” 2001, steel shapes selected for loads being supported. Weld steel according to AWS D-1.1, “Structural Welding Code - Steel,” 2001.

H. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems, permit

freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and facilitate action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends, and similar units.

I. Load Distribution: Install hangers and supports so that piping live and dead loading and

stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment.

J. Pipe Slopes: Install hangers and supports to provide indicated pipe slopes and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed by ASME B31.9 "Building Services Piping" is not exceeded.

K. Insulated Piping: Provide continuous insulation and vapor barrier through hangers and

supports. Comply with the following installation requirements.

1. Riser Clamps: Attach riser clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping with clamps projecting through insulation; do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ASME B31.9. Insulate clamps on piping with insulation and vapor barrier.

2. Saddles: Install protection saddles MSS Type 39 where insulation without vapor barrier is indicated. Fill interior voids with segments of insulation that match adjoining pipe insulation.

3. Shields: Install MSS Type 40, protective shields on cold piping with vapor barrier. Shields span an arc of 180 degrees (3.1 rad) and have dimensions in inches (mm) not less than the following:

NPS (Inches) LENGTH (Inches) THICKNESS (Inches) 1/4 to 3 1/2 12 0.048 4 12 0.060 5 and 6 18 0.060 8 to 14 24 0.075 16 to 24 24 0.105

4. Pipes 4 Inches (200 mm) and Larger: Include treated wood inserts.

5. Insert Material: Length to equal to the length of the protective shield.

6. Conform to the table below for maximum spacing of supports and rod sizes:

7. Steel and Copper Pipe:





Up to 3/4 7 5 3/8 1 7 6 3/8

1 1/4 7 7 3/8 1 1/2 9 8 3/8

2 10 8 3/8 2 1/2 11 9 1/2

3 12 10 1/2






3 1/2 13 11 1/2 4 14 12 5/8 (1/2 for copper) 5 16 13 5/8 (1/2 for copper) 6 17 14 3/4 (5/8 for copper) 8 19 16 3/4 (3/4 for copper) 10 22 18 3/4 (3/4 for copper) 12 23 19 3/4 (3/4 for copper)

a. Support vertical steel pipe and copper tube at each floor.

L. Equipment Supports:

1. Fabricate structural steel stands to suspend equipment from structure above or support equipment above floor.

2. Grouting: Place grout under supports for equipment and concrete bases. Make a smooth bearing surface.

3. Provide housekeeping pads of concrete, minimum 3-1/2 inches thick and extending 4” beyond supported equipment.

4. Using templates furnished with equipment, install anchor bolts, and accessories for mounting and anchoring equipment.

M. Metal Fabrication:

1. Cut, drill, and fit miscellaneous metal fabrications for pipe and equipment

supports. 2. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints. Field-weld connections

that cannot be shop-welded because of shipping size limitations. 3. Field Welding: Comply with AWS D1.1 procedures for manual shielded metal-arc

welding, appearance and quality of welds, methods used in correcting welding work, and the following: a. Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength

and corrosion resistance of base metals. b. Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap. c. Remove welding flux immediately. d. Finish welds at exposed connections so that no roughness shows after

finishing, and so that contours of welded surfaces match adjacent contours.


A. Licensed Engineer's Report: Prepare hanger and support installation report. Include seal and signature of Registered Engineer, licensed in jurisdiction where Project is located, certifying compliance with specifications.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Clean adjacent surfaces of firestopping materials.

3.5 PROTECTION OF FINISHED WORK

A. Protect adjacent surfaces from damage by material installation.


3.6 APPLICATIONS FOR HANGER AND SUPPORT

A. Specific hanger requirements are specified in the Section specifying the equipment and systems.

B. Comply with MSS SP-69, “Pipe Hangers and Supports C Selection and Application,”

1996, for pipe hanger selections and applications that are not specified in piping specification Sections.

3.7 ADJUSTING

A. Hanger Adjustment: Adjust hangers to distribute loads equally on attachments and to achieve indicated slope of pipe.

B. Adjust for pipe alignment and final equipment connections. Flexible connections shall not

be used for adjustment of alignment.

END OF SECTION

EASTERN DISTRICT POLICE STATION 15071 - 1 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING AND PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 28103.01 January 15, 2013

SECTION 15071 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR PLUMBING AND PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Drawing and general provisions of the Contract, including the General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section and the other Sections of Division 15.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes vibration isolators for plumbing systems piping and equipment.

B. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Section “Common Work Results for Plumbing and Equipment.” 2. Section “Mechanical Insulation.” 3. Section “Interior Painting”: Product and execution requirements for painting

specified by this Section. 4. Section “Pipes and Tubes for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.” 5. Section “Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping”: Product

requirements for anchors and piping expansion compensation. 6. Section “Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment”: Product

requirements for pipe hangers and supports.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American National Standards Institute:

1. ANSI S1.4 - Sound Level Meters. 2. ANSI S1.8 - Reference Quantities for Acoustical Levels. 3. ANSI S12.36 - Survey Methods for the Determination of Sound Power Levels of

Noise Sources.

B. Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute:

1. ARI 575 - Method of Measuring Machinery Sound within Equipment Space.

C. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and:

1. ASHRAE Handbook - HVAC Applications.


1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Terminology used in this Section is defined in Manufacturer’s Standardization Society Specification 90, “Valve and Fittings Standards,” 2000.

B. Positive Attachment:

1. A positive attachment is defined as a cast-in anchor, a drill-in wedge anchor, a double sided beam clamp loaded perpendicular to a beam, or a welded or bolted connection to structure. Single sided “C” type beam clamps for support rods of overhead piping, fire protection, or any other equipment are not acceptable on this project as seismic attachment points.

C. Transverse Bracing:

1. Restraint(s) applied to limit motion perpendicular to the centerline of the pipe.

D. Longitudinal Bracing:

1. Restraint(s) applied to limit motion parallel to the centerline of the pipe, duct or conduit.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data for each type of hanger and support.

C. Submit pipe hanger and support schedule showing manufacturer's Figure No., size, location, and features for each required pipe hanger and support.

D. Shop drawings for each type of isolator, indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, and methods of component assembly.

E. Submit following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specifications:


dimensions materials of construction and specifications. 3. Installation instructions for each product. 4. Tabulation showing for each vibration isolator supporting equipment:

a. Equipment identification tag no. b. Isolator type. c. Actual load. d. Static deflection expected under actual load. e. Specified minimum static deflection.


f. Additional deflection to solid under actual load. g. Ratio of spring height under actual load to spring diameter.

5. Layout of piping to be isolated including vertical risers showing: a. Support points. b. Weight at support points. c. Isolator type. d. Static deflection expected under actual load. e. Specified static deflection. f. Additional deflection to solid under actual load. g. Ratio of spring height under load to spring diameter.



F. Submission of samples may be requested for each type of vibration isolation device. After approval, samples shall be returned for installation at job site.



1. Certify that each welder has satisfactorily passed AWS qualification tests for welding processes involved and, if pertinent, has undergone recertification.

B. Listing and Labeling: Provide hangers and supports that are listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70 “Definitions.”

1. UL and FM Compliance: Hangers, supports, and components include listing and

labeling by UL and FM where used for fire protection piping systems.

C. Manufacturer of vibration isolation and seismic control equipment shall have the following responsibilities:

1. Determine vibration isolation and seismic restraint sizes and locations. 2. Provide calculations and materials if required for restraint of un-insulated

equipment. 3. Provide installation instructions, drawings and trained field supervision to insure

proper installation and performance.

D. Licensed Operators: Use operators that are licensed by power operated tool manufacturers to operate their tools and fasteners.

E. Coordinate size, location, and special requirements of vibration isolation equipment and systems with other trades. Coordinate plan dimensions with size of housekeeping pads.


F. Provide vibration isolators of appropriate sizes and proper loading to meet specified deflection requirements.

G. Supply and install incidental materials needed to meet requirements, even if not expressly specified or shown on drawings without claim for additional payment.

H. Verify correctness of equipment model numbers and conformance of each component with manufacturer's specifications.

I. Should any rotating equipment cause excessive noise or vibration, rebalance, realign or do other remedial work to reduce noise and vibration levels. Excessive is defined as exceeding manufacturer's specifications for unit in question.

J. Speed And Balance Requirements For Rotating Equipment:

1. Fans and other rotating mechanical equipment shall not operate at speeds in excess of 80% of their critical speed.

2. Vertical vibration of rotating equipment shall not be greater than levels indicated elsewhere. Measure vibration on equipment or steel frame equipment base when equipment is mounted on its vibration isolation mounts. If equipment has inertia base, allowable vibration level is reduced by ratio of equipment weight alone to equipment weight plus inertia base weight.

Equipment Speed Vibration Displacement (rpm) (mils, peak-to-peak) Under 600 4 600 to 1000 3 1000 to 2000 2 over 2000 1

1.7 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience.




PART 2 PRODUCTS


2.1 MATERIALS


B. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, “Track Bolts and Nuts,” 2000, steel, hex-head, track bolts and nuts.

C. Washers: ASTM F 844, “Standard Specification for Washers, Steel, Plain (Flat), Unhardened for General Use,” steel, plain, flat washers.

D. Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, “Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Non-shrink),” non-shrink, nonmetallic.



2.2 VIBRATION ISOLATION MOUNT TYPES

A. General

1. Metal parts of vibration isolation units installed out-of-doors shall be hot-dip galvanized, cadmium- plated or Neoprene-coated after fabrication. Galvanizing shall meet ASTM 144 “Salt Spray Test Standards and Federal Test Standard.”

2. Isolator types are scheduled to establish minimum standards. Optionally, labor-saving accessories can be an integral part of isolators supplied to provide initial lift of equipment to operating height, hold piping at fixed elevations during installation and initial system filling operations, and similar installation advantages. Accessories shall not degrade vibration isolation system.

B. Unit HSN (Hanger Spring and Neoprene)

1. Hangers shall consist of rigid steel frames containing minimum 1 1/4” thick neoprene elements at the top and a steel spring with general characteristics as in specification 5 seated in a steel washer reinforced neoprene cup on the bottom. The neoprene element and the cup shall have neoprene bushings projecting through the steel box. To maintain stability the boxes shall not be articulated as clevis hangers nor the neoprene element stacked on top of the spring. Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30Ε arc from side to side before contacting the rod bushing and short circuiting the spring. Submittals shall include a hanger drawing showing the 30Ε capability. Hangers shall be type 30N as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc., or approved equal.


2.3 GROMMETS

A. Grommets shall be either custom made by combining Neoprene washer and sleeve, or be Isogrommets as manufactured by MBIS, Inc., or be Series W by Barry Controls.

B. Neoprene shall be between 40 and 50 durometer.

C. Grommets shall be specially formed to prevent fastening bolts from directly contacting isolator base plate.



Acoustical sealant ........................................................................... D.A.P. BR-96 .............................................................................................. Pecra Acoustical sealant .......................................................................... Tremco Acoustical sealant ........................................................................... U.S.G.

2.5 VIBRATION ISOLATION SCHEDULE

MIN. ISOLATOR STATIC BASE EQUIPMENT TYPE DEFL (IN) TYPE REMARKS In-Line Pumps HSN 0.75 Condensate Pumps --- --- ---

PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT

A. General

1. Locations of vibration isolation equipment shall be selected for ease of inspection and adjustment as well as for proper operation.

2. Installation of vibration isolation equipment shall be in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Seismic restrains shall be provided for all installed mechanical equipment.

B. Isolation Mounts


1. Squarely align vibration isolators above or below mounting points of supported equipment.

2. Isolators for equipment with bases shall be located on sides of bases, which are parallel to equipment shaft unless this is not possible because of physical constraints.

3. If housekeeping pad is provided, isolators shall bear on housekeeping pad and isolator base plate shall rest entirely on pad. Maintain at least ten bolt diameters from isolator anchors to edge of pad.

4. Hanger rods for vibration isolated support shall be connected to structural beams or joists; not from floor slab between beams and joists. Provide intermediate support members as necessary.

5. Position vibration isolation hanger elements as high as possible in hanger rod assembly but not in contact with building structure, and so that hanger housing may rotate full 360 degrees about rod axis without contacting any object.

6. Parallel-running pipes may be hung together on trapeze, which is isolated from building. Isolator deflections must be largest determined by provisions for pipe isolation. Do not mix isolated and non-isolated pipes on same trapeze.

7. No pipes or equipment shall be supported from other pipes or equipment. 8. Resiliently-isolated pipes shall not contact rigid building structure or equipment. 9. Installed and operating heights of vibration-isolated equipment mounted on Unit

FSN isolators shall be identical. Limit stops shall be out of contact during normal operation.

10. Adjust leveling bolts and hanger rod bolts so isolated equipment is level and in proper alignment with connecting ducts or pipes.

C. Bases

1. No equipment unit shall bear directly on vibration isolators unless its own frame is suitably rigid to span between isolators and such direct support is approved by equipment manufacturer. This provision shall apply whether or not base frame is specified or indicated on drawings. If base frame is required for unit because of equipment manufacturer's requirements and is not specifically called for, base frame recommended by equipment manufacturer shall be provided at no additional expense.

2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide minimum operating clearance of 1.5" between inertia bases or structural steel frames and concrete housekeeping pad on floor beneath equipment. Position isolator mounting brackets so that required clearance is maintained. Check clearance space to ensure that no construction debris has been left to short-circuit or restrict proper operation of vibration isolation system.

D. Resilient Penetration Sleeve/Seals

1. Penetration seals shall maintain airtight seal around penetrating element and shall prevent contact of penetrating element and building structure. Fit sleeve tightly to building construction and with acoustical sealant seal airtight on both sides of construction penetrated.

3.2 APPLICATIONS FOR VIBRATION CONTROLS

A. Major Equipment

1. Unless otherwise shown or specified, major floor-mounted equipment shall be set on housekeeping type concrete pads. See architectural or structural drawings for


details.

B. Pipes

1. Isolators for first three support points adjacent to connected equipment shall achieve half of specified static deflection of isolators supporting connected equipment. When required static deflection of these pipe isolators is greater than 0.50,” Unit FSN or HSN isolators, (whichever is applicable for mounting condition) shall be used. When required static deflection is less than or equal to 0.50.”

2. Where lateral support of pipe risers is required within specified limits, use resilient lateral supports.

3. Pipes within specified limits that penetrate building construction shall be isolated from building structure by (Unit RPS-A or Unit RPS-B) resilient penetrating sleeve/seals.

4. Drain piping connected to vibration-isolated equipment shall not contact building structure or other non-isolated system unless it is resiliently mounted as described above.

3.3 ADJUSTING



END OF SECTION

EASTERN DISTRICT POLICE STATION 15072- 1 VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 28103.01 January 15, 2013

SECTION 15072 - VIBRATION AND SEISMIC CONTROLS FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes vibration and seismic control for mechanical systems piping and equipment.


1. Inertia bases. 2. Vibration isolators. 3. Cross-talk silencers. 4. Acoustic housings. 5. Ductwork lagging. 6. Acoustical louvers.

C. Related Sections:

1. Section “Common Work Results for HVAC.” 2. Section “Mechanical Insulation.” 3. Section “Interior Painting”: Product and execution requirements for painting

specified by this Section. 4. Section “Pipes and Tubes for HVAC Piping and Equipment.” 5. Section “Cast-In-Place Concrete”: Product requirements for concrete for

placement by this section. 6. Section “Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment”: Product

requirements for pipe hangers and supports.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. Air Movement and Control Association International, Inc.:

1. AMCA 300 - Reverberant Room Method for Sound Testing of Fans.

B. American National Standards Institute:

1. ANSI S1.4 - Sound Level Meters. 2. ANSI S1.8 - Reference Quantities for Acoustical Levels. 3. ANSI S1.13 - Methods for the Measurement of Sound Pressure Levels in Air. 4. ANSI S12.36 - Survey Methods for the Determination of Sound Power Levels of

Noise Sources.


C. Air-Conditioning and Refrigeration Institute:

1. ARI 575 - Method of Measuring Machinery Sound within Equipment Space.

D. ASTM International:

1. ASTM E90 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions and Elements.

2. ASTM E477 - Standard Test Method for Measuring Acoustical and Airflow Performance of Duct Liner Materials and Prefabricated Silencers.

3. ASTM E596 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of the Noise Reduction of Sound-Isolating Enclosures.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Terminology used in this Section is defined in Manufacturer’s Standardization Society Specification - 90, “Valve and Fittings Standards,” 2000.

B. Life Safety Systems:

1. All systems involved with fire dampers and smoke damper systems. 2. All HVAC systems involved with and/or connected to emergency power supply

including all generators, transfer switches, transformers and all flowpaths to fire protection.

C. Positive Attachment:

1. A positive attachment is defined as a cast-in anchor, a drill-in wedge anchor, a double sided beam clamp loaded perpendicular to a beam, or a welded or bolted connection to structure. Single sided “C” type beam clamps for support rods of overhead ductwork, hydraulic piping, bus duct, or any other equipment are not acceptable on this project as seismic attachment points.

D. Transverse Bracing:

1. Restraint(s) applied to limit motion perpendicular to the centerline of the hydraulic piping or duct.

E. Longitudinal Bracing:

1. Restraint(s) applied to limit motion parallel to the centerline of the hydraulic piping or duct.

1.5 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide vibration isolation on motor driven equipment over 0.5 hp (0.35 kW), or as detailed on the drawings, plus connected piping and ductwork.

1.6 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data for each type of seismic or vibration control.


B. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements specified under the "Quality Assurance" Article.

C. Shop drawings for each type of isolator, indicating dimensions, weights, required clearances, and methods of component assembly.

D. Submit following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specifications:


dimensions materials of construction and specifications. 3. Installation instructions for each product. 4. Tabulation showing for each vibration isolator supporting equipment:

a. Equipment identification tag no. b. Isolator type. c. Actual load. d. Static deflection expected under actual load. e. Specified minimum static deflection. f. Additional deflection to solid under actual load. g. Ratio of spring height under actual load to spring diameter.

5. Layout of piping to be isolated including vertical risers showing: a. Support points. b. Weight at support points. c. Isolator type. d. Static deflection expected under actual load. e. Specified static deflection. f. Additional deflection to solid under actual load. g. Ratio of spring height under load to spring diameter.



E. Submission of samples may be requested for each type of vibration isolation device. After approval, samples shall be returned for installation at job site.





C. Manufacturer of vibration isolation and seismic control equipment shall have the following responsibilities:


1. Determine vibration isolation and seismic restraint sizes and locations. 2. Provide calculations and materials if required for restraint of un-insulated

equipment. 3. Provide installation instructions, drawings and trained field supervision to insure

proper installation and performance.

D. Licensed Operators: Use operators that are licensed by powder-operated tool manufacturers to operate their tools and fasteners.

E. Coordinate size, location, and special requirements of vibration isolation equipment and systems with other trades. Coordinate plan dimensions with size of housekeeping pads.

F. Provide vibration isolators of appropriate sizes and proper loading to meet specified deflection requirements.

G. Supply and install incidental materials needed to meet requirements, even if not expressly specified or shown on drawings without claim for additional payment.

H. Verify correctness of equipment model numbers and conformance of each component with manufacturer's specifications.

I. Should any rotating equipment cause excessive noise or vibration, rebalance, realign or do other remedial work to reduce noise and vibration levels. Excessive is defined as exceeding manufacturer's specifications for unit in question.

J. Speed And Balance Requirements For Rotating Equipment:

1. Fans and other rotating mechanical equipment shall not operate at speeds in excess of 80% of their critical speed.

2. Vertical vibration of rotating equipment shall not be greater than levels indicated elsewhere. Measure vibration on equipment or steel frame equipment base when equipment is mounted on its vibration isolation mounts. If equipment has inertia base, allowable vibration level is reduced by ratio of equipment weight alone to equipment weight plus inertia base weight.

Equipment Speed Vibration Displacement (rpm) (mils, peak-to-peak) Under 600 4 600 to 1000 3 1000 to 2000 2 over 2000 1

1.8 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this section with minimum five years documented experience.





PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MATERIALS


B. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10 or ASTM A 183, “Track Bolts and Nuts,” 2000, steel, hex-head, track bolts and nuts.

C. Washers: ASTM F 844, “Standard Specification for Washers, Steel, Plain (Flat), Unhardened for General Use,” steel, plain, flat washers.

D. Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, “Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement Grout (Nonshrink),” nonshrink, nonmetallic.

1. Characteristics include post-hardening, volume-adjusting, dry, hydraulic-cement-type grout that is nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous and is recommended for both interior and exterior applications.


2.2 VIBRATION ISOLATION MOUNT TYPES

A. General

1. Metal parts of vibration isolation units installed out-of-doors shall be hot-dip galvanized, cadmium- plated or Neoprene-coated after fabrication. Galvanizing shall meet ASTM 144 “Salt Spray Test Standards and Federal Test Standard.”

2. Isolator types are scheduled to establish minimum standards. Optionally, labor-saving accessories can be an integral part of isolators supplied to provide initial lift of equipment to operating height, hold piping at fixed elevations during installation and initial system filling operations, and similar installation advantages. Accessories shall not degrade vibration isolation system.

B. Unit FSN (Floor Spring and Neoprene)

1. Spring isolators shall be free standing and laterally stable without any housing and complete with a molded neoprene cup or 1/4" (6mm) neoprene acoustical


friction pad between the baseplate and the support. All mountings shall have leveling bolts that must be rigidly bolted to the equipment. Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 of the compressed height of the spring at rated load. Springs shall have a minimum additional travel to solid equal to 50% of the rated deflection. Submittals shall include spring diameters, deflection, compressed spring height and solid spring height. Mountings shall be type SLF as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc., or approved equal.

2. Restrained spring mountings shall have an SLF mounting within a rigid housing that includes vertical limit stops to prevent spring extension when weight is removed. The housing shall serve as blocking during erection. Installed and operating heights are equal. A minimum clearance of 1/2" (12mm) shall be maintained around restraining bolts and between the housing and the spring so as not to interfere with the spring action. Restraining Bolts shall have a neoprene bushing between the bolt and the housing. Limit stops shall be out of contact during normal operation. Housing shall be designed to resist all seismic forces. Mountings shall have Anchorage Preapproval “OPA” Number from OSHPD in the state of California certifying the maximum certified horizontal and vertical load ratings. Mountings shall be type SLR or SLRS as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc., or an approved equal.

C. Unit HSN (Hanger Spring and Neoprene)

1. Hangers shall consist of rigid steel frames containing minimum 1 1/4" thick neoprene elements at the top and a steel spring with general characteristics as in specification 5 seated in a steel washer reinforced neoprene cup on the bottom. The neoprene element and the cup shall have neoprene bushings projecting through the steel box. To maintain stability the boxes shall not be articulated as clevis hangers nor the neoprene element stacked on top of the spring. Spring diameters and hanger box lower hole sizes shall be large enough to permit the hanger rod to swing through a 30Ε arc from side to side before contacting the rod bushing and short circuiting the spring. Submittals shall include a hanger drawing showing the 30Ε capability. Hangers shall be type 30N as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc., or approved equal.

D. Unit FN-P (Floor Neoprene-Pad) (Type 1)

1. Isolation pads shall be neoprene elastomer in-shear pads, used in conjunction with steel shims where required, having static deflections as tabulated. Pads shall have a durometer of 50 and be designed for a maximum of 60 psi (4.2 kg./sq. cm) loading. Pads shall be designed for a maximum deflection of approximately 20% of its unloaded thickness, 0.15” (0.38 cm). All pads shall be elastomer in-shear and shall be molded using 250 psi minimum tensile strength oil resistant neoprene compounds with no color additives. Pad shall be Model RSP as manufactured by Kinetics Noise Control or comparable acceptable product.

2.3 EQUIPMENT BASES

A. Unit BSR (Base - Steel Rail)

1. Vibration isolation manufacturer shall furnish integral structural steel bases. Rectangular bases are preferred for all equipment. Centrifugal refrigeration machines and pump bases may be T or L shaped where space is a problem.


Pump bases for split case pump shall include supports for suction and discharge elbows. All perimeter members shall be steel beams with a minimum depth equal to 1/10 of the longest dimension of the base. Base depth need not exceed 14" provided that the deflection and misalignment is kept within acceptable limits as determined by the manufacturer. Height saving brackets shall be employed in all mounting locations to provide a base clearance of 1". Bases shall be type WF as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc., or approved equal.

B. Unit BIB (Base - Inertia Base)

1. Vibration isolation manufacturer shall furnish rectangular steel concrete pouring forms for floating and inertia foundations. Bases for split case pumps shall be large enough to provide for suction and discharge elbows. Bases shall be a minimum of 1/12 of the longest dimension of the base but not less than 6" (150mm). The base depth need not exceed 12" (300mm) unless specifically recommended by the base manufacturer for mass or rigidity. Forms shall include minimum concrete reinforcing consisting of 1/2" (12mm) bars welded in place on 6" (150mm) centers running both ways in a layer 1 2" (38mm) above the bottom. Forms shall be furnished with steel templates to hold the anchor bolts sleeves and anchors while concrete is being poured. Height saving brackets shall be employed in all mounting locations to maintain a 1" (25mm) clearance below the base. Wooden formed bases leaving a concrete rather then a steel finish are not acceptable. Base shall be type BMK or K as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc., or approved equal.

C. Unit BC (Base – Curb)

1. Curb mounted rooftop equipment shall be mounted on vibration isolation bases that fit over the roof curb and under the isolated equipment. The extruded aluminum top member shall overlap the bottom to provide water runoff independent of the seal. Aluminum members shall house electro-galvanized or powder coated springs selected for 0.75”(20mm) minimum deflection. Travel to solid shall be 1.5”(40mm) minimum. Spring diameters shall be no less than 0.8 of the spring height at rated load. Wind resistance shall be provided by means of resilient snubbers in the corners with a minimum clearance of 1/4”(6mm) so as not to interfere with the spring action except in high winds. Manufacturer's self adhering closed cell sponge gasketing must be used both above and below the base and a flexible EPDM duct like connection shall seal the outside perimeter. Foam or other sliding or shear seals are unacceptable in lieu of the EPDM ductlike closure. Submittals shall include spring deflections, spring diameters, compressed spring height and solid spring height as well as seal and wind resistance details. Curb mounted bases shall be Type CMAB as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc., or approved equal.

2.4 RESILIENT PENETRATION SLEEVE/SEAL

A. Unit RPS-A (Resilient Penetration Sleeve/Seal)

1. The horizontal thrust restraint shall consist of a spring element in series with a neoprene molded cup as described in specification 5 with the same deflection as specified for the mountings or hangers. The spring element shall be designed so it can be preset for thrust at the factory and adjusted in the field to allow for a


maximum of 1/4" (6mm) movement at start and stop. The assembly shall be furnished with 1 rod and angle brackets for attachment to both the equipment and the ductwork or the equipment and the structure. Horizontal restraints shall be attached at the centerline of thrust and symmetrical on either side of the unit. Horizontal thrust restraints shall be type WBI/WBD as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc.

2.5 FLEXIBLE DUCT CONNECTIONS

A. Flexible duct connections shall be fabricated from Neoprene, loaded vinyl or canvas. Clear space between connected parts shall be a minimum of three inches and connection shall have 1.5" minimum of slack material.

B. Seismic Restraint: The horizontal thrust restraint shall consist of a spring element in series with a neoprene molded cup as described in specification 5 with the same deflection as specified for the mountings or hangers. The spring element shall be designed so it can be preset for thrust at the factory and adjusted in the field to allow for a maximum of 1/4" (6mm) movement at start and stop. The assembly shall be furnished with 1 rod and angle brackets for attachment to both the equipment and the ductwork or the equipment and the structure. Horizontal restraints shall be attached at the centerline of thrust and symmetrical on either side of the unit. Horizontal thrust restraints shall be type WBI/WBD as manufactured by Mason Industries, Inc., or approved equal.

2.6 FLEXIBLE ELECTRICAL CONNECTION

A. Unit FEC-A (Flexible Electrical Connection Type A):

1. Flexible electrical coupling shall be prefabricated units incorporating flexible watertight outer jacket, grounding strap, plastic inner sleeve to maintain smooth wire way and end hubs with standard tapered electrical threads to fit standard threaded, rigid metal conduit.

2. Unit FEC-A shall be as specified in Section “Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems” for liquid tight flexible metal conduit.

B. Unit FEC-B (Flexible Electrical Connection Type B):

1. Flexible electrical couplings shall be field-fabricated using minimum 2 ft length of flexible conduit or cable installed in grossly slack "U" shape.

2. Unit FEC-B shall be as specified in Section “Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems” for flexible meta conduit.

2.7 RESTRAINTS

A. Thrust Restraint

1. Thrust restraints shall consist of spring element in series with Neoprene pad. 2. Thrust restraint shall be designed to have same deflection as specified for

isolators supporting equipment generating thrust. 3. Spring element shall be contained within steel frame and be designed to be

factory-preset for thrust and be field-adjustable to allow for maximum of 1/4"


movement during starting or stopping of equipment. 4. Furnish assembly complete with rods and angle brackets for attachment to both

equipment generating thrust and adjacent fixed structural anchor. 5. Thrust restraint shall be Mason Industries Type WB, or approved equal.

2.8 GROMMETS

A. Grommets shall be either custom made by combining Neoprene washer and sleeve, or be Isogrommets as manufactured by MBIS, Inc., or be Series W by Barry Controls.

B. Neoprene shall be between 40 and 50 durometer.

C. Grommets shall be specially formed to prevent fastening bolts from directly contacting isolator base plate.



1. Acoustical sealant ........................................................................... D.A.P. 2. BR-96 .............................................................................................. Pecra 3. Acoustical sealant .......................................................................... Tremco 4. Acoustical sealant ........................................................................... U.S.G.

2.10 VIBRATION ISOLATION SCHEDULE

MIN. ISOLATOR STATIC BASE EQUIPMENT TYPE DEFL (IN) TYPE REMARKS Fan Coil Unit HSN 0.75 --- --- In-Line Exhaust HSN 0.75 -- --- Fans Base-Mounted Exhaust FSN 1.5 BSR Thrust Restraint Fans Above Grade Pumps on Grade HSN 0.75 BC Thrust Restraint Packaged Rooftop HSN 1.5 BC Thrust Restraint Unit In-Line Pumps HSN 0.5 --- --- Boilers FN-P 0.25 --- ---


PART 3 EXECUTION

3.1 INSTALLATION OF VIBRATION ISOLATION EQUIPMENT

A. General

1. Locations of vibration isolation equipment shall be selected for ease of inspection and adjustment as well as for proper operation.

2. Installation of vibration isolation equipment shall be in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Seismic restrains shall be provided for all installed mechanical equipment.

B. Isolation Mounts

1. Squarely align vibration isolators above or below mounting points of supported equipment.

2. Isolators for equipment with bases shall be located on sides of bases, which are parallel to equipment shaft unless this is not possible because of physical constraints.

3. If housekeeping pad is provided, isolators shall bear on housekeeping pad and isolator base plate shall rest entirely on pad. Maintain at least ten bolt diameters from isolator anchors to edge of pad.

4. Hanger rods for vibration isolated support shall be connected to structural beams or joists; not from floor slab between beams and joists. Provide intermediate support members as necessary.

5. Position vibration isolation hanger elements as high as possible in hanger rod assembly but not in contact with building structure, and so that hanger housing may rotate full 360 degrees about rod axis without contacting any object.

6. Parallel-running pipes may be hung together on trapeze, which is isolated from building. Isolator deflections must be largest determined by provisions for pipe isolation. Do not mix isolated and non-isolated pipes on same trapeze.

7. No pipes or equipment shall be supported from other pipes or equipment. 8. Resiliently-isolated pipes shall not contact rigid building structure or equipment. 9. Installed and operating heights of vibration-isolated equipment mounted on Unit

FSN isolators shall be identical. Limit stops shall be out of contact during normal operation.

10. Adjust leveling bolts and hanger rod bolts so isolated equipment is level and in proper alignment with connecting ducts or pipes.

C. Bases

1. No equipment unit shall bear directly on vibration isolators unless its own frame is suitably rigid to span between isolators and such direct support is approved by equipment manufacturer. This provision shall apply whether or not base frame is specified or indicated on drawings. If base frame is required for unit because of equipment manufacturer's requirements and is not specifically called for, base frame recommended by equipment manufacturer shall be provided at no additional expense.

2. Unless otherwise indicated, provide minimum operating clearance of 1.5" between inertia bases or structural steel frames and concrete housekeeping pad on floor beneath equipment. Position isolator mounting brackets so that required clearance is maintained. Check clearance space to ensure that no construction debris has been left to short-circuit or restrict proper operation of vibration


isolation system.

D. Flexible Duct Connections

1. Sheet metal ducts or plenum openings shall be squarely aligned with fan discharge, fan intake or adjacent duct section prior to installation of flexible connection, so that clear length is approximately equal all way around perimeter. Flexible duct connections shall not be installed until this provision is met.

2. Fan or adjacent duct section shall be able to move 1" in any direction without causing metal to metal contact or stretching flexible connection taut.

E. Thrust Restraints

1. Attach thrust restraints at centerline of thrust and symmetrically on each side of equipment generating thrust.

2. Adjust restraints to limit equipment movement to specified limit.

F. Resilient Penetration Sleeve/Seals

1. Penetration seals shall maintain airtight seal around penetrating element and shall prevent contact of penetrating element and building structure. Fit sleeve tightly to building construction and with acoustical sealant seal airtight on both sides of construction penetrated.

3.2 APPLICATIONS FOR VIBRATION CONTROLS

A. Major Equipment

1. Unless otherwise shown or specified, major floor-mounted equipment shall be set on housekeeping type concrete pads. See architectural or structural drawings for details.

2. Flexible duct connections shall be installed at fan unit intakes, fan unit discharges, and wherever else shown on drawings.

3. Electrical connections to vibration-isolated equipment exposed to weather shall be Unit FEC-A.

4. Electrical connections to vibration-isolated equipment located indoors shall be Unit FEC-B.

5. Thrust Restraints shall be installed on equipment as called for in schedule on drawings or specified hereunder.

B. Miscellaneous Mechanical Equipment

1. Miscellaneous pieces of mechanical equipment such as storage tanks, condensate receiver tanks and expansion tanks shall be vibration-isolated from building structure by Unit FN isolators unless their position in piping system required higher degrees of isolation as called for under pipe isolation requirements.

C. Pipes

1. Heating water and reheat piping within mechanical rooms or within 50 ft total pipe length (whichever is longer) of connected vibration-isolated equipment (pumps, roof top units, pressure reducing stations, etc.), and all of above piping that is 6” or larger, shall be isolated from building structure by vibration mounts, resilient


pipe guides, and resilient penetration sleeve/seals. 2. Isolators for first three support points adjacent to connected equipment shall

achieve half of specified static deflection of isolators supporting connected equipment. When required static deflection of isolators is greater than 0.50”, Unit FSN or HSN isolators, (whichever is applicable for mounting condition) shall be used.

3. Where lateral support of pipe risers is required within specified limits, use resilient lateral supports.

4. Pipes within specified limits that penetrate building construction shall be isolated from building structure by (Unit RPS-A or Unit RPS-B) resilient penetrating sleeve/seals.

3.3 ADJUSTING



END OF SECTION

EASTERN DISTRICT POLICE STATION 15075 - 1 IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 28103.01 January 15, 2013

SECTION 15075 - IDENTIFICATION FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS:

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section, and all sections of Division 15.

1.2 SUMMARY:

A. Section Includes:

1. Painted Identification Materials. 2. Plastic Pipe Markers. 3. Valve Tags. 4. Valve Schedule Frames. 5. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs. 6. Plastic Equipment Markers. 7. Plasticized Tags.

B. Related Sections The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Section “Interior Painting”: Execution requirements for painting specified by this section.

2. Section “Common Work Results for Plumbing.” 3. Section “Pipes and Tubes for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.” 4. Section “General Duty Valves for Plumbing Piping.” 5. Section “Plumbing Fixture and Equipment.”

1.3 REFERENCES


1. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems, 2007.

B. National Fire Protection Association:

1. NFPA 99 - Standard for Health Care Facilities, 2005. 1.4 SUBMITTALS:

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for each identification material and device required.

B. Samples: Submit samples of each color, lettering style and other graphic representation

required for each identification material or system.

C. Schedules: Submit valve schedule for each piping system, typewritten and reproduced on 8 1/2" x 11" bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on tag), location of valve (room or space), and variations for identification (if any). Mark valves which are intended for emergency shut-off and similar special uses, by special "flags", in margin of schedule. Furnish copies for Maintenance Manuals as


specified in Division 1. Section “Project Closeout.”

D. Maintenance Data: Include product data and schedules in maintenance manuals, in accordance with requirements of Division 1.

1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE:

A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of identification devices of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

B. Codes and Standards:

1. ANSI Standards: Comply with ANSI A13.1, for lettering size, length of color field,

colors, and viewing angles of identification devices.

C. Equipment Lettering and Graphics:

1. General: Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in plumbing identification work, with corresponding designations shown, specified or scheduled. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by manufacturers or as required for proper identification and operation/maintenance of plumbing systems and equipment. a. Multiple Systems: Where multiple systems of same generic name are

shown and specified, provide identification, which indicates individual system number as well as service (for example; Water Heater No. 3).

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS:

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering identification materials which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide plumbing identification

materials of one of the following:

1. Brady (W.H.) Co.; Signmark Div. 2. Industrial Safety Supply Co., Inc. 3. Seton Name Plate Corp.

2.2 MATERIALS:

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application as referenced in other Division 22 Sections. Where more than single type is specified for application, selection is Installer’s option, but provides single selection for each product category.

B. Painted Identification Materials:

1. Stencils: Standard fiberboard stencils, prepared for required applications with

letter sizes not less than 1 1/4" high for ductwork and not less than 3/4" high for access door signs and similar operational instructions. Stencils shall not be utilized on piping and plumbing equipment.


2. Stencil Paint: Standard exterior type stenciling enamel; black, except as otherwise indicated; either brushing grade or pressurized spray-can form and grade.

3. Identification Paint: Standard identification enamel of colors indicated or, if not otherwise indicated for piping systems and plumbing equipment comply with ANSI A13.1 for colors.

C. Plastic Pipe Markers:

1. Snap-On Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, semi-rigid snap-on,

UV-resistant color-coded pipe markers, complying with ANSI/ASME A13.1 2. Small Pipes: For external diameters less than 6" (including insulation if any),

provide full-band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location, fastened by one of the following methods: a. Snap-on application of pre-tensioned semi-rigid plastic pipe marker. b. Adhesive lap joint in pipe marker overlap. c. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not

less than 3/4" wide; full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 1 1/2".

3. Large Pipes: For external diameters of 6" and larger (including insulation if any), provide either full-band or strip-type pipe markers, but not narrower than 3 times letter height (and of required length), fastened by one of the following methods: a. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not

less than 1 1/2" wide; full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 3".

b. Strapped-to-pipe (or insulation) application of semi-rigid type, with manufacturer's standard stainless steel bands.

4. Lettering: Comply with piping system nomenclature as specified, scheduled or shown, and abbreviate only as necessary for each application length. a. Arrows: Print each pipe marker with arrows indicating direction of flow,

either integrally with piping system service lettering (to accommodate both directions), or as a separate unit of plastic.

5. Provide pipe markers with the following background colors and designations:

SERVICE

STENCIL DESIGNATION

LETTER COLOR

BACKGROUND COLOR

Sanitary/Vent Sanitary Sewer/Vent White Safety Green Storm Water/Rain Leaders Storm Water White Safety Green Domestic Cold Water Domestic Cold Water White Safety Green Domestic Hot Water Domestic Hot Water Black Safety Green Condensate Drain Drain Water White Safety Green Natural Gas Natural Gas (psig) Black Safety Yellow

D. Underground-type Plastic Line Marker:

1. General: Manufacturer's standard permanent, bright-colored, continuous-printed

plastic tape, intended for direct-burial service; not less than 6" wide x 4 mils thick. Provide tape with printing which most accurately indicates the type of service of buried pipe. a. Provide multi-ply tape consisting of solid aluminum foil core between

2-layers of plastic tape.


E. Valve Tags:

1. Plastic Laminate Valve Tags: Provide manufacturer's standard 3/32" thick engraved plastic laminate valve tags, with piping system abbreviation in 1/4" high letters and sequenced valve numbers 1/2" high, and with 5/32" hole for fastener. a. Provide 1 1/2" sq. black tags with white lettering, except as otherwise

indicated. b. Provide size, shape and color combination as specified or scheduled for

each piping system. 2. Plastic Valve Tags: Provide manufacturer's standard solid plastic valve tags with

printed enamel lettering, with piping system abbreviation in approximately 3/16" high letters and sequenced valve numbers approximately 3/8" high, and with 5/32" hole for fastener. a. Provide 1 1/8" sq. white tags with black lettering. b. Provide size, shape and color combination as specified or scheduled for

each piping system. 3. Valve Tag Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass chain (wire

link or beaded type), or solid brass S-hooks of the sizes required for proper attachment of tags to valves, and manufactured specifically for that purpose.

4. Ceiling Grid and Access Panel Markers: Provide Kroy type clear adhesive printed labels with 3/16" high letters to identify the type of concealed plumbing devices.

F. Engraved Plastic-laminate Signs:

1. General: Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, complying with FS

L-P-387, in the sizes and thicknesses indicated, engraved with engraver's standard letter style of the sizes and wording indicated, black with white core (letter color) except as otherwise indicated, punched for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessary because of substrate.

2. Thickness: 1/8", except as otherwise indicated. 3. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws, except contact-type permanent

adhesive where screws cannot or should not penetrate the substrate. 4. Nomenclature: Include the following, matching terminology on schedules as

closely as possible: a. Name and plan number. b. Equipment service. c. Design capacity. d. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving

conditions, rpm, etc. 5. Size: Provide approximate 2 1/2" x 4" markers for control devices, dampers, and

valves; and 4 1/2" x 6" for equipment.

G. Plasticized Tags:

1. General: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed or partially pre- printed accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card stock with matt finish suitable for writing, approximately 3 1/4" x 5 5/8", with brass grommets and wire fasteners, and with appropriate pre- printed wording including large-size primary wording (as examples; DANGER, CAUTION, DO NOT OPERATE).


A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.


3.2 INSTALLATION:

A. General:

1. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces, which require insulation, painting or other covering or finish, including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces, install identification after completion of covering and painting. Install identification prior to installation of acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment.

2. Confined Spaces: Provide labels and signs on all duct and equipment doors, plenums, etc. to indicate service and provide operator warnings as required by OSHA, NFPA, and authority having jurisdiction.

B. Piping System Identification:

1. General: Install pipe markers of one of the following types on each system

indicated to receive identification, and include arrows to show normal direction of flow: a. Plastic pipe markers, with application system as indicated under

"Materials" in this section. 2. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows on all piping in occupied spaces,

above ceilings, machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces (shafts, tunnels, plenums) and exterior non-concealed locations. a. Near each valve and control device. b. Near each branch, excluding short take-offs for fixtures and terminal

units; mark each pipe at branch, where there could be question of flow pattern.

c. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors/ ceilings, or enter non-accessible enclosures.

d. At access doors, manholes and similar access points, which permit view of concealed piping.

e. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.

f. Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 25' along each piping run, except reduce spacing to 10' in congested areas.

C. Valve Identification:

1. General: Provide valve tag on every valve, cock and control device in each piping

system; exclude check valves, valves within factory-fabricated equipment units, plumbing fixture faucets, convenience and lawn-watering hose bibs, and shut-off valves at plumbing fixtures. List each tagged valve in valve schedule for each piping system.

D. Equipment Identification:

1. General: Install engraved plastic laminate sign on or near each major item of

plumbing equipment and each operational device, as specified herein if not otherwise specified for each item or device. Provide signs for the following general categories of equipment and operational devices: a. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and

hazardous units such as gas outlets. b. Water meters and flow meters. c. Fuel-burning units.


d. Pumps, compressors, and similar motor- driven units. e. Heat exchangers, expansion tanks, and similar equipment. f. Tanks and pressure vessels. g. Filters, water treatment systems and similar equipment. h. Domestic water heater, RO/DI equipment, vacuum pump units, sumps,

sewage ejectors, etc. 2. Lettering Size: Minimum 1/4" high lettering for name of unit where viewing

distance is less than 2'-0", 1/2" high for distances up to 6'-0", and proportionately larger lettering for greater distances. Provide secondary lettering of 2/3 to 3/4 of size of the principal lettering.

3. Text of Signs: In addition to name of identified unit, provide lettering to distinguish between multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations.

3.3 ADJUSTING:

A. Adjusting: Relocate any identification device, which has become visually blocked by work of this division or other divisions.

3.4 CLEANING:

A. Cleaning: Clean face of identification devices. 3.5 EXTRA STOCK:

A. Furnish minimum of 5% extra stock of each identification material required, including additional numbered valve tags (not less than 3) for each piping system, additional piping system identification markers, and additional plastic laminate engraving blanks of assorted sizes.

1. Where stenciled markers are provided, clean and retain stencils after completion

of stenciling and include used stencils in extra stock, along with required stock of stenciling paints and applicators.

END OF SECTION

EASTERN DISTRICT POLICE STATION 15076- 1 IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 28103.01 January 15, 2013

SECTION 15076 - IDENTIFICATION FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY


1. Painted Identification Materials. 2. Plastic Pipe Markers. 3. Valve Tags. 4. Valve Schedule Frames. 5. Engraved Plastic-Laminate Signs. 6. Plastic Equipment Markers. 7. Plasticized Tags.

B. Mechanical identification furnished as part of factory-fabricated equipment, is specified as

part of equipment assembly in other Division 15 sections.

C. Related Documents:

1. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 specification sections, apply to this section.

D. Related Sections: The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Section “Interior Painting”: Execution requirements for painting specified by this

section. 2. Section “Common Work Results for HVAC.” 3. Section “Pipes and Tubes for HVAC Piping and Equipment.” 4. Section “General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping.” 5. Section “Refrigerant Piping.” 6. Section “Air Distribution.” 7. Section “Heating Ventilating and Air Conditioning.”

1.3 REFERENCES


1. ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems, 2007. 1.4 SUBMITTALS

A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical product data and installation instructions for each identification material and device required.

B. Samples: Submit samples of each color, lettering style and other graphic representation


required for each identification material or system.

C. Schedules: Submit valve schedule for each piping system, typewritten and reproduced on 8 1/2" x 11" bond paper. Tabulate valve number, piping system, system abbreviation (as shown on tag), location of valve (room or space), and variations for identification (if any). Mark valves which are intended for emergency shut-off and similar special uses, by special "flags", in margin of schedule. Furnish copies for Maintenance Manuals as specified in Division 01. Section “Project Closeout.”

D. Maintenance Data: Include product data and schedules in maintenance manuals, in

accordance with requirements of Division 01. 1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Manufacturer's Qualifications: Firms regularly engaged in manufacturer of identification devices of types and sizes required, whose products have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years.

B. Codes and Standards:

1. ANSI Standards: Comply with ANSI A13.1, for lettering size, length of color field,

colors, and viewing angles of identification devices.

C. Equipment Lettering and Graphics:

1. General: Coordinate names, abbreviations and other designations used in HVAC identification work, with corresponding designations shown, specified or scheduled. Provide numbers, lettering and wording as indicated or, if not otherwise indicated, as recommended by manufacturers or as required for proper identification and operation/maintenance of HVAC systems and equipment. a. Multiple Systems: Where multiple systems of same generic name are

shown and specified, provide identification, which indicates individual system number as well as service (for example; Unit Heater No. 3).

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering identification materials which may be incorporated in the work include, but are not limited to, the following:

B. Manufacturer: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide HVAC identification

materials of one of the following:

1. Brady (W.H.) Co.; Signmark Div. 2. Industrial Safety Supply Co., Inc. 3. Seton Name Plate Corp.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. General: Provide manufacturer's standard products of categories and types required for each application as referenced in other Division 15 sections. Where more than single type is specified for application, selection is Installer's option, but provide single selection for each product category.


B. Painted Identification Materials:

1. Stencils: Standard fiberboard stencils, prepared for required applications with

letter sizes not less than 1 1/4" high for ductwork and not less than 3/4" high for access door signs and similar operational instructions.

2. Stencil Paint: Standard exterior type stenciling enamel; black, except as otherwise indicated; either brushing grade or pressurized spray-can form and grade.

3. Identification Paint: Standard identification enamel of colors indicated or, if not otherwise indicated for piping systems and HVAC equipment comply with ANSI A13.1 for colors. For ductwork, use green paint. For hazardous exhaust, use colors per ANSI A13.1.

C. Plastic Pipe Markers:

1. Snap-On Type: Provide manufacturer's standard pre-printed, semi-rigid snap-on,

UV-resistant color-coded pipe markers, complying with ANSI/ASME A13.1 2. Small Pipes: For external diameters less than 6" (including insulation if any),

provide full-band pipe markers, extending 360 degrees around pipe at each location, fastened by one of the following methods: a. Snap-on application of pre-tensioned semi-rigid plastic pipe marker. b. Adhesive lap joint in pipe marker overlap. c. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not

less than 3/4" wide; full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 1 1/2".

3. Large Pipes: For external diameters of 6" and larger (including insulation if any), provide either full-band or strip-type pipe markers, but not narrower than 3 times letter height (and of required length), fastened by one of the following methods: a. Taped to pipe (or insulation) with color-coded plastic adhesive tape, not

less than 1 1/2" wide; full circle at both ends of pipe marker, tape lapped 3".

b. Strapped-to-pipe (or insulation) application of semi-rigid type, with manufacturer's standard stainless steel bands.

4. Lettering: Comply with piping system nomenclature as specified, scheduled or shown, and abbreviate only as necessary for each application length. Operating pressure of steam systems shall be indicated. a. Arrows: Print each pipe marker with arrows indicating direction of flow,

either integrally with piping system service lettering (to accommodate both directions), or as a separate unit of plastic.

5. Provide pipe markers with the following background colors and designations:

SERVICE

STENCIL DESIGNATION

LETTER COLOR

BACKGROUND COLOR

Hot Water Heating Supply Heating Water Supply White Safety Green Hot Water Heating Return Heating Water Return White Safety Green Refrigerated Suction White Safety Green Refrigerated Liquid White Safety Green

D. Plastic Duct Markers (Not Permitted): All ductwork identification shall be stenciled.

E. Valve Tags:


1. Plastic Laminate Valve Tags: Provide manufacturer's standard 3/32" thick

engraved plastic laminate valve tags, with piping system abbreviation in 1/4" high letters and sequenced valve numbers 1/2" high, and with 5/32" hole for fastener. a. Provide 1 1/2" sq. black tags with white lettering, except as otherwise

indicated. b. Provide size, shape and color combination as specified or scheduled for

each piping system. 2. Plastic Valve Tags: Provide manufacturer's standard solid plastic valve tags with

printed enamel lettering, with piping system abbreviation in approximately 3/16" high letters and sequenced valve numbers approximately 3/8" high, and with 5/32" hole for fastener. a. Provide 1 1/8" sq. white tags with black lettering. b. Provide size, shape and color combination as specified or scheduled for

each piping system. 3. Valve Tag Fasteners: Provide manufacturer's standard solid brass chain (wire

link or beaded type), or solid brass S-hooks of the sizes required for proper attachment of tags to valves, and manufactured specifically for that purpose.

4. Ceiling Grid and Access Panel Markers: Provide Kroy type clear adhesive printed labels with 3/16" high letters to identify the type of concealed HVAC devices.

F. Engraved Plastic-laminate Signs:

1. General: Provide engraving stock melamine plastic laminate, complying with FS

L-P-387, in the sizes and thicknesses indicated, engraved with engraver's standard letter style of the sizes and wording indicated, black with white core (letter color) except as otherwise indicated, punched for mechanical fastening except where adhesive mounting is necessary because of substrate.

2. Thickness: 1/8", except as otherwise indicated. 3. Fasteners: Self-tapping stainless steel screws, except contact-type permanent

adhesive where screws cannot or should not penetrate the substrate. 4. Nomenclature: Include the following, matching terminology on schedules as

closely as possible: a. Name and plan number. b. Equipment service. c. Design capacity. d. Other design parameters such as pressure drop, entering and leaving

conditions, rpm, etc. 5. Size: Provide approximate 2 1/2" x 4" markers for control devices, dampers, and

valves; and 4 1/2" x 6" for equipment.

G. Plasticized Tags:

1. General: Manufacturer's standard pre-printed or partially pre- printed accident-prevention tags, of plasticized card stock with matt finish suitable for writing, approximately 3 1/4" x 5 5/8", with brass grommets and wire fasteners, and with appropriate pre- printed wording including large-size primary wording (as examples; DANGER, CAUTION, DO NOT OPERATE).


A. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Coordination: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces, which require insulation, painting or other covering or finish, including valve tags in finished mechanical spaces, install identification after completion of covering and painting. Install identification prior to installation of acoustical ceilings and similar removable concealment.

2. Confined Spaces: Provide labels and signs on all duct and equipment doors, plenums, etc. to indicate service and provide operator warnings as required by OSHA, NFPA, and authority having jurisdiction.

B. Ductwork Identification:

1. General: Identify air supply, return, exhaust, and intake ductwork with stenciled signs and arrows, showing ductwork service specified nomenclature and direction of flow, in black or white (whichever provides most contrast with ductwork color).

2. Location: Locate stenciled signs along entire length of duct route at 10' spacing, up to the point of branch ducts to the final air terminal device. Stenciled signs shall be easily visible from ceiling access viewpoints.

3. Access Doors: Provide stenciled signs on each access door in ductwork and housings, indicating purpose of access (to what equipment) and any appropriate warning or safety labeling.

4. Concealed Doors: Where access doors are concealed above ceilings, provide “Kroy” type clear adhesive printed labels to indicate the location of access doors.

C. Piping System Identification:

1. General: Install pipe markers of one of the following types on each system

indicated to receive identification, and include arrows to show normal direction of flow: a. Plastic pipe markers, with application system as indicated under

"Materials" in this section. 2. Locate pipe markers and color bands as follows on all piping in occupied spaces,

above ceilings, machine rooms, accessible maintenance spaces (shafts, tunnels, plenums) and exterior non-concealed locations. a. Near each valve and control device. b. Near each branch, excluding short take-offs for equipment and terminal

units; mark each pipe at branch, where there could be question of flow pattern.

c. Near locations where pipes pass through walls or floors/ ceilings, or enter non-accessible enclosures.

d. At access doors, manholes and similar access points, which permit view of concealed piping.

e. Near major equipment items and other points of origination and termination.

f. Spaced intermediately at maximum spacing of 25' along each piping run, except reduce spacing to 10' in congested areas.

D. Valve Identification:

1. General: Provide valve tag on every valve, cock and control device in each piping

system; exclude check valves, valves within factory-fabricated equipment units, shut-off valves at HVAC equipment, and shut-off valves at HVAC terminal


devices and similar rough-in connections of end-use fixtures and units. List each tagged valve in valve schedule for each piping system.

E. Equipment Identification:

1. General: Install engraved plastic laminate sign on or near each major item of

HVAC equipment and each operational device, as specified herein if not otherwise specified for each item or device. Provide signs for the following general categories of equipment and operational devices: a. Main control and operating valves, including safety devices and

hazardous units. b. Flow meters. c. Fuel-burning units. d. Pumps, compressors, and similar motor- driven units. e. Expansion tanks, and similar equipment. f. Tanks and pressure vessels.

2. Lettering Size: Minimum 1/4" high lettering for name of unit where viewing distance is less than 2'-0", 1/2" high for distances up to 6'-0", and proportionately larger lettering for greater distances. Provide secondary lettering of 2/3 to 3/4 of size of the principal lettering.

3. Text of Signs: In addition to name of identified unit, provide lettering to distinguish between multiple units, inform operator of operational requirements, indicate safety precautions, and warn of hazards and improper operations.

3.3 ADJUSTING

A. Adjusting: Relocate any identification device, which has become visually blocked by work of this division or other divisions.

3.4 CLEANING

A. Cleaning: Clean face of identification devices. 3.5 EXTRA STOCK

A. Furnish minimum of 5% extra stock of each identification material required, including additional numbered valve tags (not less than 3) for each piping system, additional piping system identification markers, and additional plastic laminate engraving blanks of assorted sizes.

1. Where stenciled markers are provided, clean and retain stencils after completion

of stenciling and include used stencils in extra stock, along with required stock of stenciling paints and applicators.

END OF SECTION

EASTERN DISTRICT POLICE STATION 15080- 1 MECHANICAL INSULATION 28103.01 January 15, 2013

SECTION 15080 - MECHANICAL INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes field applied thermal insulation for mechanical systems, ductwork, piping, and equipment.


1. Section : “Common Work Results for HVAC.” 2. Section: "Common Work Results for Plumbing” for spacing and installation

requirements. 3. Section: “Air Distribution” 4. Section: “Pipes and Tubes for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.”

C. Insulation material shall be non-combustible and jacketing material shall be fire retardant with UL listing flame spread of not greater than 25, fuel contributed greater than 50 and smoke developed greater than 50 and shall conform to requirements of NFPA 90A, NFPA 255, ASTM E84 and UL 723. Adhere insulation jackets with self-sealing, vaporproof lap or with non-flammable vapor seal adhesive. Staples to adhere jackets will be permitted only on flexible blanket type duct insulation, provided all jacket laps and staples are sealed with non-flammable vapor seal adhesive. Pipe insulation materials shall be tested per UL 723 at the specified thickness with a maximum flamespread of 25 and a maximum smoke rating of 50.

D. Comply with the requirements of the manufacturer's published instructions on the use and

application of all specified materials. The installation and application of all materials, including compatibility and drying/curing times shall be coordinated to effect a compatible quality installation. Provide adequate ventilation and follow safety procedures as required.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Submit the following according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

1. Product data for each type of product provided. 2. Submit schedule showing manufacturer's product name, model number., size,

and system application for each field applied thermal insulation for mechanical systems and equipment.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Coordinate size, location and special requirements of vibration isolation equipment and

systems, application of thermal insulation shall not interfere with operation of vibration isolation equipment.

B. Supply and install incidental materials needed to meet requirements even if not expressly specified or shown on drawings without claim for additional payment.


PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE INSULATION

A. Pipe insulation, shall be Owens-Corning Fiberglass® SSL11-All-Service Jacket (ASJ), self sealing lap Pipe Insulation or approved equal. Insulation shall be molded, one-piece, hinged construction with factory applied all service jacket and double pressure sensitive adhesive closure system. Apply insulation to following piping with thickness indicated.

SYSTEM DESCRIPTION THICKNESS

Domestic Water - Cold, Hot and Hot Water Circulating: Piping larger then 1 ½” 2” 1 1/2" piping and smaller 1"

Condensate Drains 1" Refrigerant Piping 1" Storm Water ½” to 2" 1 ½" 2½” to 12" 1 ½” Heating Water Piping larger then 1 ½” 2” 1 ½” piping and smaller 1”

B. Basis of designs hall be Owens-Corning Fiberglass pipe insulation, comparable products as manufactured by Johns Manville and Knauf insulation shall be submitted for approval as a comparable product.

C. Jacket shall have water vapor performance not greater than 0.02 Perms.

D. Jacket and butt strips shall have factory applied self-sealing pressure sensitive adhesive.

Adhere jacket and butt strips by removing in center of each section and working toward ends. Lap and butt strips must be pressurized by rubbing with hard tool such as nylon sealing tool. For cold water piping, seal ends of pipe insulation with Foster 30-35 or equal vapor barrier mastic, at all flanges and valves. Finish elbows, with pre-molded covers as manufactured by Zeston or approved equal.

E. Finish insulation exposed to weather above ground, with 0.016" thick aluminum jacket.

Aluminum jacket shall be provided with moisture barrier. Finish elbows with 0.016" thick pre-molded aluminum covers with moisture barrier. Jacketing shall be held in place with ½” x .020" aluminum bands and wing seals located 9" on center. Screws shall not be used to fasten aluminum jacketing on piping systems operating below ambient temperatures.

F. Oversize insulation for electric heat tracing and oversize insulation joints at mechanical

fittings. 2.2 EQUIPMENT INSULATION


A. Insulate heating system pumps and equipment with Owens Corning Fiberglas 700 Series Insulation, or an approved comparable product as manufactured by Johns Manville and Knauf. Insulation shall be cut or mitered where necessary to fit shape and contour of equipment and banded in place with ¾" x 0.015" thick galvanized steel bands on 18" centers or impale insulation over welded pins and secure with speed washers. Point up all joints with insulating cement. Cover insulation with 1" galvanized hexagonal wire mesh and apply ½" thickness of OC-110 insulating cement in two coats. Over cement, when dry, apply pre-sized glass cloth adhered with Benjamin-Foster Lagging Adhesive. Extend oil and grease fittings of fans to exterior of insulation for serving.

2.3 DUCTWORK INSULATION

A. Fiberglass blanket Insulation 1. Basis of design shall be model No. “SOFTR” as manufactured by Owens

Corning, comparable products as manufactured by Armstrong, CSG, Johns Manville,and Knauf shall be submitted for approval as a comparable product.

2. Concealed indoor ductwork: Externally insulate all indoor concealed supply ductwork, return ductwork, outdoor air ductwork, flexible connections and the back of all air devices, with flexible fiberglass duct wrap suitable for applications to 250°F. Duct wrap shall be 1½” thick, 1 pcf minimum density, 0.28 “k” @ 75˚F mean temperature per ASTM Practice C1045 with data obtained from ASTM C177. R-value shall not be less than 5.6 out-of-package. R-value shall not be less than 4.5 installed at a maximum 25% compression rate. Duct wrap insulation shall be installed per manufacturer’s recommendation. Ductwork that has internal sound lining must also receive exterior insulation.

B. Semi-Rigid Fiberglass Board Insulation

1. Basis of design shall be model No. “7053RK” as manufactured by Ownens

Corning, comparable products as manufactured by Armstrong, CSG, Johns Manville and Knauf shall be submitted for approval as a comparable product.

2. Exposed indoor ductwork: Externally insulate all indoor exposed supply ductwork, return ductwork, outdoor air ductwork, flexible connections, etc. with semi-rigid fiberglass insulation board with factory applied foil skrim kraft facing. Factory applied foil skrim kraft facing shall have a maximum permeance of 0.02 ASTM E 96 Procedure A. Duct insulation board shall be 1½” thick, 3 pcf minimum nominal density, 0.23 “k” @ 75°F mean temperature per ASTM Practice C 1045 with data obtained from ASTM C177. R-value shall not be less than 6.5. Duct insulation board shall be installed per manufacturer’s recommendation.

2.4 DUCT SOUND LINING

A. Basis of design shall be K-Flex as manufactured by Nomaco, comparable products as manufactured by Owens-Corning, Johns Manville and Knauff shall be submitted for approval as a comparable product.

B. Provide sound lined duct insulation on the interior of ductwork as indicated on the contract

drawings. Ducts with interior lining shall also require exterior insulation.

C. Material shall have a density ranging from 3 lb/ft3 (ASTM D1622, ASTM D 3575), a maximum thermal conductivity (k) of 0.25 Btu-in/hr-ft2-°F @ 75°F mean temperature (ASTM C518, ASTM C177), and a maximum Water Vapor Transmission rate of 0.10 Perm-in. (ASTM E96, Desiccant Method). Material up to nominal 1” thick, when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, shall have a flame spread rating not greater than 25 and a


smoke developed rating not greater than 50. It shall come in sheet or roll form with factory-applied pressure sensitive adhesive backing. The duct liner shall conform to the requirements of ASTM C 1071, with an NRC not less than .70 as tested per ASTM C 423 using a Type “A” mounting.

D. All exposed edges and the leading edge of all cross joints of the liner shall be coated with

a sealant acrylic coating with anti-microbial agent meeting the same requirement as the coating for the liner.

E. Contact Adhesive: standard air-drying contact adhesives (brush, roller, or spray applied)

formulated for joining sheet insulation seams and adhering sheet insulation to duct substrate. Adhesive shall comply with SCAQMD 1168 VOC emission requirements. Refer to manufacturer’s literature for a list of recommended and compatible adhesives. The adhesive manufacturer should be contacted to verify correct application for service temperatures anticipated.

F. The duct liner shall be additionally secured with mechanical fasteners which shall

compress the duct liner sufficiently to hold it firmly in place.

G. Mechanical fasteners shall conform to Mechanical Fastener Standard MF-1-1971, available from Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Installers National Association.

H. All duct lining shall be installed in complete accordance with the Sheet Metal Air

Conditioning Installers National Association (SMACNA) Duct Liner Application Standard, First Edition.

I. Dimensions on drawings indicate inside clear opening of ductwork. Increase duct

dimensions to accommodate interior insulation on all shop or field fabricated ductwork.

J. Submit coordination drawings for sound lined ductwork as required in Part 3 of this specification.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 PIPE INSULATION

A. Apply insulation to clean, dry surfaces only, after piping and equipment have been tested and accepted. All piping insulation, jackets or facings and adhesives used to adhere jacket or facing to insulation, including fittings and butt strips, shall have non-combustible fire and smoke hazard system rating label as tested by ASTM E-84, NFPA 255 and UL 73 not exceeding Flame Spread 25, Fuel Contributed 50, Smoke Developed 50. Accessories such as adhesives, mastics, cements, tapes and cloth for fittings shall have same ratings as listed above. All products or their shipping cartons shall bear the Underwriter's Label indicating that flame and smoke ratings do not exceed above criteria.

B. Insulation on domestic cold water and refrigerant piping shall be continuous through walls

and floors. Sleeves shall be oversized to accommodate insulation. At each point of support including alignment guides, provide Insul Shield or equal, multi-purpose pipe saddle in lieu of fiberglass insulation. Insulation on other piping need not be continuous through walls and floors provided insulation is neatly terminated and sealed at sleeve.

C. Insulate all fittings and valves, strainers, etc. Additionally insulate unions, valve flanges,

control valves, thermometer extensions, and pressure gauge extensions to prevent condensation of any kind with segments of pipe insulation or molded fiberglass fitting covers of thickness equal to thickness of adjacent pipe insulation, wire in place, apply


smoothing coat of insulating cement and vapor seal with pre-sized glass cloth before 2 coats of Benjamin-Foster 30-35 or equal, fire resistant vapor barrier coating. Finish elbows with pre-molded covers as manufactured by Zeston or approved equal. Do not insulate flanges or check valves. Provide oversize fitting insulation cover for all pipe joints if grooved piping is utilized.

D. Insulation exposed to weather shall be weatherproofed with Benjamin-Foster 60-25 or

equal, lagging adhesive and then cover in 0.016" thick aluminum jacket with joint turned down to shed water.

3.2 DUCTWORK INSULATION

A. Insulation requirements as specified hereinbefore shall apply to the entire air distribution system, including but not limited to, ductwork, air handling apparatus, casings, plenums, exterior of diffuser cones, air measuring devices and other air terminal devices. Where the equipment is not factory insulated, provide field installed insulation through sleeves and other openings.

B. Exposed fiberglass duct insulation; tightly butt all edges and seams. Secure insulation

with flush mechanical fasteners spaced not less than one per square foot. Insulation may be secured with 100% coverage of adhesive with mechanical fasteners on the underside of the duct only, in addition to adhesive. Cover all seams, joints and fasteners with not less than 3" wide tape matching the insulation facing. Pre-finished white fastener caps may be left exposed if the spacing and pattern is uniform in appearance.

C. Duct sizes shown on plans shall be inside clear dimension. Increase duct size to

accommodate duct liner. All surfaces must be clean and free of any dust, dirt, scale, moisture, and other contaminates before applying adhesives or coatings. Insure that liner is installed flat and in full contact with duct surface. Liner sheets must be adhered to duct using mechanical pins / fasteners in addition to adhesive. Seal all joint and seams.

3.3 WORKMANSHIP

A. The Installer shall take special care to prevent soiling equipment below or adjacent to areas being insulated. He shall be completely responsible for removing insulation cement splashes and smears and all surfaces that he mars or otherwise soils or defaces and he will be totally responsible for restoring these damaged surfaces to their like new condition when delivered to the site.

B. Replace damaged insulation, which cannot be satisfactorily repaired, including insulation with vapor barrier damaged by moisture-saturated insulation.

3.4 INSULATION COVERING

A. All exposed pipe and duct insulation including Equipment Room piping shall have an 8 oz. glass cloth cover neatly cut and pasted over pipe.

B. Piping exposed in rooms other than the Equipment Room shall be protected with a PVC

jacket.

C. Piping exposed to weather shall be covered with aluminum jacket as indicated hereinbefore.

D. Insulation for hot water and drain piping exposed to use at lavatories, etc., by the

handicapped shall be provided with ADA conforming wheelchair accessible lavatory, P-trap and angle valve assemblies molded type anti-microbial as manufactured by Truebro,


Inc. Model 102 Lavatory Guard or approved equal. Color to be as selected by the Architect. Covers shall be secured with snapclip flush reusable fasteners, angle stops shall have lock lid locking access covers.

E. Items such as handholds, cleanouts, ASME stamp, and manufacturer’s nameplates, may

be left un-insulated unless omitting insulation would cause a condensation problem. When such is the case, appropriate tagging shall be provided to identify the presence of the items. Provide removable insulation section with neatly beveled edges at interruptions of insulation.

3.5 REMOVABLE INSULATION

A. Provide removable insulation sections to cover parts of equipment which must be opened

periodically for maintenance, such as vessel covers, fasteners, pump suction diffusers, and strainers.

END OF SECTION

EASTERN DISTRICT POLICE STATION 15105- 1 PIPES AND TUBES FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 28103.01 January 15, 2013

SECTION 15105 - PIPES AND TUBES FOR PLUMBING PIPING AND EQUIPMENT



1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes piping and limited pipe fittings for the following systems:

1. Domestic water piping, within 5 feet of building. 2. Sanitary sewer piping, within 5 feet of building. 3. Storm water piping within 5 feet of building. 4. Air conditioning condensate, equipment drains, and over flows. 5. Unions and flanges. 6. Natural gas piping.


1. Section “Common Work Results for Plumbing.” 2. Section “Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.” 3. Section “Expansion Fittings and Loops for Plumbing Piping.” 4. Section “Plumbing Fixture and Equipment.” 5. Section “Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment”: Product

requirements for hangers and supports for placement by this section. 6. Section “Vibration and Seismic Controls for Plumbing Piping and Equipment”:

Product requirements for vibration isolation for placement by this section. 7. Section “Mechanical Insulation”: Product requirements for piping insulation for

placement by this section. 8. Section “Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for Plumbing.”

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Gas Distribution Piping: Piping which conveys gas from the point of delivery to the points of usage.

B. Point of Delivery is the outlet of the service meter assembly, or the outlet of the service

regular (service shutoff valve when no meter is provided).

C. Domestic Water Systems: A system conveying domestic potable or non-potable water, such as Cold Water, Hot Water, Hot Water circulating, etc.

D. Gravity Drainage Systems: A system of gravity fed effluent conveying storm water,

sanitary, and laboratory acid waste, etc. 1.4 REFERENCES

A. ANSI (American National Standards Institute)

1. ANSI B16.39, “Malleable Iron Threaded Pipe Unions,” January, 1999.


2. ANSI/ASME B1.20.1, “Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch),” R2006. 3. ANSI/ASME B16.3, “Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings,” 2006. 4. ANSI/ASME B16.5, “Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings,” January, 2003. 5. ANSI/ASME B16.21, “Non-metallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges,” January,

1992. 6. ANSI/ASME B16.22, “Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure

Fittings,” 2001. 7. ANSI/ASME B16.29, “Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint

Drainage Fittings (DWV),” February, 2002. 8. ANSI/API 600, “Bolted Bonnet Steel Gate Valves for Petroleum and Natural Gas

Industries,” 2006. 9. ANSI/AWS B2.1, “Standard Specification for Welding Procedure and

Performance Qualification,” January, 2000. 10. ANSI/AWS D10.12, “Guide for Welding Mild Steel Pipe,” January, 2000. 11. ANSI/AWWA C104, “American National Standard for Cement-Mortar Lining for

Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water,” 2003. 12. ANSI/AWWA C110, “American National Standard for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron

Fittings, 3in. Through 48in., for Water and Other Liquids,” 2003. 13. ANSI/AWWA C111, “Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and

Fittings,” 2007. 14. ANSI/AWWA C151, “American National Standard for Ductile-Iron Pipe,

Centrifugally Cast, for Water,” August, 2002. 15. ANSI/AWWA C153, “American National Standard for Ductile-Iron Compact

Fittings, 3in. Through 24in., and 54in. Through 64in, for Water Service,” 2006.

B. ASME (American Society of Mechanical Engineers)

1. ASME A112.1.2, “Air Gaps in Plumbing Systems,” 2004. 2. ASME A112.14.1, “Back Water Valves,” January, 1990. 3. ASME A112.21.2M, “Roof Drains,” 1983. 4. ASME A112.36.2M, “Clean-outs,” January, 1991. 5. ASME B16.1, “Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings,” 2005. 6. ASME B16.4, “Cast Iron Threaded Fittings,” 2006. 7. ASME B16.5, “Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings,” 2003. 8. ASME B16.20, “Metallic Gaskets for Pipe Flanges- Ring-Joint, Spiral-Wound, and

Jacketed,” 2007. 9. ASME B16.21, “Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges,” 2005. 10. ASME B16.24, “Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings,” 2006. 11. ASME B18.2.1, “Square and Hex Bolts and Screw- Inch Series,” January, 1996. 12. ASME B18.10, “Track Bolts and Nuts,” 2006. 13. ASME B31.1, “Power Piping,” 2007. 14. ASME B31.9, “Building Services Piping,” 2004. 15. ASME B40.1, “Gauges- Pressure Indicating Dial Type- Elastic Element,”

September, 1991. 16. ASTM/ASME B16.22, “Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure

Fittings,” 2001. 17. ANSI/ASME B1.20.1, “Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch),” 2006. 18. ANSI/ASME B16.3, “Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings,” 1998. 19. ANSI/ASME B16.5, “Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings,” 2003. 20. ANSI/ASME B16.21, “Non-metallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges,” 2005. 21. ANSI/ASME B16.22, “Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure

Fittings,” 2001. 22. ASME B16.25, “Butt-Welding Ends,” January, 2007. 23. ANSI/ASME B16.29, “Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint

Drainage Fittings (DWV),” October, 2007.


24. ANSI/AWA C606, “Grooved and Soldered Joints,” 2006.

C. ASSE (American Society of Sanitary Engineers)

1. ASSE 1001, “Hose Connection Vacuum Breakers,” 2008. 2. ASSE 1010, “Water Hammer Arresters,” 2004. 3. ASSE 1013, “Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventors,” 2005. 4. ASSE 1015, “Double Check Backflow Prevention Assembly,” 2005. 5. ASSE 1019, “Vacuum Breaker Wall Hydrants, Frost Resistant Automatic Draining

Type,” 2004. 6. ASSE 1035, “Laboratory Faucet Backflow Preventors,” 2002.

D. ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials)

1. ASTM A36, “Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel,” March, 2001. 2. ASTM A47, “Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings,” 2004. 3. ASTM A53, “Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-

Coated, Welded and Seamless,” 2007. 4. ASTM A74, “Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings,” 2006. 5. ASTM A126, “Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges,

and Pipe Fittings,” 2004. 6. ASTM A167, “Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-

Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip,” 2004. 7. ASTM A182, “Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy-Steel Pipe

Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves and Parts for High-Temperature Service,” 2008.

8. ASTM A183, “Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts,” 2003.

9. ASTM A193, “Standard Specification for Alloy Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service,” 2008.

10. ASTM A194, “Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High-Pressure or High-Temperature Service, or Both,” 2008.

11. ASTM A216, “Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Welding, for High-Temperature Service,” 2007.

12. ASTM A234, “Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High-Temperature Service,” 2007.

13. ASTM A276, “Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes,” 2008. 14. ASTM A278, “Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Pressure

Containing Parts,” 2006. 15. ASTM A351, “Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes,” 2006. 16. ASTM A536, “Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings,” 2004. 17. ASTM A564, “Standard Specification for Hot-Rolled and Cold-Finished Age-

Hardening Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes,” 2004. 18. ASTM A582, “Standard Specification for Free-Machining Stainless Steel Bars,”

2005. 19. ASTM A780, “Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Un-coated Areas of

Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings,” 2006. 20. ASTM B16, “Standard Specification for Free-Cutting Brass Rod, Bar and Shapes

for Use in Screw Machines,” 2005. 21. ASTM B32, “Standard Specification for Soldered Metal,” 2008. 22. ASTM B62, “Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal

Castings,” March 2002. 23. ASTM B88, “Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Water Tubes,” March,

2002. 24. ASTM B124, “Standard Specification for Copper and Copper Alloy Forging Rod,


Bar and Shapes,” 2008. 25. ASTM B148, “Standard Specification for Aluminum-Bronze Sand Castings,” 2003. 26. ASTM B306, “Standard Specification for Copper Drainage Tube (DWV),” March,

2002. 27. ASTM B819, “Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Medical Gas

Systems,” 2006. 28. ASTM B584, “Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General

Applications,” 2008. 29. ASTM C33, “Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates,” 2007. 30. ASTM C150, “Standard Specification for Portland Cement,” 2007. 31. ASTM C1107, “Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement

Grout (Non-shrinking),” 2007. 32. ASTM D2321, “Standard Practice for Thermoplastic Pipe for Sewers and Other

Gravity- Flow Applications,” 2005. 33. ASTM D635, “Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time

of Burning Plastics in a Horizontal Position,” 2006. 34. ASTM D2464, “Standard Specification for Threaded Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC)

Plastic Pipe Fittings,” 2006. 35. ASTM D2564, “Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Poly (Vinyl

Chloride) (PVC) Plastic Piping Systems,” 2004. 36. ASTM D2661, “Standard Specification for Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS)

Schedule 40 Plastic Drain, Waste and Vent Pipe and Fittings,” 2008. 37. ASTM D2665, “Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) (PVC) Plastic

Drain, Waste, and Vent Pipe and Fittings,” 2008. 38. ASTM D2729, “Standard Specification for Poly (Vinyl Chloride) PVC) Sewer Pipe

and Fittings,” 2003. 39. ASTM D2846, “Standard Specification for Chlorinated Polyvinyl Chloride (CPVC)

Plastic Hot- and Cold-Water Distribution Systems,” 2006. 40. ASTM D3138, Standard Specification for Solvent Cements for Transition Joints

between Acrylonitrile-Butadiene-Styrene (ABS) and Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC) Non-Pressure Piping Components,” October, 2004.

41. ASTM D3309, “Standard Specification for Polybutylene (PB) Plastic Hot- and Cold-Water Distribution Systems,” 2002.

42. ASTM E1, “Standard Specification for ASTM Thermometers,” 2007. 43. ASTM F402, “Standard Practice for Safe Handling of Solvent Cements, Primers,

and Cleaners used for Joining Thermoplastic Pipes and Fittings,” 2005. 44. ASTM F844, “Standard Specification for Washers, Steel, Plain (Flat),

Unhardened for General Use,” 2007.

E. AWS (American Welding Society)

1. AWS D1.1, “Structural Welding Code- Steel,” 2008. 2. ANSI/AWS B2.1, “Standard Specification for Welding Procedure and

Performance Qualification,” 2006. 3. ANSI/AWS D10.12, “Guide for Welding Mild Steel Pipe,” January, 2000.

F. AWWA (American Water Works Association)

1. AWWA C600, “Standards for Insulation of Ductile-Iron Water Mains and their

Appearances,” 2005. 2. AWWA C700, “Standard for Cold-Water Meters- Displacement Type, Bronze

Main Case,” January, 2003. 3. AWWA C702, “Cold-Water Meters- Compound Type,” January, 2001. 4. ANSI/AWWA C104, “American National Standard for Cement-Mortar Lining for

Ductile-Iron Pipe and Fittings for Water,” 2004.


5. ANSI/AWWA C110, “American National Standard for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron Fittings, 3in. Through 48in., for Water and Other Liquids,” December, 2003.

6. ANSI/AWWA C111, “Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and Fittings,” 2007.

7. ANSI/AWWA C151, “American National Standard for Ductile-Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast, for Water,” August, 2002.

8. ANSI/AWWA C153, “American National Standard for Ductile-Iron Compact Fittings, 3in. Through 24in., and 54in. Through 64in, for Water Service,” January, 2000.

G. CISPI (Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute)

1. CISPI 301, “Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Sanitary and Storm

Drain, Waste and Vent Piping Applications,” 2004.

H. CS (Commercial Standard)

I. CSA (Canadian Standards Association)

J. IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers)

K. IMC (International Mechanical Code)

L. IPC (International Plumbing Code)

M. MOSHA (Maryland Occupational Safety and Health Administration)

N. NEC (National Electrical Code)

O. NEMA (National Electrical Manufacturers Association)

P. NFPA (National Fire Protection Association)

1. NFPA 54, “National Fuel Gas Code,” 2006. 2. NFPA 70, “National Electrical Code,” 2008.

Q. OSHA (Occupational Safety and Health Administration)

R. UL (Underwriters' Laboratories)

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit each item in this Article according to the Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. Maintenance data to be included in the operation and maintenance manual specified in

Division 1. Include detailed manufacturer's instructions on adjusting, servicing, disassembling, and repairing. Include data for the following:

1. Pipe Materials 2. Flow Measuring Systems 3. Plumbing Specialties

C. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements

specified under the "Quality Assurance" Article.


D. Certification of compliance with ASTM, ASME and ANSI manufacturing requirements for

pipe, fittings, and specialties. 1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. ASME (American Society of Mechanical Engineers) Compliance; comply with:

1. ASME B31.9, “Building Services Piping,” January, 1996. 2. ASME B31.1, “Power Piping,” July 2001, for power piping, meters, and gages.

B. Qualify welding processes and welding operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural

Welding Code—Steel," 2001.


C. Gas Installer Qualifications: Installation and replacement of gas piping, gas utilization

equipment or accessories, and repair and servicing of equipment shall be performed only by a qualified installer. The term qualified is defined as experienced in such work (experienced shall mean having a minimum of 5 previous projects similar in size and scope to this project), familiar with precautions required, and has complied with the requirements of the authority having jurisdiction. Upon request, submit evidence of such qualifications to the Architect.

D. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the requirements of the following additional codes:

1. NFPA 54, “National Fuel Gas Code,” 1999, for gas piping materials and

components, gas piping installations, and inspection, testing, and purging of gas piping systems.

2. International Mechanical Code (IMC), 2006. 3. ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15: Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration. 4. PHCC - National Illustrated Plumbing Code, latest edition.

1.7 QUALIFICATIONS

A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this section with minimum five years experience.

B. Installer: Company specializing in performing work of this section with minimum 5 years

experience. 1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Furnish temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation.

B. Protect piping from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of

the Work, and isolating parts of completed system.

C. Handling Flammable Liquids: Remove and legally dispose of liquid from drips in existing gas piping and handle cautiously to avoid spillage or ignition. Notify the gas supplier. Handle flammable liquids used by the installer with proper precautions, and do not leave on the premises from the end of one working day to the beginning of the next.



A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 1.10 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Notification of Interruption of Service: Provide notification for all utility outages.

B. Work Interruptions: When interruptions in work occur while repairs or alterations are being made to an existing piping system, leave the system in safe condition.

C. Coordinate the installation of pipe sleeves for foundation wall penetrations.

D. Coordinate the size and location of concrete pads. Cast anchor bolt inserts into pad.

E. Coordinate the installation of roof piping support, and roof penetrations.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE AND TUBE MATERIALS AND APPLICATION SCHEDULE

System

Pipe Material

Fitting Material

Joint Material

2" and smaller: Malleable - Iron Threaded: ANSI B16.3, Class 150. Threads per ANSI B.1.20.1, and threadolets.

2" and smaller: Threaded: American Standard for Pipe Threads ANSI B2.1.

Natural Gas

Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Grade B, Schedule 40, black steel.

2 ½” and larger: Steel; ASTM A234, butt welded, long radius ells, and weldolets. Flanges: ANSI B16.5, weld neck, raised faced with gaskets.

2 ½” and larger: Welded: Latest revision of Section IX, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Filler material per AWS D10.12.

Domestic Hot Water, Cold Water, and Hot Water Circulating, Above ground within building.

Copper Tube: ASTM B88, Type L, Seamless, Water Tube, hard-drawn temper.

Copper Tube: ASME B16.22, wrought copper, or copper alloy, solder joint, 150 lb.

For Pipe Sizes of 4” or less: ASTM B32, alloy Sb5 (95 percent tin and 5 percent antimony), with 0.2 percent maximum load content. For Pipe Sizes over 4”: Joints shall be silver soldered.

Cold Water, underground to 5' beyond building

4” and larger: Ductile Iron: AWWA C151 or with AWWA C104 cement mortar lining.

4” and Larger: Ductile Iron: AWWA C 110 or AWWA C153, with AWWA C104 cement mortar lining.

Push on or mechanical joints: AWWA C111.


System

Pipe Material

Fitting Material

Joint Material

3” and smaller: ASTM B88, Type K, water tube, annealed temper.

Copper Tube: ASME B16.22, cast copper alloy, 150 lb.

For Pipe Sizes of 4” or less: ASTM B32, alloy Sb5 (95 percent tin and 5 percent antimony), with 0.2 percent maximum load content. For Pipe Sizes over 4”: Joints shall be silver soldered.

Sanitary, Storm Water, and Sanitary Vents, Above Ground within building

Cast Iron; Service weight, no hub, CISPI-301. All pipes shall bare the label of CISPI.

Cast Iron; Service weight, no hub, CISPI-301. All pipes shall bare the label of CISPI.

Couplings; Heavy Duty Type 304 Stainless Steel, ASTM C-1540 neoprene gasket, 3" wide for less than 5" pipe, 4" wide for 5-10”, 5 ½” wide for 12” pipe and larger

Sanitary, Storm Water, and Vents, Below Ground to 5 feet beyond building

Poly Vinyl Chloride (PVC); DWV pipe, ASTM D2665, Schedule 40, plain ends.

Socket: ASTM D 2464, Schedule 40.

Solvent Cements, per ASTM D2564.

Air Conditioning Condensate and Equipment Drains

Copper Drainage Tube; DWV, ASTM B306.

Wrought copper and bronze drainage fittings, ASNI B16.29.

Soldered; ASTM B32, Alloy Sb5 (95 percent tin and 5% antimony), with 0.2 percent maximum lead content.

Foundation Drains

Perforated Plastic: ASTMD-2729, hole spacing per AASHTOM-252.

Not applicable.

Not applicable.

2.2 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Pipe Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for the chemical and thermal conditions of the piping system contents:

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8” (3mm) maximum thickness,

except where thickness or specific material is indicated. a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125 cast-iron and cast-bronze

flanges. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250 cast-iron and steel

flanges. 2. ASME B16.20, for grooved, ring-joint, steel flanges. 3. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick, except where other

thickness is indicated; and full-face or ring type, except where type is indicated.

B. Flange Bolts and Nuts:

1. ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, except where other material is indicated.


C. Plastic Pipe Flange Gasket, Bolts, and Nuts: Type and material recommended by piping system manufacturer, except where other type or material is indicated.

D. Unions: ANSI B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron; female pattern; brass to iron seat;

ground joint. Threads shall conform to ANSI/ASME B1.20.1. Unions in copper piping shall be sweat fittings with bronze seats designed for 200 psig working pressure.

E. Dielectric Unions: Provide dielectric unions with appropriate end connections for the pipe

materials in which installed (screwed, soldered, or flanged), which effectively isolate dissimilar metals, prevent galvanic action, and stop corrosion.

F. Strainers – “Y” Type:

1. Strainers shall be of the basket or "Y" as manufactured by Spirax Sarco, Mueller

or approved equal. Bodies shall have arrows clearly cast on the sides to show flow direction. Strainers shall be equipped with easily removable covers and standard stainless steel screens. Total area of perforations shall be not less than four times the cross section of the entering pipe.

2. Provide valved blow off connections for all strainers full size of blow off tapping, with capped ends.

G. Expansion Tanks:

1. Provide diaphragm type expansion tank as manufactured by Amtrol, Taco Model

No. CA, CAX, or CX, or Bell and Gossett.

2. Size and number as indicated on Contract drawing; construct of welded carbon steel for 125 psig working pressure, 375°F maximum operating temperature. Separate air charge from system water to maintain design expansion capacity, by means of a flexible diaphragm securely sealed into tank. Provide taps for air charging fitting, and drain plug. Support vertical tanks with steel legs or base; support horizontal tanks with steel saddles. Tank, with taps and supports, shall be constructed, tested, and labeled in accordance with ASME Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, Division 1. Tanks shall be provided with integral base ring for vertical mounting.

H. Recessed Non-freeze Wall Hydrants:

1. Provide as manufactured by Jay R. Smith, Zurn or Josam. 2. ASME A112.21.3M, or ASSE 1019, cast-bronze, with chrome-plated face hinged

locking cover tee handle removable key, automatic draining, vacuum breaker, ¾” inlet, and hose outlet. Bronze casing shall be length to suit wall thickness.

I. Vacuum Breakers:

1. Pipe Applied, Atmospheric Vacuum Breaker shall conform to ASSE 1001, with

floating disc and atmospheric vent. 2. Hose connection vacuum breakers shall conform to ASSE Standard 1011, with

finish to match hose connection. 3. Laboratory Faucet Vacuum Breakers: ASSE 1035, chrome plated; consisting of

primary and secondary checks, intermediate vacuum breaker, threaded ends, 1/4” or 3/8” size as required, for continuous pressure application.

J. Reduced Pressure Backflow Preventers:


1. Provide as manufactured by Zurn/Wilkens #375A, or approved equal. 2. Reduced-pressure-principle assembly consisting of shutoff valves on inlet and

outlet and strainer on inlet. Assemblies shall include test cocks and pressure-differential relief valve located between 2 positive seating check valves and comply with requirements of ASSE Standard 1013. Shut-off valves shall be provided in accordance with valves as specified in this section.

3. Shut-off and check valves shall be the same model as provided for system in which backflow preventer is being installed.

K. Double Check Valve Backflow Preventers:

1. Provide as manufactured by Watts, Spence, or Wilkens. 2. Double check backflow assemblies, conforming to ASSE 1015, consisting of

shut-off valves on inlet and outlet and strainer on inlet. Include test cocks with 2 positive seating check valves for continuous pressure application.

L. Water Hammer Arresters:

1. Provide as manufactured by Amtrol, Ancon, or JR Smith. 2. ASSE 1010, or PDI WH-201, “Water Hammer Arresters,” January, 1992, bellows

or piston type with pressurized cushioning chamber. Sizes are based on water-supply fixture units, sizes “A” through “F” and PDI WH-201, sizes “A” through “F.”

M. Welding Materials: Comply, with Section II, Part C. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel

Code for welding materials appropriate for the wall thickness and chemical analysis of the pipe being welded.

N. Drainage System Specialties

1. Horizontal Backwater Valves: ASME A112.14.1, cast iron body, with removable

bronze swing check valve, threaded or bolted cover, as manufactured by Josam, JR Smith, or Zurn. a. Extension: Full size, service class, cast iron soil pipe extension to field

installed cleanout at floor. 2. Vent Caps: Cast-iron body with threaded or hub inlet and vandal-proof design.

Include vented hood and set-screws to secure to vent pipe. 3. Cleanouts: ASME A112.36.2M, cast-iron body with straight threads and gasket

seal or taper threads for plug flashing flange and clamping ring, and a brass closure plug. Cleanouts for installation in floors not having membrane waterproofing may be furnished without clamping ring. Cleanouts in Concrete Floors Zurn Model No. Z-1400 style to suit floor finish

with round scoriated top. Cleanouts in Finished Floors Zurn Model No. ZN-1400 style to suit floor finish

with recessed top for tile or carpet. Cleanouts in Piping Zurn Model No. ZN-1450-7 with bronze plug. Cleanouts in Walls Zurn Model No. Z-1440-1 style to suit all finish,

with vandalproof screws.

4. Floor Drains: a. Floor Drains (FD) (Toilet Rooms): Zurn floor drain Z-415, dura coated

cast iron body with no hub type 3 inch outlet, combination invertible


membrane clamps, adjustable type 'B' 6 inch diameter nickel bronze strainer, trap primer connection and 3 inch no hub type deep seal trap.

b. Floor Drains (FD-S) (Prison Grade): Zurn floor drain Z355 Dura coated cast iron body with side outlet, integral trap, anchor flange and adjustable nickel bronze slotted strainer secured with spanner type vandal-proof screw.

5. Deep Seal Traps: Cast iron or bronze, with inlet and outlet matching connected piping, cleanout where indicated, and trap seal primer valve connection, as manufactured by Josam, Zurn, or Ancon. a. 2-Inch Size: 4-inch-minimum water seal. b. 2 1/2 Inches and Larger: 5-inch-minimum water seal.

6. Inlet Fittings: Cast iron, with threaded inlet and threaded or spigot outlet, and trap seal primer valve connection.

7. Air Gap Fittings: ASME A112.1.2, cast iron or cast bronze, with fixed air gap, inlet for drain pipe or tube, and threaded or spigot outlet.

8. Roof Drains: a. Froet Brain combination roof and overflow drain Model 100C4.

Comparable products as manufactured by Josam, Zurn and Ancon. 9. Parapet Scupper: Zurn, Model Z-198, or comparable product as manufactured

by Josam and Ancon. 10. Downspout nozzle: Zurn, Model Z-199, or comparable product as manufactured

by Josam and Ancon.

O. Escutcheons: Manufactured wall, ceiling, and floor plates; deep-pattern type where required to conceal protruding fittings and sleeves. 1. Inside Diameter: Closely fit around pipe, tube, and insulation. 2. Outside Diameter: Completely cover opening. 3. Cast Brass: One-piece, with set-screw. 4. Cast Brass: Split casting, with concealed hinge and set-screw.

a. Finish: Rough brass. b. Finish: Polished chrome plate.

5. Stamped Steel: One-piece, with set-screw and chrome-plated finish. 6. Stamped Steel: Split plate, with concealed hinge, set-screw, and chrome-plated

finish. 7. Cast-Iron Floor Plate: One-piece casting.

P. Dielectric Fittings: Assembly or fitting having insulating material isolating joined dissimilar

metals to prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion.

1. Description: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous; threaded, solder, plain, and weld neck end types and matching piping system materials.

2. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. 3. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly for 250-psig (1725kPa)

minimum working pressure at a 180°F (82°C) temperat ure. 4. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly for 150- or

300-psig (1035kPa or 2070kPa) minimum pressure to suit system pressures. 5. Dielectric-Flange Insulation Kits: Field-assembled, companion-flange assembly,

full-face or ring type. Components include neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers. a. Provide separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts for 150- or

300-psig (1035kPa or 2070kPa) minimum working pressure to suit system pressures.

6. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling, having inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining, with threaded ends and 300-psig (2070kPa) minimum working pressure at 225°F (107° C) temperature.


7. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple, having inert and noncorrosive thermoplastic lining, with combination of plain, threaded, or grooved end types and 300-psig (2070kPa) working pressure at 225°F (1 07° C) temperature.

Q. Gas System Specialties:

1. Flexible Gas Hoses: Dormont 1600 Series Safe-T-Link by T&S Brass and Bronze

Works, Inc., or equivalent.

R. Pipe Guides:

1. Systems greater than 70°F operating temperature: Provide Erico (formerly known as Michigan) Model No. 650, or equivalent.

2. Systems less than 70°F operating temperature: Pr ovide Erico (formerly known as Michigan) Model No. 651, or equivalent.

S. Pipe Anchors:

1. Provide Erico (formerly known as Michigan) Model 710, or equivalent.

T. Thermometers, General

1. Scale Range: Temperature ranges indicated in degrees Fahrenheit shall be provided for services listed as follows: a. Domestic Hot Water: 30 to 200°F, with 2-degree scale divisions. b. Domestic Cold Water: 0 to 100°F, with 2-degree scale divisions.

2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span or plus or minus one scale division to maximum of 1.5 percent of range span.

3. Liquid-in-glass Thermometers a. Provide as manufactured by H.O. Trerice, Weiss Instruments, or Weksler

Instrument Corp. b. Description: ASTM E1, liquid-in-glass thermometer. c. Case: Die-cast and aluminum-finished in baked-epoxy enamel, glass

front, spring secured, 9 inches (230 mm) long. d. Adjustable Joint: Finished to match case, 180° (3.1rad) adjustment in

vertical plane, 360° (6.3rad) adjustment in horizon tal plane, with locking device.

e. Tube: Red-reading, organic liquid-filled instead of mercury-filled, with magnifying lens.

f. Scale: Satin-faced nonreflective aluminum with permanently etched markings.

g. Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass for a separable socket of length to suit installation.

4. Direct-mounting Filled-system Dial Thermometers a. Provide as manufactured by H.O. Trerice Co., Weiss Instruments, Inc., or

Weksler Instrument Corp. b. Description: Vapor-actuated universal-angle dial thermometer. c. Case: Drawn steel or cast aluminum, with 4-1/2-inch (115mm) -diameter

glass lens. d. Adjustable Joint: Finish to match case, 180° (3 .1rad) adjustment in

vertical plane, 360° (6.3rad) adjustment in horizon tal plane, with locking device.

e. Thermal Bulb: Copper with phosphor-bronze Bourdon pressure tube. f. Movement: Brass, precision geared. g. Scale: Progressive satin-faced nonreflective aluminum with permanently

etched markings.


h. Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass for a separable socket of length to suit installation.

5. Remote-reading, Filled-system Dial Thermometers a. Provide as manufactured by H.O. Trerice Co., Weiss Instruments, Inc., or

Weksler Instrument Corp. b. Description: Vapor-actuated remote-reading dial thermometer. c. Case: Drawn steel or cast aluminum, with 4 1/2 -inch (115mm) -diameter

glass lens. d. Movement: Brass, precision geared. e. Scale: Progressive satin-faced nonreflective aluminum with permanently

etched markings. f. Tubing: Bronze double-braided armor-over-copper capillary of length to

suit installation. g. Bulb: Copper with separable socket for liquids; averaging element for air.

6. Thermometer Wells a. Description: Brass or stainless-steel thermometer well, with heat

conducting compound. b. Pressure Rating: Not less than piping system design pressure. c. Stem Length: To extend 2 inches (50 mm) into fluid or center of pipe,

whichever is shorter. d. Extension for Insulated Piping: 2 inches (50 mm) nominal, but not less

than thickness of insulation. e. Threaded Cap Nut: With chain permanently fastened to well and cap.

U. Pressure Gages, General

1. Provide as manufactured by H.O. Trerice Co., Weiss Instruments, Inc., or

Weksler Instrument Corp. a. Description: ASME B40.1, Grade A phosphor-bronze Bourdon-tube

pressure gage, with bottom connection. b. Case: Drawn steel, brass, or aluminum with 4 1/2 -inch (115mm)

-diameter glass lens. c. Connector: Brass, 1/4" inch (8mm) NPS. d. Scale: White-coated aluminum, with permanently etched markings. e. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span. f. Range: Conform to the following:

1) Vacuum: 30 inches Hg of vacuum to 15 psig of pressure. 2) Fluids Under Pressure: From zero to two times operating

pressure. g. Snubbers: ¼” inch (8mm) brass bushing with corrosion-resistant porous-

metal disc of material suitable for system fluid and working pressure. h. Needle Valve: Exceed pressure and temperature rating of installation.

V. Test Plugs:

1. Provide as manufactured by Flow Design, Inc., Peterson Equipment Co., or H.O.

Trerice. 2. Description: Nickel-plated brass-body test plug in 1/2" inch fitting. 3. Body: Length as required to extend beyond insulation. 4. Pressure Rating: 500 psig minimum. 5. Core Inserts: 2 self-sealing valve types, suitable for inserting a 1/8” inch (3mm)

outside-diameter probe from a dial thermometer or pressure gage. 6. Core Material: According to the following for fluid and temperature range:

a. Air, Water, Oil, and Gas: 20°F to 200°F, neopre ne rubber. b. Air and Water: Minus 30°F to 275°F (minus 35 to 136° C),


ethylene-propylene-diene-terpolymer (EPDM) rubber. 7. Test-Plug Cap: Gasketed and threaded cap, with retention chain. 8. Test Kit: Provide test kit consisting of 1 pressure gage and gage adapter with

probe, 2 bimetal dial thermometers and a carrying case. 9. Pressure Gage and Thermometer Ranges: Approximately 2 times systems

operating conditions.

W. Thermostatic mixing valve 1. Provide automatic mixing valve assembly with mixing capability down to 1 gpm,

discharge temperature as noted on the drawings shall vary no more than 1°F over a pressure range to 100 psi. Pressure loss through the valve shall not exceed 10 psig. Body shall be chrome plated DZR brass/polymer construction with self-finish brass and bronze components with service unions, provided for inlet checkstops and strainers. a. Basis of Design shall be Armstrong Rada 50R.

2. Provide inlet and outlet stop valves, temperature gauges, and pressure gauges

for each mixing valve.

2.3 SLEEVE PENETRATION SYSTEMS

A. General: Provide protective sheathing or wrapping between metal pipes and sleeves to prevent pipes from corroding.

B. Sleeves shall be provided around all pipes through walls, floors, ceilings, partitions,

structure members or other building parts. Sleeves through walls and floors shall be standard weight galvanized iron pipe two sizes larger than the pipe or insulation so that pipe or insulation shall pass through freely with space for movement for all piping which passes through masonry or concrete walls or floors. Provide 20 gauge galvanized steel sheet or galvanized pipe sleeves for all piping passing through frame walls.

C. Sleeves through floors shall be flush with the floor except for sleeves passing through

Mechanical Rooms which shall extend ¾” above the floor. Space between the pipe and sleeve shall be caulked. Escutcheon plates shall be constructed to conceal the ends of sleeves.

D. Sleeves through walls and floors shall be sealed.

E. Penetrations through fire rated walls and floors.

1. All plumbing pipe and fixture penetrations through fire rated floors and walls shall

be provided and firestopped using UL classified through penetration firestop devices as manufactured by ProSet Systems, Inc. The fire rating of the firestop device shall be equivalent or greater than the fire rating of the floor or wall penetrated. All firestop devices shall be provided in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. a. Penetrations by hot and cold domestic water lines shall be provided using

ProSet System A firestop devices. b. Penetrations by cast iron drain, waste and vent piping, bathtub drains,

water closet openings, shower drains and floor drains shall be provided using ProSet System B firestop devices.

2. All penetrations by fire protection water lines through fire rated floors and walls


shall be provided and firestopped using UL classified through penetration firestop devices, System A, as manufactured by ProSet Systems Inc. a. The fire rating of the firestop device shall be equivalent to or greater than

the fire rating of the floor or wall penetrated. b. All firestop devices shall be provided in accordance with manufacturer's

instructions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Verify excavations and trenches are ready to receive piping.

B. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed devices. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

C. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for

proper size, length, and material. Check gasket material for proper size, material composition suitable for service, and freedom from defects and damage.

D. Examine substrates and conditions under which pipe expansion joints, pipe alignment

guides, and pipe anchors are to be installed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

E. Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation any piping system until it has been inspected

by the authority having jurisdiction and tested as specified herein. 3.2 PREPARATION

A. Preparation of Foundation For Buried Piping

1. Grade trench bottom to provide smooth, firm, stable, and rock-free foundation

throughout length of piping. 2. Remove unstable, soft, and unsuitable materials at surface on which piping is to

be laid and backfill with clean sand or pea gravel to indicated level. 3. Shape bottom of trench to fit bottom of piping. Fill unevenness with tamped-sand

backfill. Dig bell holes at each pipe joint to relieve bells of loads and to ensure continuous bearing.

B. Preparation For Testing: Prepare water piping and condensate piping in accordance with

ASME B31.9, and as follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of system tested.

2. Leave joints including welds uninsulated and exposed for examination during the test.

3. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints, which cannot sustain the reactions due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are not practical, isolate expansion joints from testing.

4. Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers. 5. Isolate equipment that is not be subjected to the test pressure from the piping. If

a valve is used to isolate the equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing


against the test pressure without damage to the valve. Flanged joints at which blinds are inserted to isolate equipment need not be tested.

6. Install relief valve set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than the test pressure, to protect against damage by expansion of liquid or other source of overpressure during the test.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF PIPING, GENERAL

A. Piping

1. Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate the general location and arrangement of piping systems. Locations and arrangements of piping take into consideration pipe sizing and friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. So far as practical, install piping as indicated.

2. Install concentric reducers where pipe is reduced in size in the direction of flow, with bottoms of both pipes and reducer flush.

3. Connect branch piping to mains from top of main, unless specific otherwise for specific systems.

4. Install supports in accordance with Specification Section Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment.

5. Make changes in directions and branch connections using fitting, pull tees shall not be permitted.

6. Install unions in pipes 2 inches and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connections each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required on flanged devices.

7. Install dielectric unions where piping of dissimilar metals is joined. 8. Install flanges on valves, apparatus, and equipment having 2 1/2" inch and larger

connections. 9. Install flexible connectors at inlet and discharge connections to pumps and other

vibration producing equipment. 10. Install strainers on the supply side of each control valve, pressure regulating

valve, and elsewhere as indicated. Install ¾” inch NPS nipple and ball valve in blow down connection of strainers. Use same size nipple and valve as blow-off connection of strainer.

11. Anchor piping to ensure proper direction of expansion and contraction. Anchors shall attach to the building structure to prevent pipe movement. Anchors shall be installed in such a manner to prevent damage to the building structure. Anchors shall be securely welded to the piping being anchored. Install expansion loops and joints as indicated on the Drawings.

12. Install pipe sleeves at all wall and floor penetrations. Provide protective sheathing or wrapping between metal pipes and sleeves to prevent pipes from corroding.

13. Seal pipe penetrations of fire separations specified in Specification Section "Joint Sealers."

14. Hanger, supports, and anchors are specified in Specification Section "Hangers, Supports, and Vibration Controls."

15. Install drains at low points in mains, risers, and branch lines consisting of a tee fitting, ¾” ball valve, and short ¾” threaded nipple and cap.

16. Exterior Wall Penetrations: Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Pipe sleeves smaller than 6 inch shall be steel; pipe sleeves 6 inches and larger shall be sheet metal.

17. Install escutcheons at each wall, floor, and ceiling penetration in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipe fittings.

18. In concealed locations where piping, other than cast iron or galvanized steel, is


installed through holes or notches in studs, joists, rafters or similar members less than 1 ½” from the nearest edge of the member, the pipe shall be protected by steel shield plates. The plates shall be made of gage 16 and shall cover the area of the pipe where the member is notched or bored, and shall extend a minimum of 2” above sole plates and below tip plates.

B. Joint Construction

1. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads in accordance with

ANSI/ASME B1.20.1. a. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. b. Ream threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. c. Apply pipe joint lubricant or sealant, suitable for the service for which the

pipe is intended, on the male threads at each joint. d. Tighten joint to leave not more than 3 threads exposed. e. Note the internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity

of internal seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint.

f. Align threads at point of assembly. g. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads. h. Assemble joint to appropriate thread depth. When using a wrench on

valves place the wrench on the valve end into which the pipe is being threaded.

i. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe with threads which are corroded or damaged.

j. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe with threads which are corroded or damaged. If a weld opens during cutting or threading operations, that portion of pipe shall not be used.

2. Welded Joints: Weld pipe joints in accordance with ASME B31.9 and ASME B31.1, where required by COMAR.

3. Brazed Joints: For copper tube and fittings, braze joints in accordance with ASME B31, “Standard Code for Pressure Piping” and AWS “Brazing Manual.” a. Remove stems, seats, and packing of valves and accessible internal

parts of valves before brazing. b. Braze joints in accordance with ASME B31.1. c. Fill the tubing and fittings during brazing with nitrogen under a continuous

purge to prevent formation of scale. d. Thoroughly clean tube surface and inside surface of the cup of the

fittings, using very fine emery cloth, and prior to making brazed joints. Wipe tube and fittings clean and apply flux. Flux shall not be used as the sole means for cleaning tube and fitting surfaces.

e. Heat joints to proper and uniform temperature. f. WARNING: Some filler metals contain compounds which produce highly

toxic fumes when heated. Provide adequate ventilation and avoid breathing fumes.

4. Mechanical Joints: Follow grooved-end mechanical coupling manufacturer's written instructions.

5. Flanged Joints: Align flanges surfaces parallel. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly to appropriate torque specified by the bolt manufacturer.

6. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints in accordance with fitting manufacturers written instructions.

7. CPVC Pipe Joint Construction: Conform to ASTM D2846. 8. PB Heat - Fusion and Compression Joints: Conform to ASTM D3309.


3.4 INSTALLATION OF THREADED CONNECTIONS

A. Align threads at point of assembly.

B. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads, except where dry seal threading is specified.

C. Assemble joint, wrench tight.

3.5 INSTALLATION OF FLANGED CONNECTIONS

A. Align flange surfaces parallel.

B. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly with a torque wrench.

C. For dead-end service, butterfly valves require flanges both upstream and downstream for

proper shutoff and retention. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF METERS, GAGES, THERMOMETERS, ETC.

A. Meters/Gages

1. General: Where indicated, install meters and gages of types, sizes, capacities, and with features indicated.

2. Install meters, gages, and accessories according to manufacturers’ written instructions for applications where used.

3. Install thermometers and adjust vertical and tilted positions. 4. Remote-Reading Dial Thermometers: Install in control panels with tubing

connecting panel and thermometer bulb supported to prevent kinks. Use minimum tubing length.

5. Thermometer Wells: Install in vertical position in piping tees where thermometers are indicated. a. Install wells with stem extending minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) into fluid. b. Install wells with stem extending to center of pipe. c. Fill wells with oil or graphite and secure caps.

B. Pressure Gages

1. Install pressure gages in piping tee with pressure gage face located on pipe at

most readable position. 2. Install in the following locations and elsewhere as indicated:

a. At suction and discharge of each pump. b. At building water service entrance. c. On expansion tanks.

3. Needle Valves: Provide ¼: needle valve in piping tee, with snubber.

C. Installation - Test Plug

1. Install test plugs in piping tees where indicated, located on pipe at most readable position. Secure cap.

D. Installation - Flow-measuring System, Flow Element And Meter


1. General: Install flow meters for piping systems located in accessible locations at

most readable position. 2. Locations: Install flow measuring elements and meters at discharge of each

pump and elsewhere as indicated. 3. Differential-Pressure-Type Flow Elements: Install minimum straight lengths of

pipe upstream and downstream from element as prescribed by the manufacturer's installation instructions.

4. Install connection fittings for attachment to portable flow meters in readily accessible locations.

5. Permanently Mounted Meters for Flow Elements: Install meters on walls or brackets in accessible locations.

6. Install connections, tubing, and accessories between flow elements and meters as prescribed by manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Connections - Meters

1. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow servicing

and maintenance. 2. Connect flow-measuring-system elements to meters. 3. Connect flow-meter transmitters to meters. 4. Make electrical connections to power supply and electrically operated meters and

devices.

F. Adjusting and Cleaning - Meters

1. Calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions, after installation.

2. Adjusting: Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility. 3. Cleaning: Clean windows of meters and gages and factory-finished surfaces.

Replace cracked and broken windows and repair scratched and marred surfaces with manufacturer's touchup paint.

G. Portable Meters

1. Turn-over portable meters to the Owner upon completion of the project.

3.7 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIFIC TO NATURAL GAS

A. Preparation

1. Precautions: Before turning off the gas to the premises, or section of piping, turn off all equipment valves. Perform a leakage test as specified in "LEAK TESTS PIPING AND DUCT SYSTEMS" to determine that all equipment is turned off in the piping section to be affected.

2. Conform to the requirements in NFPA 54, for the prevention of accidental ignition.

B. Piping

1. General: Conform to the requirements of NFPA 54. 2. Concealed Locations: Except as specified below, install concealed gas piping in

an air-tight conduit constructed of Schedule 40, seamless black steel with welded joints. Vent conduit to the outside and terminate with a screened vent cap. a. Above Ceiling Locations: Gas piping may be installed in accessible

above-ceiling spaces (subject to the approval of the authority having


jurisdiction), whether or not such spaces are used as a plenum. 1) Valves shall not be located in such spaces. 2) Piping installed in plenums shall be welded.

b. In Floors: Piping installed in floors shall be as specified for underground natural gas piping.

c. Piping in Partitions: Concealed piping shall not be located in solid partitions. Tubing shall not be run inside hollow walls or partitions unless protected against physical damage. This does not apply to tubing passing through walls or partitions.

d. Prohibited Locations: Do not install gas piping in or through a circulating air duct, clothes chute, chimney or gas vent, ventilating duct, dumb waiter, elevator shaft, in floor construction, and below floor slabs. This does not apply to accessible above-ceiling space specified above.

3. Drips Legs: Install a drip leg at points where condensate may collect, at the outlet of the gas meter, and in a location readily accessible to permit cleaning and emptying. Do not install drips where condensate is likely to freeze. a. Construct drips and sediment traps using a tee fitting with the bottom

outlet plugged or capped. Use a minimum of 3 pipe diameters in length for the drip leg. Use same size pipe for drip leg as the connected pipe.

4. Install gas piping at a uniform grade of 1/4" inch in 15 feet, upward in direction of risers.

5. Connect branch outlet pipes from the top or sides of horizontal lines, not from the bottom.

6. Pipe Joint Construction a. Threaded Joints: Refer to NFPA for guide for number and length of

threads for field threading steel pipe. 7. Terminal Equipment Connections

a. Install shut-off valve upstream and within 6 feet of gas appliance. Install a union or flanged connection downstream from the gas cock to permit removal of controls.

b. Drip Legs: Install a tee fitting with the bottom outlet plugged or capped as close to the inlet of the gas appliance as practical. Drip leg shall be a minimum of 3 pipe diameters in length.

8. Electrical Bonding And Grounding a. Install above ground portions of gas piping systems, upstream from

equipment shutoff valves electrically continuous and bonded to a grounding electrode in accordance with NFPA 70.

b. Do not use gas piping as a grounding electrode. c. Conform to NFPA 70 for electrical connections between wiring and

electrically operated control devices. 9. Flexible pipe connections shall not be permitted. All connections shall be hard

piped. 3.8 INSTALLATION OF PIPING SPECIFIC TO DRAINAGE AND VENT SYSTEMS

A. Service Entrance Piping

1. Extend building storm drain piping and connect to building storm sewer piping of size and in location indicated for service entrance to building. Install cleanout and extension to grade at connection of building storm drain and building storm sewer.

2. Extend building sanitary drain piping and connect to sanitary sewer piping of size and in location indicated for service entrance to building. Install cleanout and extension to grade at connection of building sanitary drain and building sanitary sewer.


3. Install sleeve and mechanical sleeve seal at service penetrations through foundation wall for watertight installation.

B. General

1. Install cast-iron soil pipe and cast-iron soil pipe fittings according to CISPI 1990

revised and edited edition of “Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook, Volume I,” Chapter IV, “Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.”

2. Make changes in direction for drainage and vent piping using appropriate Y branches, Y branches with 1/8 bends, and long-sweep 1/4, 1/5, 1/6, 1/8, and 1/16 bends. Sanitary tees and short-sweep quarter vends may be used on vertical stacks of drainage lines where change in direction of flow is from horizontal to vertical. Use long-turn double-Y-branch and 1/8-bend fittings where 2 fixtures are installed back to back or side by side and have a common drain. Straight tees, elbows, and crosses may be used on vent lines. Make no change in direction of flow greater than 90°. Where different sizes of dr ainage pipes and fittings are connected, use proper size standard increasers and reducers. Reduction of the size of drainage piping in the direction of flow is prohibited.

3. Lay buried building drains beginning at low point of each system, true to grades and alignment indicated, with unbroken continuity of invert. Place hub or bell ends of piping facing upstream. Install required gaskets according to manufacturer’s recommendations for use of lubricants, cements, and other special installation requirements. Maintain swab or drag in piping and pull past each joint as completed.

4. Install drainage and vent piping at the following minimum slopes, except where another slope is indicated: a. Sanitary Building Drain: 1/4 inch per foot (2 percent) for piping 3 inches

and smaller; 1/8 inch per foot (1 percent) for piping 4 inches and larger. b. Horizontal Sanitary Drainage Piping: 1/4 inch per foot (2 percent). c. Storm Building Drain: 1/8 inch per foot (1 percent). d. Horizontal Storm Drainage Piping: 1/4 inch per foot (2 percent). e. Vent Piping: 1/8 inch per foot (1 percent).

5. Install engineered sanitary drainage and vent systems in locations indicated and as follows: a. Combination Waste and Vent Systems: Comply with standards of

authority having jurisdiction. b. Copper, Sovent, Single-Stack Plumbing Systems: Comply with CDA

Solvent Single-Stack Plumbing System. c. Cast-Iron, Solvent, Single-Stack Plumbing Systems: Comply with solvent

fitting manufacturer’s written installation instructions. d. Reduced-Size Venting Systems: Comply with design.

6. Install underground PVC drainage piping according to ASTM D2321. a. Rigid plastic and hubless drainage piping, including offsets and jumps,

shall rest on a continuous bed of sand, gravel or crushed stone, a minimum of four (4) inches deep below the pipe; maximum aggregate size shall be three-quarter (3/4) inches (MD #6 and smaller). Bedding material shall be placed on both sides of the pipe equal in depth to the pipe diameter. Piping shall be laid in a trench, except where soil conditions or grade do not permit such practices.

b. Drainage piping above grade and not fully confined within a trench shall rest on bedding material at least thirty (30) inches wide. Horizontal and vertical alignment of piping shall be maintained by three-eighths (3/8) inch minimum diameter steel “J” hooks, “U” hooks or equivalent hold-down devices driven into the ground every eight (8) feet, at changes of direction 45° or more, and at ends of runs. The len gth of hold-down


devices shall be sufficient, depending on soil type, to prevent easy removal, but not less than twenty-four (24) inches long.

7. Sleeves are not required for cast-iron soil pipes passing through concrete slab, without membrane waterproofing, on grade.

8. Install ABS drainage pipe and fittings according to ASTM D2661. 9. Install PVC drainage pipe and fittings according to ASTM D2665. 10. Joint Construction

a. Grooved Pipe and Grooved-Pipe Fittings Joints: Assemble joints with coupling, gasket, lubricant, and bolts according to coupling and fitting manufacturer’s written instructions.

b. Cast-Iron Soil Pipe and Cast-Iron Soil Pipe Fitting Joints: Make joints according to recommendations in CISPI 1990 revised and edited edition of “Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings Handbook, Volume I,” Chapter IV, “Installation of Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.” 1) Compression Joint: Make with neoprene gasket matching class

of pipe and fittings. 2) Hubless Joint: Make with neoprene gasket and sleeve or clamp.

c. ABS DWV Pipe: Join ABS drainage pipe and fittings according to ASTM D2661.

d. PVC DWV Pipe: Join PVC drainage pipe and fittings according to ASTM D2665.

e. ABS to PVC Transition Joints: Make non-pressure transition joint between ABS and PVC drainage components, using fittings, solvent cements, and procedure conforming to ASTM D3138.

f. Handling of Solvent Cements, Primers, and Cleaners: Comply with procedures in ASTM F402, for safe handling during joining of plastic pipe and fittings with solvent cements.

g. PB Heat-Fusion and Compression Joints: Conform to ASTM D3309. 11. Pipe Attachments:

a. Riser Clamps: MSS Type 8 or Type 42 for vertical runs. b. Adjustable Steel Clevis Hangers: MSS Type 1 for individual straight

horizontal runs 100 feet and less. c. Adjustable Roller Hangers: MSS Type 43 for individual straight horizontal

runs longer than 100 feet. d. Spring Cushion Rolls: MSS Type 49, where indicated, for individual

straight horizontal runs longer than 100 feet. e. Pipe Rolls: MSS Type 44 for multiple straight horizontal runs 100 feet or

longer. Support pipe rolls on trapeze. f. Spring Hangers: MSS Type 52 for support of base of vertical runs.

12. Install vent flashing sleeves on stacks passing through roof. Secure over stack flashing according to the manufacturer’s written instructions.

13. Install frost-proof vent caps on each vent pipe passing through roof. Maintain 1-inch clearance between vent pipe and roof substrate.

C. Connections

1. Drainage Runouts to Fixtures: Provide drainage and vent piping runouts, with

approved trap, of sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code, to plumbing fixtures and drains.

2. Locate drainage piping runouts as close as possible to bottom of floor slab supporting fixtures or drains.

3. Supply Runouts to Fixtures: Install hot- and cold-water supply piping runouts to fixtures of sizes indicated, but not smaller than required by plumbing code. a. Drainage Runouts to Fixtures: Provide drainage and vent piping runouts

to plumbing fixtures and drains, with approved trap, of sizes indicated, but


not smaller than required by plumbing code. b. Locate drainage piping runouts as close as possible to bottom of floor

slab supporting fixtures or drains. c. Electrical Connections: Power wiring and disconnect switches are

specified in Division 26. 1) Grounding: Connect unit components to ground according to the

National Electrical Code and Specification Section “Grounding.”

D. Protection

1. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

2. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day or when work stops. 3. Exposed ABS or PVC Piping: Protect plumbing vents exposed to sunlight with 2

coats of a water-based latex paint.

E. Drainage And Vent System Specialties

1. Install backwater valves in building drain piping as indicated. For interior installation, provide cleanout deck plate (cover) flush with floor and centered over backwater valve cover and of adequate size to remove valve cover for service.

2. Install expansion joints on vertical risers, stacks, and conductors as indicated. 3. Cleanouts

a. Install cleanouts in above-ground piping and building drain piping as indicated, and where not indicated, according to the following: 1) Size same as drainage piping up to 4-inch size. Use 4-inch size

for larger drainage piping except where larger size cleanout is indicated.

2) Locate at each change in direction of piping greater than 45°. 3) Locate at minimum intervals of 50 feet for piping 4 inches and

smaller and 100 feet for larger piping. 4) Locate at base of each vertical soil or waste stack.

b. Install cleanout deck plates (covers), of types indicated, with top flush with finished floor, for floor cleanouts for piping below floors.

c. Install cleanout wall access covers, of types indicated, with frame and cover flush with finished wall, for cleanouts located in concealed piping.

d. Install flashing flange and clamping device with each stack and cleanout passing through floors having waterproof membrane.

4. Floor Drain Installation a. Install floor drains according to manufacturer’s written instructions, in

locations indicated. b. Install floor drains at low points of surface areas to be drained, or as

indicated. Set tops of drains flush with finished floor. c. Trap drains connected to sanitary building drain. Provide trap primers for

all traps. d. Install drain flashing collar or flange so that no leakage occurs between

drain and adjoining flooring. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes, where penetrated.

e. Position drains for easy accessibility and maintenance. 5. Roof Drain Installation

a. Install roof drains at low points of roof areas, according to the roof membranes manufacturer’s installation instructions.

b. Install drain flashing collar or flange so no leakage occurs between roof drain and adjoining roofing. Maintain integrity of waterproof membranes, where penetrated.


c. Position roof drains for easy accessibility and maintenance. 3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing shall be performed by Installer of system being tested in presence of the Owner’s representative. Provide seven (7) day advance notice prior to testing of systems.

B. Inspection of Piping Systems:

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation any piping system until it has been

inspected and approved by Owner’s Representative. 2. During progress of installation, notify the authority having jurisdiction seven (7)

days prior to time such inspection must be made. Perform tests specified in presence of Owner’s Representative. a. Roughing-In Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping system after

system roughing-in, before concealing, and prior to setting fixtures. b. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by Owner’s Representative

to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements of Owner’s Representative.

3. Re-inspections: Make required corrections and arrange for reinspection by Owner’s Representative when piping system fails to pass test or inspection.

4. Reports: Prepare and submit inspection reports for approval by Owner’s Representative.

C. Test domestic water, sanitary waste, vent, and storm drainage piping systems in

accordance with all applicable codes and the local authority having jurisdiction.

D. Natural Gas

1. Inspect, test, and purge natural gas systems in accordance with NFPA 54, “National Fuel Gas Code”, 1999, and local utility requirements.

2. Cap and fill systems, with oil-free, dry air or gaseous nitrogen, to pressure of 50 psig above system operating pressure, but not less than 150 psig. Isolate the test source and let stand for 4 hours to equalize temperature. Refill system, if required, to test pressure and hold pressure for 2 hours with no drop in pressure.

3. Purging: a. Removal from Service: When piping is to be opened for servicing,

addition, or modification, the section to be worked on shall be turned off from the gas supply at the nearest convenient point and the line pressure vented to the outdoors or to ventilated areas of sufficient size to prevent accumulation of flammable mixtures. The remaining gas in the piping shall be dispersed with an inert gas.

4. Placing in Operation: When piping full of air is placed in operation, the air in the piping shall be displaced with an inert gas, and the inert gas shall then be displaced with fuel.

5. Discharge of Purged Gases: The open end of piping systems being purged shall not discharge into confined spaces or areas where there are sources of ignition unless precautions are taken to perform this operation in a safe manner by ventilation of the space, control or purging rate, and elimination of all hazardous conditions.

E. Water Systems

1. Perform tests prior to installation of piping insulation.


2. Use ambient temperature water as the testing medium, except where there is a risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid may be used if it is safe for workmen and compatible with the piping system components.

3. Use vents installed at high points in the system to release trapped air while filling the system. Use drains installed at low points for complete removal of the liquid.

4. Examine system to see that equipment and parts that cannot withstand test pressures are properly isolated. Examine test equipment to ensure that it is tight and that low pressure filling lines are disconnected.

5. Subject piping system to a hydrostatic test pressure which at every point in the system is not less than 1.5 times the design pressure. The test pressure shall not exceed the maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in the system under test. Make a check to verify that the stress due to pressure at the bottom of vertical runs does not exceed either 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength, or 1.7 times the ASE value in Appendix A of ASME B31.9, “Code For Pressure Piping, Building Services Piping.”

6. After the hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components as appropriate, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.

7. Test backflow preventors in accordance with the local plumbing code and requirements of the authority having jurisdiction.

F. Drainage And Vent Piping Systems

1. Rough Plumbing Test Procedure: Except for outside leaders and perforated or

open-jointed drain tile, test piping of plumbing drainage and venting systems on completion of roughing-in piping installation. Tightly close all openings in piping system and fill with water to point of overflow, but not less than 10 feet head of water. Water level shall not drop during the period from 15 minutes before inspection starts through completion of inspection. Inspect joints for leaks.

2. Finished Plumbing Test Procedure: After plumbing fixtures have been set and their traps filled with water, test connections and prove gastight and watertight. Plug stack openings on roof and building drain where it leaves the building and introduce air into the system equal to pressure of 1-inch water column. Use a U tube or manometer inserted in the trap of a water closet to measure this pressure. Air pressure shall remain constant without introducing additional air throughout period of inspection. Inspect plumbing fixture connections for gas and water leaks.

3. Repair leaks and defects using new materials and retest system or portion thereof until satisfactory results are obtained.

4. Prepare reports for tests and required corrective action. 3.10 CLEANING (Refer to Specification Section “Plumbing Piping Systems Cleaning and Treatment.”)

END OF SECTION

EASTERN DISTRICT POLICE STATION 15106- 1 PIPES AND TUBES FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT 28103.01 January 15, 2013

SECTION 15106 - PIPES AND TUBES FOR HVAC PIPING AND EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes piping and limited pipe fittings for the following systems:

1. Hydronic piping. 2. Drain piping.


1. Section “Common Work Results for HVAC.” 2. Section “General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping.” 3. Section “Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping.” 4. Section “Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment”: Product

requirements for pipe hangers and supports for placement by this section. 5. Section “Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment”:

Product requirements for vibration isolation for placement by this section. 6. Section “Mechanical Insulation”: Product requirements for piping insulation for

placement by this section. 7. Section “Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for HVAC.” 8. Section “Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment”: labeling and

identification of piping, valve tags, and charts. 9. Section “Refrigerant Piping”: refrigerant piping and associated accessories. 10. Section “Instrumentation and Control for HVAC”: for equipment, piping, and

accessories for building temperature controls. 11. Meter and gages furnished as part of factory furnished equipment are specified

as part of the equipment assembly in other Division 15. Sections. 1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Point of Delivery is the outlet of the service meter assembly, or the outlet of the service regular (service shutoff valve when no meter is provided).

B. Hydronic Water Systems: A system of heating that involves a transfer of heat by a

circulating fluid, such as Heating Water. 1.4 REFERENCES

A. ANSI (American National Standards Institute)

1. ANSI B16.39, “Malleable Iron Threaded Pipe Unions,” January, 1999. 2. ANSI/ASME B1.20.1, “Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch),” 2006. 3. ANSI/ASME B16.3, “Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings,” 2006. 4. ANSI/ASME B16.5, “Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings,” 2003. 5. ANSI/ASME B16.21, “Non-metallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges,” January,

1992.


6. ANSI/ASME B16.22, “Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure Fittings,” 2001.

7. ANSI/ASME B16.29, “Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings (DWV),” February, 2002.

8. ANSI/AWS B2.1, “Standard Specification for Welding Procedure and Performance Qualification,” 2006.

9. ANSI/AWS D10.12, “Guide for Welding Mild Steel Pipe,” January, 2000. 10. ANSI/AWWA C110, “American National Standard for Ductile-Iron and Gray-Iron

Fittings, 3in. Through 48in., for Water and Other Liquids,” 2003. 11. ANSI/AWWA C111, “Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and

Fittings,” 2007. 12. ANSI/AWWA C151, “American National Standard for Ductile-Iron Pipe,

Centrifugally Cast, for Water,” August, 2002. 13. ANSI/AWWA C153, “American National Standard for Ductile-Iron Compact

Fittings, 3in. Through 24in., and 54in. Through 64in, for Water Service,” 2006.

B. ASHRAE (American Society of Heating, Refrigerating & Air Conditioning Engineers)

C. ASME (American Society of Mechanical Engineers)

1. ASME B16.1, “Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings,” 2005. 2. ASME B16.4, “Cast Iron Threaded Fittings,” 2006. 3. ASME B16.5, “Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings,” 2003. 4. ASME B16.20, “Metallic Gaskets for Pipe Flanges- Ring-Joint, Spiral-Wound, and

Jacketed,” 2007. 5. ASME B16.21, “Nonmetallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges,” 2005. 6. ASME B16.24, “Cast Copper Alloy Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings,” 2006. 7. ASME B18.2.1, “Square and Hex Bolts and Screw- Inch Series,” January, 1996. 8. ASME B18.10, “Track Bolts and Nuts,” 2006. 9. ASME B31.1, “Power Piping,” 2007. 10. ASME B31.9, “Building Services Piping,” 2004. 11. ASME B40.1, “Gauges- Pressure Indicating Dial Type- Elastic Element,”

September, 1991. 12. ASTM/ASME B16.22, “Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure

Fittings,” 2001. 13. ANSI/ASME B1.20.1, “Pipe Threads, General Purpose (Inch),” January, 1983. 14. ANSI/ASME B16.3, “Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings,” 1998. 15. ANSI/ASME B16.5, “Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings,” 2003. 16. ANSI/ASME B16.21, “Non-metallic Flat Gaskets for Pipe Flanges,” January,

1992. 17. ANSI/ASME B16.22, “Wrought Copper and Copper Alloy Solder Joint Pressure

Fittings,” 2001. 18. ASME B16.25, “Butt-Welding Ends,” January, 2007. 19. ANSI/ASME B16.29, “Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint

Drainage Fittings (DWV),” October, 2002. 20. ANSI/AWA C606, “Grooved and Soldered Joints,” 2006.

D. ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials)

1. ASTM A36, “Standard Specification for Carbon Structural Steel,” March, 2001. 2. ASTM A47, “Standard Specification for Ferritic Malleable Iron Castings,” 2004. 3. ASTM A53, “Standard Specification for Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-

Coated, Welded and Seamless,” 2007. 4. ASTM A74, “Standard Specification for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings,” 2006. 5. ASTM A126, “Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges,


and Pipe Fittings,” 2004. 6. ASTM A167, “Standard Specification for Stainless and Heat-Resisting Chromium-

Nickel Steel Plate, Sheet and Strip,” 2004. 7. ASTM A182, “Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy-Steel Pipe

Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves and Parts for High-Temperature Service,” 2008.

8. ASTM A183, “Standard Specification for Carbon Steel Track Bolts and Nuts,” 2003.

9. ASTM A193, “Standard Specification for Alloy Steel and Stainless Steel Bolting Materials for High-Temperature Service,” 2008.

10. ASTM A194, “Standard Specification for Carbon and Alloy Steel Nuts for Bolts for High-Pressure or High-Temperature Service, or Both,” 2008.

11. ASTM A216, “Standard Specification for Steel Castings, Carbon, Suitable for Fusion Welding, for High-Temperature Service,” 2007.

12. ASTM A234, “Standard Specification for Piping Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and High-Temperature Service,” 2007.

13. ASTM A276, “Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes,” 2008. 14. ASTM A278, “Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Pressure

Containing Parts,” 2006. 15. ASTM A351, “Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes,”

March, 2006. 16. ASTM A536, “Standard Specification for Ductile Iron Castings,” 2004. 17. ASTM A564, “Standard Specification for Hot-Rolled and Cold-Finished Age-

Hardening Stainless Steel Bars and Shapes,” 2004. 18. ASTM A582, “Standard Specification for Free-Machining Stainless Steel Bars,”

2005. 19. ASTM A780, “Standard Practice for Repair of Damaged and Un-coated Areas of

Hot-Dip Galvanized Coatings,” 2006. 20. ASTM B16, “Standard Specification for Free-Cutting Brass Rod, Bar and Shapes

for Use in Screw Machines,” 2005. 21. ASTM B32, “Standard Specification for Soldered Metal,” 2008. 22. ASTM B62, “Standard Specification for Composition Bronze or Ounce Metal

Castings,” March 2002. 23. ASTM B124, “Standard Specification for Copper and Copper Alloy Forging Rod,

Bar and Shapes,” 2008. 24. ASTM B148, “Standard Specification for Aluminum-Bronze Sand Castings,” 2003. 25. ASTM B584, “Standard Specification for Copper Alloy Sand Castings for General

Applications,” 2008. 26. ASTM C33, “Standard Specification for Concrete Aggregates,” 2007. 27. ASTM C150, “Standard Specification for Portland Cement,” 2007. 28. ASTM C1107, “Standard Specification for Packaged Dry, Hydraulic-Cement

Grout (Non-shrinking),” 2007. 29. ASTM D635, “Standard Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent and Time

of Burning Plastics in a Horizontal Position,” 2006. 30. ASTM E1, “Standard Specification for ASTM Thermometers,” 2007. 31. ASTM F402, “Standard Practice for Safe Handling of Solvent Cements, Primers,

and Cleaners used for Joining Thermoplastic Pipes and Fittings,” 2005. 32. ASTM F844, “Standard Specification for Washers, Steel, Plain (Flat),

Unhardened for General Use,” 2007.

E. AWS (American Welding Society)


Performance Qualification,” 2006.


3. ANSI/AWS D10.12, “Guide for Welding Mild Steel Pipe,” January, 2000.

F. CS (Commercial Standard)

G. IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers)

H. IMC (International Mechanical Code)

I. IPC (International Plumbing Code)

J. MOSHA (Maryland Occupational Safety and Health Administration)

K. NEC (National Electrical Code)

L. NEMA (National Electrical Manufacturers Association)

M. NFPA (National Fire Protection Association)

N. OSHA (Occupational Safety and Health Administration)

O. UL (Underwriters' Laboratories) 1.5 SUBMITTALS



Division 01. Include detailed manufacturer's instructions on adjusting, servicing, disassembling, and repairing. Include data for the following:

1. Pipe Materials 2. Flow Measuring Systems 3. Hydronic Specialties - Specialties 4. Refrigerant Specialties

C. Welder certificates signed by Contractor certifying that welders comply with requirements

specified under the "Quality Assurance" Article.

D. Test reports specified in Part 3 below.

E. Certification of compliance with ASTM, ASME and ANSI manufacturing requirements for pipe, fittings, and specialties.

F. Product data for each type refrigerant piping specialty specified.

G. Shop Drawings showing layout of refrigerant piping, specialties, and fittings including, but

not necessarily limited to, pipe and tube sizes, valve arrangements and locations, slopes of horizontal runs, wall and floor penetrations, and equipment connection details. Show interface and spatial relationship between piping and proximate to equipment.


A. ASME (American Society of Mechanical Engineers) Compliance; comply with:


1. ASME B31.9, “Building Services Piping,” January, 1996. 2. ASME B31.1, “Power Piping,” July 2001, for power piping, meters, and gages. 3. ANSI B31.5: ASME code for pressure Piping - Refrigerant Piping, “Refrigeration

Piping and Heat Transfer Components,” 2001.

B. MSS Compliance: Comply with the various MSS Standard Practice documents referenced.

C. Qualify welding processes and welding operators according to AWS D1.1, "Structural

Welding Code—Steel," 2001.


D. Qualify welding processes and welding operators according to ASME "Boiler and

Pressure Vessel Code," Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications." All boiler internal piping welds and welds to pressure vessels shall be made by welders possessing the National Board “R” stamp.

E. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with the requirements of the following additional codes:

1. International Mechanical Code (IMC), 2009. 2. ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15: Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration.

F. Expansion, Guides, Anchors - Performance Requirements

1. Compatibility: Provide pipe expansion joints, pipe alignment guides, and pipe

anchors suitable for piping system fluids, materials, working pressures, and temperatures.

2. Fabricate and install expansion and anchor system capable of sustaining forces generated by gravity, thermal movement and seismic events.

1.7 QUALIFICATIONS




A. Furnish temporary end caps and closures on piping and fittings. Maintain in place until installation.

B. Protect piping from entry of foreign materials by temporary covers, completing sections of

the Work, and isolating parts of completed system. 1.9 FIELD MEASUREMENTS

A. Verify field measurements prior to fabrication. 1.10 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Notification of Interruption of Service: Provide notification for all utility outages.


B. Work Interruptions: When interruptions in work occur while repairs or alterations are being

made to an existing piping system, leave the system in safe condition.

C. Coordinate the installation of pipe sleeves for foundation wall penetrations.

D. Coordinate the size and location of concrete pads. Cast anchor bolt inserts into pad.

E. Coordinate the installation of roof piping support, and roof penetrations. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PIPE AND TUBE MATERIALS AND APPLICATION SCHEDULE

System

Pipe Material

Fitting Material

Joint Material

Heating Water System

2 ½” and larger: Steel Pipe, ASTM A53, grade B, Schedule 40, black steel.

2 ½” and larger: Steel; ASTM A234, butt welded, long radius ells, and weldolets. Flanges: ANSI B16.5, weld neck, raced face, with gaskets.

Welded: Latest revision of Section IX, ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Filler material per AWS D10.12.

2" and smaller steel pipe, ASTM A53, grade B, Schedule 40, black steel

2" and smaller: Malleable iron, threaded, ANSI B16.3 Class 150. Threads per ANSI B1.20.1 and threadolets.

For Pipe Sizes of 2” or less: Threads American standard for pipe threads, ANSI B2.1.

Air Conditioning Condensate and Equipment Drains

Copper Drainage Tube; DWV, ASTM B306.

Wrought copper and bronze drainage fittings, ASNI B16.29.

Soldered; ASTM B32, Alloy Sb5 (95 percent tin and 5% antimony), with 0.2 percent maximum lead content.

2.2 PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. Pipe Flange Gasket Materials: Suitable for the chemical and thermal conditions of the piping system contents:

1. ASME B16.21, nonmetallic, flat, asbestos-free, 1/8” (3mm) maximum thickness,

except where thickness or specific material is indicated. a. Full-Face Type: For flat-face, Class 125 cast-iron and cast-bronze

flanges. b. Narrow-Face Type: For raised-face, Class 250 cast-iron and steel

flanges. 2. ASME B16.20, for grooved, ring-joint, steel flanges. 3. AWWA C110, rubber, flat face, 1/8 inch (3 mm) thick, except where other

thickness is indicated; and full-face or ring type, except where type is indicated.

B. Pipe Flange Gasket Materials (Steam Systems):


1. ASTM B16, metallic, raised face, spiral wound 304 stainless steel Grafoil Filler, API Standard 601, Class to match flange.

C. Flange Bolts and Nuts:

1. Non-Steam Systems: ASME B18.2.1, carbon steel, except where other material

is indicated. 2. Steam Systems: ASTM A193, B7, Hex Head Bolts; ASTM A194, 2H, Hex Nuts.

D. Unions: ANSI B16.39, Class 150, malleable iron; female pattern; brass to iron seat;

ground joint. Threads shall conform to ANSI/ASME B1.20.1. Unions in copper piping shall be sweat fittings with bronze seats designed for 200 psig working pressure.

E. Dielectric Unions: Provide dielectric unions with appropriate end connections for the pipe

materials in which installed (screwed, soldered, or flanged), which effectively isolate dissimilar metals, prevent galvanic action, and stop corrosion.

F. Strainers – “Y” Type:

1. Strainers shall be of the basket or "Y" as manufactured by Spirax Sarco, Mueller

or approved equal. Bodies shall have arrows clearly cast on the sides to show flow direction. Strainers shall be equipped with easily removable covers and standard stainless steel screens. Total area of perforations shall be not less than four times the cross section of the entering pipe.

2. Provide valved blow off connections for all strainers full size of blow off tapping, with capped ends.

3. Basis of Design: Spirax Sarco models shall be provided:

Copper Tubing

Screw Piping Pressure Except Medium Pressures

Flange Piping Except High Steam and Condensate

Type BT Type AT Type AF-125

G. Flexible Pipe Connections:

1. Flexible pipe connections shall be equal to those manufactured by the Metraflex Corporation and shall be designed for a working pressure of not less than 150 psig with a bursting pressure of not less than 300 psig when handling water at a temperature of 250o

2. The flexible connection shall be made of a corrosion resistant material, such as bronze or stainless steel with a braided wire cover. Flexible connectors shall be long enough to compensate for the following offset misalignments in piping:

F.

MAXIMUM MAXIMUM PIPE SIZE PERMANENT OFFSET INTERMITTENT OFFSET 2" and smaller 3/8" 1/4" 2 1/2" and larger 3/8” 1/8”

H. Manual Air Vent:

1. Provide as manufactured by Armstrong, Bell and Gossett, or Hoffman.


2. Bronze body and nonferrous internal parts; 150 psig working pressure, 225°F operating temperature; manually operated with screwdriver or thumbscrew; and having 1/4" inch discharge connection and 2 inch inlet connection.

I. Automatic Air Vent:

1. Provide as manufactured by Armstrong, Bell and Gossett, or Hoffman. 2. Design to vent automatically with float principle; bronze body and nonferrous

internal parts; 150 psig working pressure, 240°F operating temperature; and having 3 inch discharge connection and 2 inch inlet connection.

J. Pump Suction Diffusers:

1. Provide as manufactured by Armstrong, Bell and Gossett, or Hoffman. 2. Cast-iron body, with threaded connections for 2 inch and smaller, flanged

connections for 2 1/2 inch and larger; 175 psig working pressure, 300°F maximum operating temperature; and complete with the following features: a. Inlet vanes with length 2 1/2 times pump suction diameter or greater. b. Cylinder strainer with 3/16 inch diameter openings with total free area

equal to or greater than 5 times cross-sectional area of pump suction, designed to withstand pressure differential equal to pump shutoff head.

c. Disposable fine start-up mesh strainer to fit over cylinder strainer. d. Permanent magnet, located in flow stream, removable for cleaning. e. Adjustable foot support, designed to carry weight of suction piping. f. Blowdown tapping in bottom; gage tapping in side.

K. Diverting Fittings: cast iron body with threaded ends, or wrought copper with solder ends;

125 psig working pressure, 250°F maximum operating temperature. Indicate flow direction on fitting.

L. Welding Materials: Comply, with Section II, Part C. ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel

Code for welding materials appropriate for the wall thickness and chemical analysis of the pipe being welded.

M. Dielectric Fittings: Assembly or fitting having insulating material isolating joined dissimilar

metals to prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion.

1. Description: Combination of copper alloy and ferrous; threaded, solder, plain, and weld neck end types and matching piping system materials.

2. Insulating Material: Suitable for system fluid, pressure, and temperature. 3. Dielectric Unions: Factory-fabricated, union assembly for 250-psig (1725kPa)

minimum working pressure at a 180°F (82°C) temperature. 4. Dielectric Flanges: Factory-fabricated, companion-flange assembly for 150- or

300-psig (1035kPa or 2070kPa) minimum pressure to suit system pressures. 5. Dielectric-Flange Insulation Kits: Field-assembled, companion-flange assembly,

full-face or ring type. Components include neoprene or phenolic gasket, phenolic or polyethylene bolt sleeves, phenolic washers, and steel backing washers. a. Provide separate companion flanges and steel bolts and nuts for 150- or

300-psig (1035kPa or 2070kPa) minimum working pressure to suit system pressures.

6. Dielectric Couplings: Galvanized-steel coupling, having inert and noncorrosive, thermoplastic lining, with threaded ends and 300-psig (2070kPa) minimum working pressure at 225°F (107°C) temperature.

7. Dielectric Nipples: Electroplated steel nipple, having inert and noncorrosive


thermoplastic lining, with combination of plain, threaded, or grooved end types and 300-psig (2070kPa) working pressure at 225°F (107°C) temperature.

N. Pipe Guides:

1. Systems greater than 70°F operating temperature: Provide Erico (formerly known

as Michigan) Model No. 650, or equivalent. 2. Systems less than 70°F operating temperature: Provide Erico (formerly known as

Michigan) Model No. 651, or equivalent.

O. Pipe Anchors:

1. Provide Erico (formerly known as Michigan) Model 710, or equivalent.

P. Thermometers, General

1. Scale Range: Temperature ranges indicated in degrees Fahrenheit shall be provided for services listed as follows: a. Steam and Condensate: 50 to 400°F, with 5-degree scale divisions. b. Chilled Glycol: 0 to 100°F, with 2-degree scale divisions.

2. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span or plus or minus one scale division to maximum of 1.5 percent of range span.

3. Liquid-in-glass Thermometers a. Provide as manufactured by H.O. Trerice, Weiss Instruments, or Weksler

Instrument Corp. b. Description: ASTM E1, liquid-in-glass thermometer. c. Case: Die-cast and aluminum-finished in baked-epoxy enamel, glass

front, spring secured, 9 inches (230 mm) long. d. Adjustable Joint: Finished to match case, 180° (3.1rad) adjustment in

vertical plane, 360° (6.3rad) adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device.

e. Tube: Red-reading, organic liquid-filled instead of mercury-filled, with magnifying lens.

f. Scale: Satin-faced non-reflective aluminum with permanently etched markings.

g. Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass for a separable socket of length to suit installation.

4. Direct-mounting Filled-system Dial Thermometers a. Provide as manufactured by H.O. Trerice Co., Weiss Instruments, Inc., or

Weksler Instrument Corp. b. Description: Vapor-actuated universal-angle dial thermometer. c. Case: Drawn steel or cast aluminum, with 4-1/2-inch (115mm) -diameter

glass lens. d. Adjustable Joint: Finish to match case, 180° (3.1rad) adjustment in

vertical plane, 360° (6.3rad) adjustment in horizontal plane, with locking device.

e. Thermal Bulb: Copper with phosphor-bronze Bourdon pressure tube. f. Movement: Brass, precision geared. g. Scale: Progressive satin-faced non-reflective aluminum with permanently

etched markings. h. Stem: Copper-plated steel, aluminum, or brass for a separable socket of

length to suit installation. 5. Remote-reading, Filled-system Dial Thermometers

a. Provide as manufactured by H.O. Trerice Co., Weiss Instruments, Inc., or Weksler Instrument Corp.


b. Description: Vapor-actuated remote-reading dial thermometer. c. Case: Drawn steel or cast aluminum, with 4 1/2 -inch (115mm) -diameter

glass lens. d. Movement: Brass, precision geared. e. Scale: Progressive satin-faced non-reflective aluminum with permanently

etched markings. f. Tubing: Bronze double-braided armor-over-copper capillary of length to

suit installation. g. Bulb: Copper with separable socket for liquids; averaging element for air.

6. Thermometer Wells a. Description: Brass or stainless-steel thermometer well, with heat

conducting compound. b. Pressure Rating: Not less than piping system design pressure. c. Stem Length: To extend 2 inches (50 mm) into fluid or center of pipe,

whichever is shorter. d. Extension for Insulated Piping: 2 inches (50 mm) nominal, but not less

than thickness of insulation. e. Threaded Cap Nut: With chain permanently fastened to well and cap.

Q. Turbine Flow Meters 1. One-directional:

a. Onicon Model F-1210 Dual Turbine Insertion b. Analog Output c. Furnish and install an Onicon Model F-1210 (or engineer approved equal)

dual turbine insertion flow sensor complete with all installation hardware necessary to enable insertion and removal of the flow meter without system shutdown.

d. The dual turbine element shall have contra-rotating axial turbine elements, each with its own rotational sensing system, and an averaging circuit to reduce measurement errors due to swirl and flow profile distortion.

e. Paddle type rotors will not be acceptable. Rotational sensing of each turbine shall be accomplished electronically by sensing impedance change and not with magnetic or photo-electric means.

f. Each sensor shall be individually calibrated and tagged accordingly against the manufacturers primary standards which must be accurate to within 0.1% and traceable to the U.S. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST).

g. The sensor shall have a maximum operating pressure of 400 PSI, maximum operating temperature of 200°F and a pressure drop of less than 1 PSI at 17 feet per second flow velocity.

h. Flow sensor shall have 100:1 turndown ratio. Accuracy shall be within + 0.5% of actual reading at the calibrated typical velocity, and within + 2% of reading over a 50:1 turndown (from 0.4 to 20 ft/s).

i. The sensor shall have integral analog outputs of 0-10 VDC and 4-20 mA current output for connection to the Central Control System.

j. The sensor shall also include three integral frequency outputs, (top turbine, bottom turbine, average frequency) for diagnostic purposes and for connection to peripheral equipment (local display, BTU meter, etc.).

k. All outputs shall be linear with flow rate. l. The turbine elements shall be made of polypropylene with sapphire jewel

bearings and tungsten carbide shafts. The flow sensor shall be constructed of 316 stainless steel with an aluminum electronics enclosure and gasketed cover.

R. Impeller Type Flow Meters


1. Provide as manufactured by Badger, Fischer, or Hersey.

a. Description: Impeller flow meter made for insertion in hydronic piping fluid flow that measures flow directly in gallons/minute (L/s).

b. Totalization: Include register to indicate total volume in gallons (cu. m). c. Construction: Bronze or stainless-steel body and plastic impeller, with

integral direct-reading calibrated scale. d. Pressure Rating: 150 psig (1035 kPa) minimum. e. Temperature Rating: 180°F (82° C) minimum. f. Accuracy: Plus or minus 2.5 percent.

S. Pressure Gages, General

1. Provide as manufactured by H.O. Trerice Co., Weiss Instruments, Inc., or

Weksler Instrument Corp. a. Description: ASME B40.1, Grade A phosphor-bronze Bourdon-tube

pressure gage, with bottom connection. b. Case: Drawn steel, brass, or aluminum with 4 1/2 -inch (115mm)

-diameter glass lens. c. Connector: Brass, 1/4" inch (8mm) NPS. d. Scale: White-coated aluminum, with permanently etched markings. e. Accuracy: Plus or minus 1 percent of range span. f. Range: Conform to the following:

1) Vacuum: 30 inches Hg of vacuum to 15 psig of pressure. g. Fluids Under Pressure: From zero to two times operating pressure. h. Pressure Gage Accessories - Hydronic Systems

1) Snubbers: 1/4" inch (8mm) brass bushing with corrosion-resistant porous-metal disc of material suitable for system fluid and working pressure.

2) Needle Valve: Exceed pressure and temperature raring of installation

i. Pressure Gage Accessories - Steam Systems 1) Syphons: 1/4" inch (8mm) straight coil of brass tubing with

threads on each end. j. Performance Requirements:

1) Hydronic Systems: 2000 psig at 300°F. 2) Steam Systems: 600 psig at 750°F.

T. Test Plugs:

1. Provide as manufactured by Flow Design, Inc., Peterson Equipment Co., or H.O.

Trerice. 2. Description: Nickel-plated brass-body test plug in 1/2" inch fitting. 3. Body: Length as required to extend beyond insulation. 4. Pressure Rating: 500 psig minimum. 5. Core Inserts: 2 self-sealing valve types, suitable for inserting a 1/8” inch (3mm)

outside-diameter probe from a dial thermometer or pressure gage. 6. Core Material: According to the following for fluid and temperature range:

a. Water: 20°F to 200°F, neoprene rubber. b. Water: Minus 30°F to 275°F (minus 35 to 136° C),

ethylene-propylene-diene-terpolymer (EPDM) rubber. 7. Test-Plug Cap: Gasketed and threaded cap, with retention chain. 8. Test Kit: Provide test kit consisting of 1 pressure gage and gage adapter with

probe, 2 bimetal dial thermometers and a carrying case. 9. Pressure Gage and Thermometer Ranges: Approximately 2 times systems


operating conditions.

U. Flow Meter Fittings- Venturi Type

1. Flow meter fittings shall be venturi flow measurement system as manufactured by Preso, Barco or approved equal. a. This shall be a coordinated system, including individual venturi flow

stations. b. Provide one portable master meter supplied by the flow meter

manufacturer. 2. Each primary flow element shall be Venturi selected from manufacturers’

engineering data to permit prescribed flow at a minimum of head loss. a. For maximum accuracy and minimal turbulence in recovery area and

thus low pressure loss, the beta ratio shall be selected to allow for a differential pressure compatible with the meter as specified herein to insure a proper system accuracy throughout the entire range.

b. This accuracy must be obtained with as little as five pipe diameters of straight pipe upstream and two diameters downstream from the venturi.

c. Each venturi shall be furnished with two accurately located built in sensing taps, nipples, shut off valves and quick connect couplings.

d. Venturis shall be complete with an identification tag on a chain giving pipe size, venturi series, station identification and meter reading at specified flow rate, flow versus differential curves and installation instructions.

3. Venturi stations shall consist of one piece zinc plated cast steel venturi, with weld neck or flanged ends.

4. Venturi sizes and beta ratios shall be selected so that design rates shall read between 20% and the full scale range on a linear meter with permanent pressure loss of not more than 25% of indicated flow rate differential pressure.

5. The indicating meter shall be portable type with 6" round dial, 270° indication. a. It shall be dual rupture proof liquid filled bellows type with integral

temperature compensation. b. The meter shall have over range protection in either direction equal to the

working pressure equivalent of the instrument housing (250 psig at +250°F).

c. The accuracy of the meter shall be no less than 0.5% full scale. d. The meter case shall be waterproof and coated with approximate paint. e. It shall have external zero and range adjusting screws and lifelong

lubrication. f. Schale shall be calibrated uniformly either in differential pressure (0-50"

w.c.), percent of flow or directly in gpm. 6. One portable master meter shall be mounted in a durable metal reinforced plastic

carrying case and turned over to the owner with the following accessories: Two 10" lengths of connecting hose, each with color coded quick connect couplings compatible with the venturi couplings. a. Two brass blowdown valves with Buna-N seals.

V. Flow Indicators:

1. Provide Anderson Model as manufactured by Dwyer Instrument.

a. Description: Instrument for visual verification of flow made for installation in piping systems that measures flow directly in gallons/minute (L/s).

b. Construction: Bronze or stainless-steel body with sight glass and plastic pelton-wheel indicator.

c. Pressure Rating: 125 psig (860 kPa).


d. Temperature Rating: 200°F (93° C). 2.3 SLEEVE PENETRATION SYSTEMS

A. General: Provide protective sheathing or wrapping between metal pipes and sleeves to prevent pipes from corroding.

B. Sleeves shall be provided around all pipes through walls, floors, ceilings, partitions,

structure members or other building parts. Sleeves through walls and floors shall be standard weight galvanized iron pipe two sizes larger than the pipe or insulation so that pipe or insulation shall pass through freely with space for movement for all piping which passes through masonry or concrete walls or floors. Provide 20 gauge galvanized steel sheet or galvanized pipe sleeves for all piping passing through frame walls.

C. Sleeves through floors shall be flush with the floor except for sleeves passing through

Mechanical Rooms which shall extend ¾” above the floor. Space between the pipe and sleeve shall be caulked. Escutcheon plates shall be constructed to conceal the ends of sleeves.

D. Sleeves through walls and floors shall be sealed.

E. Penetrations through fire rated walls and floors.

1. All penetrations by fire protection water lines through fire rated floors and walls

shall be provided and firestopped using UL classified through penetration firestop devices, System A, as manufactured by ProSet Systems Inc. a. The fire rating of the firestop device shall be equivalent to or greater than


instructions. 2. All penetrations by hydronic and steam system piping lines through fire rated

floors and walls shall be provided and firestopped using UL classified through penetration firestop devices, System A, as manufactured by ProSet Systems, Inc. a. The fire rating of the firestop device shall be equivalent to or greater than


instructions. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and

other conditions affecting performance of installed devices. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for


C. Examine substrates and conditions under which pipe expansion joints, pipe alignment

guides, and pipe anchors are to be installed. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.


D. Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation any piping system until it has been inspected by the authority having jurisdiction and tested as specified herein.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Preparation For Testing: Prepare hydronic piping in accordance with ASME B31.9, and as

follows:

1. Test for leaks and defects in new piping systems and parts of existing systems that have been altered, extended, or repaired. If testing is performed in segments, submit separate report for each test, complete with diagram of portion of system tested.

2. Leave joints including welds uninsulated and exposed for examination during the test.

3. Provide temporary restraints for expansion joints, which cannot sustain the reactions due to test pressure. If temporary restraints are not practical, isolate expansion joints from testing.

4. Flush system with clean water. Clean strainers. 5. Isolate equipment that is not be subjected to the test pressure from the piping. If

a valve is used to isolate the equipment, its closure shall be capable of sealing against the test pressure without damage to the valve. Flanged joints at which blinds are inserted to isolate equipment need not be tested.

6. Install relief valve set at a pressure no more than one-third higher than the test pressure, to protect against damage by expansion of liquid or other source of overpressure during the test.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF PIPING, GENERAL

A. Piping

1. Locations and Arrangements: Drawings (plans, schematics, and diagrams) indicate the general location and arrangement of piping systems. Locations and arrangements of piping take into consideration pipe sizing and friction loss, expansion, pump sizing, and other design considerations. So far as practical, install piping as indicated.

2. Install eccentric reducers where pipe is reduced in size in the direction of flow, with bottoms of both pipes and reducer flush.

3. Connect branch piping to mains from top of main, unless specific otherwise for specific systems.

4. Install supports in accordance with Specification Section Hangers, Supports, and Vibration Controls.

5. Make changes in directions and branch connections using fitting, pull tees shall not be permitted.

6. Install unions in pipes 2 inch and smaller, adjacent to each valve, at final connections each piece of equipment, and elsewhere as indicated. Unions are not required on flanged devices.

7. Install dielectric unions where piping of dissimilar metals are joined. 8. Install flanges on valves, apparatus, and equipment having 2 1/2" inch and larger

connections. 9. Install flexible connectors at inlet and discharge connections to pumps and other

vibration producing equipment. 10. Install strainers on the supply side of each control valve, pressure regulating

valve, and elsewhere as indicated. Install ¾” inch NPS nipple and ball valve in blow down connection of strainers. Use same size nipple and valve as blow-off


connection of strainer. 11. Anchor piping to ensure proper direction of expansion and contraction. Anchors

shall attach to the building structure to prevent pipe movement. Anchors shall be installed in such a manner to prevent damage to the building structure. Anchors shall be securely welded to the piping being anchored. Install expansion loops and joints as indicated on the Drawings.

12. Install pipe sleeve seals at all wall penetrations. 13. Seal pipe penetrations of fire separations specified in Specification Section "Joint

Sealers." 14. Hanger, supports, and anchors are specified in Specification Section "Hangers,

Supports, for HVAC Piping and Equipment." 15. Install drains at low points in mains, risers, and branch lines consisting of a tee

fitting, ¾” ball valve, and short ¾” threaded nipple and cap. 16. Exterior Wall Penetrations: Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls using

sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Pipe sleeves smaller than 6 inch shall be steel; pipe sleeves 6 inch and larger shall be sheet metal.

17. Install escutcheons at each wall, floor, and ceiling penetration in exposed finished locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipe fittings.

18. In concealed locations where piping, other than cast iron or galvanized steel, is installed through holes or notches in studs, joists, rapiers or similar members less than 1 ½” from the nearest edge of the member, the pipe shall be protected by steel shield plates. The plates shall be made of gage 16 and shall cover the area of the pipe where the member is notched or bored, and shall extend a minimum of 2” above sole plates and below tip plates.

B. Joint Construction

1. Threaded Joints: Thread pipe with tapered pipe threads in accordance with ANSI/ASME B1.20.1. a. Cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. b. Ream threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. c. Apply pipe joint lubricant or sealant, suitable for the service for which the

pipe is intended, on the male threads at each joint. d. Tighten joint to leave not more than 3 threads exposed. e. Note the internal length of threads in fittings or valve ends, and proximity

of internal seat or wall, to determine how far pipe should be threaded into joint.

f. Align threads at point of assembly. g. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads. h. Assemble joint to appropriate thread depth. When using a wrench on

valves place the wrench on the valve end into which the pipe is being threaded.

i. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe with threads which are corroded or damaged.

j. Damaged Threads: Do not use pipe with threads which are corroded or damaged. If a weld opens during cutting or threading operations, that portion of pipe shall not be used.

2. Welded Joints: Weld pipe joints in accordance with ASME B31.9 and ASME B31.1, where required by COMAR.

3. Brazed Joints: For copper tube and fittings, braze joints in accordance with ASME B31, “Standard Code for Pressure Piping” and AWS “Brazing Manual.” a. Remove stems, seats, and packing of valves and accessible internal

parts of valves before brazing.


b. Braze joints in accordance with ASME B31.1. c. Fill the tubing and fittings during brazing with nitrogen under a continuous

purge to prevent formation of scale. d. Thoroughly clean tube surface and inside surface of the cup of the

fittings, using very fine emery cloth, prior to making brazed joints. Wipe tube and fittings clean and apply flux. Flux shall not be used as the sole means for cleaning tube and fitting surfaces.

e. Heat joints to proper and uniform temperature. f. WARNING: Some filler metals contain compounds which produce highly

toxic fumes when heated. Provide adequate ventilation and avoid breathing fumes.

4. Mechanical Joints: Follow grooved-end mechanical coupling manufacturer's written instructions.

5. Flanged Joints: Align flanges surfaces parallel. Assemble joints by sequencing bolt tightening to make initial contact of flanges and gaskets as flat and parallel as possible. Use suitable lubricants on bolt threads. Tighten bolts gradually and uniformly to appropriate torque specified by the bolt manufacturer.

6. Grooved Joints: Assemble joints in accordance with fitting manufacturers written instructions.

7. PB Heat - Fusion and Compression Joints: Conform to ASTM D3309. 3.4 INSTALLATION OF THREADED CONNECTIONS

A. Align threads at point of assembly.

B. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads, except where dry seal threading is specified.

C. Assemble joint, wrench tight.





proper shutoff and retention. 3.6 INSTALLATION OF METERS, GAGES, THERMOMETERS, ETC.

A. Meters/Gages

1. General: Where indicated, install meters and gages of types, sizes, capacities, and with features indicated.

2. Install meters, gages, and accessories according to manufacturers’ written instructions for applications where used.

3. Install thermometers and adjust vertical and tilted positions. 4. Install in the following locations and elsewhere as indicated:

a. At inlet and outlet of each hydronic zone. b. At inlet and outlet of each hydronic boiler. c. At inlet and outlet of each hydronic coil in roof top units. d. At inlet and outlet of each hydronic heat recovery unit.


e. At inlet and outlet of each thermal storage tank. 5. Remote-Reading Dial Thermometers: Install in control panels with tubing

connecting panel and thermometer bulb supported to prevent kinks. Use minimum tubing length.

6. Thermometer Wells: Install in vertical position in piping tees where thermometers are indicated. a. Install wells with stem extending minimum of 2 inches (50 mm) into fluid. b. Install wells with stem extending to center of pipe. c. Fill wells with oil or graphite and secure caps.

B. Pressure Gages

1. Install pressure gages in piping tee with pressure gage face located on pipe at

most readable position. 2. Install in the following locations and elsewhere as indicated:

a. At suction and discharge of each pump. b. At inlet and discharge of each pressure-reducing valve and steam control

valve. c. On expansion tanks.

3. Needle Valves: Provide ¼” needle valve in piping tee, with snubber. Install siphon instead of snubber for steam pressure gages.

C. Installation - Test Plug

1. Install test plugs in piping tees where indicated, located on pipe at most readable

position. Secure cap.

D. Installation - Flow-measuring System, Flow Element And Meter

1. General: Install flow meters for piping systems located in accessible locations at most readable position.

2. Locations: Install flow measuring elements and meters at discharge of each pump, at inlet of each hydronic coil in built-up central systems, and elsewhere as indicated. Also, provide one element or meter to measure total system flow for each hydronic system. In multiple chiller installations, provide meter or element for each chiller.

3. Differential-Pressure-Type Flow Elements: Install minimum straight lengths of pipe upstream and downstream from element as prescribed by the manufacturer's installation instructions.

4. Install connection fittings for attachment to portable flow meters in readily accessible locations.

5. Permanently Mounted Meters for Flow Elements: Install meters on walls or brackets in accessible locations.

6. Install connections, tubing, and accessories between flow elements and meters as prescribed by manufacturer's written instructions.

E. Connections - Meters

1. Install meters and gages adjacent to machines and equipment to allow servicing

and maintenance. 2. Connect flow-measuring-system elements to meters. 3. Connect flow-meter transmitters to meters. 4. Make electrical connections to power supply and electrically operated meters and

devices.


F. Adjusting and Cleaning - Meters

1. Calibrate meters according to manufacturer's written instructions, after installation.

2. Adjusting: Adjust faces of meters and gages to proper angle for best visibility. 3. Cleaning: Clean windows of meters and gages and factory-finished surfaces.

Replace cracked and broken windows and repair scratched and marred surfaces with manufacturer's touchup paint.

G. Portable Meters

1. Turn-over portable meters to the Owner upon completion of the project.

3.7 PIPING INSTALLATION PIPING AND SPECIALITIES SPECIFIC TO HYDRONIC SYSTEMS

A. Install piping at a uniform grade of 1 inch in 40 feet upward in the direction of flow.

B. Install branch connections to mains using Tee fittings in main with take-off out the bottom of the main, except for up-feed risers which shall have take-off out the top of the main line.

C. Ductile Iron Pipe: Install in accordance with AWWA C600. Pipe below grade inside

building and to a point 5 feet outside of building shall have restrained joints.

D. Install manual air vents at high points in the system, at heat transfer coils, and elsewhere as required for system air venting.

E. Install automatic air vents at high points in the system, heat transfer coils, and elsewhere

as required for system air venting, in Mechanical rooms only. Do not use automatic air vents in systems using glycol.

F. On end suction pumps, install pump suction diffusers on pump suction inlet, adjust foot

support to carry weight of suction piping. Install nipple and ball valve in blowdown connection.

G. Install pump discharge valves in horizontal or vertical position with stem in upward

position. Allow clearance above stem for check mechanism removal. H. Install pressure-regulating and reducing valves with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and

balance valve bypass. Install pressure gage on valve outlet and install valved bypass where indicated. Install unions at inlet and outlet connections.

I. Install strainers on supply side of each control valve, pressure-regulating valve, and

solenoid valve, and where indicated.

J. Adjusting

1. Adjust operation and correct deficiencies discovered during commissioning.

K. Protection

1. Protect drains during remainder of construction period to avoid clogging with dirt and debris and to prevent damage from traffic and construction work.

2. Place plugs in ends of uncompleted piping at end of day or when work stops.



A. Testing shall be performed by Installer of system being tested in presence of the Owner’s representative. Provide seven (7) day advance notice prior to testing of systems.

B. Inspection of Piping Systems:

1. Do not enclose, cover, or put into operation any piping system until it has been

inspected and approved by Owner’s Representative. 2. During progress of installation, notify the authority having jurisdiction seven (7)

days prior prior to time such inspection must be made. Perform tests specified in presence of Owner’s Representative. a. Roughing-In Inspection: Arrange for inspection of piping system after

system roughing-in, before concealing, and prior to setting fixtures. b. Final Inspection: Arrange for final inspection by Owner’s Representative

to observe tests specified below and to ensure compliance with requirements of Owner’s Representative.

3. Re-inspections: Make required corrections and arrange for re-inspection by Owner’s Representative when piping system fails to pass test or inspection.

4. Reports: Prepare and submit inspection reports for approval by Owner’s Representative.

C. Leak Testing

1. Hydronic Systems:

a. Perform tests prior to installation of piping insulation. b. Use ambient temperature water as the testing medium, except where

there is a risk of damage due to freezing. Another liquid may be used if it is safe for workmen and compatible with the piping system components.

c. Use vents installed at high points in the system to release trapped air while filling the system. Use drains installed at low points for complete removal of the liquid.

d. Examine system to see that equipment and parts that cannot withstand test pressures are properly isolated. Examine test equipment to ensure that it is tight and that low pressure filling lines are disconnected.

e. Subject piping system to a hydrostatic test pressure which at every point in the system is not less than 1.5 times the design pressure. The test pressure shall not exceed the maximum pressure for any vessel, pump, valve, or other component in the system under test. Make a check to verify that the stress due to pressure at the bottom of vertical runs does not exceed either 90 percent of specified minimum yield strength, or 1.7 times the ASE value in Appendix A of ASME B31.9, “Code For Pressure Piping, Building Services Piping.”

f. After the hydrostatic test pressure has been applied for at least 10 minutes, examine piping, joints, and connections for leakage. Eliminate leaks by tightening, repairing, or replacing components as appropriate, and repeat hydrostatic test until there are no leaks.

g. Test backflow preventors in accordance with the local plumbing code and requirements of the authority having jurisdiction.

3.9 CLEANING (Refer to Specification Section “HVAC Piping Systems Cleaning and Treatment.”) .


END OF SECTION

EASTERN DISTRICT POLICE STATION 15110 - 1 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING 28103.01 January 15, 2013

SECTION 15110 - GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR PLUMBING PIPING



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes 1. Globe valves. 2. Check valves. 3. Ball valves. 4. Butterfly valves. 5. Drain valves. 6. Valving specialties


1. Section “Common Work Results for Plumbing.” 2. Section “Plumbing Fixtures and Equipment.” 3. Section “Common Motor Requirements.” 4. Section “Identification for Plumbing Piping and Equipment”: Product and

installation requirements for labeling and identification. 5. Section “Pipes and Tubes for Plumbing and Equipment”: Product and installation

requirements for piping materials applying to various system types. 6. Section “Hangers and Supports for Plumbing Piping and Equipment”: Product

and installation requirements for pipe hangers and supports. 7. Section “Mechanical Insulation”: Product and installation requirements for

insulation for valves. 8. Section “Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing for Plumbing.”

1.3 REFERENCES

A. References listed in this section:

1. AGA (American Gas Association) 2. ANSI (American National Standards Institute)

a. ANSI/ASME B16.34, “Valves-Flanged, Threaded, and Welding End,” 2004.

b. ANSI/API 600, “Bolted Bonnet Steel Gate Valves for Petroleum and Natural Gas Industries,” October, 2001.

3. API (American Petroleum Institute) a. API 6D, “Specification for Pipeline Valves,” January, 2002. b. API 594, “Check Valves: Wafer, Wafer-Lig, and Double Flanged Type,”

November, 1997. c. API 598, “Valve Inspection and Testing,” October, 1996. d. API 607, “Fire Test for Soft-Seated Quarter Turn Valves,” May, 1993. e. API 608, “Metal Ball Valves- Flanged and But-Welding Ends,” August,


2002. f. API 609, “Lug- and Wafer-Type Butterfly Valves,” May, 1997.

4. ASME (American Society of Mechanical Engineers) a. ASME A112.14.1, “Back Water Valves,” 2008. b. ASME B16.10, “Face to Face and End to End Dimensions of Valves,”

2003. 5. ASSE (American Society of Sanitary Engineers)

a. ASSE 1013, “Reduced Pressure Principle Backflow Preventors,” January, 1993.

b. ASSE 1015, “Double Check Backflow Prevention Assembly,” January, 1993.

c. ASSE 1035, “Laboratory Faucet Backflow Preventors,” January, 1993. 6. ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials)

a. ASTM A126, “Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings,” 2004.

b. ASTM A182, “Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy-Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves and Parts for High-Temperature Service,” 2008.

c. ASTM B61, “Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy-Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves and Parts for High-Temperature Service,” 2008.

7. IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) 8. IMC (International Mechanical Code) 9. IPC (International Plumbing Code) 10. MOSHA (Maryland Occupational Safety and Health Administration) 11. MSSP (Manufacturers Standards Society of the Valve & Fittings Industry)

a. MSSP SP-25, “Standard Marketing System for Valves, Fittings, Flanges and Unions,” 1998.

b. MSSP SP-45, “Bypass Drain Connections,” January, 1998. c. MSSP SP-55, “Quality Standard for Steel Castings for Valves, Flanges

and Fittings and Other Piping Components”. d. MSSP SP-61, “Pressure Testing of Steel Valves”. e. MSSP SP-67, “Butterfly Valves,” January, 2002. f. MSSP SP-68, “High-Pressure Butterfly Valves with Offset Design,”

January, 1997. g. MSSP SP-70, “Cast Iron Gate Valves Flanged and Threaded Ends,”

2006. h. MSSP SP-71, “Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves,

Flanges, and Pipe Fittings,” October, 1995. i. MSSP SP-72, “Ball Valves with Flanged Fitting,” 1999. j. MSSP SP 78 - Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends,

2005. k. MSSP SP-80, “Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves,” January,

1997. l. MSSP SP-85, “Cast Iron Globe and Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded

Ends,” January, 2002. m. MSSP SP-110, “Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint,

Grooved and Flared Ends,” January, 1996. 12. NEC (National Electrical Code) 13. NEMA (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) 14. OSHA (Occupational Safety and Health Administration) 15. UL (Underwriters' Laboratories)

1.4 SUBMITTALS



B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers catalog information with valve data and ratings for

each service.

C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit hanging, support methods, and joining procedures.

D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1.5 CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS

A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves.

B. Maintenance data to be included in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1.


A. Valves shall be provided by the same manufacturer when applicable.


1.7 QUALIFICATIONS




A. Prepare for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Set globe and gate valves closed to prevent rattling. 3. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. 4. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open. 5. Block check valves in either closed or open position.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Store indoors and maintain temperature higher than ambient dew-point

temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store off the ground in watertight enclosures.

C. Use a sling to handle large valves. Rig to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use

handwheels and stems as lifting or rigging points. 1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not install valves underground when bedding is wet or frozen.


1.10 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Notification of Interruption of Service: Provide notification for all utility outages. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 VALVES - BASIC, COMMON FEATURES

A. Pressure and Temperature Ratings: As indicated in the "Application Schedule" of Part 3 of this Section and as required to suit system pressures and temperatures.

B. Sizes: Same size as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Extended Stems: Where insulation is indicated or specified, provide extended stems

arranged to receive insulation.

D. Threads: ANSI/ASME B1.20.1.

E. Flanges: ASME B16.1, ASME B16.5, and ASME B16.24.

F. Hexagonal Threaded Packing Adjustment: All ball valves.

G. Bypass and Drain Connections: Comply with MSS SP-45.

H. Memory Stops: Provide memory stops for all “Balancing” valves. 2.2 VALVE APPLICATION SCHEDULE:

A. Domestic Water:

1. Check Valves:

a. Horizontal Swing ¼” through 2”:

1) Check valves shall be class 125# SWP, 200# WOG, horizontal swing check, body with 5° integral seat. Body, cap, & Disc shall be of ASTM B62, cast bronze. (Disc on ¼” through ¾” ASTM B16) Lever, retaining ring, and Hinge Pin shall be stainless steel. Plug shall be ATSM B16, Lever, MSS SP-80, Type 3. Basis of Design:

Milwaukee Model: 509 (Threaded) Milwaukee Model: 1509 (Sweat)

b. Horizontal Swing- 2 ½” through 24":

1) Check valves shall be class 125# SWP, 200# WOG, horizontal

swing Check. Body, bonnet, Hanger & disc shall be of ASTM A126, Class B cast iron. Hanger Pin, disc nut, & side plug shall be ASTM B16, Brass. Seat Ring & Disc or disc Face Ring of Cast ASTM B62, Bronze. 125 Lb. flanged ends. bolted bonnet. MSS SP-71, Type 1. Basis of Design:


Milwaukee Model: F-2974

2. Ball Valves:

a. ¼” through 2":

1) Ball valves shall be 600 WOG, ASTM B584, cast bronze two

piece adapter loaded single reduced bore with chrome plated solid ASTM B16, brass tunnel drilled ball, blow-out proof brass stem, RPTFE 15% glass filled seats & thrust washer, PTFE packing, hexagonal threaded packing nut of ASTM B16, brass, Lever handle of Zinc plated steel with vinyl handle grip, MSS SP-110. Fed. Spec. WW-V-35C II, BZ, 3. Basis of Design:

Milwaukee Model: BA-100 (Threaded) Milwaukee Model: BA-150 (Sweat) Other manufacturers: Worcester, Hill McCena

b. 3 Piece- ¼” through 2":

1) Ball valves shall be 600# WOG, ASTM B584, cast bronze three

piece, exposed bolt design, full bore, chrome plated solid ASTM B16, brass tunnel drilled ball, blow-out proof brass stem, one piece RPTFE 15% glass filled seat and body seal, 25% glass filled RPTFE thrust washer, PTFE packing, hexagonal threaded packing nut of ASTM B16, brass, Grade 8 Zinc plated steel body bolts & nuts, Lever handle of Zinc plated steel with vinyl handle grip, MSS SP-110. Fed. Spec. WW-V-35C II, BZ, 1. Basis of Design:

Milwaukee Model: BA-300-A (Threaded) Milwaukee Model: BA-350-A (Sweat) Other manufacturers: Worcester, Hill, McCena

c. 2 ½” Carbon Steel:

1) Ball valves shall be ANSI class 150 Lb., split body, full bore. Body

of ASTM A216, grade WCB. Steel solid tunnel drilled & grounded ball, vented from the body cavity to the tunnel of the ball. Spiral wound graphite & 304 SS body seals, Multiple piece PTFE/Graphite packing, Threaded hexagonal packing nut or two bolt packing adjustment, lever operator, RPTFE seats (200 PSI @ 350°F). API 607, Valves must be tested in accordance with ANSI B16.34, API 598, and be compliant with NACE MR0175, ANSI/ASME B16.5, MSS SP-72, API 608. Basis of Design:

Carbon Steel Body: Milwaukee Model: F20CS150F-02 (lever) Other manufacturers: Fischer, Hammond

3. Butterfly Valves:

a. 3” through 48":


1) Materials & Construction:

a) Butterfly valves shall be, Cast Iron ASTM A126, Class B Lug Style Body with through tapped lugs. Valves will be of the Phenolic back cartridge, two-piece stem design, molded lip for “Dead End Service”. Elastomer seat will be made of EPDM, ASTM D2000, suitable for continuous operation from B30°F through + 275°F, ASTM B148, Alloy 954 Aluminum Bronze Disc with a Broached Stem to Disc Drive Connection. (14” & larger valves to have a plug & pin stem to disc connection) Upper & Lower Blowout proof stems of ASTM A582, Type 416 Stainless Steel. Buna N “O” Ring stem and Dirt seals, 2”+ extended neck to accommodate insulation. Valves to be “Bubble Tight” up to the maximum rated working pressure in either direction. Valves to be factory tested for “Bubble Tight” shut off in accordance with MSS SP-67, and API 609 standards. Valves are rated for Uni-Directional dead end service 3” through 12” 150 PSIG.

2) Maximum Rated Working Pressure: a) For 3” through 12” valves is 200 PSIG

3) Actuator / Operator: a) For all valves 3” through 6” use a 10 position Lever

handle with locking Trigger. Operators are to be equipped with Travel Stops. Basis of Design:

Milwaukee Model: CL-223-E 3” through 5” Milwaukee Model: CL-323-E 6” through 24” Milwaukee Model: ML-323-E 30 through 48”

4. Hose End Drain Valves ½” and ¾”:

a. Hose end drain valves shall be class 600# WOG, ASTM B584, cast

bronze two piece adapter loaded single reduced bore with chrome plated solid ASTM B16, brass tunnel drilled ball, blow-out proof brass stem, RPTFE 15% glass filled seats & 25% glass filled thrust washer, PTFE packing, hexagonal threaded packing nut of ASTM B16, brass, Lever handle of Zinc plated steel with vinyl handle grip, ASTM B16, brass tail piece with standard hose end threads, brass bead chain and Zinc die cast cap, MSS SP-110, Fed. Spec. WW-V-35C II, BZ, 3. Basis of Design:

Milwaukee Model: BA-100-H (Threaded) Milwaukee Model: BA-150-H (Sweat)

B. Natural Gas Service

1. Ball Valves:

a. Forged Brass - ¼” through 2” Ball valves shall be class 600 WOG / 150 SWP, forged brass two piece adapter loaded, full bore, with chrome plated solid ASTM B584, brass tunnel drilled ball, blow-out proof brass


stem, PTFE seats, PTFE packing, & Buna-N “O” Ring, hexagonal threaded packing nut, Zinc Plated steel lever handle & nut, AGA and CGA approved, UL/FM, MSS SP-110, WW-V-35C, Type II, Comp. BZ, End A. Basis of Design:

Milwaukee Model: BA-475 B Other manufacturers: Worcester, Hills McCena

2. Lubricated Plug Valves: Sizes 2 ½ through 4”:

a. Bodies, plugs and bonnets shall be made from ASTM A126 Class B cast iron. Valves shall be full port design.

b. Ends of threaded valves shall have taper pipe threads conforming to ANSI B2.1.

c. End flanges shall be integral with the valve body. Flange drilling and thickness shall conform to ANSI B16.1 for pressure Class 125. Flanges shall be finished in accordance with MSS SP-6.

d. Face-to-Face dimensions of flanged valves shall conform to ANSI B16.10.

e. Pressure-Temperature rating shall be per ANSI B16.1 flanges, Class 125.

f. Valves shall conform to MSS-SP-78, Type IV. g. Valves shall conform to ANSI B16.38 (2 ½” through 4”). h. Provide one wrench operator for each size valve. i. Valves 2 ½” – 4” shall carry AGA, CGA, CSA and UL certifications and

approvals.

Homestead Model: 602 Other manufacturers: Walworth, Rockwell Norstrom

2.3 VALVING SPECIALTIES

A. Gas Solenoid Valves: Provide “normally closed” 2-way solenoid valve as manufactured by SIKAI, or equivalent. Valves shall be UL and FM approved and labeled.

B. Gas Pressure Reducing Valves: Valve shall be Equimeter, Inc. Model No. 243, or

equivalent with internal relief valve and capacities as indicated on the contract drawings. Size valve and springs to deliver scheduled pressures and gas flows.

C. Pressure Reducing Valves:

1. Provide as manufactured by Watts Regulator, Model UB, TACO, Spence, or

equivalents. 2. Domestic Water Systems: Provide Watts Model 115-7, or equivalent 125 pound,

cast iron ASTM A126, Class B, fused epoxy coated inside and outside, stainless steel seat, stainless steel stem, suitable for dead-end service.

D. Safety Relief Valves:

1. Provide as manufactured by Watts Regulator, Spence, or approved equal. 2. 125 psig working pressure and 250°F maximum operating temperature;

designed, manufactured, tested, and labeled in accordance with the requirements of Section IV of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

3. Valve body shall be cast-iron.


4. Valve shall have forged copper alloy disc, fully enclosed cadmium plated steel spring with adjustable pressure range and positive shut-off.

5. Factory set valves to relieve at 10 psi above operating pressure.

E. Combined Pressure/Temperature Relief Valves:

1. Provide as manufactured by Watts Regulator, Spence, or approved equal. 2. Hydronic Systems: diaphragm operated, cast-iron or brass body valve, with low

inlet pressure check valve, inlet strainer removable without system shut-down, and noncorrosive valve seat and stem. Select valve size, capacity, and operating pressure to suit system. Valve shall be factory-set at operating pressure and have the capability for field adjustment. Safety relief valve designed, manufactured, tested, and labeled in accordance with the requirements of Section IV of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Valve body shall be cast-iron, with all wetted internal working parts made of brass and rubber; 125 psig working pressure and 250°F maximum operating temperature. Select valve to suit actual system pressure and Btu capacity. Provide with fast fill feature for filling hydronic system.

F. Automatic Flow Control Valves: Class 150, cast iron housing, stainless steel operating

parts; threaded connections for 2 inch and smaller, flanged connections for 2 1/2 inch and larger. Factory set to automatically control flow rates within plus or minus 5 percent design, while compensating for system operating pressure differential. Provide quick disconnect valves for flow measuring equipment. Provide a metal identification tag with chain for each valve, factory marked with the zone identification, valve model number, and rate flow in GPM.

G. Trap Priming Systems:

1. Pressure Differential Valve Type:

a. Primers shall be E&S Primer Valves, Zurn, Josam or equal chrome plated with vandal-proof screws and with 3/8" water connections, as connected as to the prime the trap on a variation in water pressure in the mains. Take water connections from the nearest cold water line and provide the loose key stops. Set primers above floor level of the drains they serve. Primer valves behind walls shall be provided with access doors as specified hereinbefore.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of valves. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion.

Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.

C. Operate valves from fully open to fully closed positions. Examine guides and seats made

accessible by such operation.

D. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.


E. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for proper size, length, and material. Check gasket material for proper size, material composition suitable for service, and freedom from defects and damage.

F. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF VALVES

A. Valves shall be placed in such manner as to be easily accessible for smooth and easy handwheel operation and packing maintenance.

B. Install valves in piping where shown and where listed herein:

1. To balance flows in water piping systems. 2. To isolate all items of equipment. 3. To isolate branch lines and risers at mains. 4. To drain low points in piping systems. 5. To drain pipe risers. 6. To drain equipment.

C. Where piping or equipment may be subsequently removed, provide valves with bodies

having integral flanges or full lugs drilled and tapped to hold valve in place so that downstream piping or equipment can be disconnected and replaced with blank-off plate while valve is still in service.

D. Valves for equipment and controls shall be installed full size of pipe before reducing size

to make equipment connection.

E. Where there is not interference, gate and globe shut-off valves shall be installed with handwheel up on horizontal runs of pipe to prevent accumulation of foreign matter in working parts of valves. In no case shall the stem be installed below the pipe centerline.

F. Butterfly valves shall be installed with handle position in the horizontal position: i.e.,

butterfly pivot point parallel with the floor.

G. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow servicing, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

H. Install valves in a position to allow full handle movement.

I. For chain-wheel operators, provide chains to 60 inches (1500 mm)

above finished floor elevation.

J. Installation of Check Valves: Install for proper direction of flow as follows:

1. Swing Check Valves: Horizontal position with hinge pin level. 2. Lift Check Valve: With stem upright and plumb. 3. Install check valves on each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to

control flow direction.

K. Install drain valves at low points in mains, risers, branch lines, and everywhere else required to permit drainage of the entire system.

L. Install shut-off valves on natural gas and compressed air systems upstream of each

pressure regulator. Where two pressure regulators are installed in series in a single line,


a manual valve is not required at the second regulator.

M. Install pump discharge valves with stem in upward position.

N. Install safety relief valves on hot water generators, boilers, pressure vessels, etc. and elsewhere as required by ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Pipe discharge without valves as shown on drawings or to nearest floor drain if not shown on drawings. Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section VIII, Division 1 for installation requirements.

O. Provide balancing valves as shown on drawings and as required to permit complete

balancing of all systems. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF THREADED CONNECTIONS

A. Note the internal length of threads in valve ends and proximity of valve internal seat or wall to determine how far pipe should be threaded into valve.

B. Align threads at point of assembly.

C. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads, except where dry

seal threading is specified.

D. Assemble joint, wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which the pipe is being threaded.





proper shutoff and retention. 3.5 INSTALLATION OF VALVING SPECIALTIES SPECIFIC TO WATER SYSTEMS

A. Install pump discharge valves in horizontal or vertical position with stem in upward position. Allow clearance above stem for check mechanism removal.

B. Install pressure-regulating and reducing valves with inlet and outlet shutoff valves and

balance valve bypass. Install pressure gage on valve outlet and install valved bypass where indicated. Install unions at inlet and outlet connections.

C. Install trap seal primer valves with valve outlet piping pitched down toward drain trap a

minimum of 1/8” inch per foot (1 percent) and connect to floor drain body, trap, or inlet fitting. Adjust valve for proper flow.

D. Adjusting

1. Adjust operation and correct deficiencies discovered during commissioning.

a. Electrical Connections: Power wiring and disconnect switches are


specified in Division 16. b. Grounding: Connect unit components to ground according to the National

Electrical Code and Specification Section “Grounding & Bonding For Electrical Systems.”

3.6 ADJUSTING VALVES

A. VALVES: Adjust or replace packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if leak persists.

END OF SECTION

EASTERN DISTRICT POLICE STATION 15111- 1 GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING 28103.01 January 15, 2013

SECTION 15111 - GENERAL DUTY VALVES FOR HVAC PIPING



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Check valves. 2. Ball valves. 3. Butterfly valves. 4. Gate valves. 5. Drain valves. 6. Valving specialties


1. Section “Common Work Results for HVAC.” 2. Section “Motor Requirement.” 3. Section “Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment.” 4. Section “Expansion Fittings and Loops for HVAC Piping.” 5. Section “Instrumentation and Control for HVAC.” 6. Section “Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC.” 7. Section “HVAC Piping Systems Cleaning and Treatment.” 8. Section “Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment”: Product and installation

requirements for labeling and identification. 9. Section “Pipes and Tubes for HVAC Piping and Equipment”: Product and

installation requirements for piping materials applying to various system types. 10. Section “Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment”: Product and

installation requirements for pipe hangers and supports. 11. Section “Insulation”: Product and installation requirements for insulation for

valves. 1.3 REFERENCES

A. References listed in this section:

1. ANSI (American National Standards Institute) a. ANSI/ASME B16.34, “Valves-Flanged, Threaded, and Welding End,”

2004. 2. API (American Petroleum Institute)

a. API 6D, “Specification for Pipeline Valves,” January, 2002. b. API 594, “Check Valves: Wafer, Wafer-Lig, and Double Flanged Type,”

November, 1997. c. API 598, “Valve Inspection and Testing,” October, 1996. d. API 607, “Fire Test for Soft-Seated Quarter Turn Valves,” May, 1993. e. API 608, “Metal Ball Valves- Flanged and But-Welding Ends,” August,

2002.


f. API 609, “Lug- and Wafer-Type Butterfly Valves,” May, 1997. 3. ASME (American Society of Mechanical Engineers)

a. ASME A112.14.1, “Back Water Valves,” 2008. b. ASME B16.10, “Face to Face and End to End Dimensions of Valves,”

2003. 4. ASTM (American Society for Testing and Materials)

a. ASTM A126, “Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves, Flanges, and Pipe Fittings,” 2004.

b. ASTM A182, “Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy-Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves and Parts for High-Temperature Service,” 2008.

c. ASTM B61, “Standard Specification for Forged or Rolled Alloy-Steel Pipe Flanges, Forged Fittings, and Valves and Parts for High-Temperature Service,” 2008.

5. BOCA (Building Officials and Code Administrators) 6. CSA (Canadian Standards Association) 7. IEEE (Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers) 8. IMC (International Mechanical Code) 9. MOSHA (Maryland Occupational Safety and Health Administration) 10. MSSP (Manufacturers Standards Society of the Valve & Fittings Industry)

a. MSSP SP-25, “Standard Marketing System for Valves, Fittings, Flanges and Unions,” 1998.

b. MSSP SP-45, “Bypass Drain Connections,” January, 1998. c. MSSP SP-55, “Quality Standard for Steel Castings for Valves, Flanges

and Fittings and Other Piping Components”. d. MSSP SP-61, “Pressure Testing of Steel Valves”. e. MSSP SP-67, “Butterfly Valves,” January, 2002. f. MSSP SP-68, “High-Pressure Butterfly Valves with Offset Design,”

January, 1997. g. MSSP SP-70, “Cast Iron Gate Valves Flanged and Threaded Ends,”

2006. h. MSSP SP-71, “Standard Specification for Gray Iron Castings for Valves,

Flanges, and Pipe Fittings,” October, 1995. i. MSSP SP-72, “Ball Valves with Flanged Fitting,” 1999. j. MSSP SP 78 - Cast Iron Plug Valves, Flanged and Threaded Ends,

2005. k. MSSP SP-80, “Bronze Gate, Globe, Angle and Check Valves,” January,

1997. l. MSSP SP-85, “Cast Iron Globe and Angle Valves, Flanged and Threaded

Ends,” January, 2002. m. MSSP SP-110, “Ball Valves Threaded, Socket-Welding, Solder Joint,

Grooved and Flared Ends,” January, 1996. 11. NEC (National Electrical Code) 12. NEMA (National Electrical Manufacturers Association) 13. OSHA (Occupational Safety and Health Administration) 14. UL (Underwriters' Laboratories)

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product Data: Submit manufacturers catalog information with valve data and ratings for

each service.


C. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit hanging, support methods, and joining procedures.

D. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.


A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of valves.

B. Maintenance data to be included in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 01.


A. Valves shall be provided by the same manufacturer when applicable.


1.7 QUALIFICATIONS




A. Prepare for shipping as follows:

1. Protect internal parts against rust and corrosion. 2. Set globe and gate valves closed to prevent rattling. 3. Set ball and plug valves open to minimize exposure of functional surfaces. 4. Set butterfly valves closed or slightly open. 5. Block check valves in either closed or open position.

B. Use the following precautions during storage:

1. Store indoors and maintain temperature higher than ambient dew-point

temperature. If outdoor storage is necessary, store off the ground in watertight enclosures.

C. Use a sling to handle large valves. Rig to avoid damage to exposed parts. Do not use

handwheels and stems as lifting or rigging points. 1.9 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Do not install valves underground when bedding is wet or frozen. 1.10 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Notification of Interruption of Service: Provide notification for all utility outages. PART 2 PRODUCTS


2.1 VALVES - BASIC, COMMON FEATURES

A. Pressure and Temperature Ratings: As indicated in the "Application Schedule" of Part 3 of this Section and as required to suit system pressures and temperatures.

B. Sizes: Same size as upstream pipe, unless otherwise indicated.

C. Operators: Use specified operators and handwheels, except provide the following special

operator features:

1. Chain-Wheel Operators: For valves 3 inches (DN100) and larger, installed 120 inches

2. Lever Operators: Ball and butterfly valves 10" and less. or higher above finished floor elevation.

D. Extended Stems: Where insulation is indicated or specified, provide extended stems

arranged to receive insulation.

E. Threads: ANSI/ASME B1.20.1.

F. Flanges: ASME B16.1, ASME B16.5, and ASME B16.24.

G. Hexagonal Threaded Packing Adjustment: All ball valves.

H. Bypass and Drain Connections: Comply with MSS SP-45.

I. Memory Stops: Provide memory stops for all “Balancing” valves. 2.2 VALVE APPLICATION SCHEDULE:

A. Hyoronic Water

1. Check Valves:

a. Horizontal Swing- ¼” through 2”:

1) Check valves shall be class 125# SWP, 200# WOG, horizontal swing check, body with 5° integral seat. Body, cap, & Disc shall be of ASTM B62, cast bronze. (Disc on ¼” through ¾” ASTM B16) Retaining ring, & Hinge Pin shall be stainless steel. Plug shall be ASTM B16, MSS SP-80, Type 3. Basis of Design:

Milwaukee Model: 510T (Threaded) Milwaukee Model: 1510T (Sweat) Other manufacturers: Hammond, Lunkenhimer

b. Horizontal Swing- 2 ½” through 24”:

1) Check valves shall be class 125# SWP, 200# WOG, horizontal

swing Check. Body, bonnet, Hanger & disc shall be of ASTM A126, Class B cast iron. Hanger Pin, disc nut, & side plug shall be ASTM B16, Brass. Seat Ring & Disc or disc Face Ring of Cast ASTM B62, Bronze, 125 Lb. Flanged ends, Bolted bonnet, MSS SP-71, Type 1. Basis of Design:

Milwaukee Model: F-2974-A (Domestic)


Other manufacturers: Hammond, Lunkenhimer

c. Spring Loaded “Silent” Lift- 3/8” through 2”:

1) Check valves shall be 250# WOG. ASTM B584, cast bronze body with integral seat, Tail Piece, & center guided disc holder. ASTM B104, bronze Spring. Buna or PTFE disc ring. Basis of Design:

Milwaukee Model: 548B (Threaded) Milwaukee Model: 1548T (Sweat) Other manufacturers: Hammond, Lunkenhimer

2. Ball Valves:

a. ¼” through 2":

1) Ball valves shall be 600 WOG, ASTM B584, cast bronze two

piece adapter loaded single reduced bore with ASTM B276, A Type 316 solid stainless steel tunnel drilled ball, blow-out proof ASTM B276, Type 316 stainless steel stem, RPTFE 15% glass filled seats & 25% glass filled thrust washer, PTFE packing, hexagonal threaded packing nut of ASTM B16 brass, Lever handle of Zinc plated steel with vinyl handle grip, MSS SP-110. Fed. Spec. WW-V-35C II, BZ, 3. Basis of Design:

Milwaukee Model: BA-100S (Threaded) Milwaukee Model: BA-150S (Sweat) Other manufacturers: Worcester, Hills McCena

b. 2 ½” Carbon Steel:

1) Ball valves shall be ANSI class 150 Lb., split body, full bore. Body of ASTM A216, grade WCB steel solid tunnel drilled & grounded ball, vented from the body cavity to the tunnel of the ball. Spiral wound graphite & 304 SS body seals, Multiple piece PTFE/Graphite packing, Threaded hexagonal packing nut or two bolt packing adjustment, lever operator, RPTFE seats (200 PSI @ 350 F), API 607, fire tested, four bolt actuator mounting configuration to ISO 5211 standards. Valves must be tested in accordance with ANSI B16.34, API 598, and be compliant with NACE MR0175, ANSI/ASME B16.5, MSS SP-72, and API 608. Basis of Design:

Carbon Steel Body: Milwaukee Model: F20CS150F-02 (lever) Other manufacturers: Worcester, Hills McCena

3. Butterfly Valves:

a. 3” through 24":

1) Materials & Construction:

a) Butterfly valves shall be, Cast Iron ASTM A126, Class B Lug Style Body with through tapped lugs. Valves will be


of the Phenolic back cartridge, two piece stem design. Phenolic backed cartridge to have molded lip for “Dead End Service,” liner must be field replaceable. Seat will be made of EPDM ASTM D2000, suitable for continuous operation from B30°F through + 275°F, ASTM B148, Alloy 954 Aluminum Bronze Disc with a Broached Stem to Disc Drive Connection. (14” & larger valves to have a plug & pin stem to disc connection) Upper & Lower Blowout proof stems of ASTM A582, Type 416 Stainless Steel, Top bearing Thermoplastic polymer alloy containing a solid lubricant with an integral dirt seal to support and neutralize hydraulic & external axial stem loads Buna N “O” Ring stem and Dirt seals, 2”+ extended neck to accommodate insulation. All valves to be “Bubble Tight” up to the maximum rated working pressure in either direction. Each valve to be factory tested for “Bubble Tight” shut off in accordance with MSS SP-67, and standards. Valves are rated for Uni-Directional dead end service 2” through 12” 150 PSIG.

2) Maximum Rated Working Pressure: a) For 3” through 12” valves is 200 PSIG b) For 14” through 48” valves is 150 PSIG

3) Actuator / Operator: a) Provide memory stop where used for balancing

purposes. b) For all valves 3” through 6” use a 10 position Lever

handle with locking Trigger. c) For all valves 8” through 48” use an Enclosed Manual

Self-Locking Worm Gear Operator with Handwheel and Position Indicator. Both types of operators are to be equipped with Travel Stops. Basis of Design:

Milwaukee Model: CL-223-E 3” through 5” Milwaukee Model: CL-323-E 6” through 24” Other manufacturers: Fischer, Hammond

4. Hose End Drain Valves ½” and ¾”:

a. Hose end drain valves shall be class 600# WOG, ASTM B584, cast

bronze two piece adapter loaded single reduced bore with chrome plated solid ASTM B16, brass tunnel drilled ball, blow-out proof brass stem, RPTFE 15% glass filled seats & 25% glass filled thrust washer, PTFE packing, hexagonal threaded packing nut of ASTM B16, brass, Lever handle of Zinc plated steel with vinyl handle grip, ASTM B16, brass tail piece with standard hose end threads, brass bead chain and Zinc die cast cap, MSS SP-110, Fed. Spec. WW-V-35C II, BZ, 3. Basis of Design:

Milwaukee Model: BA-100-H (Threaded) Milwaukee Model: BA-150-H (Sweat)

2.3 VALVING SPECIALTIES

A. Pressure Reducing Valves:


1. Provide as manufactured by Watts Regulator, Model UB, TACO, Spence, or equivalents.

2. Hydronic Systems: diaphragm operated, bronze body valve, stainless steel inlet strainer, renewable stainless steel seat and stem. Select valve size, capacity, and operating pressure to suit system. Valve shall be factory-set at operating pressure and have the capability for field adjustment.

3. Steam Systems: a. Pressure reducing valve shall be self-operated, external pilot type, single-

seated, metal diaphragm actuated - SPENCE Type ED Pressure Regulators, or equivalent. Valve shall regulate accurately throughout the range of pressure and flow conditions scheduled. Valve shall function quietly and shut tight on a dead end shutoff.

b. Body shall be cast iron; sizes 2 ½” and larger shall have flanged ends. Seats and discs shall be of SECO Metal, stems of stainless steel and diaphragms of bronze. There shall be no springs in the path of the steam and no stuffing boxes. All parts must be easily accessible without removal of the valve from the line.

c. The pilot valve shall be separate from the main valve and connected to it by unions. It shall be adjusted for pressure by movement of a weight on a lever. A strainer screen shall be built in the pilot inlet. Pilot shall be interchangeable with size of main valve.

B. Safety Relief Valves:

1. Provide as manufactured by Watts Regulator, Spence, or approved equal. 2. 125 psig working pressure and 250°F maximum operating temperature;

designed, manufactured, tested, and labeled in accordance with the requirements of Section IV of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code.

3. Valve body shall be cast-iron. 4. Valve shall have forged copper alloy disc, fully enclosed cadmium plated steel

spring with adjustable pressure range and positive shut-off. 5. Factory set valves to relieve at 10 psi above operating pressure. 6. For steam systems, provide drip pan elbow at base of elbow.

C. Combined Pressure/Temperature Relief Valves:

1. Provide as manufactured by Watts Regulator, Spence, or approved equal. 2. Hydronic Systems: diaphragm operated, cast-iron or brass body valve, with low

inlet pressure check valve, inlet strainer removable without system shut-down, and noncorrosive valve seat and stem. Select valve size, capacity, and operating pressure to suit system. Valve shall be factory-set at operating pressure and have the capability for field adjustment. Safety relief valve designed, manufactured, tested, and labeled in accordance with the requirements of Section IV of the ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Valve body shall be cast-iron, with all wetted internal working parts made of brass and rubber; 125 psig working pressure and 250°F maximum operating temperature. Select valve to suit actual system pressure and Btu capacity. Provide with fast fill feature for filling hydronic system.

D. Automatic Flow Control Valves: Class 150, cast iron housing, stainless steel operating

parts; threaded connections for 2 inch and smaller, flanged connections for 2 1/2 inch and larger. Factory set to automatically control flow rates within plus or minus 5 percent design, while compensating for system operating pressure differential. Provide quick disconnect valves for flow measuring equipment. Provide a metal identification tag with chain for each valve, factory marked with the zone identification, valve model number,


and rate flow in GPM.

E. Flow and Balancing Measuring System :

1. Sizes ½” through 4": a. Provide a complete flow balancing valve system as manufactured by

Flow Design Inc., or Preso. b. Flow meter shall be “venturi” type as defined by ASHRAE, with machined

brass section. Devices shall have a precision machined throat and have a stated catalog accuracy of 3% full scale. The induced differential reading (flow signal) shall be greater than two feet water column at the design flow with the valve in the wide open position. The permanent pressure loss at design flow, shall not exceed two feet of water in the wide open position. The venturi flow meter shall have pressure and temperature ports with caps.

c. Combination balancing and shut-off valves shall be throttling type ball valves with a memory stop. The ball valves shall have a bronze body, blowout proof ball, virgin teflon seats, brass stem and packing nut and a steel handle. Valves shall be available in thread or sweat connections through 2" in size, pressure rated to 400 PSI at 250°F.

d. Combination balancing and shut-off valves 2 1/2” through 4" shall be of the same basis of design with the exception of a iron body construction, flanged connections, pressure rated to 250 PSI at 250°F non shock service.

e. Ball valves shall be as specified hereinbefore. f. Combination balancing and shut-off valves shall be butterfly valve type as

specified hereinbefore with memory stop. g. Provide a portable readout meter kit by the manufacturer of the balancing

devices. The meter shall be permanently mounted in a durable case complete with two 10' color coded hoses with shut-off valves at the end that connects to the balance valve so that water does not drain out between readings. Meter shall have a 6" diameter face and 1.75% full rated accuracy. Meter for the venturi type devices shall be provided with a removable transparent face indicating flow directly in GPM for each size device furnished. Meter shall have a three valve manifold for over-range protection.

F. Multi-Purpose Valves:

1. Valves shall be TACO, Model No. SD-400-6 or equivalent, with check valve

features, plug valve features, and memory stop. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine piping system for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of valves. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Examine valve interior for cleanliness, freedom from foreign matter, and corrosion.

Remove special packing materials, such as blocks, used to prevent disc movement during shipping and handling.


C. Operate valves from fully open to fully closed positions. Examine guides and seats made accessible by such operation.

D. Examine threads on valve and mating pipe for form and cleanliness.

E. Examine mating flange faces for conditions that might cause leakage. Check bolting for


F. Do not attempt to repair defective valves; replace with new valves.

3.2 INSTALLATION OF VALVES

A. Valves shall be placed in such manner as to be easily accessible for smooth and easy handwheel operation and packing maintenance.

B. Install valves in piping where shown and where listed herein:

1. To balance flows in piping systems. 2. To isolate all items of equipment. 3. To isolate motorized flow control valves. 4. To isolate branch lines and risers at mains. 5. To drain low points in piping systems. 6. To drain pipe risers. 7. To drain equipment.

C. Where piping or equipment may be subsequently remove, provide valves with bodies

having integral flanges or full lugs drilled and tapped to hold valve in place so that downstream piping or equipment can be disconnected and replaced with blank-off plate while valve is still in service.

D. Valves for equipment and controls shall be installed full size of pipe before reducing size

to make equipment connection.

E. Where there is not interference, gate and globe shut-off valves shall be installed with handwheel up on horizontal runs of pipe to prevent accumulation of foreign matter in working parts of valves. In no case shall the stem be installed below the pipe centerline.

F. Butterfly valves shall be installed with handle position in the horizontal position: i.e.,

butterfly pivot point parallel with the floor.

G. On valves, strainers, etc., installed in copper piping, provide unions, or threaded adapters where piping connects to valves, strainers, etc.

H. Drawings indicate the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties.

I. Install valves with unions or flanges at each piece of equipment arranged to allow

servicing, maintenance, and equipment removal without system shutdown.

J. Install valves in a position to allow full handle movement.

K. For chain-wheel operators, provide chains to 60 inches (1500 mm)

above finished floor elevation.

L. Installation of Check Valves: Install for proper direction of flow as follows:


1. Swing Check Valves: Horizontal position with hinge pin level. 2. Lift Check Valve: With stem upright and plumb. 3. Install check valves on each pump discharge and elsewhere as required to

control flow direction.

M. Install drain valves at low points in mains, risers, branch lines, and everywhere else required to permit drainage of the entire system.

N. Install pump discharge valves with stem in upward position.

O. Install safety relief valves on boilers, pressure vessels, etc. and elsewhere as required by

ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code. Pipe discharge without valves as shown on drawings or to nearest floor drain if not shown on drawings. Comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code Section VIII, Division 1 for installation requirements.

P. Provide balancing valves as shown on drawings and as required to permit complete

balancing of all systems.

Q. Provide sufficient clearance of all valve installations to permit proper valve operation. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF THREADED CONNECTIONS

A. Note the internal length of threads in valve ends and proximity of valve internal seat or wall to determine how far pipe should be threaded into valve.

B. Align threads at point of assembly.

C. Apply appropriate tape or thread compound to the external pipe threads, except where dry

seal threading is specified.

D. Assemble joint, wrench tight. Wrench on valve shall be on the valve end into which the pipe is being threaded.





proper shutoff and retention. 3.5 ADJUSTING VALVES

A. VALVES: Adjust or replace packing after piping systems have been tested and put into service, but before final adjusting and balancing. Replace valves if leak persists.

END OF SECTION

EASTERN DISTRICT POLICE STATION 15127- 1 EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING 28103.01 January 15, 2013

SECTION 15127 - EXPANSION FITTINGS AND LOOPS FOR HVAC PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY


1. Flexible pipe connectors. 2. Expansion joints. 3. Pipe alignment guides. 4. Pipe anchors.


1. Section “Common Work Results for HVAC.” 2. Section “Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment.” 3. Section “HVAC Insulation.” 4. Section “Pipes and Tubes for HVAC Piping and Equipment.” 5. Section “General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping.” 6. Section “Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment”: Product and

installation requirements for piping hangers and supports. 7. Section “Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment”:

Product and installation requirements for vibration isolators used in piping systems.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ASME (American Society of Mechanical Engineers)

1. ASME B16.20, “Metallic Gaskets for Pipe Flanges- Ring-Joint, Spiral-Wound, and Jacketed,” 2007.

2. ASME B16.21, “Nonmetallic Flay Gaskets for Pipe Flanges,” 2005. 3. ASME B31.9, “Building Services Piping,” 2004.

B. AWS (American Welding Society)


Performance Qualification,” 2005. 3. ANSI/AWS D10.12, “Guide for Welding Mild Steel Pipe,” January, 2000.

C. AWWA (American Water Works Association)

1. ANSI/AWWA C111, “Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile-Iron Pressure Pipe and

Fittings,” 2007.

D. IMC (International Mechanical Code), 2009


1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

A. Provide structural work and equipment required for expansion and contraction of piping. Verify anchors, guides, and expansion joints and adequately protect all systems.

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Shop Drawings: Indicate layout of piping systems, including flexible connectors,

expansion joints, expansion compensators, loops, offsets and swing joints.

C. Product Data:

1. Flexible Pipe Connectors: Indicate maximum temperature and pressure rating, face-to-face length, live length, hose wall thickness, hose convolutions per foot and per assembly, fundamental frequency of assembly, braid structure, and total number of wires in braid.

2. Expansion Joints: Indicate maximum temperature and pressure rating, and maximum expansion compensation.

D. Design Data: Indicate criteria and show calculations. Submit sizing methods and

calculations.

E. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit special procedures.

F. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.

1. Manufacturer’s Field Reports: Indicate results of inspection by manufacturer’s representative.


A. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of flexible pipe connectors, expansion joints, anchors, and guides.


Division 1. Include detailed manufacturer's instructions on servicing, disassembling, and adjusting.


A. Perform Work in accordance with ASME B31.9 code for installation of piping systems and ASME Section IX for welding materials and procedures.

B. Perform Work in accordance with all applicable codes and standards.

1.8 QUALIFICATIONS





A. Accept expansion joints on site in factory packing with shipping bars and positioning devices intact. Inspect for damage.

B. Protect equipment from exposure by leaving factory coverings, pipe end protection, and

packaging in place until installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 FLEXIBLE PIPE CONNECTORS:

A. Flexible pipe connectors shall be equal to those manufactured by the Metraflex Corporation and shall be designed for a working pressure of not less than 150 psig with a bursting pressure of not less than 300 psig when handling water at a temperature of 250°F.

B. The flexible pipe connectors shall be made of a corrosion resistant material, such as

bronze or stainless steel with a braided wire cover. Flexible connectors shall be long enough to compensate for the following offset misalignments in piping:

MAXIMUM MAXIMUM PIPE SIZE PERMANENT OFFSET INTERMITTENT OFFSET 2" and smaller 3/8" 1/4" 2 1/2" and larger 3/8” 1/8”

2.2 EXPANSION JOINTS

A. Capability: Absorb 200 percent of maximum piping expansion between anchors.

B. Packless-type Pipe Expansion Joints:

1. Metal-Bellows Packless-Type Pipe Expansion Joints as manufactured by Adsco, Metraflex, or Keflex, Inc.: Pressure rated for 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum; conform to the standards of Expansion Joint Manufacturers Association, Inc. (EJMA); with end fittings and external tie rods for limiting maximum travel. Features include the following: a. Copper Piping Systems: 2-ply phosphor-bronze bellows and brass

shrouds. b. Steel Piping Systems: 2-ply stainless-steel bellows and carbon-steel

shrouds. 2. Expansion-Compensator Packless-Type Pipe Expansion Joints as manufactured

by Adsco, Metraflex, or Keflex, Inc.: Pressure rated for 60 psig (414 kPa) minimum for low-pressure systems and for 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum for high-pressure systems. Include 2-ply phosphor bronze bellows, brass shrouds, and end fittings for copper piping systems and 2-ply stainless-steel bellows, carbon-steel shrouds, and end fittings for steel piping systems. Include internal guides, antitorque device, and removable end clip for proper positioning.

3. Rubber-Sphere Packless-Type Pipe Expansion Joints as manufactured by Metraflex, Keflex, or Vibration Mountings: Double-sphere type, fabric-reinforced butyl rubber with full-faced integral flanges, external control rods, and internal reinforcing. Include steel retaining rings drilled to match flange bolt holes over


entire surface of flanges. Pressure rating is 175 psig (1200 kPa) minimum at 240°F (116°C) minimum.

C. Miscellaneous Materials:

1. Structural Steel: ASTM A36/A36M, steel plates, shapes, and bars, black and

galvanized. 2. Bolts and Nuts: ASME B18.10, or ASTM A183, steel, hex-head, track bolts and

nuts. 3. Washers: ASTM F844, steel, plain, flat washers.

D. Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Attachments with pull-out and shear capacities appropriate

for supported loads and building materials where used.

E. Concrete: Portland-cement mix, 3000 psi (20.7 Mpa):

1. Cement: ASTM C150, Type I. 2. Fine Aggregate: ASTM C33, sand. 3. Coarse Aggregate: ASTM C33, crushed gravel. 4. Water: Potable.

F. Grout: ASTM C 1107, Grade B, non-shrink, nonmetallic:

1. Characteristics include post-hardening volume-adjusting dry

hydraulic-cement-type grout that is non-staining, noncorrosive, nongaseous and is recommended for both interior and exterior applications.

2. Design Mix: 5000 psi (34.5 MPa), 28-day compressive strength. 3. Water: Potable. 4. Packaging: Premixed and factory-packaged.

2.3 PIPE ALIGNMENT GUIDES

A. Systems greater than 70°F operating temperature: Provide Erico (formerly known as Michigan) Model No. 650, or equivalent.

B. Systems less than 70°F operating temperature: Provide Erico (formerly known as

Michigan) Model No. 651, or equivalent. 2.4 PIPE ANCHORS

A. Provide Erico (formerly known as Michigan) Model 710, or equivalent. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 INSTALLATION

A. Pipe Expansion Joint Installation:

1. Install pipe expansion joints according to manufacturer's written instructions. 2. Align expansion joints to avoid end-loading and torsional stress.

B. Fabricated-type Pipe Expansion Compensation Installation:

1. Install pipe expansion loops cold-sprung in tension or compression as required to

absorb 50 percent of total compression or tension that will be produced during


anticipated change in temperature. 2. Connect risers to mains with at least 5 pipe fittings including tee in main. 3. Connect risers to terminal units with at least 4 pipe fittings including tee in riser.

C. Pipe Alignment Guide Installation:

1. Install pipe alignment guides on piping that adjoins pipe expansion joints. 2. Install pipe alignment guides on piping that adjoins pipe expansion loops. 3. Install pipe alignment guides on piping elsewhere as indicated. 4. Secure pipe alignment guides to building substrate.

D. Pipe Anchor Installation:

1. Install pipe anchors at proper locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those

permitted by ASME B31.9, and to prevent transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment.

2. Fabricate and install anchors by welding steel shapes, plates, and bars to piping and to structure. Comply with ASME B31.9 and with AWS D1.1.

3. Construct concrete pipe anchors of poured-in-place concrete of dimensions indicated.

4. Where pipe expansion joints are indicated, install pipe anchors according to expansion unit manufacturer's written instructions to control movement to compensators.

5. Pipe Anchor Spacings: Where not otherwise indicated, install pipe anchors at ends of principal pipe runs, at intermediate points in pipe runs between expansion loops and bends. Preset anchors as required to accommodate both expansion and contraction of piping.

6. Use grout to form flat bearing surfaces for pipe expansion joints, pipe alignment guides, and pipe anchors that are installed on or in concrete.


A. Certified Manufacturer’s Installation Report: Prepare a certified report covering installation of pipe expansion joints, pipe alignment guides, and pipe anchors.

END OF SECTION

EASTERN DISTRICT POLICE STATION 15184- 1 REFRIGERANT PIPING 28103.01 January 15, 2013

SECTION 15184 - REFRIGERANT PIPING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this and the other Sections of Division 15.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes design and installation of refrigerant piping used for air conditioning applications. Design and installation shall be provided in accordance with equipment manufacturer’s recommendations. This Section includes:

1. Pipes, tubing, fittings, and specialties. 2. Special duty valves. 3. Refrigerants.

B. Products installed but not furnished under this Section include pre-charged tubing,

refrigerant specialties, and refrigerant accessories furnished as an integral part of packaged air conditioning equipment.

C. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this section:

1. Section "Common Work Results for HVAC": Labeling and identification of

refrigerant piping. 2. Section “Hangers and Supports for HVAC piping and equipment.” 3. Section “Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC piping and equipment.” 4. Section "Mechanical Insulation": Pipe insulation. 5. Section “Identification for HVAV piping and equipment.” 6. Section “Testing Adjusting Balancing for HVAC.”

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Product data for the following products:

1. Each type valve specified. 2. Each type refrigerant piping specialty specified.

B. Submit Shop Drawings showing design and layout of refrigerant piping, valves, expansion

valves, drains accumulators, traps, hot gas bypass, filters, and miscellaneous specialties, etc. Shop Drawings shall also include but not necessarily be limited to, pipe and tube sizes, valve arrangements and locations, slopes of horizontal runs, wall and floor penetrations, and equipment connection details. Show interface and spatial relationship between piping and proximate to equipment. Provide a letter from the equipment manufacturer certifying the design is being provided in accordance with the equipment manufacturer’s criteria.

C. Brazer's Certificates signed by Contractor certifying that brazers comply with

requirements specified under "Quality Assurance" below.

D. Maintenance data for refrigerant valves and piping specialties, for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manual specified in Division 1 and Division 15 Section "Common Work Results for HVAC."



A. Qualify brazing processes and brazing operators in accordance with ASME "Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code," Section IX, "Welding and Brazing Qualifications".

B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with provisions of the following codes:

1. ANSI B31.5: ASME Code for Pressure Piping - Refrigerant Piping, latest edition. 2. ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 15: Safety Code for Mechanical Refrigeration, latest

edition. 3. International Mechanical and Plumbing Codes, latest edition.

1.5 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING

A. Coordinate the installation of roof piping supports, and roof penetrations. Roof specialties are specified in Division 7


A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

1. Refrigerant Valves and Specialties:

a. Alco Controls Div, Emerson Electric. b. Danfoss Electronics, Inc. c. EATON Corporation, Control Div. d. Henry Valve Company. e. Parker-Hannifin Corporation, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Division. f. Sporlan Valve Company.

2.2 PIPE AND TUBING MATERIALS

A. General: Refer to Part 3, Article "Pipe Application" for identification of systems where the below specified pipe and fitting materials are used.

B. Copper Tubing: ASTM B 280, Type ACR, hard-drawn straight lengths, and soft-annealed

coils, seamless copper tubing. Tubing shall be factory cleaned, ready for installation, and have ends capped to protect cleanliness of pipe interiors prior to shipping.

2.3 FITTING MATERIALS

A. Wrought-Copper Fittings: ANSI B16.22, streamlined pattern. 2.4 JOINING MATERIALS

A. Brazing Filler for Joining Similar Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification BCuP series, with melting range from 1190 to 1480°F.

B. Brazing Filler for Joining Dissimilar Metals: AWS A5.8, Classification BAg series, with melting range from 1125 to 1370°F.

2.5 VALVES

A. General: Complete valve assembly shall be UL-listed and designed to conform to ARI 760.


B. Globe: 450 psig maximum operating pressure, 275°F maximum operating temperature;

cast bronze body, with cast bronze or forged brass wing cap and bolted bonnet; replaceable resilient seat disc; plated steel stem. Valve shall be capable of being repacked under pressure. Valve shall be straight through or angle pattern, with solder-end connections.

C. Check Valves - Smaller Than 7/8 inch: 500 psig maximum operating pressure, 300 °F

maximum operating temperature; cast brass body, with removable piston, Teflon seat, and stainless steel spring; straight through globe design. Valve shall be straight through pattern, with solder-end connections.

D. Check Valves - 7/8 inch and Larger: 450 psig maximum operating pressure, 300°F

maximum operating temperature; cast bronze body, with cast bronze or forged brass bolted bonnet; floating piston with mechanically retained Teflon seat disc. Valve shall be straight through or angle pattern, with solder-end connections.

E. Solenoid Valves: 250°F temperature rating, 400 psig working pressure; forged brass,

with Teflon valve seat, two-way straight through pattern, and solder end connections. Provide manual operator to open valve. Furnish complete with NEMA 1 solenoid enclosure with 1/2 inch conduit adapter, and 24 volt, 60 Hz. normally closed holding coil.

F. Evaporator Pressure Regulating Valves: pilot-operated, forged brass or cast bronze;

complete with pilot operator, stainless steel bottom spring, pressure gage tappings, 24 volts DC, 50/60 Hz, standard coil; and wrought copper fittings for solder end connections.

G. Thermal Expansion Valves: thermostatic adjustable, modulating type; size as required for

specific evaporator requirements, and factory set for proper evaporator superheat requirements. Valves shall have copper fittings for solder end connections; complete with sensing bulb, a distributor having a side connection for hot gas bypass line, and an external equalizer line.

H. Hot Gas Bypass Valve: adjustable type, sized to provide capacity reduction beyond the

last step of compressor unloading; and wrought copper fittings for solder end connections.

2.6 REFRIGERANT PIPING SPECIALTIES

A. General: Complete refrigerant piping specialty assembly shall be UL-listed and designed to conform to ARI 760.

B. Strainers: 500 psig maximum working pressure; forged brass body with monel 80-mesh

screen, and screwed cleanout plug; Y-pattern, with solder end connections.

C. Moisture/liquid Indicators: 500 psig maximum operation pressure, 200°F maximum operating temperature; forged brass body, with replaceable polished optical viewing window, and solder end connections.

D. Filter-driers: 500 psig maximum operation pressure; steel shell, flange ring, and spring,

ductile iron cover plate with steel capscrews, and wrought copper fittings for solder end connections. Furnish complete with replaceable filter-drier core kit, including gaskets, as follows:

1. Standard capacity desiccant sieves to provide micronic filtration.

E. Suction Line Filter-Drier: 350 psig maximum operation pressure, 225°F maximum


operating temperature; steel shell, and wrought copper fittings for solder end connections. Permanent filter element shall be molded felt core surrounded by a desiccant for removal of acids and moisture for refrigerant vapor.

F. Suction Line Filters: 500 psig maximum operation pressure; steel shell, flange ring, and

spring, ductile iron cover plate with steel capscrews, and wrought copper fittings for solder end connections. Furnish complete with replaceable filter core kit, including gaskets, as follows:

G. Flanged Unions: 400 psig maximum working pressure, 330°F maximum operating

temperature; two brass tailpiece adapters for solder end connections to copper tubing; flanges for 7/8 inch through 1-5/8 inch unions shall be forged steel, and for 2-1/8 inch through 3-1/8 inch shall be ductile iron; four plated steel bolts, with silicon bronze nuts and fiber gasket. Flanges and bolts shall have factory-applied rust-resistant coating.

H. Flexible Connectors: 500 psig maximum operating pressure; seamless tin bronze or

stainless steel core, high tensile bronze braid covering, solder connections, and synthetic covering; dehydrated, pressure tested, minimum 7 inch in length.

I. Suction Accumulators: Provide as manufactured by Refrigeration Research, Inc.

2.7 REFRIGERANT: Type shall be provided to suit equipment being served. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine rough-in for refrigerant piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installation.

3.2 PREPARATION

A. Pre-Cleaning:

1. Before installation of copper tubing other than Type ACR tubing, clean the tubing and fitting using following cleaning procedure: a. Remove coarse particles of dirt and dust by drawing a clean, lintless cloth

through the tubing by means of a wire or an electrician’s tape. b. Draw a clean, lintless cloth saturated with trichloroethylene through the

tube or pipe. Continue this procedure until cloth is not discolored by dirt. c. Draw a clean, lintless cloth, saturated with compressor oil, squeezed dry,

through the tube or pipe to remove remaining lint. Inspect tube or pipe visually for remaining dirt and lint.

d. Finally, draw a clean, dry, lintless cloth through the tube or pipe. 3.3 INSTALLATION OF HANGERS AND SUPPORTS

A. General: Hangers, supports, and anchors are specified in Section "Supports and Anchors."

3.4 INSTALLATION OF VALVING

A. General: Install refrigerant valves where indicated, and in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

B. Install globe valves on each side of strainers and driers, in liquid and suction lines at


evaporators, and elsewhere in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

C. Install a full sized, 3-valve bypass around each drier.

D. Install solenoid valves ahead of each expansion valve and hot-gas bypass valve. Install solenoid valves in horizontal lines with coil at the top.

1. Electrical wiring for solenoid valves is specified in Division 26. Coordinate

electrical requirements and connections.

E. Thermostatic expansion valves may be mounted in any position, as close as possible to the evaporator.

1. Where refrigerant distributors are used, mount the distributor directly on the

expansion valve outlet. 2. Install the valve in such a location so that the diaphragm case is warmer than the

bulb. 3. Secure the bulb to a clean, straight, horizontal section of the suction line using

two bulb straps. Do not mount bulb in a trap or at the bottom of the line. 4. Where external equalizer lines are required, make the connection where it will

clearly reflect the pressure existing in the suction line at the bulb location.

F. Install pressure regulating and relieving valves as required by ASHRAE Standard 15. 3.5 PIPING APPLICATION

A. Provide Type ACR drawn copper tubing with wrought copper fittings and brazed joints above ground, within building. Provide Type K, annealed temper copper tubing for 2 inch and smaller without joints, within enclosed areas. Mechanical fittings (crimp or flair) are not permitted.

1. Install annealed temper tubing in pipe duct. Vent pipe duct to the outside.

3.6 INSTALLATION OF PIPING

A. Size piping and install refrigerant piping, traps, specialties as necessary for a complete and operational system in accordance with equipment manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. General: Install refrigerant piping in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 15 "The Safety

Code for Mechanical Refrigeration". Unless specified otherwise by the Section, comply with “Installation of Piping - General” as specified in Section “Building Services Piping.”

C. Install piping in as short and direct arrangement as possible to minimize pressure drop.

D. Install piping for minimum number of joints using as few elbows and other fitting as

possible.

E. Arrange piping to allow normal inspection and servicing of compressor and other equipment. Install valves and specialties in accessible locations to allow for servicing and inspection.

F. Provide adequate clearance between pipe and adjacent walls and hanger, or between

pipes for insulation installation. Use sleeves through floors, walls, or ceilings, sized to permit installation of full thickness insulation.

G. Insulate suction lines. Liquid lines are not required to be insulated, except where they are


installed adjacent and clamped to suction lines, where both liquid and suction lines shall be insulated as a unit.

1. Do not install insulation until system testing has been completed and all leaks

have been eliminated.

H. Install branch tie-in lines to parallel compressors equal length, and pipe identically and symmetrically.

I. Install copper tubing in rigid or flexible conduit in locations where copper tubing will be

exposed to mechanical injury.

J. Slope refrigerant piping as follows:

1. Install horizontal hot gas discharge piping with 1/2" per 10 feet downward slope away from the compressor.

2. Install horizontal suction lines with 1/2" per 10 feet downward slope to the compressor, with no long traps or dead ends which may cause oil to separate from the suction gas and return to the compressor in damaging slugs.

3. Install traps and double risers and where required in accordance with equipment manufacturer’s recommendations to entrain oil in vertical runs.

4. Liquid lines may be installed level.

K. Use fittings for all changes in direction and all branch connections.

L. Install exposed piping at right angles or parallel to building walls. Diagonal runs are not permitted, unless expressly indicated.

M. Install piping free of sags or bends and with ample space between piping to permit proper

insulation applications.

N. Conceal all pipe installations in walls, pipe chases, utility spaces, above ceilings, below grade or floors, unless indicated to be exposed to view.

O. Install piping tight to slabs, beams, joists, columns, walls, and other permanent elements

of the building. Provide space to permit insulation applications, with 1” clearance outside the insulation. Allow sufficient space above removable ceiling panels to allow for panel removal.

P. Locate groups of pipes parallel to each other, spaced to permit applying insulation and

servicing of valves.

Q. Exterior Wall Penetrations: Seal pipe penetrations through exterior walls using sleeves and mechanical sleeve seals. Pipe sleeves smaller than 6” shall be steel; pipe sleeves 6” and larger shall be sheet metal.

R. Fire Barrier Penetrations: Where pipes pass through fire rated walls, partitions, ceilings,

and floors, maintain the fire rated integrity. Refer to Division 7 for special sealers and materials.

S. Make reductions in pipe sizes using eccentric reducer fittings installed with the level side

down.

T. Install strainers immediately ahead of each expansion valve, solenoid valve, hot gas bypass valve, compressor suction valve, and as required to protect refrigerant piping system components.


U. Install moisture/liquid indicators in liquid lines between filter/driers and thermostatic

expansion valves and in liquid line to receiver.

1. Install moisture/liquid indicators in lines larger than 2 1/8” OD, using a bypass line.

V. Install unions to allow removal of solenoid valves, pressure regulating valves, expansion

valves, and at connections to compressors and evaporators.

W. Install flexible connectors at the inlet and discharge connection of compressors. 3.7 CONSTRUCTION

A. Pipe Joints:

1. Brazed Joints: Comply with the procedures contained in the AWS "Brazing Manual." a. WARNING: Some filler metals contain compounds which produce highly

toxic fumes when heated. Avoid breathing fumes. Provide adequate ventilation.

b. CAUTION: When solenoid valves are being installed, remove the coil to prevent damage. When sight glasses are being installed, remove the glass. Remove stems, seats, and packing of valves, and accessible internal parts of refrigerant specialties before brazing. Do no apply heat near the bulb of the expansion valve.

2. Fill the pipe and fittings during brazing, with an inert gas (i.e., nitrogen or carbon dioxide) to prevent formation of scale.

3. Heat joints using oxy-acetylene torch. Heat to proper and uniform brazing temperature.

B. Equipment Connections:

1. The Drawings indicate the general arrangement of piping and fittings. 2. Install piping adjacent to machine to allow servicing and maintenance.

3.8 REFRIGERANT PIPING SYSTEMS

A. Inspect, test and perform corrective action of refrigerant piping in accordance with ASME Code B31.5, Chapter VI, “Refrigerant Piping and Heat Transfer Components”, 2001, and as follows:

1. All refrigerant tubing shall be tested before tube insulation is applied. 2. Note: The use of compressed air for pressure testing refrigerant tubing will not be

permitted. 3. Refrigerant relieve valves, if installed, shall be removed prior to pressure testing

and shell openings plugged. After system is tested and found to be completely tight, relief valves shall be reinstalled prior to system evacuation.

4. Each tubing system shall be pressure tested with dry nitrogen. Leaks shall be repaired by removing and remaking the defective joint. No caulking will be permitted. After repair of leaks, system shall be retested and provided tight.

5. Tubing shall be tested as a minimum of 300 psig on the high side of 225 psig on the low side. Suggested procedure is as follows: a. Charge system with oil pumped dry nitrogen to a pressure of 100 psig.

Make a soap bubble test of all joints and all connections. Mark all leaks, blow down and repair all leaks.


b. After above test and repair, charge high side with R-507 or R-12, R-22 or R-502 gas (based upon application) to a pressure of 30 psig. Make a rapid leak check at this pressure using an electronic leak detector. If no leaks are found, raise pressure to 300 psig on the high side of 225 psig on the low side using oil pumped dry nitrogen.

c. Leave nitrogen and refrigerant mixture overnight to permit mixing by diffusion. Check diffusion and leak tester operation by venting a flange or valve stem. Make a thorough leak test. If leaks are found, blow down, repair and retest. Continue this procedure until entire system is provided to be absolutely tight.

d. After the refrigerant piping has been pressure tested and proven tight, and before piping insulation s applied, the entire system shall be evacuated with a vacuum pump to remove air and moisture. Evacuation shall be performed with all spaces containing refrigerant piping or equipment at no lower than 50°F.

e. Manual valves except those open to atmosphere shall be opened and all controls such as solenoids shall be jacked open. Any gauges or pressure controls which could be damaged by a deep vacuum shall be valved off. Seal caps on valves shall be in place and tight. Any valves open to atmosphere shall be closed and capped.

f. The entire system shall be double evacuated to 1500 microns Hg absolute (1.5 torr) as follows: 1) When vacuum pump is started, vacuum should pull down fairly

rapidly to 25,000 microns Hg absolute (28.94”). If vacuum does not pull below 25,000 microns, there are leaks in the system and leak test procedure must be repeated.

2) At approximately 10,000 microns, evaporation of free water in the system will be rapidly accelerated and vacuum will tend to remain constant as evaporation rate begins to equal vacuum pump capacity. Depending on amount of water, ambient temperature and vacuum pump capacity, it may take several hours to make any noticeable decrease in vacuum below 10,000 microns. During this period, apply heat to any low points or suspected points of moisture. Feel pipes for cold spots and supply heat.

3) Continue evacuation until a pressure of 1,500 microns (1.5 torr) minimum is reached, then break the vacuum and pressurize to 10 psig with oil pumped dry nitrogen as a holding charge until ready for charging.

4) When ready for charging, vent nitrogen holding charge to atmosphere and re-evacuate down to a minimum of 1,500 microns. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas. Do not use liquid.

g. Repair leaking joints using new materials, and retest for leaks. 3.9 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING

A. Verify actual evaporator applications and operating conditions, and adjust thermostatic expansion valve to obtain proper evaporator superheat requirements.

B. Clean and inspect refrigerant piping systems in accordance with industry standards.

C. Adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged or malfunctioning controls and

equipment with new materials and products. 3.10 COMMISSIONING

A. Charge system using the following procedure:


1. Install core in filter dryer after leak test but before evacuation. 2. Evacuate refrigerant system with vacuum pump; until temperature of 35°F is

indicated on vacuum dehydration indicator. 3. During evacuation, apply heat to pockets, elbows, and low spots in piping. 4. Maintain vacuum on system for minimum of 5 hours after closing valve between

vacuum pump and system. 5. Break vacuum with refrigerant gas; allow pressure to build up to 2 psi. 6. Complete charging of system, using new filter dryer core in charging line. Provide

full operating charge.

B. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to start-up and shut-down, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventative maintenance of refrigerant piping valves and refrigerant piping specialties.

C. Review data in Operating and Maintenance Manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section "Project

Closeout."

D. Schedule training with Owner through the Architect, with at least seven (7) days advance notice.

END OF SECTION

EASTERN DISTRICT POLICE STATION 15400 - 1 PLUMBING EQUIPMENT 28103.01 January 15, 2013

SECTION 15400 - PLUMBING EQUIPMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes:

1. Plumbing fixtures and trim, fittings, and accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, and supports associated with plumbing fixtures.

2. Water Heaters. 3. Domestic Hot Water Re-Circulating Pumps. 4. Sump pump


1. Section “Common Work Results for Plumbing” 2. Section “Pipes and Tubes for Plumbing Piping and Equipment” 3. Section “General Duty Values for Plumbing Piping”

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Accessible: Describes a plumbing fixture, building, facility, or portion thereof that can be approached, entered, and used by physically handicapped people.

B. Accessory: Device that adds effectiveness, convenience, or improved appearance to

a fixture but is not essential to its operation.

C. Appliance: Device or machine designed and intended to perform a specific function. D. Appurtenance: Device or assembly designed to perform some useful function when

attached to or used with a fixture.

E. Equipment: Device used with plumbing fixtures or plumbing systems to perform a certain function for plumbing fixtures but that is not part of the fixture.

F. Fitting: Fitting installed on or attached to a fixture to control the flow of water into or out of the fixture.

G. Fixture: Installed receptor connected to the water distribution system, that receives

and makes available potable water and discharges the used liquid or liquid-borne wastes directly or indirectly into the drainage system. The term "Fixture" means the actual receptor, except when used in a general application where terms "Fixture" and "Plumbing Fixture" include associated trim, fittings, accessories, appliances, appurtenances, support, and equipment.

H. Roughing-In: Installation of piping and support for the fixture prior to the actual

installation of the fixture.


I. Support: Device normally concealed in building construction, for supporting and securing plumbing fixtures to walls and structural members. Supports for urinals, lavatories, and sinks are made in types suitable for fixture construction and the mounting required. Categories of supports are:

1. Carrier: Floor-mounted support for wall-mounted water closet, and support fixed

to wall construction for wall-hung fixture. 2. Chair Carrier: Support for wall-hung fixture, having steel pipe uprights that

transfer weight to the floor. 3. Chair Carrier, Heavy Duty: Support for wall-hung fixture, having rectangular steel

uprights that transfer weight to the floor. 4. Reinforcement: Wood blocking or steel plate built into wall construction, for

securing fixture to wall.

J. Trim: Hardware and miscellaneous parts, specific to a fixture and normally supplied with it required to complete fixture assembly and installation.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS

A. Pressure Rating of Water Storage Tanks and Pressurized Accessories: At least equal to system operating pressure, but not less than 100 psig (690 kPa).

B. Pressure Rating of Piping for Pressure Systems: At least equal to system operating

pressure, but not less than 125 psig (860 kPa).

C. Pressure Rating of Other Tanks and Piping Components: At least equal to system operating pressure.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. Product data for the following:

1. Each type of plumbing fixture specified, including fixture and trim, fittings,

accessories, appliances, appurtenances, equipment, supports, construction details, dimensions of components, and finishes.

2. Rated capacities of water heaters, and other equipment, including weights, specialties, dimensions, wall thicknesses, coating, clearances, etc.

C. Wiring diagrams for field-installed wiring of electrically operated units.


A. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with requirements of ANSI Standard, "Buildings and Facilities -- Providing Accessibility and Usability for Physically Handicapped People," and the “Americans for Disability Act” (ADA), with respect to plumbing fixtures for the physically handicapped.

B. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) Compliance: Fabricate and stamp

steel hot water storage tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section VIII, “Pressure Vessels.”


C. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME) Compliance: Fabricate and stamp fiberglass softener tanks to comply with ASME Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code, Section X, “Fiber-Reinforced Plastic Pressure Vessels.”

D. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) Compliance: Water softeners constructed

according to NSF 44, “Standard for Cation Exchange Water Softeners.”

E. Ion-Exchange Resin Standard: Provide resin products acceptable to public health authorities having jurisdiction.

F. Electrical Component Standard: Provide components that comply with NFPA 70.

G. Listing and Labeling: Provide equipment specified in this Section that is listed and

labeled.

1. The terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.

2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.

H. Product Options: The Drawings and Specifications indicate sizes, profiles,

connections, and dimensional requirements of water softener equipment and are based on the specific types and models indicated. Other manufacturers’ products with equal performance characteristics may be considered. Refer to Divisions 1 Section “Substitutions.”

I. Design Concept: The drawings indicate types of plumbing fixtures and are based on

the specific descriptions, manufacturers, models, and numbers indicated. Plumbing fixtures having equal performance characteristics by other manufacturers may be considered provided that deviations in dimensions, operation, color or finish, or other characteristics are minor and do not change the design concept or intended performance as judged by the Architect. Burden of proof for equality of plumbing fixtures is on the proposer.


A. Deliver plumbing products in manufacturer's protective packing, crating, and covering.

B. Store plumbing products on elevated platforms in a dry location. 1.8 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Deliver extra materials to Owner. Furnish extra materials described below matching products installed, packaged with protective covering for storage, and identified with labels clearly describing contents.

1. Faucet Washers and O-rings: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 10

percent of amount of each installed. 2. Faucet Cartridges and O-rings: Furnish quantity of identical units not less than 5

percent of amount of each installed. 3. Provide a hinged-top wood or metal box, or individual metal boxes, having a

separate compartment for each type and size of above extra materials. 4. Filter Cartridges: Furnish quantity of identical filter cartridges not less than 50

percent of amount of each type and size installed.


1.9 DEFINITIONS

A. Lead Free:

1. The pipes, pipe fittings, plumbing fittings or fixtures in plumbing systems that are intended to dispense potable

2. Solder and flux for soldered joints in potable water piping shall be “lead free”, containing not more than 0.2% lead free

water for human consumption, including drinking and cooking, shall be “lead free”, containing not more than a weighted average of 0.25% lead with respect to the wetted surfaces.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PLUMBING FIXTURES, GENERAL

A. Furnish and install all fixtures and trim, including fixture supports necessary to complete

fixture installation. Provide approved stop valves to match fittings on both hot and cold water supplies to each fixture. All fixtures requiring hot and cold water shall have cold water faucets on right and hot water faucet on left. Exposed metal work, including fixtures, shall be white, unless otherwise specified. (Note: The "P" identification symbol with each fixture identified type shown on the contract drawings). Where fixture tailpieces, traps and stop valves are not included, same shall be provided to suit fixture.

B. The basis of design shall be as listed for each plumbing fixture. Comparable products as

manufactured by American Standard, Elkay, Moen, or Fiat/Crane shall be submitted for approval as a comparable product. All colors and finishes shall be approved by the project Architect.

P-1 Water Closet

: Provide American Standard Madera Elongated 10” Rough water closet, Model 2234.015, vitreous china water low consumption and floor mounted. Provide Sloan Optima Plus low consumption (1.28 GPF) flush valve. Olsonite Seat Co. #96SSTL White open front seat.

P-1A Water Closet (Handicapped)

: Provide American Standard Madera Elongated 10” Rough 17” rim height handicapped, water closet, Model 2234.015, vitreous china water low consumption and floor mounted. Provide Sloan Optima Plus low consumption (1.28 GPF) flush valve. Olsonite Seat Co. #96SSTL White open front seat.

P-1B Combination water closet and Lavatory

: Provide Bradley stainless steel security fixture combination water closet and lavatory model COMBI5500. Lavatory shall be Die-drawn oval bowl has multiple-hole fast drain with air vent. Self-draining soap dishes are formed into countertop. Water closet shall be Elongated die-drawn bowl has blowout jet action for positive flush. 30 PSI (fl owing into flush valve) required for flushing. Provide low flow Flush valve (1.6 GPF).

P-1C Combination water closet and Lavatory (Handicapped)

: Provide Bradley stainless steel security fixture combination water closet and lavatory model COMBI5100. Lavatory shall be Die-drawn oval bowl has multiple-hole fast drain with air vent. Self-draining soap dishes are formed into countertop. Water closet shall be Elongated die-drawn bowl has blowout jet action for positive flush. 30 PSI (fl owing into flush valve) required for flushing. Provide low flow Flush valve (1.6 GPF).

P-2 Urinal: Provide American Standard FLoWise Flush Free Waterless Urinal Model 6150.100. Vitreous china no water wall hung with drain flange coupler, odor barrier liquid and drain inserts.


P-2A Urinal (Handicapped)

: Provide American Standard FLoWise Flush Free Waterless Urinal Model 6150.100. Vitreous china no water wall hung with drain flange coupler, odor barrier liquid and drain inserts.

P-3 Lavatory Countertop

: Provide American Standard Colony Round Counter top sink model 3003.605. Acid resisting enamel steel, front overflow , and self rimming with cutout template supplied. Provide Moen solid brass body with chrome plated model 8301. Faucet shall be, lead free, vandal resistant low flow (0.5 gpm) with adjustable battery operated infrared sensor.

P-3A Lavatory Countertop (Handicapped)

: Provide American Standard Colony Round Counter top sink model 3003.605. Acid resisting enamel steel, front overflow , and self rimming with cutout template supplied. Provide Moen solid brass body with chrome plated model 8301. Faucet shall be, lead free, vandal resistant low flow (0.5 gpm) with adjustable battery operated infrared sensor.

P-3B Lavatory Wall Hung (Handicapped)

: Provide American Standard Roxalyn wall hung lavatory model 0195.073. Vitreous chine front overflow lavatory. Provide Moen solid brass body with chrome plated model 8301. Faucet shall be, lead free, vandal resistant low flow (0.5 gpm) with adjustable battery operated infrared sensor.

P-4 Water Cooler: Provide Halsey Taylor high efficeny vandal resistant indoor water fountain model HVRGRN8. Unit shall be, lead free, self-contained electric refrigerated water cooler that shall deliver 8.0 GPH of 50º F water at 90º F ambient and 80º F inlet water. Shall have stainless steel basin with removable drain strainer. Bubbler shall be one-piece, lower-flow, vandal-resistant. Separate valve and automatic stream regulator shall be mounted within cabinet. Refrigeration system shall employ high-efficiency, positive start compressor using R134A, non-pressurized tank with optimized heat transfer and totally encapsulated insulation and be controlled by positive sensing thermostat. Unit shall comply with ANSI 117.1 and ADA for visual and motion disabilities. P-4A Water Cooler (Handicapped): Provide Halsey Taylor high efficeny vandal resistant indoor water fountain model HVRGRN8. Unit shall be, lead free, self-contained electric refrigerated water cooler that shall deliver 8.0 GPH of 50º F water at 90º F ambient and 80º F inlet water. Shall have stainless steel basin with removable drain strainer. Bubbler shall be one-piece, lower-flow, vandal-resistant. Separate valve and automatic stream regulator shall be mounted within cabinet. Refrigeration system shall employ high-efficiency, positive start compressor using R134A, non-pressurized tank with optimized heat transfer and totally encapsulated insulation and be controlled by positive sensing thermostat. Unit shall comply with ANSI 117.1 and ADA for visual and motion disabilities. P-5 Shower

: Provide Fiat Pilot Shower Stall model 99M30. Durable cabinet shall be made of #24 gauge galvanized-bonderized steel finished with a white baked-on enamel finish inside and out. Unit comes with soap dish. Provide Zurn low flow Auqa Spec mixing valve and shower head (1.5 GPM).

P-5A Shower (Handicapped): One piece acrylic barrier free handicapped shower modules shall be an Aquarius model S4136BF as manufactured by Praxis Industries, Inc., Crane Plumbing/Fiat Products, or approved equal and shall be vacuum-formed from continuous cast acrylic sheet into one piece seamless units. Units shall be reinforced in the backs with fiberglass polyester resin and have a backside fire rating of "A" and flame spread of 25. Provide units with 2" cast brass chrome plated shower drains. All units shall have anti-skid floor to meet ASTMF-462-78. Shower units shall


come with the following: a. Grab bars. b. Fold-up wheelchair transfer seat. c. Shower curtains 10 oz's with curtain hooks CSA approved. d. Model 1195 DL, dome light, round shower light.

Provide ZURN low flow (1.5 GPM) hand/wall shower unit with slide bar and bracket model Z7000-HW-H9, with . Mixing valve and handle show be mounted off center per ADA requirements. P-6 Mop Sink

: Fiat Products Model No. TSB-3000 or approved equal, 1 piece 12” high with 6” drop front. Provide with the following:

2. Fiat 832-AA hose and hose bracket or approved equal. 3. Fiat 830-AA service faucet or approved equal 2.5 gpm. P-7 Dishwasher

: Provided under another division

P-8 Sink

: Provide American standard single bowl kitchen sink model 7143.803. Acid resisting enameled 3-hole sink with self rimming installation. Provide Delta single handle center set kitchen faucet, lead free, model 100LF-HDF (1.5 GPM).

C. Protect chromium plated trim from corrosive solutions and used to clean tile work.

D. Protect chromium plated trim from corrosive solutions used to clean tile work.

E. Provide white, silicon caulking where fixtures come in contact with walls and

floors. Sealant shall be mildew resistant type in accordance with ANSI A-136.1.

2.2 SHOCK ABSORBERS

A. Furnish and install shock absorbers on the domestic water system, where indicated, where recommended by the manufacturer, and where required by National Standard Plumbing Code.

B. Size shock absorbers in accordance with P.D.I. Standard WH201 and as recommended by the manufacturer.

C. `Shock absorbers shall be pre-charged and permanently sealed from water system requiring no recharging.

2.3 DEEP SEAL TRAPS

A. Except as otherwise specified, provide all floor drains discharging into sanitary sewer with deep seal traps.

2.4 VACUUM BREAKERS

A. Provide vacuum breakers on water connections to fixtures and equipment where minimum air gaps required by Plumbing Code are not possible and on hose bibbs and other outlets to which hoses can be attached.


B. Vacuum breakers not subject to back pressure. Watts No. 288A vacuum breakers subject to back pressure, Watts Series 9D or for hose threads, Watts Series 8A. On expansion tanks and incoming water service, provide Watts 909 with gate valves

2.5 PLUMBING FIXTURE SUPPORTS

A. Supports: ASME A112.6.1M, categories and types as required for wall-hanging fixtures specified, and wall reinforcement.

B. Support categories are:

1. Chair Carriers, Heavy Duty: Supports with rectangular steel uprights for

wall-hanging fixtures. 2. Reinforcement: 2-inch by 4-inch wood blocking between studs or 1/4-inch by

6-inch steel plates attached to studs, in wall construction, to secure floor-mounted and special fixtures to wall.

C. Support Types: Provide support of category specified, of type having features required

to match fixture.

2.6 GAS WATER HEATER (WH-1 & 2)

A. The water heater shall be a Lochinvar TurboCharger TNR Series, Model No. 200-100.

The unit shall be a factory assembled and tested packaged water heater with a total thermal efficiency of 98%.

B. The burner section shall have a sealed submerged combustion chamber, for direct

venting using PVC, CPVC, or ABS with a low NOx operation that exceeds air quality requirements of all code jurisdictions.

1. The flue design shall provide for multiple passes to assure thermal efficiency. 2. The burner shall have an electronic ignition system.

C. Storage tank shall be heavy strength steel tested to twice the rated capacity of 150 psi.

The tank shall have a heavy gauge steel jacket with a minimum R 16 foam insulation. The tank shall be glass lined and provided with tank protecting anodes. The tank shall be provided with ASME temperature and pressure relief valve and brass drain valve.

2.7 DOMESTIC HOT WATER RE-CIRCULATING PUMPS (RCP-1)

A. Domestic hot water re-circulating pump shall be PL-Series as manufactured by Bell and Gossett. Comparable products as manufactured by Taco shall be submitted for approval as a comparable product. Refer to contract drawings for sizes and capacities.

B. Pump shall have the following features:

1. Close – coupled dry motor 2. Permanently lubricated sealed bearings. 3. Bronze body construction 4. Stainless steel face plate 5. 30% glass filled PPS impeller


6. High strength solid alloy steel shaft 7. Carbon / Silcon carbide seal 8. ODP motor.

2.8 SUMP PUMP (SP-1) A. General

1. Contractor shall provide a simplex elevator pit pump and control system(s). Pump

system shall be capable of pumping water while containing oil.

2. The system shall function automatically and shall provide for an alarm in the event of (a) the presence of oil in the sump, (b) high liquid in the sump or (c) high amps or a locked rotor condition. If water should re-enter the pit before oil alarm condition is cleared, the system shall continue to remove water as a normal operation. An alarm that sounds only in the event of a high liquid condition shall not be acceptable.

B. Pump

1. The pump shall be a submersible type, with capacities and performance requirements as indicated on the contract documents.

2. The pump shall be approved to UL 778 standards and shall include thermal and overload protection.

3. The motor shall be 115V and capable of operating continuously or intermittently. The motor housing shall be constructed of #304 stainless steel and double mechanical seals shall be housed in a separate oil-filled compartment.

C. Controls

1. The control shall be approved to UL 508 standards and housed in a gasketed

NEMA 4X enclosure with stainless steel hinged hardware and 8-pin twist-lock electrical receptacle.

2. The control shall include dual “Oil-Minder Relays” with variable sensitivity settings, magnetic contactor with separate over-current relay, self-cleaning stainless steel sensor probe, high decibel warning horn with illuminated red light and alarm silencing switch, dual floats, clearly marked terminal board and remote monitoring contact.

3. A NEMA 4X box with 8-pin twist-lock electrical receptacle and required length of mating cable shall be provided. Provide all required cables between the pump, junction box and the control unit.

4. The control unit, pump, floats and sensor probe shall be factory assembled as a complete, ready to use system and shall be tested and approved by a nationally recognized testing laboratory such as ENTELA.

D. Jurisdiction Approval

1. The pump and system must be approved by the local authorities.

E. The system shall be provided with required contacts to provide alarm signals at ATC

system.



A. Examine roughing-in for potable cold water and hot water supplies and soil, waste, and

vent piping systems to verify actual locations of piping connections prior to installing fixtures.

B. Examine walls, floors, and cabinets for suitable conditions where fixtures are to be

installed.

C. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.2 APPLICATION

A. Install plumbing fixtures and specified components, in accordance with designations and locations indicated on Drawings.

B. Install supports for plumbing fixtures as specified hereinbefore in accordance with

plumbing fixture manufacturer’s requirements, in accordance with categories indicated, and of type required:

1. Chair carriers for the following fixtures:

a. Wall-hanging lavatories and sinks. 2. Heavy-duty chair carriers for the following fixtures:

a. Accessible lavatories. b. Fixtures where specified.

3.3 INSTALLATION OF PLUMBING FIXTURES

A. Install plumbing fixtures level and plumb, in accordance with fixture manufacturers' written installation instructions, roughing-in drawings, and referenced standards.

1. Fasten wall-hanging plumbing fixtures securely to supports attached to building

substrate when supports are specified, and to building wall construction where no support is indicated.

2. Fasten wall-mounted fittings to reinforcement built into walls. 3. Fasten counter-mounting-type plumbing fixtures to casework. 4. Secure supplies behind wall or within wall pipe space, providing rigid installation. 5. Install stop valve in an accessible location in each water supply to each fixture. 6. Install trap on fixture outlet except for fixtures having integral trap. 7. Install escutcheons at each wall, floor, and ceiling penetration in exposed finished

locations and within cabinets and millwork. Use deep pattern escutcheons where required to conceal protruding pipe fittings.

8. Seal fixtures to walls, floors, and counters using a sanitary-type, one-part, mildew-resistant, silicone sealant. Match sealant color to fixture color.

9. Maintain separation between piping and pipe supports of dissimilar metals. 3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Piping installation requirements are specified in other sections of Division 15. The Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements:

1. Install piping connections between plumbing fixtures and piping systems and

plumbing equipment specified in other sections of Divisions 13, and 15. 2. Install piping connections between appliances and specified equipment in other

sections, such as specialty lab equipment, film developing, kitchenettes, etc.



A. Inspect each installed fixture for damage, missing parts, completion of units, etc. Replace missing or damaged fixtures and components.

B. Test fixtures to demonstrate proper operation upon completion of installation and after

units are water pressurized. Replace malfunctioning fixtures and components, then retest. Repeat procedure until all units operate properly.

C. Manufacturer’s Field Service: Provide services of a factory-authorized service

representative to supervise the field assembly of components and installation of water heaters, softeners, equipment, etc., including piping and electrical connections. Report results in writing.

D. Operate and adjust faucets and controls. Replace damaged and malfunctioning

fixtures, fittings, and controls.

E. Adjust water pressure at faucets and valves to provide proper flow and stream.

F. Replace washers of leaking and dripping faucets and stops.

G. Clean fixtures, fittings, and spout and drain strainers with manufacturers' recommended cleaning methods and materials.

H. Review the data in Operating and Maintenance Manuals. Refer to Division 1 Section

"Project Closeout."

I. Test and adjust safety controls of all equipment, replaced, damaged and malfunctioning controls.

3.6 PROTECTION

A. Provide protective covering for installed fixtures and fittings.

B. Do not allow use of fixtures for temporary facilities, except when approved in writing by the Owner.

3.7 CONCRETE HOUSEKEEPING PADS

A. Install concrete bases of dimensions indicated. Refer to Division 15 Section "Common Work Results for Plumbing."

3.8 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION

A. General: Install water heaters on concrete bases. Set and connect units in accordance with manufacturer’s written installation instructions. Install units plumb and level, firmly anchored in locations indicated, and maintain manufacturer’s recommended clearances. Orient so controls and devices needing servicing are accessible.

B. Install thermometers on water heater inlet and outlet piping. Thermometers are

specified in Division 15 Section “Pipes and Tubes for Plumbing Piping and Equipment”.

C. Connections


1. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Sections of Division 15. The Drawings indicate general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements: a. Install piping adjacent to equipment arranged to allow servicing and

maintenance. b. Connect hot and cold water piping to units with shutoff valves and unions.

Connect hot water circulating piping to unit with shutoff valve, check valve, and union. Extend relief valve discharge to closest floor drain.

c. Where water heater piping connections are dissimilar metals, make connections with dielectric fittings or dielectric unions specified elsewhere in Division 15.

D. Water Heaters

1. General: Provide the services of a factory-authorized service representative to

test and inspect unit installation, provide start-up service, and demonstrate and train Owner’s maintenance personnel as specified below. a. Test and adjust operating and safety controls. Replace damaged and

malfunctioning controls and equipment. 2. Train Owner’s maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to

start-up and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventative maintenance. a. Review data in Operating and Maintenance Manuals. Refer to Division 1

Section “Project Closeout.” b. Schedule training with at least 7 days, advance notice.

3.9 COMMISSIONING

A. Provide assistance and support for all commissioning activities and functional testing as outlined in the Commissioning Plan and specifications.

END OF SECTION

EASTERN DISTRICT POLICE STATION 15600- 1 HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING 28103.01 January 15, 2013

SECTION 15600 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY


1. Packaged Roof Top Equipment. 2. Boilers. 3. Pumps. 4. Fans. 5. Unit Heaters. 6. Cabinet Unit Heaters. 7. Ductless Split System Air Conditioning Units. 8. Base Board Heaters.


1. Section “Common Work Results for HVAC.” 2. Section “Identification for HVAC Piping and Equipment.” 3. Section “Mechanical Insulation.” 4. Section “Pipes and Tubes for HVAC Piping and Equipment.” 5. Section “General Duty Valves for HVAC Piping.” 6. Section “Hangers and Supports for HVAC Piping and Equipment”: Product and

installation requirements for piping hangers and supports. 7. Section “Vibration and Seismic Controls for HVAC Piping and Equipment”:

Product and installation requirements for vibration isolators used in piping systems.

8. Section “Variable Frequency Drives”. 9. Section “Air Distribution”.

1.3 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data for products specified in this Section. Include dimensions, ratings, and data

on features and components.

C. Certified reports of field tests and observations specified in “Field Quality Control” in this Section.

D. Maintenance data for products for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manual

specified in Division 1 and in Section “Common Work Results for HVAC.”

E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.


1. Manufacturer’s Field Reports: Indicate results of inspection by manufacturer’s

representative.

F. Qualification data for field-testing organization certificates, signed by the Contractor, certifying that the organization complies with the requirements specified in “Quality Assurance” below. Include list of completed projects with project names, addresses, names of Architects and Owners, plus other information specified


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide equipment from manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacturer of equipment of the types and capacities indicated, with such products in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. Manufacturer must also maintain, within 100 miles of the project site, a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance and repairs.

B. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.

1. The terms “listed” and “labeled” shall be defined as they are in the National

Electrical Code, Article 100. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A “Nationally Recognized Testing

Laboratory” (NRTL) as defined in OSHA regulation 1910.7. 1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Accept equipment on site in factory packing with shipping bars/supports and positioning devices intact. Inspect for damage.

B. Protect equipment from exposure by leaving factory coverings, pipe end protection, and

packaging in place until installation. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 Rooftop Units (RTU-1,2,3)

A. Packaged rooftop units shall include compressors, evaporator coils, filters, supply fans, dampers, air-cooled condenser coils, condenser fans, reheat coil, hot water heaters, exhaust fans, energy recovery wheels, and unit controls.

1. Unit shall be factory assembled and tested including leak testing of the coils, pressure testing of the refrigeration circuit, and run testing of the completed unit. Run test report shall be supplied with the unit in the controls compartment’s literature pocket.

2. Unit shall have decals and tags to indicate lifting and rigging, service areas and caution areas for safety and to assist service personnel.

3. Unit components shall be labeled, including pipe stub outs, refrigeration system components and electrical and controls components.

4. Estimated sound power levels (dB) shall be shown on the unit ratings sheet.


5. Installation, Operation and Maintenance manual shall be supplied within the unit.

6. Laminated color-coded wiring diagram shall match factory installed wiring and shall be affixed to the interior of the control compartment’s access door.

7. Unit nameplate shall be provided in two locations on the unit, affixed to the exterior of the unit and affixed to the interior of the control compartment’s access door.

B. All cabinet walls, access doors, and roof shall be fabricated of double wall, impact resistant, rigid polyurethane foam panels.

1. Unit insulation shall have a minimum thermal resistance R-value of 13. Foam insulation shall have a minimum density of 2 pounds/cubic foot and shall be tested in accordance with ASTM D-1929 for a minimum flash ignition temperature of 610°F.

2. Unit construction shall be double wall with G90 galvanized steel on both sides and a thermal break with no metal path from inside to outside the cabinet. Double wall construction with a thermal break prevents moisture accumulation on the insulation, provides a cleanable interior, prevents heat transfer through the panel, and prevents exterior condensation on the panel.

3. Unit shall be designed to reduce air leakage and infiltration through the cabinet. Cabinet leakage shall not exceed 1% of total airflow when tested at 3 times the minimum external static pressure provided in AHRI Standard 340/360. Panel deflection shall not exceed L/240 ratio at 125% of design static pressure, at a maximum 8 inches of positive or negative static pressure, to reduce air leakage. Deflection shall be measured at the midpoint of the panel height and width. Continuous sealing shall be included between panels and between access doors and openings to reduce air leakage. Refrigerant piping and electrical conduit through cabinet panels shall include sealing to reduce air leakage.

4. Roof of the air tunnel shall be sloped to provide complete drainage. Cabinet shall have rain break overhangs above access doors.

5. Access to filters, dampers, cooling coils, reheat coil, heaters, supply fans, exhaust fans, return fans, energy recovery wheels, compressors, water-cooled condensers, and electrical and controls components shall be through hinged access doors with quarter turn, zinc cast, lockable handles. Full length stainless steel piano hinges shall be included on the doors.

6. Exterior paint finish shall be capable of withstanding at least 2,500 hours, with no visible corrosive effects, when tested in a salt spray and fog atmosphere in accordance with ASTM B 117-95 test procedure.

7. Units with cooling coils shall include double sloped 304 stainless steel drain pans.

8. Unit shall be provided with base discharge and return air openings. All openings through the base pan of the unit shall have upturned flanges of at least 1/2 inch in height around the opening.

9. Unit shall include lifting lugs on the top of the unit


C. Air-source heat pump shall include an optimized start defrost cycle to prevent frost accumulation on the outdoor coil during heat pump heating operation and to minimized defrost cycle energy usage. If the temperature of the outdoor heat exchanger and/or the suction line is less than a predetermined value, a deferred defrost cycle is initiated wherein the defrost cycle starts after a variable, continuously optimizing, time interval has elapsed. The defrost cycle is terminated when the relative temperatures of the outdoor heat exchanger and/or the suction line indicate that sufficient frost is melted from the heat exchanger to insure adequate time between successive defrost cycles for optimizing the efficiency and reliability of the system, or after a predetermined time interval has elapsed, whichever condition occurs first. During defrost cycle all compressors shall energize, reversing valves shall de-energize, and auxiliary heat shall energize. [WattMaster Orion Controls System]

D. Unit shall be provided with factory installed and factory wired 115V, 13 amp GFI outlet with outlet disconnect switch in the unit control panel.

E. Unit shall be provided with phase and brown out protection which shuts down all motors in the unit if the electrical phases are more that 10% out of balance on voltage, the voltage is more that 10% under design voltage, or on phase reversal.

F. Supply Fans

1. Unit shall include direct drive, unhoused, backward curved, plenum supply fans.

2. Blowers and motors shall be dynamically balanced and mounted on rubber isolators.

3. Motors shall be premium efficiency ODP with ball bearings rated for 200,000 hours service with external lubrication points.

4. Variable frequency drives shall be factory wired and mounted in the unit. Fan motors shall be premium efficiency.

G. Exhaust Fans

1. Exhaust dampers shall be sized for 100% relief.

2. Fans and motors shall be dynamically balanced.

3. Motors shall be premium efficiency ODP with ball bearings rated for 200,000 hours service with external lubrication points.

4. Access to exhaust fans shall be through double wall, hinged access doors with quarter turn handles.

5. Unit shall include belt driven, unhoused, backward curved, plenum exhaust fans.

6. Variable frequency drives shall be factory wired and mounted in the unit. Fan motors shall be premium efficiency.

H. Cooling Coils

1. Evaporator Coils


a. Coils shall be designed for use with R-410A refrigerant and constructed of copper tubes with aluminum fins mechanically bonded to the tubes and galvanized steel end casings. Fin design shall be sine wave rippled.

b. Coils shall have interlaced circuitry and shall be standard capacity.

c. Coils shall be helium leak tested.

d. Coils shall be furnished with a factory installed thermostatic expansion valves.

I. Refrigeration System

1. Unit shall be factory charged with R-410A refrigerant.

2. Compressors shall be scroll type with thermal overload protection, independently circuited, and carry a 5 year non-prorated warranty.

3. Compressors shall be mounted in an isolated service compartment which can be accessed without affecting unit operation. Lockable hinged compressor access doors shall be fabricated of double wall, rigid polyurethane foam insulated panels to prevent the transmission of noise outside the cabinet.

4. Compressors shall be isolated from the base pan with the compressor manufacturer’s recommended rubber vibration isolators, to reduce any transmission of noise from the compressors into the building area.

5. Each refrigeration circuit shall be equipped with thermostatic expansion valve type refrigerant flow control.

6. Each refrigeration circuit shall be equipped with automatic reset low pressure and manual reset high pressure refrigerant safety controls, Schrader type service fittings on both the high pressure and low pressure sides, and factory installed liquid line filter driers.

7. Unit (RTU-1) shall include modulating capacity control on all circuits.

8. Unit (RTU-2) shall include modulating capacity control on lead stage and on/off control on lag stage.

9. Unit (RTU-3) shall include first/second stage modulating capacity control and third/fourth stage on/of control.

J. Accessories

1. (RTU-1 & RTU-2) Lead refrigeration circuit(s) shall be provided with hot gas reheat coil, modulating valves, electronic controller, supply air temperature sensor and a dehumidification control signal terminal which allow the unit to have a dehumidification mode of operation, which includes supply air temperature control to prevent supply air temperature swings and overcooling of the space.

2. (RTU-1 & RTU-2) Unit shall be configured as an air-source heat pump. Each refrigeration circuit shall each be equipped with a factory installed liquid line filter drier with check valve, reversing valve, accumulator, and thermal expansion


valves on both the indoor and outdoor coils. Reversing valve shall energize during the heat pump heating mode of operation.

3. First capacity stage shall be provided with on/off condenser fan cycling and adjustable compressor lockout.

K. Air-Cooled Condenser

1. Condenser fans shall be vertical discharge, axial flow, direct drive fans.

2. Coils shall be designed for use with R-410A refrigerant and constructed of copper tubes with aluminum fins mechanically bonded to the tubes and aluminum end casings. Fin design shall be sine wave rippled.

3. Coils shall be designed for a minimum of 10°F of refrigerant sub-cooling.

4. Coils shall be helium leak tested.

L. Hot water Heating

1. (RTU-1 & RTU-2) Auxiliary Hot water heating capacity shall be sized to meet heating leaving air temperature setpoint when heat pump heating is in operation. Auxiliary heating capacity shall be available for operation when heat pump heating is in operation.

M. Heating Coils

1. Hot Water Heating Coils

a. Coils shall be certified in accordance with AHRI Standard 410 and be leak tested.

b. Coil shall be constructed of copper tubes with aluminum fins mechanically bonded to the tubes and galvanized steel end casings. Fin design shall be sine wave rippled.

c. Coil shall have half serpentine circuitry.

d. Coil shall be located in the reheat position downstream of the supply fans.

e. Control valves shall be field supplied and field installed.

2. (RTU-1 & RTU-2) Hot water heating capacity shall be available for operation when heat pump heating is in operation and when heat pump heating is not in operation.

N. Filters

1. Unit shall include 4 inch thick, pleated panel filters with an ASHRAE efficiency of 85% and a MERV rating of 13, upstream of the cooling coil. Unit shall also include 2 inch thick, pleated panel pre filters with an ASHRAE efficiency of 30% and MERV rating of 7, upstream of the 4 inch standard filters.


2. Unit shall include a clogged filter switch.

O. Outside Air/Economizer

1. Unit shall include 0-100% economizer consisting of a motor operated outside air damper and return air damper assembly constructed of extruded aluminum, hollow core, airfoil blades with rubber edge seals and aluminum end seals. Damper blades shall be gear driven and designed to have no more than 15 CFM of leakage per sq. ft. of damper area when subjected to 2 inches w.g. air pressure differential across the damper. Damper assembly shall be controlled by spring return enthalpy activated fully modulating actuator. Unit shall include outside air opening bird screen, outside air hood with rain lip and barometric relief dampers.

P. Energy Recovery

1. Unit shall contain a factory mounted and tested energy recovery wheel. The energy recovery wheel shall be mounted in a rigid frame containing the wheel drive motor, drive belt, wheel seals and bearings. Frame shall slide out for service and removal from the cabinet.

2. The energy recovery component shall incorporate a rotary wheel in an insulated cassette frame complete with seals, drive motor and drive belt.

3. Wheels shall be wound continuously with one flat and one structured layer in an ideal parallel plate geometry providing laminar flow and minimum pressure drop-to-efficiency ratios. The layers shall be effectively captured in stainless steel wheel frames or aluminum and stainless steel segment frames that provide a rigid and self-supporting matrix.

4. Wheels shall be provided with removable energy transfer matrix. Wheel frame construction shall be a welded hub, spoke and rim assembly of stainless, plated and/or coated steel and shall be self-supporting without matrix segments in place. Segments shall be removable without the use of tools to facilitate maintenance and cleaning. Wheel bearings shall be selected to provide an L-10 life in excess of 400,000 hours. Rim shall be continuous rolled stainless steel and the wheel shall be connected to the shaft by means of taper locks.

5. All diameter and perimeter seals shall be provided as part of the cassette assembly and shall be factory set. Drive belts of stretch urethane shall be provided for wheel rim drive without the need for external tensioners or adjustment.

6. The energy recovery cassette shall be an Underwriters Laboratories Recognized Component for electrical and fire safety. The wheel drive motor shall be an Underwriters Laboratory Recognized Component and shall be mounted in the cassette frame and supplied with a service connector or junction box. Thermal performance shall be certified by the manufacturer in accordance with ASHRAE Standard 84, Method of Testing Air-to-Air Heat Exchangers and AHRI Standard 1060, Rating Air-to-Air Energy Recovery Ventilation Equipment. Cassettes shall be listed in the AHRI Certified Products.

7. Energy recovery wheel cassette shall carry a 5 year non-prorated warranty.


8. Unit shall include 2 inch thick, pleated panel outside air and exhaust air filters with an ASHRAE efficiency of 30% and MERV rating of 7, upstream of the wheels.

9. Hinged service access door shall allow access to the wheel.

10. Total energy recovery wheels shall be coated with silica gel desiccant permanently bonded by a process without the use of binders or adhesives, which may degrade desiccant performance. The substrate shall be lightweight polymer and shall not degrade nor require additional coatings for application in marine or coastal environments. Coated segments shall be washable with detergent or alkaline coil cleaner and water. Desiccant shall not dissolve nor deliquesce in the presence of water or high humidity.

11. (RTU-2) Unit shall include energy recovery wheel defrost control which includes an adjustable temperature sensor and timer wired to periodically stop the wheel rotation, which allows the warm exhaust air to defrost the wheel.

12. (RTU-2) Unit shall include energy recovery wheel rotation detection sensors and a set of normally open and normally closed contracts for field indication of wheel rotation.

Q. Factory Installed and Factory Provided Controller:

1. Unit controller shall be capable of controlling all features and options of the unit. Controller shall be factory installed in the unit controls compartment and factory tested.

2. Controller shall be capable of stand alone operation with unit configuration, setpoint adjustment, sensor status viewing, unit alarm viewing, and occupancy scheduling available without dependence on a building management system.

3. Controller shall have an onboard clock and calendar functions that allow for occupancy scheduling.

4. Controller shall include non-volatile memory to retain all programmed values, without the use of an external battery, in the event of a power failure.

5. With enthalpy activated fully modulating economizer option, an outdoor air humidity sensor shall be factory installed.

6. (RTU-1 & RTU-2) With the modulating hot gas reheat option a space humidity sensor and supply air temperature sensor shall be furnished with the unit for field installation. Suction pressure sensor shall be factory installed. Supply air temperature and space humidity setpoints, for the dehumidification mode of operation, shall be adjustable.

7. (RTU-3) Variable Air Volume Controller

a. Outside and return air temperature sensors shall be factory mounted and wired. Supply air temperature sensor and supply air duct static pressure sensor shall be furnished with the unit for field installation.

b. Control of supply air flow, for duct static pressure control, shall be with unit controller, factory installed variable frequency drive, and supply air


duct static pressure sensor.

8. (RTU-1 & RTU-2) Constant Volume Controller

a. Outside air temperature sensor shall be factory mounted and wired. Supply air temperature sensor and space temperature sensor with temperature setpoint reset and unoccupied override shall be furnished with the unit for field installation.

9. Units shall be provided with a terminal block for field installation of a smoke detector which shuts off the unit’s control circuit.

R. Roof Curb

1. Contractor shall provide factory supplied roof curb, 16 gauge perimeter made of zinc coated steel with supply and return air gasketing and wood nailer strips. Ship knocked down and provided with instructions for easy assembly.

2. Provide minimum 2” deflection spring isolation rails to match the roof top unit manufacturers standard curb dimensions. The spring rails shall be engineered to minimize vibration transmission from roof top unit to the building supports for curb.

3. Curb shall be manufactured in accordance with the National Roofing Contractors Association guidelines

2.2 Base Mounted End Suction Centrifugal Pump (P-1,2)

A. The Contractor shall furnish and install in location shown on the plans Bell and Gossett Model 1510, end suction centrifugal pumps of frame mounted design. Comparable products as manufactured by Taco shall be submitted for approval as a comparable product. Construction shall be case iron bronze fitted with casing wearing rings, shaft sleeve and leakless mechanical shaft seal, radially split case design; rated for 175-psig (1200-kPa) minimum working pressure and a continuous water temperature of 225 deg F (107 deg C).

B. Pump volutes or casings shall be center-line discharge for positive air venting constructed

of class 30 cast iron with integrally cast mounting feet. The pumps shall be fitted with replaceable bronze wear rings, drilled and tapped for gage ports at both the suction and discharge flanges and for drain port at the bottoms of the casings.

C. The impellers shall be ASTM B 584, case bronze of the Francis Vane type hydraulically

balanced by either back vanes or back wear ring and balancing holes. The impellers shall be statically and dynamically balanced, closed, overhung, single suction, fitted to the shafts with a key, and secured by locking cap screw.

D. The pump shafts shall be high tensile steel with removable bronze shaft sleeves for

mechanical seal or stainless steel sleeve for soft packed gland seals. If no shaft sleeve is furnished, the shaft shall be stainless steel.

E. The cast iron pump bearing housings shall have heavy duty regreasable ball bearings

replaceable without disturbing the piping connections and shall have a foot support at the driver end.


F. Pumps shall have a self flushing seal design or a positive external seal flushing line. Any mechanical seal pump used on an open system shall be furnished with a seal flush line and a purocell #900 replaceable cartridge filter with shut-off isolation valve installed in the seal flushing line. The filter shall have the ability to remove particles down to five microns in size.

G. The pump seals shall be EPT ni-resist rated to 250o

F.

H. The base plates shall be one piece fabricated steel and shall be open at both ends for grouting. A flexible coupler shall connect the pump to the motors and shall be covered by a coupler guard. Contractor shall level and grout each pump according to the manufacturers recommendations to insure proper alignment prior to operation.

I. Provide power factor correction capacitors as specified in Section 16.

2.3 In-Line Mounted Centrifugal Pump (P-3,4)

A. The Contractor shall furnish and install in location shown on the plans Bell and Gossett Model 90, in-line type, closed coupled, single stage design, for installation in horizontal or vertical position. Comparable products as manufactured by Taco shall be submitted for approval as a comparable product. Pump shall be capable of being serviced without disturbing piping connections. Construction shall be case iron bronze fitted with casing wearing rings, shaft sleeve and leakless mechanical shaft seal, radially split case design; rated for 175-psig (1200-kPa) minimum working pressure and a continuous water temperature of 225 deg F (107 deg C).

B. Pump volutes shall be of class 30 cast iron and impeller shall be of bronze/brass,

enclosed type, keyed and secured to the shaft by a locking capscrew or nut.

C. The impellers shall be ASTM B 584, case bronze of the Francis Vane type hydraulically balanced by either back vanes or back wear ring and balancing holes. The impellers shall be statically and dynamically balanced, closed, overhung, single suction, fitted to the shafts with a key, and secured by locking cap screw.

D. The pump shafts shall be high tensile steel with removable bronze shaft sleeves for

mechanical seal or stainless steel sleeve for soft packed gland seals. If no shaft sleeve is furnished, the shaft shall be stainless steel.

E. The cast iron pump bearing housings shall have heavy duty regreasable ball bearings

replaceable without disturbing the piping connections and shall have a foot support at the driver end.

F. Pumps shall have a self flushing seal design or a positive external seal flushing line. Any

mechanical seal pump used on an open system shall be furnished with a seal flush line and a purocell #900 replaceable cartridge filter with shut-off isolation valve installed in the seal flushing line. The filter shall have the ability to remove particles down to five microns in size.

G. Provide power factor correction capacitors as specified in Section 16.

2.4 In-Line Pumps (P-5,6,7,8)

A. In-line pump shall be NRF Series as manufactured by Bell and Gossett. Comparable


products as manufactured by Taco shall be submitted for approval as a comparable product. Refer to contract drawings for sizes and capacities.

B. In-Line pump shall be constructed of cast iron. System shall have one-piece, high nickel stainless steel stator. Pump shall have carbon bearings with a diamond-like ceramic shaft. Pump shall be rated for 150-psi minimum working pressure and a continuous water temperature of 225 deg F (107 deg C).

2.5 In-Line pump (P-9,10)

A. In-line pump shall be PL-Series as manufactured by Bell and Gossett. Comparable products as manufactured by Taco shall be submitted for approval as a comparable product. Refer to contract drawings for sizes and capacities.

B. Pump shall have the following features:

1. Close – coupled dry motor 2. Permanently lubricated sealed bearings. 3. Bronze body construction 4. Stainless steel face plate 5. 30% glass filled PPS impeller 6. High strength solid alloy steel shaft 7. Carbon / Silcon carbide seal 8. ODP motor.

2.6 In-Line Exhaust Fan (EF-1,2)

A. Model/Product: Basis of Design shall be Greenheck Model: BSQ of size, capacity, arrangement and electrical characteristics as indicated on the contract drawings. Comparable product as manufactured by Loren Cook Company or Penn Ventilator Co. shall be submitted for approval as a comparable product. General description: 1. Base fan performance at standard conditions (density 0.075 LB/ft3) 2. Normal operating temperature up to 180 Fahrenheit (82.2 Celsius) 3. Applications include: intake, exhaust, return, or make-up air systems 4. Each fan shall bear a permanently affixed manufacture's engraved metal

nameplate containing the model number and individual serial number.

B. Wheel: 1. Non-overloading, backward inclined centrifugal wheel 2. Constructed of aluminum 3. Statically and dynamically balanced in accordance to AMCA Standard 204-05 4. The wheel cone and fan inlet will be matched and shall have precise running

tolerances for maximum performance and operating efficiency 5. Single thickness blades are securely riveted or welded to a heavy gauge back

plate and wheel cone.

C. Motors: 1. Open driproof, premium efficiency. 2. Motors are permanently lubricated, heavy duty ball bearing type to match with the

fan load and pre-wired to the specific voltage and phase.

D. Shafts and Bearings: 1. Fan shaft shall be ground and polished solid steel with an anti corrosive coating.


2. Permanently sealed bearings or pillow block ball bearings. 3. Bearing shall be selected for a minimum L10 life in excess of 100,000 hours

(equivalent to L50 average life of 500,000 hours), at maximum cataloged operating speed.

4. Fan Shaft first critical speed is at least 25 percent over maximum operating speed.

E. Housing/Cabinet Construction 1. Square design constructed of heavy gauge galvanized steel and shall include

square duct mounting collars. 2. Housing and bearing supports shall be constructed of heavy gauge bolted and

welded steel construction to prevent vibration and to rigidly support the shaft and bearing assembly.

3. Aluminum construction is available in sizes 70-300.

F. Housing Supports and Drive Frame: 1. Housing supports are constructed of structural steel with formed flanges. 2. Drive frame is welded steel which supports the shaft and bearings and

reinforcement for the housing. 3. Pivoting motor plate with adjusting screws to make belt tensioning operations.

G. Drive Assembly:

1. Belts, pulleys, and keys oversized for a minimum of 150 percent of driven horsepower

2. Belts: Static free and oil resistant 3. Pulleys: Cast type, keyed, and securely attached to wheel and motor shafts 4. Motor pulleys are adjustable for final system balancing 5. Readily accessible for maintenance

H. Duct Collars:

1. Square design to provide a large discharge area 2. Inlet and discharge collars provide easy duct connection

I. Access Panel:

1. Two sided access panels, permit easy access to all internal components 2. Located perpendicular to the motor mounting panel

J. Accessories:

1. Belt Guards: Three-sided fabricated steel belt guard covers drive and motor 2. Dampers:

a. Types: Gravity. b. Galvanized frames with prepunched mounting holes. c. Balanced for minimal resistance to flow.

3. Extended Lube Lines: Grease zerks on housing exterior allows for lubrication of bearings without disassembling the fan

4. Finishes: Coating type: Permatector 5. Inlet and Outlet Guards: Constructed of expanded metal mounted in a steel frame

to provide protection for non-ducted installations 6. Insulated Housing:

a. Thickness: 0.5 inches b. For noise reduction and condensation control c. Constructed of fiberglass liner

7. Motor Cover: a. Constructed of galvanized steel b. Covers motor and drives for safety c. Standard on unit specified with UL


8. Wiring Pigtail: a. Direct hook-up to the power supply

2.7 Ventilation / Exhaust Fans (EF-3)

A. Upblast Centrifugal Exhaust Fan:

1. Roof mounted exhaust fan shall be upblast centrifugal belt driven type. The fan wheel shall be centrifugal backward inclined, constructed of aluminum and shall include a wheel cone carefully matched to the inlet cone for precise running tolerances. Wheel shall be statically and dynamically balanced. The fan housing shall be constructed of heavy gauge aluminum with a rigid internal support structure. Wind bands shall have a rolled bead for added strength and shall be joined to curb cap with a welded seam.

2. Motor shall be heavy duty ball bearing type, carefully matched to the fan load and furnished at the specified voltage, phase and enclosure. Motor and drive shall be mounted on vibration isolators, out of the airstream.

3. Fresh air for motor cooling shall be drawn into the motor compartment from an area free of discharge contaminants.

4. Motor shall be readily accessible for maintenance.

5. Drive frame assemblies shall be constructed of heavy gauge steel and mounted on vibration isolators.

6. Precision ground and polished fan shaft shall be mounted in permanently sealed, lubricated pillow block ball bearings.

7. Bearings shall be selected for a minimum (L50) life in excess of 200,000 hours at maximum cataloged operating speed.

8. Drive shall be sized for a minimum of 150% of driven horsepower.

9. Pulley shall be of the fully machined cast iron type, keyed and securely attached to the wheel and motor shafts.

10. Motor pulley shall be adjustable for final system balancing.

11. A conduit chase shall be provided through the curb cap to the motor compartment for ease of electrical wiring.

12. Fan shall bear the AMCA Certified Ratings Seal for sound and air performance.

13. Fan shall bear a permanently affixed manufacturer's nameplate containing the model number and individual serial number for future identification.

14. Fan shall be as manufactured by the Greenheck Fan Corp, Loren Cook, Penn Ventilator or an approved equal.

15. Fan shall be provided with 12" high roof curb with insect screen.

2.8 Cabinet Unit Heaters (CUH-#)


A. The contractor shall furnish and install Sterling Cabinet Unit Heaters as selected to meet job requirements or approved equal.

B. The Cabinet Unit Heaters will conform to the items listed below and be certified under CSA guidelines.

C. Cabinets

1. All cabinets will be constructed with 18 gauge electro galvanneal steel internal cabinets, side panels and top. The front panel shall be furnished in 16 gauge electro galvanneal steel. Adequate work area for installation of control valves or electrical equipment shall be provided on both sides of the internal cabinet.

2. The cabinet shall be provided with a neutral eggshell baked enamel prime coat as standard. (Available if specified) Powder coated baked enamel, color selected from Sterling Color Chart.

3. All cabinets shall be supplied with adjustable rear mounting brackets which will provide adjustment to correct alignment of the unit at installation to non square or out of true walls, joists, studs or surfaces. Adjustable leveling legs (two each base leg) are available when specified.

D. Filters

1. All filters supplied as standard shall be reusable aluminum media with a 69% arrestance level. Filters shall be slide in type which are locked into position with two cotter pins.

E. Fans

1. Fan wheels shall be centrifugal, forward curved, double width of electro galvanneal steel. Fan housings shall be of formed, galvanized sheet metal.

F. Motors

1. All motors shall have integral thermal protection and start at 78 per cent of rated voltage. All motors shall be of p.s.c. design and be capable of operating in high static conditions. All motors shall be factory run-tested and assembled in unit prior to shipping.

G. Electrical

1. All primary internal wiring shall be done at the factory and every unit shall be factory tested for reliability.

2.9 Ductless Split Systems (AC-1,2,3 and CU-1,2,3)

A. Basis of design shall be Mitsubishi Mr. Slim, comparable products as manufactured by Sanyo shall be submitted for approval as a comparable product.

B. The air conditioning system shall be a split system with Variable Speed Inverter Compressor technology. The system shall consist of a wall mounted indoor section with wired, wall mounted controller and a horizontal discharge, single phase outdoor unit.

C. The units shall be tested by a Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory (NRTL) and shall bear the ETL label.


D. All wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code (N.E.C.).

E. A dry air holding charge shall be provided in the indoor section.

F. The outdoor unit shall be pre-charged with R-410a refrigerant for 70 feet of refrigerant tubing.

G. System efficiency shall meet or exceed SEER as noted on drawings.

H. The units shall have a manufacturer’s parts and defects warranty for a period one (1) year from date of installation. The compressor shall have a warranty of 6 years from date of installation.

I. Indoor Ductless Air Handling Unit.

1. The indoor unit cabinet shall be wall mounted by means of a factory supplied mounting plate, The cabinet shall be formed from high strength molded plastic with front panel access for filter.

2. The indoor unit shall be factory assembled, wired and tested. Contained within the unit shall be all factory wiring and internal piping, control circuit board and fan motor.

3. The unit in conjunction with the wired, wall mounted controller shall have a self-diagnostic function, 3-minute time delay mechanism, an auto restart function, and a test run switch. Indoor unit and refrigerant pipes shall be purged with dry nitrogen before shipment from the factory.

4. The evaporator fan shall be high performance, double inlet, forward curve, direct drive sirocco fan with a single motor. The fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced and run on a motor with permanently lubricated bearings. The indoor fan shall have two speeds: Low, High.

5. There shall be a motorized horizontal vane to automatically direct air flow in a horizontal and downward direction for uniform air distribution. The horizontal vane shall significantly decrease downward air resistance for lower noise levels, and shall close the outlet port when operation is stopped. There shall also be a set of vertical vanes to provide horizontal swing airflow movement selected by remote control.

6. Return air shall be filtered by means of an easily removable washable filter.

7. The evaporator coil shall be of nonferrous construction with pre-coated aluminum strake fins on copper tubing. The multi-angled heat exchanger shall have a modified fin shape that reduces air resistance for a smoother, quieter airflow. All tube joints shall be brazed with PhosCopper or silver alloy. The coils shall be pressure tested at the factory. A condensate pan and drain shall be provided under the coil.

8. The electrical power of the unit shall be 115/208 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. The system shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of 198 volts to 253 volts.

9. Control


a. The control system shall consist of two (2) microprocessors, one on each indoor and outdoor unit, interconnected by a single non-polar two-wire cable. Field wiring shall run directly from the indoor unit to the wall mounted controller with no splices. Where separate power is supplied to the indoor and outdoor units, a two (2) 20 ga. AWG wire shall be run between the units to provide forbid-directional control communication.

b. The system shall be capable of automatic restart when power is restored after power interruption. The system shall have self-diagnostics ability, including total hours of compressor run time. Diagnostics codes for indoor and outdoor units shall be displayed on the wired controller panel.

c. The microprocessor located in the indoor unit shall have the capability of monitoring return air temperature and indoor coil temperature, receiving and processing commands from the wired controller, providing emergency operation and controlling the outdoor unit.

d. The indoor unit shall be connected to a wall mounted wired controller to perform input functions necessary to operate the system. The wired controller shall have a large multi-language DOT liquid crystal display (LCD) presenting contents in English. There shall be a built-in weekly timer with up to eight pattern settings per day. The controller shall consist of an On/Off button, Increase/Decrease Set Temperature buttons, a Cool/Dry/Fan mode selector, a Timer Menu button, a Timer On/Off button, Set Time buttons, a Fan Speed selector, a Vane Position selector, a Louver Swing button, a Ventilation button, a Test Run button, and a Check Mode button. The controller shall have a built-in temperature sensor. Temperature shall be displayed in either Fahrenheit (°F) or Celsius (°C). Temperature changes shall be by increments of 1°F (1°C) with a range of 67°F to 87°F (19°C to 30°C).

e. The wired controller shall display operating conditions such as set temperature, room temperature, pipe temperatures (i.e. liquid, discharge, indoor and outdoor), compressor operating conditions (including running current, frequency, input voltage, On/Off status and operating time), LEV opening pulses, sub cooling and discharge super heat.

f. Normal operation of the wired controller shall provide individual system control in which one wired controller and one indoor unit are installed in the same room.

g. The control voltage from the wired controller to the indoor unit shall be 12 volts, DC. The control signal between the indoor and outdoor unit shall be pulse signal 24 volts DC.

h. Control system shall control the continued operation of the air sweep louvers, as well as provide On/Off and mode switching. The controller shall have the capability to provide sequential starting with up to fifty seconds delay.

J. Outdoor Air Cooled Condensing Unit

1. The outdoor unit shall be equipped with a control board that interfaces with the indoor unit to perform all necessary operation functions.


2. The outdoor unit shall be capable of operating at 0°F (-18°C) ambient temperature without additional low ambient controls. Provide wind baffle.

3. The outdoor unit shall be able to operate with a maximum height difference of 100 feet (30 meters) indoor unit to outdoor unit,

4. System shall have a maximum refrigerant tubing length of 165 feet (50 meters) between indoor and outdoor units without the need for line size changes, traps or additional oil.

5. Units shall be pre-charged for a maximum of 70 feet (20 meters) of refrigerant tubing. The outdoor unit shall be completely factory assembled, piped, and wired. Each unit must be test run at the factory.

6. The casing shall be constructed from galvanized steel plate, coated with a finished with an electrostatically applied, thermally fused acrylic or polyester powder coating for corrosion protection and have a munsell 3Y 7.8/1.1 finish. The fan grille shall be of ABS plastic.

7. Unit shall be furnished with an AC fan motor. The fan motor shall be of aerodynamic design for quiet operation, and the fan motor bearings shall be permanently lubricated. The outdoor unit shall have horizontal discharge airflow. The fan shall be mounted in front of the coil, pulling air across it from the rear and dispelling it through the front. The fan shall be provided with a raised guard to prevent contact with moving parts.

8. The L shaped condenser coil shall be of copper tubing with flat aluminum fins to reduce debris build up. The coil shall be protected with an integral metal guard. Refrigerant flow from the condenser shall be controlled by means of linear expansion valve (LEV) metering orifice. The LEV shall be control by a microprocessor controlled step motor.

9. The compressor shall be a DC rotary compressor with Variable Compressor Speed Inverter Technology. The compressor shall be driven by inverter circuit to control compressor speed. The compressor speed shall dynamically vary to match the room load for significantly increasing the efficiency of the system which results in vast energy savings. To prevent liquid from accumulating in the compressor during the off cycle, a minimal amount of current shall be intermittently applied to the compressor motor to maintain enough heat. The outdoor unit shall have an accumulator and high pressure safety switch. The compressor shall be mounted to avoid the transmission of vibration.

10. Electrical

a. The electrical power of the unit shall be 115/208 volts, 1 phase, 60 hertz. The unit shall be capable of satisfactory operation within voltage limits of 198 volts to 253 volts. The outdoor unit shall be controlled by the microprocessor located in the indoor unit.

b. The control signal between the indoor unit and the outdoor unit shall be pulse signal 24 volts DC. The unit shall have Pulse Amplitude Modulation circuit to utilize 98% of input power supply.

2.10 Base Board Heater (BH-1)


A. Baseboard heater shall be manufactured by Sterling or approved equal.

B. Heating Elements: ¾ inch ID seamless copper tubing, mechanically expanded into evenly spaced aluminum fins, suitable for soldering fittings.

C. Element Hangers: Ball bearing cradle type on enclosure brackets.

D. Enclosures: 0.0478 inch thick steel up to 18 inches in height, 0.0598 inch steel over 18 inches in height. Support rigidly, on wall or floor mounted brackets.

E. Finish: Factory applied baked primer coat.

F. Access Doors: 6x7 inch minimum size, integral with cabinet.

2.11 Boiler

A. The gas fired Boiler shall as manufactured by Lochinvar Knight XL series or an approved equal. The boiler shall be capable of full modulation firing down to 20% of rated input with a turndown ration of 5:1.

B. The boiler shall bear the ASME "H" stamp for 160 psi working pressure and shall be National Board listed. There shall be no banding material, bolts, gaskets or "O" rings in the header configuration. The 316L stainless steel combustion chamber shall be designed to drain condensation to the bottom of the heat exchanger assembly. A built-in trap shall allow condensation to drain from the heat exchanger assembly. The complete heat exchanger assembly shall carry a ten (10) year limited warranty.

C. The boiler shall be certified and listed by C.S.A. International under the latest edition of the harmonized ANSI Z21.13 test standard for the U.S. and Canada. The BOILER shall comply with the energy efficiency requirements of the latest edition of the ASHRAE 90.1 Standard and the minimum efficiency requirements of the latest edition of the BTS2000 Standard. The boiler shall operate at a minimum of 94% thermal efficiency at full fire. Boiler shall operate up to 98% thermal efficiency with return water temperatures at 100°F or below. The boiler shall be certified for indoor installation. The boiler’s Thermal Efficiency shall be verified through third party testing by the Hydronics Institute Division of AHRI and listed in the AHRI Certification Directory.

D. The boiler shall be constructed with a heavy gauge steel jacket assembly, primed and pre-painted on both sides. The combustion chamber shall be sealed and completely enclosed, independent of the outer jacket assembly, so that integrity of the outer jacket does not affect a proper seal. A burner/flame observation port shall be provided. The burner shall be a premix design and constructed of high temperature stainless steel with a woven metal fiber outer covering to provide modulating firing rates. The boiler shall be supplied with a gas valve designed with negative pressure regulation and be equipped with a variable speed blower system, to precisely control the fuel/air mixture to provide modulating boiler firing rates for maximum efficiency. The boiler shall operate in a safe condition at a derated output with gas supply pressures as low as 4 inches of water column. The boiler shall be equipped with leveling legs.

E. The boiler shall utilize a 24 VAC control circuit and components. The control system shall have an electronic display for boiler set-up, boiler status, and boiler diagnostics. All components shall be easily accessed and serviceable from the front and top of the jacket. The boiler shall be equipped with; a temperature/pressure gauge, high limit temperature control certified to UL353, ASME certified pressure relief valve, outlet water temperature


sensor, return water temperature sensor, a UL 353 certified flue temperature sensor, outdoor air sensor, low water flow protection and built-in adjustable freeze protection.

F. The boiler shall feature the “Smart System” control with a Multi-Colored Graphic LCD display with Navigation Dial and Soft Keys for, password security, three loop temperature setpoints with individual outdoor air reset curves, pump delay with adjustable freeze protection, pump exercise, domestic hot water prioritization with DHW modulation limiting and USB PC port connection. The boiler shall be capable of controlling a variable speed boiler pump to keep a constant Delta T at all modulation rates. The boiler shall have the capability to accept a 0-10 VDC input connection for BMS control of modulation or setpoint, enable disable of the boiler, variable system pump signal and a 0-10VDC output of boiler modulation rate. The Boiler shall have a built-in “Cascade” with sequencing options for “lead lag” or “efficiency optimized” modulation logic, with both capable of rotation while maintaining modulation of up to eight boilers without utilization of an external controller. Supply voltage shall be 120 volt / 60 hertz / single phase.

G. The boiler shall be equipped with two terminal strips for electrical connection. A low voltage connection board with 42 data points for safety and operating controls, i.e., Auxiliary Relay, Auxiliary Proving Switch, Alarm Contacts, Runtime Contacts, Manual Reset Low Water Cutoff, Flow Switch, High and Low Gas Pressure Switches, Tank Thermostat, Three Wall Thermostat/Zone Controls, System Supply Sensor, Outdoor Sensor, Building Management System Signal, Modbus Control Contacts and Cascade Control Circuit. A high voltage terminal strip shall be provided for supply voltage. The high voltage terminal strip plus integral relays are provided for independent pump control of the System pump, the Boiler pump.

H. The boiler shall be installed and vented with a Direct Vent Sidewall system with a horizontal sidewall termination of both the vent and combustion air. The flue shall be PVC, CPVC or Stainless Steel sealed vent material terminating at the sidewall with the manufacturers specified vent termination. A separate pipe shall supply combustion air directly to the BOILER from the outside. The air inlet pipe may be PVC, CPVC, ABS, Galvanized, Dryer Vent, or Stainless Steel sealed pipe. The air inlet must terminate on the same sidewall with the manufacturer’s specified air inlet cap.

I. The boiler shall have an independent laboratory rating for Oxides of Nitrogen (NOx) of 20 ppm or less corrected to 3% O2. The manufacturer shall verify proper operation of the burner, all controls and the heat exchanger by connection to water and venting for a factory fire test prior to shipping.

J. The Firing Control System shall be Direct Spark Ignition with Electronic Supervision.

2.12 UNIT HEATER (UH - #)

A. General

1. Furnish and install where indicated or scheduled on plans, Sterling Model HS horizontal hot water unit heaters or approved equal. Unit shall be equipped as specified herein. All units shall be installed in a neat and workmanlike manner in accordance with this specification and the manufacturer's installation instructions.

B. Casing

1. Casings shall be 20 gauge die-formed steel. Casing substrates shall be prepared for finishing with a hot wash, iron phosphatizing, clear rinse, chromic acid rinse and oven drying. Paint finish shall be lead-free, chromate free, alkyd melamine


resin base and applied with an electrostatic two-pass system. Finish shall be baked at 350°F.

C. Coil Models

1. Coil elements and headers shall be of heavy wall drawn seamless copper tubing. Element tubes shall be brazed into extruded header junctions. Pipe connection saddles shall be of cast bronze. Aluminum fi ns shall have drawn collars to assure permanent bond with expanded element tubes and exact spacing. All Element Assemblies are submersion tested at factory at 200 P.S.I., and are rated at 150 pounds of saturated steam pressure at 366°F, under maximum load conditions. We recommend operating pressure of 75 P.S.I. at 320°F for long life.

D. Motors

1. Motors shall be totally enclosed fan cooled, resilient mounted with class “B” windings. All motors shall be designed for horizontal mounting. Motors shall be totally enclosed, frame mounted, 115/1/60 with thermal overload protection and permanently lubricated sleeve bearings with optional solid state speed controller available.

E. Fans

1. Fans shall be of aluminum blade, hub type designed and balanced to assure maximum air delivery, low motor horsepower requirements and quiet operation. Blades are spark proof.

F. Fan Guards

1. Fan guards shall be welded steel, zinc plated or painted. Units mounted below 8 feet from floor must be equipped with an OSHA fan guard to meet ETL and OSHA requirements.

G. Air Deflection Louvers

1. Units shall be equipped with horizontal, individually adjustable louvers. Vertical louvers for four-way air control shall be available as an optional extra.


A. General: Install all equipment in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Manufacturer’s Field Services: Arrange and pay for the services of a factory-authorized service representative to inspect the field assembly and connection of all new and existing equipment.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify equipment in accordance with Section “Common Work Results for HVAC.”


3.3 CONTROL WIRING INSTALLATION

A. Install wiring between motor control devices and control/indicating devices as specified in Section “Instrumentation and Controls for HVAC” for hard-wired connections.

B. Install wiring in enclosures neatly bundled, trained, and supported.


A. Schedule mechanical inspections and tests by manufacture authorized representative with at least one week’s advance notification.

B. Visual and mechanical inspection: Include the following inspections and related work for

all new and existing equipment.

1. Inspect for defects and physical damage of all new and existing equipment, and nameplate compliance with current project drawings.

2. Exercise and perform operational tests of new and existing mechanical components and other operable devices in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

3. Check tightness of electrical connections of devices with calibrated torque wrench. Use manufacturer’s recommended torque values.

4. Clean equipment using manufacturer’s approved methods and materials. 5. Verify proper fuse types and ratings for all new and existing equipment. 6. Provide complete start-up and re-certification of all existing equipment such as

chillers, boiler, air handling units, air compressor, vacuum pump, RO/DI system, etc. Provide certification documentation of existing equipment in accordance with close out documentation specifications. All work shall be performed by manufacture or manufacture certified technician / representative.

7. Provide / Replace air filters in all existing air handing units with 30% average atmospheric dust spot efficiency pre-filters and 85% average atmospheric dust spot efficiency final filters.

3.5 CLEANING

A. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish. Clean devices internally using methods and materials as recommended by manufacturer.

3.6 DEMONSTRATION

A. Training: Arrange and pay for the services of a factory-authorized service representative to demonstrate solid-state and variable-speed controllers and train Owner’s maintenance personnel.

B. Conduct a minimum of 40 hours of training in operation and maintenance. Include training

relating to equipment operation and maintenance procedures.

C. Schedule training with at least seven days’ advance notification.

3.7 COMMISSIONING

A. Provide assistance and support for all Commissioning activities and functional testing as


outlined in the Commissioning Plan and specifications.

END OF SECTION

EASTERN DISTRICT POLICE STATION 15725 - 1 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES 28103.01 January 15, 2013

SECTION 15725 - VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

B. Requirements of the following Division 15 Sections apply to this Section:

1. Section “Common work results for HVAC.”

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes variable frequency drives. 1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Conditions of Contract and Division 1 Specification Sections.

B. Product data for products specified in this Section. Include dimensions, ratings, and data

on features and components.

C. Certified reports of field tests and observations specified in “Field Quality Control” in this Section.

D. Maintenance data for products for inclusion in Operating and Maintenance Manual

specified in Division 1 and in Section “Common Work Results for HVAC.”

E. Units to suit actual motor nameplate full load currents.

F. Qualification data for field-testing organization certificates, signed by the Contractor, certifying that the organization complies with the requirements specified in “Quality Assurance” below. Include list of completed projects with project names, addresses, names of Architects and Owners, plus other information specified.


A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide solid-state variable frequency drives from manufacturers regularly engaged in the manufacturer of equipment of the types and capacities indicated, with such products in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than 5 years. Manufacturer must also maintain, within 100 miles of the project site, a service center capable of providing training, parts, and emergency maintenance and repairs.

B. Components and Installation: NFPA 70, “National Electrical Code.”

C. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.

1. The terms “listed” and “labeled” shall be defined as they are in the National

Electrical Code, Article 100. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A “Nationally Recognized Testing

Laboratory” (NRTL) as defined in OSHA regulation 1910.7.


D. UL Compliance

1. UL 508, “Electric Industrial Control Equipment.”

E. Single-Source Responsibility: Obtain similar motor-control devices from a single

manufacturer.

F. Field-Testing Organization Qualifications: To qualify for acceptance, a testing organization must demonstrate, based on evaluation of organization-submitted criteria conforming to ASTM E 699, “Standard Practice for Evaluation of Agencies Involved in Testing, Quality Assurance, and Evaluating of Building Components,” that it has the experience and capability to conduct satisfactorily the testing indicated.

G. Comply with IEEE C2 “National Electrical Safety Code,” 1993.

1.5 COORDINATION

A. General: Coordinate features of controllers and control devices with pilot devices and control circuits provided under Division 15 Sections covering control systems.


A. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:

1. Variable frequency drives.

a. ABB b. Square D. Company c. General Electric Co. d. Cutler-Hammer e. MagneTek f. Eurotherm g. Reliance

2.2 VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES

A. Variable Frequency Drives (VFD) shall be provided as indicated or scheduled on the drawings.

B. The Variable Frequency Drive (VFD) shall convert 460 volt, three (3) phase, sixty (60)

hertz utility power to adjustable voltage and frequency, three (3) phase, AC power for stepless motor control from ten (10) percent to one hundred ten (110) percent of base speed. The manufacturer shall provide VFDs of the same basic model number for all the drives. The VFD shall be a PWM-V design.

C. The manufacturer shall provide on site start-up services for each VFD. A training period of

four (4) hours shall be provided by factory personnel to instruct the Owner's personnel in the use of the VFD.

D. The VFD shall be a voltage source type with Pulse Width Modulation (PWM) output

utilizing power transistor semi-conductors.


1. Complete efficiency versus load and speed shall be submitted for approval.

E. The VFD together with all options and modifications shall be mounted within a standard NEMA 12 enclosure suitable for continuous operation at ambient temperature of zero (0) to forty (40) degrees Celsius with relative humidity of ninety-five (95) percent non- condensing. All high voltage components within enclosure shall be isolated with steel covers. The complete unit shall be UL listed and UL labeled. 1. Provide NEMA 3 enclosure for all roof mounted VFD units.

F. Circuits shall provide DV/DT and DI/DT protection for semi-conductors. VFD shall be

capable of starting into a rotating load without damage to the drive. Protective circuits shall cause instantaneous trip should any of the following faults occur:

1. 110 percent of controller maximum sine wave current rating is exceeded. 2. Provide a 6-pulse input. 3. Output phase to phase and phase to ground short circuit condition. 4. High input line voltage. 5. Low input line voltage. 6. Loss of input phase. 7. External fault. This protective circuit shall permit, by means of the terminal strip,

wiring of remote normally closed safety contacts such as high static, firestat, etc. to shut down the drive.

G. The following adjustments shall be available in the controller:

1. Maximum frequency (fifteen (15) to two hundred fifty (250) Hz) factory set at sixty

(60) Hz. 2. Minimum frequency (three (3) to sixty (60) Hz) factory set at six (6) Hz. 3. Acceleration adjustable from 0.1 to 360 seconds factory set at twenty (20)

seconds. 4. Deceleration adjustable from 0.1 to 360 seconds factory set at twenty (20)

seconds. 5. Volts/Hertz ratio factory set for 480V at 60 Hz. 6. Voltage offset or boost factory set at 100 percent torque. 7. Current limit (fifty (50%) percent to one hundred ten (110%) percent sine wave

current rating) factory set at 100% current.

H. The VFD shall have the following basic features:

1. Door-mounted operators controls consisting of a membrane command center which allows manual stop/start and speed control, local/remote indication and manual/automatic speed control selection. In addition, the command center will serve as a means to configure controller parameters such as minimum speed, maximum speed, acceleration and deceleration times, volts/Hz ratio, torque boost, etc. Potentiometers will not be allowed for these settings.

2. Main input disconnect to provide a positive disconnect of all phases of the incoming A-C line to both the controller and the bypass circuitry. This disconnect shall be mounted inside the controller enclosure and have through-the-door interlocking toggle with provisions for padlocking.

3. Input fuses. 4. Electronic motor solid-state overload protection:

a. Overload circuit shall provide for 3:1 FLA range. b. 2% tripping accuracy. c. True single phase protection by detecting loss of, or low voltage and

tripping within 3 seconds.


d. Inherently protection from short circuit damage by saturation of current sensors.

e. Square D Motor Logic Overload Relay, or equal. 5. Automatic restart after power outage, drive fault (except ground fault or short

circuit) or external fault, with drive in automatic mode. The circuit shall allow the user to select up to nine (9) restart attempts as well as the dwell time between attempts. The reset time between fault occurrences shall also be selectable, set at twenty (20) seconds. All settings shall be via the membrane command center.

6. Door-mounted LED display for digital indication of: a. Frequency output b. Voltage output c. Current output d. First fault indication

7. Relay contacts for remote indication of drive fault and motor running. 8. Three (3) critical frequency avoidance bands, field programmable via the

membrane command center. Each critical frequency avoidance band shall have a bandwidth adjustable via keypad entry of up to ten (10) Hz.

9. Three (3) programmable preset speeds which will force the VFD to a preset speed upon a user contact closure.

10. Process follower to enable VFD to respond to any of the following signals: a. A pneumatic 3 - three (3) to fifteen (15) pound signal or b. 0 -10VAC or c. 4 - 20MA signal.

11. The VFD shall have the capability to ride through power dips up to 500 msec without a controller trip depending on load and operating condition.

12. Harmonic Filters, line reactor or internal bus inductor to minimize line surges, line notching, and input voltage distortions to less than 3% THD. Line reactor shall be provided in a NEMA 12 enclosure for installation on three (3) phase sixty (60) hertz input power to the VFD.

13. Manual bypass-to-line with magnetic contactors interlocked to transfer motor from the variable frequency controller to full speed operation on utility supplied input power while the motor is at any speed. Three (3) motor contactors, electrically interlocked shall be utilized, one (1) contactor between the controller output and the motor and the other between the bypass power line and the motor, providing across-the-line starting. Contactors shall be isolated and interlocked such that parallel operation is prohibited.

14. Motor protection per National Electrical Code shall be provided in both the "controller" mode and the "bypass" mode by a motor overload relay. Thermal overload elements may be used in bypass mode only. The 115-volt A-C relay control logic, allowing common start/stop commands in the "controller" mode and the "bypass" mode shall also be included within the enclosure.

15. In addition to the door interlocked, main power input disconnect providing positive shutdown of all power to both the bypass circuitry and the VFD, the bypass circuit shall also include a second input disconnect to the VFD. This disconnect shall provide the ability to safely trouble shoot and test the controller, both energized and de-energized, while operating in the bypass mode. Terminal connectors for over-pressurization switches shall be provided, to protect the ductwork in the bypass mode.

I. The VFD and all components shall be supplied within NEMA 12 wall or floor and above

mounted enclosures which shall be UL listed. The assembly shall be arranged to accept a single three (3) phase 480 volt power supply to the main door-interlocked power fused input disconnect with a 200,000 A-C rating.

J. The VFD manufacturer shall maintain and staff nationwide service centers. These service

engineers shall be employed by the manufacturer and shall provide start-up service


including physical inspection of the drive and connected wiring and final adjustments to meet specified performance requirements.

K. The VFD manufacturer shall provide harmonic calculations to show the effect of the motor

and VFD on the distribution system. Calculate the input voltage THD based on the upstream distribution system characteristics, feeder size and transformer impedances. Base calculations on all VFD controlled motors running with VFD’s.

2.3 Each point of common coupling for the harmonic calculation shall be defined as the secondary

side of the transformer that feeds that group of VFD’s.

A. The VFD shall carry a full parts and labor warranty for the time period of two (2) years from the date of acceptance by the Owner.

B. The Contractor shall coordinate the connections between the VFD and the individual

motors provided. This coordination shall take place prior to shop drawing submittals and shall be reflected in the shop drawings, which are submitted for review.

C. The Contractor shall verify that the motors served by the VFD’s are compatible with the

supplied VFDs. 2.4 AUXILIARY CONTROL DEVICES

A. General: Factory installed in controller enclosure except as otherwise indicated. Where separately mounted, provide NEMA, “National Electrical Manufacturers Association,” enclosure except as otherwise indicated.

B. Pushbutton Stations and Selector Switches: Heavy-duty type, oil tight.

C. Control Relays: Auxiliary and adjustable time-delay relays.

D. Elapsed Time Meters: Heavy duty with digital readout in hours.

E. Current Sensors: Rated to suit application.

F. Phase-Failure and Undervoltage Relays: Solid-state sensing circuit with isolated output

contacts for hardwired connection. Provide adjustable undervoltage setting.

G. Current-Sensing, Phase-Failure Relay: Solid-state sensing circuit with isolated contacts for hard-wired connection. Arranged to operate on phase failure, phase reversal, current unbalance of from 30 to 40 percent, or loss of supply voltage. Provide adjustable response delay.


A. General: Install variable frequency drives in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.

B. Manufacturer’s Field Services: Arrange and pay for the services of a factory-authorized

service representative to inspect the field assembly and connection of components, and supervise the pretesting and adjustment of solid-state controllers.

C. Mounting: For control equipment at walls, bolt units to wall or mount on light-weight

structural steel channels bolted to the wall. For controllers not at walls, provide


freestanding racks fabricated of structural steel members and light-weight slotted structural steel channels. Use feet consisting of 3/8 inch thick steel plates, 6 inches square, bolted to the floor. Use feet for welded attachment of 1 ½ inch by 1 ½ inch by ¼ inch vertical angle posts not over three feet on centers. Connect the posts with horizontal lightweight slotted steel channels and bolt the control equipment to the channels.

3.2 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify variable frequency drives in accordance with Section “Common Work Results for HVAC.”


A. Install wiring between motor control devices and control/indicating devices as specified in Section “Instrumentation and Controls for HVAC” for hard-wired connections.


3.4 CONNECTIONS

A. Tighten connectors, terminals, bus joints, and mountings. Tighten field connected connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with equipment manufacturer’s published torque tightening values. Where manufacturer’s torquing requirements are not indicated, comply with tightening torques specified in UL 486A and 486B.


A. Schedule visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests with at least one week’s advance notification.

B. Visual and mechanical inspection: Include the following inspections and related work.

1. Inspect for defects and physical damage NRTL labeling, and nameplate

compliance with current project drawings. 2. Exercise and perform operational tests of mechanical components and other

operable devices in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions. 3. Check tightness of electrical connections of devices with calibrated torque

wrench. Use manufacturer’s recommended torque values. 4. Clean devices using manufacturer’s approved methods and materials. 5. Verify proper fuse types and ratings in fusible devices.

C. Electrical Tests: Perform the following in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions:

1. Insulation resistance test of motor control devices conducting parts to the extent

permitted by the manufacturer’s instructions. Insulation resistance less than 100 megohms is not acceptable. Tests are required for all motors > 10 HP.

2. Use primary current injection to check performance characteristics of motor-circuit protectors and for overload relays of controllers for motors 15 horsepower and larger. Trip characteristics not within manufacturer’s published time-current tolerances are not acceptable.

3. Make adjustments for final settings of adjustable-trip devices based on installed motor nameplates. Test auxiliary protective features such as loss of phase, phase unbalance and undervoltage to verify operation.

4. Check for improper voltages at terminals in controllers that have external control


wiring when controller disconnect is opened. Any voltage over 30 V is unacceptable.

5. Test ground fault protection devices by current injection method. 6. Retesting: Correct deficiencies and retest. Verify by the retests that specified

requirements are met. 3.6 CLEANING

A. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish. Clean devices internally using methods and materials as recommended by manufacturer.

3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Training: Arrange and pay for the services of a factory-authorized service representative to demonstrate solid-state and variable-speed controllers and train Owner’s maintenance personnel.

B. Conduct a minimum of 4 hours of training in operation and maintenance. Include training

relating to equipment operation and maintenance procedures.

C. Schedule training with at least seven days’ advance notification.

END OF SECTION

EASTERN DISTRICT POLICE STATION 15800- 1 AIR DISTRIBUTION 28103.01 January 15, 2013

SECTION 15800 - AIR DISTRIBUTION

PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 GENERAL

A. The fabrication and installation of all ductwork, together with related equipment shall comply with the standards of the National Fire Protection Association, as set forth in NFPA Standard No. 90A, as well as with the requirements of the Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Installer's Association, Inc. and the latest edition of the ASHRAE Guide.

B. All duct sizes shown are net inside clear dimensions. Where internal duct lining is used,

increase duct sizes accordingly to provide the indicated net free area. Unless otherwise indicated, size runouts, drops and connections to grilles, registers, diffusers, fans, coils, louvers, filters and other equipment to the full size of the equipment connection.

C. Minor changes may be made in duct sizes where required to fit the available space,

provided the indicated net free area and approximate aspect ratio are maintained.

D. Smoothly transition all ductwork and prevent excessive or unnecessary turbulence or pressure loss.

E. Submit sheet metal shop drawings as indicated in Section “Common Work Results for

HVAC.”

F. All ductwork shall be cleaned following fabrication using filtered compressed air and the ends shall be sealed at the shop. Upon delivery to the site, duct ends shall remain sealed until time of actual installation. Following installation, ductwork shall be wiped down and cleaned (swept/vacuumed) in place. Partially installed ductwork shall have unfinished areas resealed in place at the end of each working day.


A. The General Provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions (if any), and the General Requirements, apply to the work specified in this Division.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 DUCTWORK

A. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, fabricate ductwork of galvanized sheet steel or aluminum, conforming to Commercial Designation 3003 Temper H14 and Duct Sheet. Duct gauges, jointing and reinforcement shall conform to Tables 4, 5, 6 and 7 as applicable, Chapter 1 of 1975 ASHRAE Guide and Data Book and SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Metal and Flexible – Latest Edition. Construction for Ventilation and Air Conditioning Systems as published by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Installer's Association, Inc.

B. Erect sheet metal ductwork in a first class, workmanlike manner secured in place rigidly

and permanently. Provide suitable hangers, securely attached to building construction with bolts, clips or inserts. Hangers shall be structural shapes, flat bars or formed strap hangers; use of wire will not be permitted. Hangers shall not pass through or be inside duct. Support vertical ducts passing through floors by angles riveted to duct and resting


either on floors or on brackets secured to building construction. All space around duct where they pass through walls, floors, ceilings or roofs shall be sealed tight with incombustible inert material. Do not arrange ducts so as to impair the effectiveness of fireproofing around exposed ducts passing through walls, floors or ceilings in finished areas to provide finished appearance. Provide sheet metal flanged collars around all exposed ducts passing through walls, floors or ceilings in finished areas to provide finished appearance. Seal all duct joints and seams including low pressure supply and return and exhaust ductwork with Hardcast Two Part Sealing System as manufactured by Hardcast, Inc. and no others will be acceptable. Two part sealing system shall consist of DT-TAPE with RTA-50 indoor/outdoor sealing system.

C. Flexible connections of neoprene or other NFPA approved non-inflammable fabric shall

be provided in duct system at all fan inlet and outlet connections.

D. Provide duct turning vanes in all cut turns where center line radius is less than 1½ times width of duct and in all square elbows. Turning vanes shall be airfoil type with extended trailing edges.

E. Provide duct collars and angle iron framework for mounting of automatic dampers.

2.2 DUCT SYSTEM

A. Duct system shall be constructed as specified below.

1. Supply and return ductwork: 4" w.c. duct construction between air handling unit fans and VAV terminals and 2" w.c. sheet metal duct construction downstream of VAV boxes. Flexible or sheet metal ductwork from duct branch to diffusers as indicated on plans.

2. Outdoor Air Ductwork: 2" w.c. duct construction. 3. General Exhaust System: 2" w.c. duct construction. 4. Boiler Breeching: As specified under Section “Heating, Ventilation and Air

conditioning.” 2.3 DUCT CONSTRUCTION

A. Round Ductwork: Ductwork shall be single wall Type SS(75) as manufactured by Semco Manufacturing, Inc. or approved equal, uniseal duct and uniform fittings. Construct ductwork of galvanized sheet steel. Elbows 8" diameter and smaller shall be smooth formed. Larger elbows shall be 5 section type. Tees and crosses and laterals shall be conical. Make joints with sleeve type couplings, short length sheet metal screws and duct sealant. Conform to duct manufacturer's recommendations for jointing and installation. Ductwork and fittings shall be manufactured by a company regularly engaged in the construction of spiral ductwork and fittings. Installer fabricated ductwork will not

be acceptable. Manufacturers substituted for the above specified manufacturers shall submit for approval, independent published laboratory test data on all proposed ductwork and fittings showing materials of construction, air flow, pressure drop and acoustical performance characteristics.

B. Rectangular Ductwork (4" w.g. and 2" w.g. construction):

1. Make allowance for internal duct lining where required. 2. Determine duct gauges for the longest duct side and use for all 4 sides. Joints

and reinforcing requirements apply to the longest duct side. 3. Reinforce all ducts to prevent buckling, vibration or noise as recommended in the

referenced construction standards and as required to suit the installed conditions. 4. Do not crossbreak duct which will receive rigid insulation covering.


5. Where tap sizes of divided flow fittings are not indicated, make branch and main connection sizes proportional to their respective air flows and maintain uniform transverse velocities in the fittings.

6. Make radius elbows and radius tee connection with throat radius equal to or greater than the width of the duct. Use vaned elbows where shown and where radius elbows will not fit the space in all square bends.

7. Turning vanes shall be the airfoil type with extended trailing edges 36" maximum length. Where longer vanes are required, use 2 or more sets of vanes with intermediate runners securely fastened together.

8. Bolts, screws, rivet or spot weld reinforcing members securely to the duct on not less than 6" centers.

9. Where ducts are open ended without grilles, registers or other means of stiffening, reinforce and stiffen the open end with standing seams or an angle frame.

10. Paint all cut ends on galvanized angles, rods and other uncoated surfaces with aluminum paint.

11. Where ductwork is not painted or otherwise finished, remove all exposed traces of joint sealers, manufacturer's identification and other markings.

12. Aluminum sheet shall be 3003 H14 alloy or duct sheet, 16,000 PSI minimum tensile strength and capable of being formed to a Pittsburgh lock seam.

13. Reinforcing members for aluminum ductwork may be galvanized steel or aluminum, unless otherwise indicated. Where aluminum reinforcing is used, size the member in accordance with ASHRAE recommendations to have rigidity equivalent to listed mild steel angle sizes.

14. Where aluminum ductwork is used, make allowance for increased thermal expansion. Particularly avoid direct contact between aluminum and concrete or masonry walls subject to dampness.

2.4 AIR VOLUME CONTROLS

A. Provide air volume control devices where indicated and where required to adjust and balance air flow in the systems.

B. Air extraction for air outlets and branch ducts shall be the gang operated vane type, Tuttle

& Bailey - Vectrol, Type VLC or VLK as appropriate or approved equal, with suitable adjusting device and means of access.

C. Manual volume dampers in ductwork shall be factory assembled units with rigid frame,

opposed blade action and locking quadrant operator. Mark the extended damper shaft and align the operating handle to indicate the blade position. Dampers shall be as manufactured by American Warming and Ventilating, Inc., Ruskin or approved equal. Rectangular dampers shall be Type DAA-P-50, with steel channel frame, 16 gauge steel blades, 9" maximum blade spacing, nylon bearings, galvanized finish with aluminum paint touch up.

D. Automatic temperature control (ATC) dampers shall be as hereinafter specified under

Section 15900, “Instrumentation and Control for HVAC”.

E. Duct turning vanes shall be Tuttle & Bailey Ducturns or approved equal.

F. Furnish and install duct collars and angle iron frames for the installation of ATC dampers. 2.5 DUCT ACCESS DOORS

A. Furnish and install adequately sized duct access doors, at coils, automatic dampers and


other locations where indicated and required for duct access. Doors shall be the hinged type with approved latches and neoprene compression type gaskets. Stiffen ductwork at door openings where doors are installed in insulated ductwork, provide equivalent insulation in the door assembly. Where access doors are installed in fire rated partitions, provide fire seal access doors as manufactured by Air Balance, Inc. or approved equal, UL approved, meeting the rating of the enclosure in which the access door is installed.

2.6 INSTRUMENT TEST PORTS

A. Furnish and install instrument test ports in the ductwork to allow use of pilot tube traverses in testing and balancing air systems. Install ports in each main, submain and branch main of all systems including supply, return and exhaust. Place holes on more than 2 sides of larger ducts if required by available pilot tube length. Equip holes with Ventlok #699 instrument ports. Fittings shall extend beyond duct covering.

2.7 FLEXIBLE DUCT

A. Flexible ductwork shall be Atco UPC #080 or approved equal, UL listed for Class 1 Air Ducts, Standard 181. Ducts shall be rated for 10" W.G. per UL 181.

B. Limit flexible duct 6' maximum. Install flexible ducts, using all recommended fittings,

couplings and accessories. Support ducts with wide straps spaced so that horizontal runs do not sag more than 3" in 3'. Cover with duct tape and fasten with duct strap clamps. 180o

F bends in flexible duct are prohibited.

2.8 AIR TERMINAL DEVICES

A. Furnish and install air supply, return and exhaust devices of sizes and capacities as scheduled on the contract drawings. Unless otherwise indicated, catalog numbers shown are Titus products and for equipment which has been found suitable for the application. Products of Hart & Cooley/Tuttle & Bailey Inc., Carnes or Krueger will be considered only if performance characteristics, including throw, drop, pressure loss, sound pressure level, etc. are equal to or better than the performance characteristics of the specified product. Performance characteristics as indicated above shall be included in shop drawing submittals. Shop drawings will not be reviewed unless performance data is submitted.

B. Where air terminal devices are installed in duct collars or branches, furnish and install air

extractors. Furnish and install control grids, volume dampers and/or other accessories necessary to ensure uniform air flow across the terminal devices. Accessories shall be of the same material as the terminal device. Install fixed blade terminals so that blades block the normal line of vision. Furnish 3 of each type of removable key operators.

2.9 DUCT THERMOMETERS

A. Duct thermometers shall be Johnson Service Co., Powers Regulator Co. or approved equal, 4½" dial, 2°

F divisions, cast aluminum case, mercury actuated, brass movement, 8' copper averaging bulb with bronze braided armor, stainless steel connecting tube as required.

B. Duct thermometers shall be furnished and installed at air handling units as follows:

LOCATION RANGE

Outdoor Air Duct -40oF to 120o

Return Air Duct 30F

oF to 180o

Mixed Air Plenum 30F

oF to 180oF


Supply Air Duct 30oF to 180o

F

2.10 SPIN-IN FITTINGS

A. Furnish and install spin-in fittings where indicated on the contract drawings, Buckley Air-Tite Bellmouth Model BM with balancing damper as manufactured by Buckley Air Products, Inc. or approved equal.

2.11 SPLITTER DAMPERS

A. Provide splitter dampers in accordance with SMACNA Standards as manufactured by Titus, Hart & Cooley or approved equal. Dampers shall be of steel construction and shall be provided with manual adjusting lever and locking device.

2.12 SMOKE DETECTORS

A. Smoke detectors and associated wiring shall be provided under Division 16 and located and installed under this division.

2.13 LOUVERS

A. Provided under another division. 2.14 LOUVER BLANK-OFF PANELS

A. Provide blank off panels over unused portions of exterior louvers. Blank off panels shall be 1" Air Enterprises, Inc. Panel shall be caulked and sealed and shall be attached to aluminum angle frames to provide a neat weathertight enclosure. Paint panels per Architect’s directive.

2.15 DUCT SOUND ATTENUATORS

A. General:

1. Furnish and install silencers of the sizes and types shown on the plans and schedules. Silencers are to be factory fabricated by Dynasonics or an approved equal. Field fabricated silencers are not acceptable.

B. Construction:

1. Rectangular: The outer casing shall be constructed on not less that 22 gauge (.034”) galvanized steel with interior baffles of not less than 26 gauge (.022”) galvanized perforated steel. Perforations shall be 3/16” diameter holes on 3/32” staggered centers. All galvanized steel shall comply with ASTM A653 standard for galvanized coatings and shall be classified as G60 minimum coating thickness in accordance with SMACNA duct construction standards.

C. Acoustical Fill Material:

1. Fill shall be inorganic and compressed not less than 5% to eliminate voids and prevent settling. It shall be of sufficient density to meet the scheduled acoustical performance.

2. Fill material shall be resistant to vermin, absorb less than 1% moisture, shall not promote the corrosion of steel or aluminum, and have the following burning characteristics when tested in accordance with ASTM E-84. a. Flame Spread 25


b. Fuel Contribution 0 c. Smoke Development 50

3. Fill shall comply with NFPA-90A.

D. Performance:

1. The Dynamic Insertion Loss (DIL) values shall meet or be greater than the performance values specified. Self Generated Noise (SGN) values shall meet or be less than the scheduled performance values. Static Pressure Drop(PD) values shall not exceed the scheduled performance values.

∆P Insertion Loss per Octave Band Self generated Noise per Octave Band in

W.G.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8

0.09 6 4 9 24 39 26 18 16 57 49 47 47 45 37 27 29

E. Quality Assurance:

1. All acoustical and aerodynamic performance data shall be certified by a NATIONALLY RECOGNIZED QUALIFIED INDEPENDENT LABORATORY. Testing shall be in accordance with the most current version of ASTM E477 (99) test standard for duct silencers which specifies straight “same-size” duct for 2.5 duct diameters upstream and 5 duct diameters downstream of the silencer being tested and include “static regain”. Tests shall be conducted for “Forward” flow (sound and air moving in same direction) and “Reverse” flow (sound and air moving in opposite directions) and shall include values for a minimum of two velocities including 2000 ft/min for both flow conditions. Acoustical and aerodynamic performance data shall be obtained from the same test specimen.

2.16 FIRE DAMPERS

A. Furnish and install automatic fire dampers where indicated and where required by NFPA

Standard No. 90A and by the Fire Marshal of the State of Maryland and the authority having jurisdiction.

B. Construction of fire dampers shall conform to requirements of NFPA No. 90A and shall

bear UL label. Fire dampers shall be set in frames adequately secured to fire partitions, floors, etc. and installed in strict accordance with UL 555 listing and manufacturer's instructions.

C. Fire dampers basis of design shall be Air Balance, Inc. Comparable products as

manufactured by United Sheet Metal or Ruskin shall be submitted for approval as a comparable product. Fire dampers shall be multi-leaf accordion type, held open by adequate heavy gauge wires and suitable calibrated fusible links. Vertical dampers (horizontal air flow) shall close by gravity. Horizontal dampers (vertical air flow) shall be closed by suitable and positive spring closing devices.

D. Damper frames shall provide pocket which shall store damper leaves in open position

outside of air stream and shall provide 100% free air flow when open, Type B fire dampers.

E. Provide adequately sized hinged access doors with cam locks for access to all fusible

links and for resetting fire dampers. Where applicable, access to fire dampers shall be through registers or grilles.


F. Submit complete information to the Engineer, including installation details.

G. Behind air devices, provide thin line fire dampers where indicated shall be Ruskin (Type

A), curtain type with 1-7/8" galvanized steel frame, 18 gauge steel enclosure with UL 555 label, rated for wall in which being provided. Dynamic “Curtain blade” fire dampers shall not be acceptable, Static type shall be utilized.

H. Furnish to the Owner in a suitable storage container not less than 6 fusible links of each

type, size and rating used on the project. 2.17 COMBINATION FIRE / SMOKE DAMPERS

A. Furnish and install combination fire/smoke dampers where indicated and where required by NFPA Standard No. 90A, 92A and 92B and by the Fire Marshal of the State of Maryland, and the authority having jurisdiction.

B. Construction of combination fire/smoke dampers shall conform to requirements of NFPA

No. 90A, 92A and 92B and shall be classified for use for fire resistance ratings of less than 3 hours, in strict accordance with UL 555 listing and manufacturer's instructions. Dampers shall further be classified as Smoke Dampers in accordance with the latest version of UL555S. The leakage rating under UL555S shall be leakage Class 2.

C. Combination fire/smoke dampers basis of design shall be Ruskin. Comparable products

as manufactured by United Sheet Metal or Air Balance, Inc. shall be submitted for approval as a comparable product. Submit complete information to the Engineer, including installation details.

D. In addition to the leakage ratings already specified herein, the dampers and their

actuators shall be qualified under UL555S to an elevated temperature of 250 F (121 °C) or 350 °F (177 °C) depending upon the actuator. Appropriate electric actuators shall be installed by the damper manufacturer at time of damper fabrication. Electric actuators shall have been energized hold open tested for a period of at least 1 year with no spring return failures. Damper and actuator shall be supplied as a single entity which meets all applicable UL555 and UL555S qualifications for both dampers and actuators. Each damper shall be rated for leakage and airflow in either direction through the damper.

E. Each combination fire/smoke damper shall be equipped with a “controlled closure” quick

detect heat-actuated release device to prevent duct and HVAC component damage. Instantaneous damper closure is unacceptable.

F. Damper frame shall be minimum 16 (1.6) gage galvanized steel formed into a structural

hat channel reinforced at corners. Damper blades shall be single skin galvanized steel 16 (1.60 gage minimum with three longitudinal grooves for reinforcement. Bearings shall be stainless steel sleeve turning in an extruded hole in the frame. Blade edge seals shall be inflatable silicone coated fiberglass and galvanized steel mechanically locked into blade edge (adhesive or clip on seals not acceptable). Jamb seals shall be stainless seals compression type. Each damper shall be supplied with a factory mounted sleeve of 17” (432) minimum length.

2.18 VARIABLE VOLUME BOXES (VAV-#)

A. Manufacturers

1. General


a. Manufacturer shall participate in the ARI Certification program. Unit performance data shall be rated in accordance with ARI Standard 880. The manufacturer shall display the ARI Symbol on all units.

b. Single duct terminal units shall be UL listed as an entire assembly. 2. Furnish and install variable air volume boxes of sizes, capacities, arrangements,

and electrical characteristics as indicated on the contract drawings. Basis of design shall be Price, comparable products as manufactured by Titus, Trane or Nailor shall be submitted for approval as a comparable product.

B. Manufactured Units

1. Single duct terminal units a. Ceiling mounted primary air control terminal units for connection to a

single medium - 1.5-3.0 in. wg. pressure duct of a central air distribution system. Terminals units shall be provided with controls and integral heating coils.

2. Identify each terminal unit with clearly marked identification label and airflow indicator. Label shall include unit nominal air flow, maximum factory-set air flow, minimum factory-set air flow, and coil type.

C. Fabrication

1. Casings: Units shall be completely factory-assembled, manufactured of corrosion protected steel, and fabricated with a minimum of 18-gauge metal on the high pressure (inlet) side of the terminal unit damper and 22-gauge metal on the low pressure (outlet) side and unit casing.

2. Insulation – Unit shall be internally with engineered polymer foam insulation which complies to UL181 and NFPA 90a. Insulation shall be 1-1/2” pound density, closed cell foam. Exposed fiberglass is not acceptable. The insulation shall be mechanically fastened to the unit casing.

3. Insulation Edge Treatment- All cut edges of insulation shall completely enclosed by metal to arrest cut fibers and prevent erosion into the airstream.

4. Assembly: Primary air control damper, airflow sensor, controls and hydronic heating coil in single cabinet.

5. Rectangular Supply Air Outlet Connections: Rectangular outlet connections for single duct units shall be slip and drive type.

D. Primary Air Control Damper Assembly

1. Locate primary air control damper assembly inside unit casing. Construct the damper assembly from extruded aluminum and/or a minimum 20 gauge galvanized steel components. Maximum damper leak rate shall not exceed 1% of damper nominal CFM at 4 inch wg. differential.

2. Provide damper assembly with integral flow sensor. Flow sensor shall be provided regardless of control type. Flow sensor shall be a multi-point, averaging, ring or cross type. Bar or single point sensing type is not acceptable.

E. Heating Coils

1. Hot Water Heating Coil: Coils shall be factory-installed and shall consist of aluminum plated fins and seamless copper tubes. Fins shall have full fin collars to provide accurate fin spacing and maximum fin-to-tube contact. Tubes shall be mechanically expanded into the fin collars. Coils shall be leak tested under water to 450 psig pressure. Supply and return water connections shall be on the same side of the coil.


2. Capacity: Provide coils in capacities as scheduled on the contract drawings.

F. Wiring

1. Control Transformer - Provide single duct terminal units with a factory installed and wired 24 VAC transformer to provide control voltage power to the unit.

G. Direct Digital VAV Controls

1. Direct Digital Controls a. Terminal unit manufacturer shall factory mount the direct digital controller

which will be furnished by the Building Automation System Supplier. Perform continually check and provide results to Building Automation System Supplier. Field mounted DDC controls are not acceptable.

b. Multi-point, multi-axis flow ring or cross sensor to be furnished and mounted by terminal unit manufacturer. Single point or flow bar sensors are not acceptable. Flow sensing device shall be capable of maintaining airflow to within +/- 5 percent of rated unit airflow setpoint when installed with 1.5 duct diameters straight duct, of the same size as the primary airflow inlet, upstream from the unit.

H. Testing/Verification

1. Factory set and check all analog electronic controllers to within 5% of scheduled maximum and minimum settings. Base performance on tests conducted in accordance with ARI 880.

2. Maximum Casing Leakage: 1 percent of nominal air flow at 0.5 in wg inlet static pressure.

3. Maximum Damper Leakage: 1 percent of design air flow at 4 in wg inlet static pressure.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 DUCT INSTALLATION

A. Coordinate ductwork with other work and install ducts at proper elevations and locations to maintain indicated ceiling heights and clearances. Provide all elbows, transitions, offsets, connections and other fittings necessary to fit the work into place or to connect to equipment of diffusers. Method of duct support connection to structure and slabs shall be approved by the Architect; submit shop drawings.

B. Substantially support ductwork with structural shapes, flat bars or formed strap hangers

securely attached to the building structure by means of bolts, clamps or inserts. Support vertical ducts by angles attached to the duct and resting on the floor or supported by brackets or hangers attached to the building structure. Strap hangers shall be 16 gauge minimum galvanized steel formed under the bottom edge of duct. Use square ¼" thick washers tight against the bend on upper strap attachments to horizontal surfaces. Place all supports external to the ductwork and out of the air stream. Provide additional supports at coils and other concentrated loads. Arrange supports so that duct weight is not transmitted to ceilings, fans or other equipment.

C. Prevent direct contact between ductwork and building surfaces or other equipment.

Where ducts pass through walls, partitions, floors, ceilings or roofs, pack and seal the space around the duct with an approved fire safe inert material.


D. Use galvanized or corrosion resistant hangers, supports, brackets and hardware.

E. Furnish and install NFPA approved flexible duct connections where shown and at all connections to fans. Use glass reinforced neoprene fabric, roll formed to sheet metal strips or flanges. Support adjacent ductwork to provide sufficient slack in the connection.

3.2 LEAKAGE TESTS

A. All sheet metal ductwork shall undergo leakage tests according to duct construction ratings. Tests shall be accomplished under this section and witnessed as specified under Sections “Common Work Results for HVAC” and “Testing, Adjusting and Balancing for HVAC.”

B. Leakage from each duct system shall not exceed 5% of the normal air handling capacity

of the system. If the system ductwork is tested in sections, repair all leaks which are audible, regardless of the leakage rate of the duct system as a whole, by remaking the entire defective joint or seam. Spot sealing of ducts in place will be unacceptable.

C. Submit a complete report of ductwork leakage test to the Architect.

3.3 DUCTWORK CLEANING

A. All ductwork shall be cleaned following fabrication using filtered compressed air and the ends shall be sealed at the shop. Upon delivery to the site, duct ends shall remain sealed until time of actual installation. Following installation, ductwork shall be wiped down and cleaned (swept/vacuumed) in place. Partially installed ductwork shall have unfinished areas resealed in place at the end of each working day.

END OF SECTION

EASTERN DISTRICT POLICE STATION 15900 - 1 INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC 28103.01 January 15, 2013

SECTION 15900 - INSTRUMENTATION AND CONTROL FOR HVAC

PART 1 GENERAL


A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes all control system software, hardware, wiring, sensors, thermostats, control valving, control dampers, control components, etc.

B. All labor, material, equipment and software not specifically referred to herein or on the plans, that is required to meet the functional intent of this specification, shall be provided without additional cost to the Owner.

C. It is the owner’s goal to implement an open system that will allow products from various suppliers to be integrated into a unified system in order to provide flexibility for expansion, maintenance, and service of the system. The Owner shall be the named license holder of all software associated with any and all incremental work on the project(s).

D. Related Sections:

1. Section “Common Work Results for HVAC”: Submittal execution requirements for work under this section.

2. Section “Common Motor Requirements.” 3. Section “Pipe and Tubes for HVAC Equipment”: Product requirements for

thermometer sockets. 4. Section “Air Distribution”: Product requirements for duct mounted thermometers. 5. Section “Common Work Results for Electrical”: Execution requirements for

electric connections specified by this section. 6. Section “Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning.” 7. Section “Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors & Cables” and “Raceways &

Boxes for Electrical Systems” for wiring and raceway requirements.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. All work shall conform to the following Codes and Standards, as applicable:

1. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) Standards, latest edition. 2. National Electric Code (NEC) and applicable local Electric Code, latest edition. 3. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) listing and labels, latest edition. 4. UL 864 Control Units and Accessories for Fire Alarm Systems, 2008. 5. UL 268 Smoke Detectors for Fire Alarm Systems, 2009. 6. UL 916 Energy Management Equipment, 2007. 7. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code, 2008. 8. NFPA 90A - Standard For The Installation Of Air Conditioning And Ventilating

Systems, 2009.


9. NFPA 92A Standard for Smoke-Control Systems Utilizing Barriers and Pressure Differences, 2009.

10. NFPA 92B Standard for Smoke Management Systems in Malls, Atria, and Large Spaces, 2009.

11. Factory Mutual (FM), latest edition. 12. American National Standards Institute (ANSI), latest edition. 13. National Electric Manufacturer’s Association (NEMA), latest edition. 14. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME), latest edition. 15. American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air Conditioning Engineers

(ASHRAE), latest edition. 16. Air Movement and Control Association (AMCA), latest edition. 17. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE), latest edition. 18. American Standard Code for Information Interchange (ASCII), latest edition. 19. Electronics Industries Association (EIA), latest edition. 20. Occupational Safety and Health Administration (OSHA), latest edition. 21. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM), latest edition. 22. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) including Part 15, Radio Frequency

Devices, latest edition. 23. Americans Disability Act (ADA), latest edition. 24. ANSI/EIA 909.1-A-1999 (LonWorks) 25. ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 195-2004 (BACnet)

B. In the case of conflicts or discrepancies, the more stringent regulation shall apply.

C. All work shall meet the approval of the Authorities Having Jurisdiction at the project site.

1.4 DEFINITIONS

A. Analog: A continuously variable system or value not having discrete levels. Typically exists within a defined range of limiting values.

B. Binary: A two-state system where an “ON” condition is represented by one discrete signal level and an “OFF” condition is represented by a second discrete signal level.

C. Building Management System (BMS): The total integrated system of fully operational and functional elements, including equipment, software, programming, and associated materials, to be provided by this Section and to be interfaced to the associated work of other related trades.

D. BMS Contractor: The single Contractor to provide the work of this Section. This Contractor shall be the primary manufacturer, installer, BMS commissioning agent, and ongoing service provider for the BMS work.

E. Control Sequence: A BMS pre-programmed arrangement of software algorithms, logical computation, target values and limits as required to attain the defined operational control objectives.

F. Direct Digital Control: The digital algorithms and pre-defined arrangements included in the BMS software to provide direct closed-loop control for the designated equipment and controlled variables. Inclusive of Proportional, Derivative and Integral control algorithms together with target values, limits, logical functions, arithmetic functions, constant values, timing considerations and the like.


G. BMS Network: The total digital on-line real-time interconnected configuration of BMS digital processing units, workstations, panels, sub-panels, controllers, devices and associated elements individually known as network nodes. May exist as one or more fully interfaced and integrated sub-networks, LAN, WAN or the like.

H. Node: A digitally programmable entity existing on the BMS network.

I. BMS Integration: The complete functional and operational interconnection and interfacing of all BMS work elements and nodes in compliance with all applicable codes, standards and ordinances so as to provide a single coherent BMS as required by this Division.

J. PC: IBM-compatible Personal Computer from a recognized major manufacturer.

K. Wiring: The term “Wiring” and its derivatives when used in this Division shall mean provide the BMS wiring and terminations, including all low voltage and power (line voltage) wiring.

L. Protocol: The term “protocol” and its derivatives when used in this Division shall mean a defined set of rules and standards governing the on-line exchange of data between BMS network nodes.

M. Software: The term “software” and its derivatives when used in this Division shall mean all of programmed digital processor software, preprogrammed firmware and project specific digital process programming and database entries and definitions as generally understood in the BMS industry for real-time, on-line, integrated BMS configurations.

N. The use of words in the singular shall not be considered as limiting when other indications in these documents denote that more than one such item is being referenced.

O. Headings, paragraph numbers, titles, shading, bolding, underscores, clouds and other symbolic interpretation aids included in the Division documents are for general information only and are to assist in the reading and interpretation of these Documents.

1.5 ACRONYMS

A. The following abbreviations and acronyms may be used in describing the work of this Division:

ADC - Analog to Digital Converter AI - Analog Input AN - Application Node ANSI - American National Standards Institute AO - Analog Output ASCII - American Standard Code for Information Interchange ASHRAE - American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and Air Conditioning Engineers AWG - American Wire Gauge CPU - Central Processing Unit CRT - Cathode Ray Tube DAC - Digital to Analog Converter DDC - Direct Digital Control DI - Digital Input DO - Digital Output


EEPROM - Electronically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory EMI - Electromagnetic Interference FAS - Fire Alarm Detection and Annunciation System GUI - Graphical User Interface HOA - Hand-Off-Auto ID - Identification IEEE - Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers I/O - Input/Output LAN - Local Area Network LCD - Liquid Crystal Display LED - Light Emitting Diode MCC - Motor Control Center NC - Normally Closed NIC - Not In Contract NO - Normally Open OWS - Operator Workstation OAT - Outdoor Air Temperature PC - Personal Computer RAM - Random Access Memory RF - Radio Frequency RFI - Radio Frequency Interference RH - Relative Humidity ROM - Read Only Memory RTD - Resistance Temperature Device SPDT - Single Pole Double Throw SPST - Single Pole Single Throw XVGA - Extended Video Graphics Adapter TBA - To Be Advised TCP/IP - Transmission Control Protocol/Internet

Protocol TTD - Thermistor Temperature Device UPS - Uninterruptible Power Supply VAC - Volts, Alternating Current VAV - Variable Air Volume VDC - Volts, Direct Current WAN - Wide Area Network

1.6 BMS DESCRIPTION

A. The Facility Management and Control System (FMCS) shall be comprised of Network Area Controller or Controllers (NAC). The NAC shall connect to the owner’s local or wide area network, depending on configuration. Access to the system, either locally, or remotely from a central site or sites, shall be accomplished through standard Web browsers, via the Internet and/or local area network. Each NAC shall communicate to LonMark/LonTalk (IDC) controllers.

B. The Facility Management and Control System (FMCS) as provided in this Division shall be based on the Niagara Framework (or “Niagara”), a Java-based framework developed by Tridium. Niagara provides an open automation infrastructure that integrates diverse systems and devices (regardless of manufacturer, communication standard or software) into a unified platform that can be easily managed in real time over the Internet using a standard Web browser. Systems not developed on the Niagara Framework platform are unacceptable.


C. The Building Management System (BMS) shall be a complete system designed for use with the enterprise IT systems. This functionality shall extend into the equipment rooms. Devices residing on the automation network located in equipment rooms and similar shall be fully IT compatible devices that mount and communicate directly on the IT infrastructure in the facility. Contractor shall be responsible for coordination with the owner’s IT staff to ensure that the BMS will perform in the owner’s environment without disruption to any of the other activities taking place on that LAN.

D. All points of user interface shall be on standard PCs that do not require the purchase of any special software from the BMS manufacturer for use as a building operations terminal. The primary point of interface on these PCs will be a standard Web Browser.

E. Where necessary and as dictated elsewhere in these Specifications, Servers shall be used for the purpose of providing a location for extensive archiving of system configuration data, and historical data such as trend data and operator transactions. All data stored will be through the use of a standard data base platform: Microsoft Data Engine (MSDE) or Microsoft SQL Server as dictated elsewhere in this specification.

F. The work of the single BMS Contractor shall be as defined individually and collectively in all Sections of this Division specifications together with the associated Point Sheets and Drawings and the associated interfacing work as referenced in the related documents.

G. The BMS work shall consist of the provision of all labor, materials, tools, equipment, software, software licenses, software configurations and database entries, interfaces, wiring, tubing, installation, labeling, engineering, calibration, documentation, samples, submittals, testing, commissioning, training services, permits and licenses, transportation, shipping, handling, administration, supervision, management, insurance, temporary protection, cleaning, cutting and patching, warranties, services, and items, even though these may not be specifically mentioned in these Division documents which are required for the complete, fully functional and commissioned BMS.

H. Provide a complete, neat and workmanlike installation. Use only manufacturer employees who are skilled, experienced, trained, and familiar with the specific equipment, software, standards and configurations to be provided for this Project.

I. Manage and coordinate the BMS work in a timely manner in consideration of the Project schedules. Coordinate with the associated work of other trades so as to not impede or delay the work of associated trades.

J. The BMS as provided shall incorporate, at minimum, the following integrated features, functions and services:

1. Operator information, alarm management and control functions. 2. Enterprise-level information and control access. 3. Information management including monitoring, transmission, archiving, retrieval,

and reporting functions. 4. Diagnostic monitoring and reporting of BMS functions. 5. Offsite monitoring and management access. 6. Energy management 7. Standard applications for terminal HVAC systems.

1.7 SUBMITTALS

A. Section “Submittal Procedures.”


B. Shop Drawings, Product Data, and Samples:

1. The BMS contractor shall submit a list of all shop drawings with submittal dates within 30 days of contract award.

2. Submittals shall be in defined packages. Each package shall be complete and shall only reference itself and previously submitted packages. The packages shall be as approved by the Architect and Engineer for Contract compliance.

3. Allow 15 working days for the review of each package by the Architect and Engineer in the scheduling of the total BMS work.

4. Equipment and systems requiring approval of local authorities must comply with such regulations and be approved. Filing and permitting shall be at the expense of the BMS Contractor. Provide a copy of all related correspondence and permits to the Owner.

5. Prepare an index of all submittals and shop drawings for the installation. Index shall include a shop drawing identification number, Contract Documents reference and item description.

6. At a minimum, submit the following: a. BMS network architecture diagrams including all nodes and

interconnections. b. Systems schematics, sequences and flow diagrams. c. Floor plan drawings showing detailed locations of all field installed

control components such as sensors, dampers, actuators, control panels, etc. 1) AutoCAD mechanical drawings will be provided to the BMS

contractor, upon receipt of Kibart’s Electronic Document Release Form, per Section “Common Work Results for HVAC.”

2) Indicate all provisions required for adequate maintenance access.

d. Points schedule for each point in the BMS, including: Point Type, Object Name, Expanded ID, Display Units, Controller type, and Address.

e. Samples of Graphic Display screen types and associated menus. f. Detailed Bill of Material list for each system or application, identifying

quantities, part numbers, descriptions, and optional features. g. Control Damper Schedule including a separate line for each damper

provided under this section and a column for each of the damper attributes, including: Code Number, Fail Position, Damper Type, Damper Operator, Duct Size, Damper Size, Mounting, and Actuator Type.

h. Control Valve Schedules including a separate line for each valve provided under this section and a column for each of the valve attributes: Code Number, Configuration, Fail Position, Pipe Size, Valve Size, Body Configuration, Close off Pressure, Capacity, Valve CV, Design Pressure, and Actuator Type.

i. Room Schedule including a separate line for each VAV box and/or terminal unit indicating location and address

j. Details of all BMS interfaces and connections to the work of other trades. k. Product data sheets or marked catalog pages including part number,

photo and description for all products including software. l. Detailed training agendas. m. Start-up and controls commissioning checklist.

C. Samples: Submit two of each type of room thermostat / temperature sensor and humidistat / humidity sensor, including covers and guards.

D. Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Submit.


E. Manufacturer's Certificate: Certify products meet or exceed specified requirements.


A. Section “Closeout Procedures.”

B. Project Operation and Maintenance Manuals:

1. Three (3) hardbound copies of the Operation and Maintenance Manuals shall be provided to the Owner's Representative upon completion of the project. The entire Operation and Maintenance Manual shall also be furnished on Compact Disc media. Operation and Maintenance Manual shall include the following: a. Table of contents. b. As-built system record drawings. Computer Aided Drawings (CAD)

record drawings shall represent the as-built condition of the system, floor, including floor plans, incorporating all information supplied with the approved submittal.

c. Manufacturers’ product data sheets or catalog pages for all products including software.

d. System Operator’s manuals, including inspection periods, cleaning methods, calibration procedures, etc.

e. Archive copy of all site-specific databases and sequences. f. BMS network diagrams. g. Interfaces to all third-party products and work by other trades. h. The Operation and Maintenance Manual CD shall be self-contained, and

include all necessary software required to access the product data sheets. A logically organized table of contents shall provide dynamic links to view and print all product data sheets. Viewer software shall provide the ability to display, zoom, and search all documents.

i. Point to point complete checklists. j. Start-up and commissioning completed checklists.

1.9 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND QUALIFICATIONS

A. Workplace Safety And Hazardous Materials:

1. Provide a safety program in compliance with the Contract Documents. 2. The BMS Contractor shall have a corporately certified comprehensive Safety

Certification Manual and a designated Safety Supervisor for the Project. 3. Comply with federal, state and local safety regulations. 4. Ensure that all subcontractors and employees have written safety programs in

place that covers their scope of work, and that their employees receive the training required by the OSHA have jurisdiction for at least each topic listed in the Safety Certification Manual.

5. Hazards created by the Contractor or its subcontractors shall be eliminated before any further work proceeds.

6. Hazards observed but not created by the Contractor or its subcontractors shall be reported to either the General Contractor or the Owner within the same day. Avoid the hazard area until the hazard has been eliminated.

7. Sign and date a safety certification form prior to any work being performed, stating that the Contractors’ company is in full compliance with the Project safety requirements.


8. The safety program shall include written policy and arrangements for the handling, storage and management of all hazardous materials to be used in the work in compliance with the requirements of the AHJ at the Project site.

9. The Contractor’s employees and subcontractor’s staff shall have received training as applicable in the use of hazardous materials and shall govern their actions accordingly.

B. Quality Management Program:

1. Designate a competent and experienced employee to provide BMS Project Management. The designated Project Manger shall be empowered to make technical, scheduling and related decisions on behalf of the BMS Contractor. At minimum, the Project Manager shall: a. Manage the scheduling of the work to ensure that adequate materials,

labor and other resources are available as needed. b. Manage the financial aspects of the BMS Contract. c. Coordinate as necessary with other trades. d. Be responsible for the work and actions of the BMS workforce on site.

1.10 COORDINATION

A. The demarcation of work and responsibilities between the BMS Contractor and other related trades shall be as outlined in the BMS RESPONSIBILITY MATRIX

BMS RESPONSIBILITY MATRIX

WORK FURNISH INSTALL Low Volt. WIRING/TUBE

LINE POWER

BMS low voltage and communication wiring

BMS BMS BMS

N/A

VAV box nodes BMS BMS BMS BMS BMS conduits and raceway BMS BMS BMS BMS Automatic dampers BMS * N/A BMS Manual valves * * N/A BMS Automatic valves BMS * BMS N/A VAV boxes * * N/A BMS Pipe insertion devices and taps including thermowells, flow and pressure stations.

BMS * BMS BMS

BMS Current Switches. BMS BMS BMS BMS BMS Control Relays BMS BMS BMS BMS Power distribution system monitoring interfaces

** ** BMS **

Boiler System Controllers (Heat Timer, etc.)

* BMS BMS BMS


BMS RESPONSIBILITY MATRIX

WORK FURNISH INSTALL Low Volt. WIRING/TUBE

LINE POWER

All BMS Nodes, equipment, housings, enclosures and panels.

BMS BMS BMS BMS

Smoke Detectors ** ** BMS BMS Fire/Smoke Dampers * * BMS BMS Fire Dampers * * N/A N/A Boiler wiring * * BMS ** VFDs * * BMS ** Fire Alarm shutdown relay interlock wiring

** ** ** **

Fire Alarm smoke control relay interlock wiring

** ** BMS **

Fireman’s Smoke Control Override Panel

1** ** ** **

Fan Controls/Interlocks BMS BMS BMS BMS Unit Heater controls BMS BMS BMS BMS Packaged RTU space mounted controls

* BMS BMS BMS

Packaged RTU factory-mounted controls

* * BMS BMS

Packaged RTU field-mounted controls

BMS BMS BMS BMS

Starters, HOA switches ** ** N/A BMS Control damper actuators BMS BMS BMS BMS

Symbols: * HVAC Systems Installer

** Electric Systems Installer


A. Section “Product Requirements”: Product storage and handling requirements.

B. Accept controls on site in original factory packaging Inspect for damage.



1.13 WARRANTY

A. Section “Closeout Procedures”: Product warranties and product bonds.

B. Standard Material and Labor Warranty:

1. Provide a one-year labor and material warranty on the BMS. 2. If within twelve (12) months from the date of acceptance any work is found to be

defective in operation, workmanship or materials, it shall be replaced, repaired or adjusted at the cost of the BMS Contractor.


3. Maintain an adequate supply of materials within 100 miles of the Project site such that replacement of key parts and labor support, including programming. Warranty work shall be performed within 24 hour notice, 7 days per week.

C. Special Warranty

1. During the warranty period, provide up to five (5) eight hour site visits, when requested in writing by the Owner, to adjust and calibrate components and to assist the Owner in making program changes, adjusting sensors, controls, etc.

1.14 AGENCY AND CODE APPROVALS

A. All products of the FMCS shall be provided with the following agency approvals. Verification that the approvals exist for all submitted products shall be provided with the submittal package. Systems or products not currently offering the following approvals are not acceptable. 1. UL-916; Energy Management Systems 2. C-UL listed to Canadian Standards Association C22.2 No. 205-M1983 “signal

Equipment” 3. CE 4. FCC, Part 15, Subpart J, Class A Computing Devices

1.15 SOFTWARE LICENSE AGREEMENT

A. The Owner shall sign a copy of the manufacturer's standard software and firmware licensing agreement as a condition of this contract. Such license shall grant use of all programs and application software to Owner as defined by the manufacturer's license agreement, but shall protect manufacturer's rights to disclosure of trade secrets contained within such software.

B. It is the owners express goal to implement an open system that will allow products from various suppliers to be integrated into a unified system in order to provide flexibility for expansion, maintenance, and service of the system. The Owner shall be the named license holder of all software associated with any and all incremental work on the project(s). In addition, the Owner shall receive ownership of all job specific configuration documentation, data files, and application-level software developed for the project. This shall include all custom, job specific software code and documentation for all on figuration and programming that is generated for a given project and/or configured for use with the NAC, FMCS Server(s), and any related LAN / WAN / Intranet and Internet connected routers and devices.

1.16 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Provide factory-shipping cartons for each piece of equipment and control device. Maintain cartons through shipping, storage, and handling as required to prevent equipment damage. Store equipment and materials inside and protected from weather.

1.17 JOB CONDITIONS

A. Cooperation with Other Trades: Coordinate the Work of this section with that of other sections to ensure that the Work will be carried out in an orderly fashion. It shall be this Contractor's responsibility to check the Contract Documents for possible conflicts between his Work and that of other crafts in equipment location, pipe, duct and conduit runs, electrical outlets and fixtures, air diffusers, and structural and architectural features.


PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 GENERAL

A. The Facility Management Control System (FMCS) shall be comprised of a network of interoperable, stand-alone digital controllers, a computer system, graphical user interface software, printers, network devices and other devices as specified herein.

B. The installed system shall provide secure password access to all features, functions and data contained in the overall FMCS.

2.2 OPEN, INTEROPERABLE, INTEGRATED ARCHITECTURES

A. The intent of this specification is to provide a peer-to-peer networked, stand-alone, distributed control system with the capability to integrate ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2001 BACnet, LonWorks technology, MODBUS, OPC, and other open and proprietary communication protocols in one open, interoperable system.

B. The supplied computer software shall employ object-oriented technology (OOT) for representation of all data and control devices within the system. In addition, adherence to industry standards including ANSI / ASHRAE™ Standard 135-2001, BACnet and LonMark to assure interoperability between all system components is required. For each LonWorks device that does not have LonMark certification, the device supplier must provide an XIF file and a resource file for the device. For each BACnet device, the device supplier must provide a PICS document showing the installed device’s compliance level. Minimum compliance is Level 3; with the ability to support data read and write unctionality. Physical connection of BACnet devices shall be via Ethernet (BACnet Ethernet/IP,) and/or RS-485 (BACnet MSTP) as specified.

C. All components and controllers supplied under this Division shall be true “peer-to-peer” communicating devices. Components or controllers requiring “polling” by a host to pass data shall not be acceptable.

D. The supplied system must incorporate the ability to access all data using standard Web browsers without requiring proprietary operator interface and configuration programs. An Open DataBase Connectivity (ODBC) or Structured Query Language (SQL) compliant server database is required for all system database parameter storage. This data shall reside on a supplier-installed server for all database access. Systems requiring proprietary database and user interface programs shall not be acceptable.

E. A hierarchical topology is required to assure reasonable system response times and to manage the flow and sharing of data without unduly burdening the customer’s internal Intranet network. Systems employing a “flat” single tiered architecture shall not be acceptable.

1. Maximum acceptable response time from any alarm occurrence (at the point of

origin) to the pointof annunciation shall not exceed 5 seconds for network connected user interfaces.

2. Maximum acceptable response time from any alarm occurrence (at the point of origin) to the point of annunciation shall not exceed 60 seconds for remote or dial-up connected user interfaces.


2.3 NETWORKS

A. The Local Area Network (LAN) shall be a 100 Megabits/sec Ethernet network supporting BACnet, Java, XML, HTTP, and SOAP for maximum flexibility for integration of building data with enterprise information systems and providing support for multiple Network Area Controllers (NACs), user workstations and, if specified, a local server.

B. Local area network minimum physical and media access requirements:

1. Ethernet; IEEE standard 802.3 2. Cable; 100 Base-T, UTP-8 wire, category 5 3. Minimum throughput; 100 Mbps.

2.4 NETWORK ACCESS

A. Remote Access.

1. For Local Area Network installations, provide access to the LAN from a remote location, via the Internet. The Owner shall provide a connection to the Internet to enable this access via high speed cable modem, asynchronous digital subscriber line (ADSL) modem, ISDN line, T1 Line or via the customer’s Intranet to a corporate server providing access to an Internet Service Provider (ISP). Customer agrees to pay monthly access charges for connection and ISP.

2.5 NETWORK AREA CONTROLLER (NAC)

A. This contractor shall supply one or more Network Area Controllers (NAC) as part of this contract. Number of area controllers required is dependent on the type and quantity of devices provided under Divisions 15 and 16. It is the responsibility of this contractor to coordinate with the Division 15 and 16 contractors to determine the quantity and type of devices.

B. The Network Area Controller (NAC) shall provide the interface between the LAN or WAN and the field control devices, and provide global supervisory control functions over the control devices connected to the NAC. It shall be capable of executing application control programs to provide:

1. Calendar functions 2. Scheduling 3. Trending 4. Alarm monitoring and routing 5. Time synchronization 6. Integration of LonWorks controller data and BACnet controller data 7. Network Management functions for all LonWorks based devices

C. The Network Area Controller must provide the following hardware features as a minimum:

1. One Ethernet Port – 10/100 Mbps 2. One RS-232 port 3. One LonWorks Interface Port – 78KB FTT-10A 4. One RS-485 ports 5. Battery Backup


6. Flash memory for long term data backup (If battery backup or flash memory is not supplied, the controller must contain a hard disk with at least 1 gigabyte storage capacity)

7. The NAC must be capable of operation over a temperature range of 32 to 122°F 8. The NAC must be capable of withstanding storage temperatures of between 0

and 158°F 9. The NAC must be capable of operation over a humidity range of 5 to 95% RH,

non-condensing

D. The NAC shall provide multiple user access to the system and support for ODBC or SQL. A database resident on the NAC shall be an ODBC-compliant database or must provide an ODBC data access mechanism to read and write data stored within it.

E. The NAC shall support standard Web browser access via the Intranet/Internet. It shall support a minimum of 32 simultaneous users.

F. Event Alarm Notification and actions

1. The NAC shall provide alarm recognition, storage; routing, management, and analysis to supplement distributed capabilities of equipment or application specific controllers.

2. The NAC shall be able to route any alarm condition to any defined user location whether connected to a local network or remote via dial-up telephone connection, or wide-area network.

3. Alarm generation shall be selectable for annunciation type and acknowledgement requirements including but limited to: a. To alarm b. Return to normal c. To fault

4. Provide for the creation of a minimum of eight of alarm classes for the purpose of routing types and or classes of alarms, i.e.: security, HVAC, Fire, etc.

5. Provide timed (schedule) routing of alarms by class, object, group, or node. 6. Provide alarm generation from binary object “runtime” and /or event counts for

equipment maintenance. The user shall be able to reset runtime or event count values with appropriate password control.

G. Control equipment and network failures shall be treated as alarms and annunciated.

H. Alarms shall be annunciated in any of the following manners as defined by the user:

1. Screen message text 2. Email of the complete alarm message to multiple recipients. Provide the ability to

route and email alarms based on: a. Day of week b. Time of day c. Recipient

3. Graphic with flashing alarm object(s) 4. Printed message, routed directly to a dedicated alarm printer

I. The following shall be recorded by the NAC for each alarm (at a minimum):

1. Time and date 2. Location (building, floor, zone, office number, etc.) 3. Equipment (WSHP #, accessway, etc.)


4. Acknowledge time, date, and user who issued acknowledgement. 5. Number of occurrences since last acknowledgement.

J. Alarm actions may be initiated by user defined programmable objects created for that purpose.

K. Defined users shall be given proper access to acknowledge any alarm, or specific types or classes of alarms defined by the user.

L. A log of all alarms shall be maintained by the NAC and/or a server (if configured in the system) and shall be available for review by the user.

M. Provide a “query” feature to allow review of specific alarms by user defined parameters.

N. A separate log for system alerts (controller failures, network failures, etc.) shall be provided and available for review by the user.

O. An Error Log to record invalid property changes or commands shall be provided and available for review by the user.

2.6 Data Collection and Storage

A. The NAC shall have the ability to collect data for any property of any object and store this data for future use.

B. The data collection shall be performed by log objects, resident in the NAC that shall have, at a minimum, the following configurable properties:

1. Designating the log as interval or deviation. 2. For interval logs, the object shall be configured for time of day, day of week and

the sample collection interval. 3. For deviation logs, the object shall be configured for the deviation of a variable to

a fixed value. This value, when reached, will initiate logging of the object. 4. For all logs, provide the ability to set the maximum number of data stores for the

log and to set whether the log will stop collecting when full, or rollover the data on a first-in, first-out basis.

5. Each log shall have the ability to have its data cleared on a time-based event or by a user-defined event or action.

C. All log data shall be stored in a relational database in the NAC and the data shall be accessed from a server (if the system is so configured) or a standard Web browser.

D. All log data, when accessed from a server, shall be capable of being manipulated using standard SQL statements.

E. All log data shall be available to the user in the following data formats:

1. HTML 2. XML 3. Plain Text 4. Comma or tab separated values

F. Systems that do not provide log data in HTML and XML formats at a minimum shall not be acceptable.


G. The NAC shall have the ability to archive its log data either locally (to itself), or remotely to a server or other NAC on the network. Provide the ability to configure the following archiving properties, at a minimum:

1. Archive on time of day 2. Archive on user-defined number of data stores in the log (buffer size) 3. Archive when log has reached it’s user-defined capacity of data stores 4. Provide ability to clear logs once archived

2.7 AUDIT LOG

A. Provide and maintain an Audit Log that tracks all activities performed on the NAC. Provide the ability to specify a buffer size for the log and the ability to archive log based on time or when the log has reached its user-defined buffer size. Provide the ability to archive the log locally (to the NAC), to another NAC on the network, or to a server. For each log entry, provide the following data:

1. Time and date 2. User ID 3. Change or activity: i.e., Change setpoint, add or delete objects, commands, etc.

2.8 DATABASE BACKUP AND STORAGE

A. The NAC shall have the ability to automatically backup its database. The database shall be backed up based on a user-defined time interval.

B. Copies of the current database and, at the most recently saved database shall be stored in the NAC. The age of the most recently saved database is dependent on the user-defined database save interval.

C. The NAC database shall be stored, at a minimum, in XML format to allow for user viewing and editing, if desired. Other formats are acceptable as well, as long as XML format is supported.

2.9 GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE SOFTWARE

A. Operating System:

1. The GUI shall run on Microsoft Windows XP Professional.

B. The GUI shall employ browser-like functionality for ease of navigation. It shall include a tree view (similar to Windows Explorer) for quick viewing of, and access to, the hierarchical structure of the database. In addition, menu-pull downs, and toolbars shall employ buttons, commands and navigation to permit the operator to perform tasks with a minimum knowledge of the HVAC Control System and basic computing skills. These shall include, but are not limited to, forward/backward buttons, home button, and a context sensitive locator line (similar to a URL line), that displays the location and the selected object identification.

C. Real-Time Displays. The GUI, shall at a minimum, support the following graphical features andfunctions:

1. Graphic screens shall be developed using any drawing package capable of

generating a GIF, BMP,or JPG file format. Use of proprietary graphic file formats


shall not be acceptable. In addition to,or in lieu of a graphic background, the GUI shall support the use of scanned pictures.

2. Graphic screens shall have the capability to contain objects for text, real-time values, animation, color spectrum objects, logs, graphs, HTML or XML document links, schedule objects, hyperlinks to other URL’s, and links to other graphic screens.

3. Graphics shall support layering and each graphic object shall be configurable for assignment to a layer. A minimum of six layers shall be supported.

4. Modifying common application objects, such as schedules, calendars, and set points shall be accomplished in a graphical manner. a. Schedule times will be adjusted using a graphical slider, without requiring

any keyboard entry from the operator. b. Holidays shall be set by using a graphical calendar without requiring any

keyboard entry from the operator. 5. Commands to start and stop binary objects shall be done by right-clicking the

selected object and selecting the appropriate command from the pop-up menu. No entry of text shall be required.

6. Adjustments to analog objects, such as set points, shall be done by right-clicking the selected object and using a graphical slider to adjust the value. No entry of text shall be required.

D. System Configuration. At a minimum, the GUI shall permit the operator to perform the following tasks, with proper password access:

1. Create, delete or modify control strategies. 2. Add/delete objects to the system. 3. Tune control loops through the adjustment of control loop parameters. 4. Enable or disable control strategies. 5. Generate hard copy records or control strategies on a printer. 6. Select points to be alarmable and define the alarm state. 7. Select points to be trended over a period of time and initiate the recording of

values automatically.

E. On-Line Help. Provide a context sensitive, on-line help system to assist the operator in operation and editing of the system. On-line help shall be available for all applications and shall provide the relevant data for that particular screen. Additional help information shall be available through the use of hypertext. All system documentation and help files shall be in HTML format.

F. Security. Each operator shall be required to log on to that system with a user name and password in order to view, edit, add, or delete data. System security shall be selectable for each operator. The system administrator shall have the ability to set passwords and security levels for all other operators. Each operator password shall be able to restrict the operators’ access for viewing and/or changing each system application, full screen editor, and object. Each operator shall automatically be logged off of the system if no keyboard or mouse activity is detected. This auto log-off time shall be set per operator password. All system security data shall be stored in an encrypted format.

G. System Diagnostics. The system shall automatically monitor the operation of all workstations, printers, modems, network connections, building management panels, and controllers. The failure of any device shall be annunciated to the operator.

H. Alarm Console


1. The system will be provided with a dedicated alarm window or console. This window will notify the operator of an alarm condition, and allow the operator to view details of the alarm and acknowledge the alarm. The use of the Alarm Console can be enabled or disabled by the system administrator.

2. When the Alarm Console is enabled, a separate alarm notification window will supercede all other windows on the desktop and shall not be capable of being minimized or closed by the operator. This window will notify the operator of new alarms and un-acknowledged alarms. Alarm notification windows or banners that can be minimized or closed by the operator shall not be acceptable.

2.10 WEB BROWSER CLIENTS

A. The system shall be capable of supporting an unlimited number of clients using a standard Web browser such as Internet Explorer™ or Netscape Navigator™. Systems requiring additional software (to enable a standard Web browser) to be resident on the client machine, or manufacture-specific browsers shall not be acceptable.

B. The Web browser software shall run on any operating system and system configuration that is supported by the Web browser. Systems that require specific machine requirements in terms of processor speed, memory, etc., in order to allow the Web browser to function with the FMCS, shall not be acceptable.

C. The Web browser shall provide the same view of the system, in terms of graphics, schedules, calendars, logs, etc., and provide the same interface methodology as is provided by the Graphical User Interface. Systems that require different views or that require different means of interacting with objects such as schedules, or logs, shall not be permitted.

D. The Web browser client shall support at a minimum, the following functions:

1. User log-on identification and password shall be required. If an unauthorized user attempts access, a blank web page shall be displayed. Security using Java authentication and encryption techniques to prevent unauthorized access shall be implemented.

2. Graphical screens developed for the GUI shall be the same screens used for the Web browser client. Any animated graphical objects supported by the GUI shall be supported by the Web browser interface.

3. HTML programming shall not be required to display system graphics or data on a Web page. HTML editing of the Web page shall be allowed if the user desires a specific look or format.

4. Storage of the graphical screens shall be in the Network Area Controller (NAC), without requiring any graphics to be stored on the client machine. Systems that require graphics storage on each client are not acceptable.

5. Real-time values displayed on a Web page shall update automatically without requiring a manual “refresh” of the Web page.

6. Users shall have administrator-defined access privileges. Depending on the access privileges assigned, the user shall be able to perform the following: a. Modify common application objects, such as schedules, calendars, and

set points in a graphical manner. 1) Schedule times will be adjusted using a graphical slider, without

requiring any keyboard entry from the operator. 2) Holidays shall be set by using a graphical calendar, without

requiring any keyboard entry from the operator.


b. Commands to start and stop binary objects shall be done by right-clicking the selected object and selecting the appropriate command from the pop-up menu. No entry of text shall be required.

c. View logs and charts d. View and acknowledge alarms e. Setup and execute SQL queries on log and archive information

7. The system shall provide the capability to specify a user’s (as determined by the log-on user identification) home page. Provide the ability to limit a specific user to just their defined home page. From the home page, links to other views, or pages in the system shall be possible, if allowed by the system administrator.

8. Graphic screens on the Web Browser client shall support hypertext links to other locations on the Internet or on Intranet sites, by specifying the Uniform Resource Locator (URL) for the desired link.

2.11 SYSTEM PROGRAMMING

A. The Graphical User Interface software (GUI) shall provide the ability to perform system programming and graphic display engineering as part of a complete software package. Access to the programming functions and features of the GUI shall be through password access as assigned by the system administrator.

B. A library of control, application, and graphic objects shall be provided to enable the creation of all applications and user interface screens. Applications are to be created by selecting the desired control objects from the library, dragging or pasting them on the screen, and linking them together using a built in graphical connection tool. Completed applications may be stored in the library for future use. Graphical User Interface screens shall be created in the same fashion. Data for the user displays is obtained by graphically linking the user display objects to the application objects to provide “real-time” data updates. Any real-time data value or object property may be connected to display its current value on a user display. Systems requiring separate software tools or processes to create applications and user interface displays shall not be acceptable.

C. Programming Methods

1. Provide the capability to copy objects from the supplied libraries, or from a user-defined library to the user’s application. Objects shall be linked by a graphical linking scheme by dragging a link from one object to another. Object links will support one-to-one, many-to-one, or one-to-many relationships. Linked objects shall maintain their connections to other objects regardless of where they are positioned on the page and shall show link identification for links to objects on other pages for easy identification. Links will vary in color depending on the type of link; i.e., internal, external, hardware, etc.

2. Configuration of each object will be done through the object’s property sheet using fill-in the blank fields, list boxes, and selection buttons. Use of custom programming, scripting language, or a manufacturer-specific procedural language for configuration will not be accepted.

3. The software shall provide the ability to view the logic in a monitor mode. When on-line, the monitor mode shall provide the ability to view the logic in real time for easy diagnosis of the logic execution. When off-line (debug), the monitor mode shall allow the user to set values to inputs and monitor the logic for diagnosing execution before it is applied to the system.

4. All programming shall be done in real-time. Systems requiring the uploading, editing, and downloading of database objects shall not be allowed.


5. The system shall support object duplication within a customer’s database. An application, once configured, can be copied and pasted for easy re-use and duplication. All links, other than to the hardware, shall be maintained during duplication.

2.12 LonWorks NETWORK MANAGEMENT

A. The Graphical User Interface software (GUI) shall provide a complete set of integrated LonWorks network management tools for working with LonWorks networks. These tools shall manage a database for all LonWorks devices by type and revision, and shall provide a software mechanism for identifying each device on the network. These tools shall also be capable of defining network data connections between LonWorks devices, known as “binding”. Systems requiring the use of third party LonWorks network management tools shall not be accepted.

B. Network management shall include the following services: device identification, device installation, device configuration, device diagnostics, device maintenance and network variable binding.

C. The network configuration tool shall also provide diagnostics to identify devices on the network, to reset devices, and to view health and status counters within devices.

D. These tools shall provide the ability to “learn” an existing LonWorks network, regardless of what network management tool(s) were used to install the existing network, so that existing LonWorks devices and newly added devices are part of a single network management database.

E. The network management database shall be resident in the Network Area Controller (NAC), ensuring that anyone with proper authorization has access to the network management database at all times. Systems employing network management databases that are not resident, at all times, within the control system, shall not be accepted.

2.13 OBJECT LIBRARIES

A. A standard library of objects shall be included for development and setup of application logic, user interface displays, system services, and communication networks.

B. The objects in this library shall be capable of being copied and pasted into the user’s database and shall be organized according to their function. In addition, the user shall have the capability to group objects created in their application and store the new instances of these objects in a user-defined library.

C. In addition to the standard libraries specified here, the supplier of the system shall maintain an on-line accessible (over the Internet) library, available to all registered users to provide new or updated objects and applications as they are developed.

D. All control objects shall conform to the control objects specified in the BACnet specification.

E. The library shall include applications or objects for the following functions, at a minimum:

1. Scheduling Object. The schedule must conform to the schedule object as defined in the BACnet specification, providing 7-day plus holiday & temporary scheduling


features and a minimum of 10 on/off events per day. Data entry to be by graphical sliders to speed creation and selection of onoff events.

2. Calendar Object. . The calendar must conform to the calendar object as defined in the BACnet specification, providing 12-month calendar features to allow for holiday or special event data entry. Data entry to be by graphical “point-and-click” selection. This object must be “linkable” to any or all scheduling objects for effective event control.

3. Duty Cycling Object. Provide a universal duty cycle object to allow repetitive on/off time control of equipment as an energy conserving measure. Any number of these objects may be created to control equipment at varying intervals

4. Temperature Override Object. Provide a temperature override object that is capable of overriding equipment turned off by other energy saving programs (scheduling, duty cycling etc.) to maintain occupant comfort or for equipment freeze protection.

5. Start-Stop Time Optimization Object. Provide a start-stop time optimization object to provide the capability of starting equipment just early enough to bring space conditions to desired conditions by the scheduled occupancy time. Also, allow equipment to be stopped before the scheduled unoccupancy time just far enough ahead to take advantage of the building’s “flywheel” effect for energy savings. Provide automatic tuning of all start / stop time object properties based on the previous day’s performance.

6. Demand Limiting Object. Provide a comprehensive demand-limiting object that is capable of controlling demand for any selected energy utility (electric, oil, and gas). The object shall provide the capability of monitoring a demand value and predicting (by use of a sliding window prediction algorithm) the demand at the end of the user defined interval period (1-60 minutes). This object shall also accommodate a utility meter time sync pulse for fixed interval demand control. Upon a prediction that will exceed the user defined demand limit (supply a minimum of 6 per day), the demand limiting object shall issue shed commands to either turn off user specified loads or modify equipment set points to effect the desired energy reduction. If the list of sheddable equipment is not enough to reduce the demand to below the set point, a message shall be displayed on the users screen (as an alarm) instructing the user to take manual actions to maintain the desired demand. The shed lists are specified by the user and shall be selectable to be shed in either a fixed or rotating order to control which equipment is shed the most often. Upon suitable reductions in demand, the demand-limiting object shall restore the equipment that was shed in the reverse order in which it was shed. Each sheddable object shall have a minimum and maximum shed time property to effect both equipment protection and occupant comfort.

F. The library shall include control objects for the following functions. All control objects shall conform to the objects as specified in the BACnet specification.

1. Analog Input Object - Minimum requirement is to comply with the BACnet

standard for data sharing. Allow high, low and failure limits to be assigned for alarming. Also, provide a time delay filter property to prevent nuisance alarms caused by temporary excursions above or below the user defined alarm limits.

2. Analog Output Object - Minimum requirement is to comply with the BACnet standard for data sharing.

3. Binary Input Object - Minimum requirement is to comply with the BACnet standard for data sharing. The user must be able to specify either input condition for alarming. This object must also include the capability to record equipment run-time by counting the amount of time the hardware input is in an “on”


condition. The user must be able to specify either input condition as the “on” condition.

4. Binary Output Object - Minimum requirement is to comply with the BACnet standard for data sharing. Properties to enable minimum on and off times for equipment protection as well as interstart delay must be provided. The BACnet Command Prioritization priority scheme shall be incorporated to allow multiple control applications to execute commands on this object with the highest priority command being invoked. Provide sixteen levels of priority as a minimum. Systems not employing the BACnet method of contention resolution shall not be acceptable.

5. PID Control Loop Object - Minimum requirement is to comply with the BACnet standard for data sharing. Each individual property must be adjustable as well as to be disabled to allow proportional control only, or proportional with integral control, as well as proportional, integral and derivative control.

6. Comparison Object - Allow a minimum of two analog objects to be compared to select either the highest, lowest, or equality between the two linked inputs. Also, allow limits to be applied to the output value for alarm generation.

7. Math Object - Allow a minimum of four analog objects to be tested for the minimum or maximum, or the sum, difference, or average of linked objects. Also, allow limits to be applied to the output value for alarm generation.

8. Custom Programming Objects - Provide a blank object template for the creation of new custom objects to meet specific user application requirements. This object must provide a simple BASIClike programming language that is used to define object behavior. Provide a library of functions including math and logic functions, string manipulation, and e-mail as a minimum. Also, provide a comprehensive on-line debug tool to allow complete testing of the new object. Allow new objects to be stored in the library for re-use.

9. Interlock Object - Provide an interlock object that provides a means of coordination of objects within a piece of equipment such as an Air Handler or other similar types of equipment. An example is to link the return fan to the supply fan such that when the supply fan is started, the return fan object is also started automatically without the user having to issue separate commands or to link each object to a schedule object. In addition, the control loops, damper objects, and alarm monitoring (such as return air, supply air, and mixed air temperature objects) will be inhibited from alarming during a user-defined period after startup to allow for stabilization. When the air handler is stopped, the interlocked return fan is also stopped, the outside air damper is closed, and other related objects within the air handler unit are inhibited from alarming thereby eliminating nuisance alarms during the off period.

10. Temperature Override Object - Provide an object whose purpose is to provide the capability of overriding a binary output to an “On” state in the event a user specified high or low limit value is exceeded. This object is to be linked to the desired binary output object as well as to an analog object for temperature monitoring, to cause the override to be enabled. This object will execute a Start command at the Temperature Override level of start/stop command priority unless changed by the user.

11. Composite Object - Provide a container object that allows a collection of objects representing an application to be encapsulated to protect the application from tampering, or to more easily represent large applications. This object must have the ability to allow the user to select the appropriate parameters of the “contained” application that are represented on the graphical shell of this container.


G. The object library shall include objects to support the integration of devices connected to the Network Area Controller (NAC). At a minimum, provide the following as part of the standard library included with the programming software:

1. LonMark/LonWorks devices. These devices shall include, but not be limited to,

devices for control of HVAC, lighting, access, and metering. Provide LonMark manufacturer-specific objects to facilitate simple integration of these devices. All network variables defined in the LonMark profile shall be supported. Information (type and function) regarding network variables not defined in the LonMark profile shall be provided by the device manufacturer.

2. For devices not conforming to the LonMark standard, provide a dynamic object that can be assigned to the device based on network variable information provided by the device manufacturer. Device manufacturer shall provide an XIF file, resource file and documentation for the device to facilitate device integration.

3. For BACnet devices, provide the following objects at a minimum: a. Analog In b. Analog Out c. Analog Value d. Binary e. Binary In f. Binary Out g. Binary Value h. Multi-State In i. Multi-State Out j. Multi-State Value k. Schedule Export l. Calendar Export m. Trend Export n. Device

4. For each BACnet object, provide the ability to assign the object a BACnet device and object instance number.

5. For BACnet devices, provide the following support at a minimum a. Segmentation b. Segmented Request c. Segmented Response d. Application Services e. Read Property f. Read Property Multiple g. Write Property h. Write Property Multiple i. Confirmed Event Notification j. Unconfirmed Event Notification k. Acknowledge Alarm l. Get Alarm Summary m. Who-has n. I-have o. Who-is p. I-am q. Subscribe COV r. Confirmed COV notification s. Unconfirmed COV notification t. Media Types u. Ethernet v. BACnet IP Annex J


w. MSTP x. BACnet Broadcast Management Device (BBMD) function y. Routing

2.14 MODBUS SYSTEM INTEGRATION

A. The Network Area Controller shall support the integration of device data from Modbus RTU, Ascii, or TCP control system devices. The connection to the Modbus system shall be via an RS-232, RS485, or Ethernet IP as required by the device.

B. Provide the required objects in the library, included with the Graphical User Interface programming software, to support the integration of the Modbus system data into the FPMS. Objects provided shall include at a minimum:

1. Read/Write Modbus AI Registers 2. Read/Write Modbus AO Registers 3. Read/Write Modbus BI Registers 4. Read/Write Modbus BO Registers

C. All scheduling, alarming, logging and global supervisory control functions, of the Modbus system devices, shall be performed by the Network Area Controller.

D. The FMCS supplier shall provide a Modbus system communications driver. The equipment system vendor that provided the equipment utilizing Modbus shall provide documentation of the system’s Modbus interface and shall provide factory support at no charge during system commissioning

2.15 OPC SYSTEM INTEGRATION

A. The Network Area Controller shall act as an OPC client and shall support the integration of device data from OPC servers. The connection to the OPC server shall be Ethernet IP as required by the device. The OPC client shall support third party OPC servers compatible with the Data Access 1.0 and 2.0 specification.

B. Provide the required objects in the library, included with the Graphical User Interface programming software, to support the integration of the OPC system data into the BAS. Objects provided shall include at a minimum:

1. Read/Write OPC AI Object 2. Read/Write OPC AO Object 3. Read/Write OPC BI Object 4. Read/Write OPC BO Object 5. Read/Write OPC Date/Time Input Object 6. Read/Write OPC Date/Time Output Object 7. Read/Write OPC String Input Object 8. Read/Write OPC String Output Object

C. All scheduling, alarming, logging and global supervisory control functions, of the OPC system devices,shall be performed by the Network Area Controller.

D. The FMCS supplier shall provide a OPC client communications driver. The equipment system vendorthat provided the equipment utilizing OPC shall provide documentation of the system’s OPC serverinterface and shall provide factory support at no charge during system commissioning.


2.16 GRAPHICAL USER INTERFACE COMPUTER HARDWARE (DESKTOP)

A. The browser workstation shall be an Intel Pentium based computer (minimum processing speed of 2.4Ghz with 1.0 GB RAM and a 100-gigabyte minimum hard drive). It shall include a DVD-ROM/CDRW Combination Drive, 2-parallel ports, 2-asynchronous serial ports and 2-USB ports. A minimum 17”flat panel color monitor, 1280 x 1024 optimal preset resolution, 25 ms response time, shall also be included.

B. Connection to the FMCS network shall be via an Ethernet network interface card, 10 Mbps.

C. A system printer shall be provided. Printer shall be laser type with a minimum 600 x 600-dpi resolution rated for 8 PPM print speed minimum.

PART 3 EXECUTIONS

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Section “Administrative Requirements”: Coordination and project conditions.

B. Verify building systems to be controlled are ready to operate.

C. Verify that air handling units and ductwork have been accepted and air filters are in place before installing sensors in air streams.

D. Verify location of thermostats humidistats and other exposed control sensors with Drawings before installation.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. BMS Specific Requirements:

1. Graphic Displays : a. Provide a color graphic system flow diagram display for each system

with all points as indicated on the point list. All terminal unit graphic displays shall be from a standard design library.

b. User shall access the various system schematics via a graphical penetration scheme and/or menu selection. .

2. Custom Reports: a. Provide custom reports as required for this project:

B. BMS Wiring:

1. All conduit, wiring, accessories and wiring (low and power line voltage) connections required for the installation of the Building Management System, as herein specified, shall be provided by the BMS Contractor unless specifically shown on the Electrical Drawings under Division 16. All wiring shall comply with the requirements of applicable portions of Division 16 and all local and national electric codes, unless specified otherwise in this section.


2. All BMS wiring materials and installation methods shall comply with BMS manufacturer recommendations.

3. The sizing, type and provision of cable, conduit, cable trays, and raceways shall be the design responsibility of the BMS Contractor. If complications arise, however, due to the incorrect selection of cable, cable trays, raceways and/or conduit by the BMS Contractor, the Contractor shall be responsible for all costs incurred in replacing the selected components.

4. Class 2 Wiring: a. All Class 2 (24VAC or less) wiring shall be installed in conduit unless

otherwise specified. b. Conduit is not required for Class 2 wiring in concealed accessible

locations. Class 2 wiring not installed in conduit shall be supported every 5’ from the building structure utilizing metal hangers designed for this application. Wiring shall be installed parallel to the building structural lines. All wiring shall be installed in accordance with local code requirements.

5. Class 2 signal wiring and 24VAC power can be run in the same conduit. Power wiring 120VAC and greater cannot share the same conduit with Class 2 signal wiring.

6. Provide for complete grounding of all applicable signal and communications cables, panels and equipment so as to ensure system integrity of operation. Ground cabling and conduit at the panel terminations. Avoid grounding loops.

C. BMS Line Voltage Power Source:

1. 120-volt AC circuits used for the Building Management System shall be taken from panel boards and circuit breakers dedicated for the BMS system. Refer to electrical drawings and specs.

2. Circuits used for the BMS shall be dedicated to the BMS and shall not be used for any other purposes.

3. DDC terminal unit controllers may use AC power from motor power circuits.

D. BMS Raceway:

1. All wiring shall be installed in conduit or raceway except as noted elsewhere in this specification. Minimum control wiring conduit size 1/2”.

2. Where it is not possible to conceal raceways in finished locations, surface raceway (Wiremold) may be used only as pre-approved by the Architect. Submit request for approval in writing, via a request for information.

3. All conduits and raceways shall be installed level, plumb, at right angles to the building lines and shall follow the contours of the surface to which they are attached.

4. Flexible Metal Conduit shall be used for vibration isolation and shall be limited to 3 feet in length when terminating to vibrating equipment. Flexible Metal Conduit may be used within partition walls. Flexible Metal Conduit shall be UL listed.

5. Penetrations a. Provide fire stopping for all penetrations used by dedicated BMS

conduits and raceways. b. All openings in fire proofed or fire stopped components shall be closed

by using approved fire resistive sealant. c. All wiring passing through penetrations, including walls shall be in

conduit or enclosed raceway.


d. Penetrations of floor slabs shall be by core drilling. All penetrations shall be plumb, true, and square.

E. BMS Identification Standards:

1. Node Identification. All nodes shall be identified by a permanent label fastened to the enclosure. Labels shall be suitable for the node location.

2. Cable types specified in Item A shall be color coded for easy identification and troubleshooting.

F. BMS Panel Installation:

1. The BMS panels and cabinets shall be located as indicated at an elevation of not less than 2 feet from the bottom edge of the panel to the finished floor. Each cabinet shall be anchored per the manufacturer’s recommendations.

2. The BMS contractor shall be responsible for coordinating panel locations with other trades and electrical and mechanical contractors.

G. Input Devices:

1. All Input devices shall be installed per the manufacturer recommendation 2. Locate components of the BMS in accessible local control panels wherever

possible.

H. HVAC Input Devices – General:

1. All Input devices shall be installed per the manufacturer recommendation 2. Locate components of the BMS in accessible local control panels wherever

possible. 3. The mechanical contractor shall install all in-line devices such as temperature

wells, pressure taps, airflow stations, etc. 4. Input Flow Measuring Devices shall be installed in strict compliance with ASME

guidelines affecting non-standard approach conditions. 5. Outside Air Sensors:

a. Sensors shall be mounted on the North wall to minimize solar radiant heat impact or located in a continuous intake flow adequate to monitor outside air conditions accurately.

b. Sensors shall be installed with a rain proof, perforated cover. 6. Water Differential Pressure Sensors:

a. Differential pressure transmitters used for flow measurement shall be sized to the flow-sensing device.

b. Differential pressure transmitters shall be supplied with tee fittings and shut-off valves in the high and low sensing pick-up lines.

c. The transmitters shall be installed in an accessible location wherever possible.

7. Medium to High Differential Water Pressure Applications (Over 21” w.c.): a. Air bleed units, bypass valves and compression fittings shall be provided.

8. Building Differential Air Pressure Applications (-1” to +1” w.c.): a. Transmitters’ exterior sensing tip shall be installed with a shielded static

air probe to reduce pressure fluctuations caused by wind. b. The interior tip shall be inconspicuous and located as shown on the

drawings. 9. Air Flow Measuring Stations:


a. Where the stations are installed in insulated ducts, the airflow passage of the station shall be the same size as the inside airflow dimension of the duct.

b. Station flanges shall be two inch to three inch to facilitate matching connecting ductwork.

10. Duct Temperature Sensors: a. Duct mount sensors shall mount in an electrical box through a hole in the

duct and be positioned so as to be easily accessible for repair or replacement.

b. The sensors shall be insertion type and constructed as a complete assembly including lock nut and mounting plate.

c. For ductwork greater in any dimension than 48 inches or where air temperature stratification exists such as a mixed air plenum, utilize an averaging sensor.

d. The sensor shall be mounted to suitable supports using factory approved element holders.

11. Space Sensors: a. Shall be mounted per ADA requirements. b. Provide lockable tamper-proof covers where indicated on the plans or

elsewhere in this Section. 12. Low Temperature Limit Switches:

a. Install on the discharge side of the first water or steam coil in the air stream.

b. Mount element horizontally across duct in a serpentine pattern insuring each square foot of coil is protected by 1 foot of sensor.

c. For large duct areas where the sensing element does not provide full coverage of the air stream, provide additional switches as required to provide full protection of the air stream.

13. Air Differential Pressure Status Switches: a. Install with static pressure tips, tubing, fittings, and air filter.

14. Water Differential Pressure Status Switches: a. Install with shut off valves for isolation.

15. HVAC Output Devices: a. All output devices shall be installed per the manufacturer’s

recommendation. The mechanical contractor shall install all in-line devices such as control valves, dampers, airflow stations, pressure wells, etc.

b. Actuators: All control actuators shall be sized capable of closing against the maximum system shut-off pressure. The actuator shall modulate in a smooth fashion through the entire stroke. When any pneumatic actuator is sequenced with another device, pilot positioners shall be installed to allow for proper sequencing.

c. Control Dampers: Shall be opposed blade for modulating control of airflow. Parallel blade dampers shall be installed for two position applications.

d. Control Valves: Shall be sized for proper flow control with equal percentage valve plugs. The maximum pressure drop for water applications shall be 5 PSI. The maximum pressure drop for steam applications shall be 7 PSI.

e. Electronic Signal Isolation Transducers: Whenever an analog output signal from the Building Management System is to be connected to an external control system as an input (such as a chiller control panel), or is to receive as an input a signal from a remote system, provide a signal isolation transducer. Signal isolation transducer shall provide ground


plane isolation between systems. Signals shall provide optical isolation between systems

3.3 COMPLETION OF INSTALLATION

A. Provide all necessary relays, switches, boosters, compressed air filters and regulators, gauges, valves, brackets, linkages, control devices, auxiliaries, fasteners, accessories, and connections to result in complete and operable control system shown on the drawings and specified.

3.4 WARRANTY

A. Equipment, materials and workmanship incorporated into the work shall be warranted for a period of one year from the time of system acceptance.

B. Within this period, upon notice by the Owner, any defects in the work provided under this section due to faulty materials, methods of installation or workmanship shall be promptly (within 48 hours after receipt of notice) repaired or replaced by the BMS contractor at no expense to the Owner.

3.5 WARRANTY ACCESS

A. The Owner shall grant to the Division 17 contractor, reasonable access to the BMS during the warranty period. The owner shall allow the contractor to access the BMS from a remote location for the purpose of diagnostics and troubleshooting, via the Internet, during the warranty period.

3.6 SOFTWARE LICENSE

A. The Owner shall be the named license holder of all software associated with any and all incremental work on the project(s). The owner, or his appointed agent, shall determine which organizations to be named in the “orgid” of all Niagara Framework software licenses.

B. The owner, or his appointed agent, shall be free to direct the modification of the “orgid” in any Niagara Framework software license, regardless of supplier.

C. The owner, or his appointed agent, shall receive ownership of all job specific software configuration documentation, data files, and application-level software developed for the project. This shall include all custom, job specific software code and documentation for all configuration and programming that is generated for a given project and /or configured for use within Niagara Framework (Niagara) based controllers and/or servers and any related LAN / WAN / Intranet and Internet connected routers and devices. Any and all required Ids and passwords for access to any component or software program shall be provided to the owner.

3.7 ACCEPTANCE TESTING

A. Upon completion of the installation, the BMS contractor shall load all system software and start-up the system. The Division 15 contractor shall perform all necessary calibration, testing and de-bugging and perform all required operational checks to insure that the system is functioning in full accordance with these specifications. The Division 15 and BMS contractors are to coordinate the checkout of the system such that each Division has a representative present during system checkout.


B. The Division 15 contractor shall perform tests to verify proper performance of components, routines, and points. Repeat tests until proper performance results. This testing shall include a point-by-point log to validate 100% of the input and output points of the DDC system operation. The BMS contractor shall have a representative present during system checkout by the Division 15 contractor.

C. Upon completion of the performance tests described above, repeat these tests, point by point as described in the validation log above in presence of Owner's Representative, as required. Properly schedule these tests so testing is complete at a time directed by the Owner's Representative. Do not delay tests so as to prevent delay of occupancy permits or building occupancy.

D. System Acceptance: Satisfactory completion is when the Division 15, 16 and BMS contractors haveperformed successfully all the required testing to show performance compliance with the requirementsof the Contract Documents to the satisfaction of the Owner’s Representative. System acceptance shallbe contingent upon completion and review of all corrected deficiencies.

3.8 OPERATOR INSTRUCTION, TRAINING

A. During system commissioning and at such time acceptable performance of the BMS hardware and software has been established the Temperature Control sub-contractor shall provide on-site operator instruction to the owner's operating personnel. Operator instruction shall be done during normal working hours and shall be performed by a competent representative familiar with the system hardware, software and accessories.

B. The BMS contractor shall provide 40 hours of instruction to the owner's designated personnel on the operation of the BMS and describe its intended use with respect to the programmed functions specified. Operator orientation of the BMS shall include, but not be limited to; the overall operation program, equipment functions (both individually and as part of the total integrated system), commands, systems generation, advisories, and appropriate operator intervention required in responding to the System's operation.

3.9 POINTS LIST (See Attached)

3.10 COMMISSIONING

A. Fully commission all aspects of the Building Management System work.

B. Support all commissioning activities and testing as outlined in the Commissioning Plan.

1. Refer to detailed roles and responsibilities of Controls Contractor in the Commissioning Plan.

2. Attend all commissioning meetings as outlined in the Commissioning Plan. 3. The technician who programmed the job shall be present on site to work with the

Commissioning Agent for all functional performance testing. 4. Promptly rectify all controls related issues recorded in the Commissioning Issues

Log and submit to the Owner, Commissioning Agent (CxA) and Engineer when each item is corrected. (Note: The CxA does not provide any directives, so any deviation from the original scope must be approved by the Owner or Engineer prior to performing work.


3.11 SEQUENCES OF OPERATION A. Constant Air Volume Rooftop Air Handling Units (RTU-1)

1. The Roof Top Unit shall be started and stopped through the Building Management System (BMS).

2. The RTU shall be indexed to occupied or unoccupied mode based on a time of day and day of week schedule.

3. All Setpoints shall be adjustable through the BMS. 4. Occupied Mode

a. When in occupied mode the supply and exhaust fans shall run continuously. If Fan status does not match its command an alarm shall be annunciated through the BMS.

b. The unit’s exhaust air fan shall be “software” interlocked with the units supply fan such that the exhaust fan shall start or stop when the supply fan is energized or de-energized in occupied mode. The exhaust fan shall be balanced with the supply fan such that the building has a slightly positive pressure.

c. While in Economizer the Energy Recovery Wheel shall be de-energized, otherwise it will operate continuously in occupied mode.

d. Occupied Heating 1) The supply and exhaust air fans shall be energized and shall run

continuously. The unit’s outside air damper shall be indexed to its respective minimum opened position and the return air damper shall be indexed to its minimum closed position. The 2-way heating valve shall modulate to maintain discharge air temperature setpoint.

2) The RTUs discharge air temperature shall be subject to a reset as high as 110°F based on space temperature of 5°F or more below the occupied heating setpoint of 70°F.

e. Occupied Cooling/Dehumidification 1) The unit’s supply and exhaust fans shall energize and run

continuously. The unit’s outside air damper shall be indexed to their minimum open position and the return air damper shall be indexed to its minimum closed position. The compressors and hot gas reheat shall stage to maintain the discharge air temperature setpoint.

2) The RTUs discharge air temperature shall be subject to a linear reset as low as 55°F based on space temperature of 5°F or more above the occupied cooling setpoint of 75°F.

3) Economizer is available if outside air enthalpy (global) is measured to be less than 26 (BTU/lb dry air). The outside air damper shall modulate from minimum position to maintain a mixed air temperature of 55°F and the return damper shall close proportionally. During Economizer Mode the energy recovery wheel shall be de-energized.

5. Unoccupied Mode a. During Unoccupied Mode space temperature settings shall be relaxed to

65°F heating and 80°F cooling and the unit shall cycle as necessary to maintain unoccupied room temperature setpoints.

b. When space temperatures remain between the heating and cooling setpoints the RTU shall have the following configuration: 1) Supply and Exhaust fans shall be shut down. 2) Outside air damper shall be closed.


3) Return air damper shall be fully open. 4) Energy Recover Wheel Shall be de-energized 5) 2-way heating water valve shall be closed 6) Compressors shall be de-energized.

c. Unoccupied Cooling 1) If space temperature rises above the unoccupied cooling

setpoint of 80°F, the supply fan shall energize and the compressors shall stage to maintain the unoccupied room temperature setpoint.

2) The Outside Air Damper shall remain closed, the Return Air Damper shall remain open, the Energy Recovery Wheel shall be de-energized, and the Exhaust Fan shall be de-energized.

d. Unoccupied Heating 1) If space temperature falls below the unoccupied heating setpoint

of 65°F, the supply fan shall energize and the 2-way valve shall modulate to maintain the unoccupied heating room temperature setpoint.

2) The Outside Air damper shall remain closed, the return air damper shall remain open, the heat recovery wheel shall be de-energized, and the exhaust fan shall be de-energized.

6. Safeties & Alarms a. Filters

b.

– A differential pressure switch DP (adjustable) across the filters shall alarm at the BMS when its set-point is reached. Duct Smoke Detectors

c.

– Duct smoke detectors SD located in the return air duct and in the supply air duct shall be “hard-wired” with the supply fan de-energize the air handling unit if they detect smoke; annunciating an alarm at the BMS and at the fire alarm system. Compressor Failure Alarm

d.

– Whenever the status of the compressors does not match their command and alarm shall be annunciated through the BMS. Heat Recovery Wheel Failure Alarm

7. Ventilation Control

– Whenever the status of the Heat Recovery Wheel does not match its command an alarm shall be annunciated through the BMS.

a. When the economizer mode is disabled the outside air damper shall modulate from its minimum position to closed as sensed by the space mounted CO2 sensor to maintain the CO2 concentration less than 440 PPM.

8. Heating Coil Circulation Pump Operation a. The Lead Heating Coil Circulation Pumps shall operate continuously

whenever OAT is less than 60°F. b. The BMS shall switch the lead pump every Tuesday at 10am. c. When pump status does not match its command an alarm shall be

annunciated through the BMS.

B. Constant Air Volume Rooftop Air Handling Units (RTU-2)


2. The RTU shall be indexed to occupied or unoccupied mode based on a time of day and day of week schedule.

3. All Setpoints shall be adjustable through the BMS.


4. The Motorized Isolation Damper (MOD-1) for RTU-2 shall be “hardwired” to the RTU’s supply fan, such that when its endswitch is not made the RTU shall shutdown.

5. Occupied Mode a. When in occupied mode the supply and exhaust fans shall run

continuously. If Fan status does not match its command an alarm shall be annunciated through the BMS.

b. The unit’s exhaust air fan shall be “software” interlocked with the units supply fan such that the exhaust fan shall start or stop when the supply fan is energized or de-energized in occupied mode. The exhaust fan shall be balanced with the supply fan such that the building maintains a slightly positive pressure.



continuously. The unit’s outside air damper shall be indexed to its respective minimum opened position and the return air damper shall be indexed to its minimum closed position. The 2-way heating valve shall modulate to maintain discharge air temperature setpoint.

2) The RTUs discharge air temperature shall be subject to a reset as high as 110°F based on space temperature of 5°F or more below the occupied heating setpoint of 70°F.

e. Occupied Cooling/Dehumidification 1) The unit’s supply and exhaust fans shall energize and run

continuously. The unit’s outside air damper shall be indexed to their minimum open position and the return air damper shall be indexed to its minimum closed position. The compressors and hot gas reheat shall stage to maintain the discharge air temperature setpoint.

2) The RTUs discharge air temperature shall be subject to a linear reset as low as 55°F based on space temperature of 5°F or more above the occupied cooling setpoint of 75°F.

3) Economizer is available if outside air enthalpy (global) is measured to be less than 26 (BTU/lb dry air). The outside air damper shall modulate from minimum position to maintain a mixed air temperature of 55°F and the return damper shall close proportionally. During Economizer Mode the energy recovery wheel shall be de-energized.


b.


c.

– Duct smoke detectors SD located in the return air duct and in the supply air duct shall be “hard-wired” with the supply fan de-energize the air handling unit if they detect smoke; annunciating an alarm at the BMS and at the fire alarm system. Compressor Failure Alarm

d.

– Whenever the status of the compressors does not match their command and alarm shall be annunciated through the BMS. Heat Recovery Wheel Failure Alarm






whenever OAT is less than 60°F. b. The BMS shall switch the lead pump every Monday at 7am. c. When pump status does not match its command an alarm shall be

annunciated through the BMS. 9. Smoke Purge Sequence

a. On a signal from the fire alarm panel the following shall occur. 1) The isolation dampers (MOD on supply, return, exhaust served

by RTU-2), shall close; this damper is “hard-wired” with the supply fan, such that when the endswitch is not made RTU-2 shall be de-energized.

2) The Gravity Air Intake Damper and the isolation dampers for EF-3 shall open.

3) Once the endswitches on the gravity intake and exhaust fan dampers are proven open, EF-3 shall energize.

4) Once the fire alarm panels signal is cleared the reverse shall occur.

C. Variable Air Volume Rooftop Air Handling Units (RTU-3)


2. The RTU shall be indexed to occupied or unoccupied mode based on a time of day (TOD)/ day of week schedule.

3. All Setpoints shall be adjustable through the BMS. 4. Occupied Mode

a. When in occupied mode the supply and exhaust fans shall run continuously. If Fan status does not match its command an alarm shall be annunciated through the BMS.

b. The unit’s exhaust air fan shall be “software” interlocked with the units supply fan such that the exhaust fan shall start or stop when the supply fan is energized or de-energized in occupied mode. The exhaust fan shall volumetrically track the supply fan as to provide the building with a slightly positive pressure.



continuously. The supply fans VFD shall modulate the fan speed to maintain a discharge static pressure setpoint of 1.5” psig.

5. The unit’s outside air damper shall be indexed to its respective minimum opened position and the return air damper shall be indexed to its minimum closed position. The 3-way heating valve shall modulate to maintain discharge air temperature setpoint of 55°F.

6. Occupied Cooling/Dehumidification a. The unit’s supply and exhaust fans shall energize and run continuously.

The supply fan’s VFD shall modulate the fan speed to maintain a discharge static pressure setpoint of 1.5”psig.


b. The unit’s outside air damper shall be indexed to their minimum open position and the return air damper shall be indexed to its minimum closed position. The compressors and hot gas reheat shall stage to maintain the discharge air temperature setpoint of 55°F.

c. Economizer is available if outside air enthalpy (global) is measured to be less than 26 (BTU/lb dry air). The outside air damper shall modulate from minimum position to maintain a mixed air temperature of 55°F and the return damper shall close proportionally. During Economizer Mode the energy recovery wheel shall be de-energized.

7. Unoccupied Mode a. During Unoccupied Mode the unit shall cycle as necessary upon calls

from associated VAVs for heating or cooling to maintain unoccupied room temperature setpoints.

b. When no calls are generated from the VAVs the RTU shall have the following configuration: 1) Supply and Exhaust fans shall be shut down. 2) Outside air damper shall be closed. 3) Return air damper shall be fully open. 4) Energy Recover Wheel Shall be de-energized 5) 3-way heating water valve shall be in full bypass 6) Compressors shall be de-energized.

c. Unoccupied Cooling 1) On a call for cooling from associated VAV boxes, the supply fan

shall energize and ramp its speed to maintain duct static pressure setpoint. The compressors shall stage to maintain the cooling discharge temperature setpoint of 55°F.

2) The Outside Air Damper shall remain closed, the Return Air Damper shall remain open, the Energy Recovery Wheel shall be de-energized, and the Exhaust Fan shall be de-energized.

d. Unoccupied Heating 1) On a call for heating from associated VAV boxes, the supply fan

shall energize and ramp its speed to maintain duct static pressure setpoint. The 2-way valve shall modulate to maintain the heating discharge temperature setpoint 55°F.

2) The Outside Air damper shall remain closed, the return air damper shall remain open, the heat recovery wheel shall be de-energized, and the exhaust fan shall be de-energized.


b.


c.

– Duct smoke detectors (SD) located in the return air duct and in the supply air duct shall be “hard-wired” with the supply fan and de-energize the roof top unit if they detect smoke; an alarm shall annunciate at the BMS and at the fire alarm panel. High Discharge Static Pressure

d.

– A static pressure switch in the supply duct shall be “hard-wired” with the supply fan and de-energize the roof-top unit if supply static pressure of 4”w.c is reached. An alarm shall be annunciated through the BMS upon this pressure setpoint being reached. Compressor Failure Alarm – Whenever the status of the compressors does not match their command and alarm shall be annunciated through the BMS,


e. Heat Recovery Wheel Failure Alarm





whenever OAT is less than 60°F. b. The BMS shall switch the lead pump every Tuesday at 10am. c. When pump status does not match its command an alarm shall be

annunciated through the BMS.

D. Variable Air Volume (VAV) Boxes

1. The variable air volume (VAV) boxes shall be indexed to occupied or unoccupied mode based on a time of day (TOD)/day of week schedule.

2. All Setpoints shall be adjustable through the BMS. 3. Heating

a. Occupied heating 1) The room thermostat shall modulate the VAV damper providing

heating CFM (as shown on mechanical schedule) and 2-way reheat valve in sequence to maintain a room occupied heating temperature setpoint of 70°F.

b. Unoccupied Heating 1) The VAV box damper shall be at its closed position and 2-way

reheat valve open to coil. When the room falls below the unoccupied heating setpoint of 65°F as sensed by room thermostat, the VAV will send a signal to RTU-3 that heat is needed. The RTU shall start and operate under its unoccupied heating sequence. The VAV box shall open to provide heating cfm (as shown on mechanical schedule) in sequence with its 2-way valve to maintain unoccupied heating setpoint of 65°F. When the room thermostat is satisfied RTU-3 will de-energize and the VAV damper and 2-way valve will return to unoccupied positions.

4. Cooling a. Occupied Cooling

1) The room thermostat shall modulate the VAV damper and the 2-way reheat valve in sequence to maintain a room occupied cooling temperature setpoint of 75°F.

b. Unoccupied Cooling 1) The VAV box damper shall be at its closed position and 2-way

valve closed to coil. When the room falls below the unoccupied cooling temperature setpoint of 80°F, as sensed by a room thermostat, the VAV will send a signal to RTU-3 that cooling is needed. The RTU shall start and operate under its unoccupied cooling sequence. The VAV box and 2-way valve shall modulate open in sequence to maintain unoccupied cooling temperature setpoint of 80°F. When the room thermostat is satisfied RTU-3 shall de-energize and the VAV damper and 2-way valve will return to unoccupied positions.


5. (VAV-4 and VAV-19 only) When the VAV box corresponding AHU economizer mode is disabled the outside air damper shall modulate from its minimum position to closed as sensed by the space mounted CO2 sensor to maintain the CO2 concentration less than 440 PPM.

E. Baseboard Radiator – w/ thermostat

1. When Outdoor Air Temperature (Global) is 65°F (adj.) or higher, the baseboard radiator’s 2-way valve shall be locked out and remain closed.

2. When Outdoor Air Temperature (Global) is below 65°F (adj.) the baseboard radiator’s 2-way valve shall be permitted to operate.

3. A room thermostat shall modulate the baseboard radiator 2-way valve to maintain room temperature setpoint of 70°F (adj.).

F. Cabinet Unit Heater (CUH) Sequence – with thermostat

1. When Outdoor Air temperature rises to 65°F (adj.) or greater, the associated heater’s 2 way valve shall close and the CUH’s operation shall be locked out.

2. When Outdoor Air Temperature falls below 65°F the associated heater’s 2-way valve shall open and CUH shall be permitted to operate.

3. A room thermostat shall cycle the cabinet unit heater’s fan to maintain its room temperature setpoint of 70°F (adj.).

G. Mechanical Room EF w/Room Thermostat (EF-1, 2)

1. When the Mechanical Room’s Temperature rises to 80°F (adj.), or above, as sensed by the room thermostat a signal is sent that cooling is needed

2. The exhaust fan’s fresh air make-up damper shall open; once the damper is proven open by its endswitch the exhaust fans shall energize.

3. When the Mechanical Room Temperature falls below 80°F (adj.) the reverse shall occur.

4. If the exhaust fan’s status does not match its command an alarm shall be annunciated through the BMS.

H. Hot Water Unit Heater (UH) Sequence – with thermostat

1. When Outdoor Air Temperature (global) rises to 65°F (adj.), or above the associated heater’s 2-way valve shall close and the UH’s operation shall be locked out.

2. When Outdoor Air Temperature (global) falls below 65°F (adj.) that associated heater’s 2-way valve shall open and fan shall be permitted to operate.

3. A room thermostat shall cycle the unit heater’s fan to maintain its room temperature setpoint of 70°F (adj.).

I. Hot Water Heating System

1. General a. The HW system consists of two gas-fired water boilers, with boiler

circulating pumps and building heating system secondary distribution pumps.

b. All setpoints shall be adjustable through the Building Management System (BMS).

c. Initial values of set points shall be coordinated with owner and the engineer.


d. Boilers will operate normally under their own factory packaged controls through a Boiler Management System when occupied/enabled. The internal burner controls will modulate to maintain individual boiler water temperatures.

e. The Heating Water Supply Temperature setpoint shall be reset based on the OAT (Global).

2. System a. The heating water system shall be enabled/disabled by the BMS:

1) The HW System shall operate year round. b. When enabled the heating water system shall continuously maintain the

hot water heating supply setpoint. 1) The setpoint shall be set using a reset schedule based on

Outdoor Air Temperature (global) c. The BMS shall monitor each boiler main fuel status (boiler status) and

flame failure status. d. Boiler Circulating Pumps

1) Boiler circulation pumps shall both be energized when the heating water system is enabled.

2) Each boiler circulating pump shall be monitored through a differential pressure sensor. If the status does not match the commanded value, an alarm shall be annunciated through the BMS.

3. Heating Water Distribution Pumps a. Heating water pumps fall under hot water system occupancy/enable. b. The pumps shall be controlled via VFDs to maintain the loop differential

pressure setpoint of 15 psig. c. Lead - Lag Pumping

1) Building hot water pumps shall operate in a lead/lag configuration changing lead pump weekly on Tuesday at 10am.

2) The BMS shall be capable of scheduling and re-scheduling the pumps to operate in any assigned position.

3) The plant operator shall be capable of energizing and de-energizing each of the pumps.

4) The system shall be programmed so that the lead pump can be switched by the operator or schedule without losing flow to the system.

5) The Building Management System shall monitor each pump's run time.

d. Pump Failure 1) The HW pumps shall be monitored through differential pressure

sensors. 2) The BMS shall monitor pump status and generate an alarm

when pump is either on or off against command. If a pump off alarm is detected, the BMS shall automatically start the lag pump.

4. 2-way Heating Water Bypass Operation a. The 2-way bypass valve shall modulate open when pump VFD reaches

its minimum speed and the loop differential pressure remains above its set point. The 2-way bypass valve shall modulate to maintain loop differential pressure.

J. AC Units (AC-1, 2)

1. AC unit will be provided with packaged controls by the unit manufacturer.


2. Wall mounted thermostat calls for cooling the evaporator fan, compressor and condenser fan shall energize. When room temperature is satisfied in cooling mode, the evaporator fan, compressor, and condenser fan shall de-energize.

3. All thermostat set points shall be adjustable. 4. BMS shall monitor fan/damper status. If status does not match command value,

an alarm shall be generated.

K. AC Units (AC-3)

1. AC unit will be provided with packaged controls by the unit manufacturer. 2. Wall mounted thermostat calls for cooling the evaporator fan, compressor and

condenser fan shall energize. When room temperature is satisfied in cooling mode, the evaporator fan, compressor, and condenser fan shall de-energize.

3. The room thermostat room temperature setpoint shall be 77°F (adj.). All thermostat set points shall be adjustable.

4. BMS shall monitor fan/damper status. If status does not match command value, an alarm shall be generated.

END OF SECTION

INP

UT

/OU

TP

UT

SU

MM

AR

Y

SYST

EMIN

PUTS

OUTP

UTS

SYST

EM FE

ATUR

ES

APPA

RATU

S, O

RAN

ALOG

GENE

RAL

AREA

POI

NTME

ASUR

EDCA

LC.

BINA

RYDI

GITA

LAN

ALOG

ALAR

MSPR

OGRA

MSSU

PPLE

MENT

ALDE

SCRI

PTIO

N

RT

U-1

TEMPERATURERELATIVE HUMIDITYPRESSURERHKWAIR FLOWGPM

KWHENTHALPYRUN TIMEMETERBTURESET

STATUSFILTERSMOKEFREEZEAIR FLOWMETER

OFF-ONOFF-AUTO-ONOFF-HI-LOOPEN-CLOSE

DAMPER POSITIONVALVE POSITIONSET POINT ADJ.VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE

HI ANALOGLOW ANALOGHI BINARYLO BINARYPROOFFILTER

TIME SCHEDULINGDEMAND LIMITINGDUTY CYCLESTART/STOP OPT.ENTHALPY OPT.SMOKE CONTROLTRENDALARM INSTRUCT.MAINT. WORK ORD.ECONOMIZERCAPACITY CONSUMED

NOTE

S

GENE

RAL

XX

XX

X

OUTS

IDE A

IRX

XX

XX

HE

AT R

ECOV

ERY

WHE

ELX

XX

SU

PPLY

FAN

XX

X

EXHA

UST F

ANX

XX

MI

XED

AIR

TEMP

.X

XDI

SCHA

RGE A

IRX

XX

SP

ACE

XX

X

COMP

RESS

ORS

XX

XCI

RCUL

ATIO

N PU

MPX

XX

HEAT

ING

VALV

EX

XOA

DAM

PER

XX

X

NOTE

S:

INP

UT

/OU

TP

UT

SU

MM

AR

Y

SYST

EMIN

PUTS

OUTP

UTS

SYST

EM FE

ATUR

ES

APPA

RATU

S, O

RAN

ALOG

GENE

RAL

AREA

POI

NTME

ASUR

EDCA

LC.

BINA

RYDI

GITA

LAN

ALOG

ALAR

MSPR

OGRA

MS

DESC

RIPT

ION

RTU-

2


KWHENTHALPYRUN TIMEMETERBTU

RESET

STATUSFILTERSMOKEFREEZEAIR FLOWMETERENDSWITCH





GENE

RAL

XX

XX

X

OUTS

IDE A

IRX

XX

XX

HE

AT R

ECOV

ERY

WHE

ELX

XX

SU

PPLY

FAN

XX

X

EXHA

UST F

ANX

XX

MI

XED

AIR

TEMP

.X

XDI

SCHA

RGE A

IRX

XX

SP

ACE

XX

X

COMP

RESS

ORS

XX

XCI

RCUL

ATIO

N PU

MPX

XX

HEAT

ING

VALV

EX

XOA

DAM

PER

XX

XMO

D-1

XX

XMO

D-2

XX

XMO

D-3

XX

XEF

-3X

XX

NOTE

S:

INP

UT

/OU

TP

UT

SU

MM

AR

Y

SYST

EMIN

PUTS

OUTP

UTS

SYST

EM FE

ATUR

ES

APPA

RATU

S, O

RAN

ALOG

GENE

RAL

AREA

POI

NTME

ASUR

EDCA

LC.

BINA

RYDI

GITA

LAN

ALOG

ALAR

MSPR

OGRA

MS

DESC

RIPT

ION

RTU-

3


KWHENTHALPYRUN TIMEMETERBTU




HI ANALOGLOW ANALOGHI BINARYLO BINARYPROOFFILTERHI STATIC


GENE

RAL

XX

XX

X

OUTS

IDE A

IRX

XX

XX

HE

AT R

ECOV

ERY

WHE

ELX

XX

SU

PPLY

FAN

XX

XX

EX

HAUS

T FAN

XX

X

MIXE

D AI

R X

XDI

SCHA

RGE A

IRX

XX

X

SPAC

E X

XX

CO

MPRE

SSOR

SX

XX

CIRC

ULAT

ION

PUMP

XX

XHE

ATIN

G VA

LVE

XX

OA D

AMPE

RX

XX

NOTE

S:

INP

UT

/OU

TP

UT

SU

MM

AR

Y

SYST

EMIN

PUTS

OUTP

UTS

SYST

EM FE

ATUR

ES

APPA

RATU

S, O

RAN

ALOG

GENE

RAL

AREA

POI

NTME

ASUR

EDCA

LC.

BINA

RYDI

GITA

LAN

ALOG

ALAR

MSPR

OGRA

MS

DESC

RIPT

ION

HW S

YSTE

M






HI ANALOGLOW ANALOGHI BINARYLO BINARYPROOFFILTERHI STATICFAULTTIME SCHEDULINGDEMAND LIMITINGDUTY CYCLESTART/STOP OPT.ENTHALPY OPT.SMOKE CONTROLTRENDALARM INSTRUCT.MAINT. WORK ORD.ECONOMIZERCAPACITY CONSUMED

GENE

RAL

X

OUTS

IDE A

IRX

XX

SU

PPLY

XX

XX

RE

TURN

XX

X

CIRC

ULAT

ION

PUMP

SX

XX

X

HW D

ISTR

IBUT

ION

PUMP

SX

XX

XX

BYPA

SS V

ALVE

X

BOILE

R (S

)X

XX

X

NOTE

S:1.

THE B

OILE

RS A

RE C

ONTR

OLLE

D BY

A B

OILE

R MA

NAGE

MENT

SYS

TEM

INP

UT

/OU

TP

UT

SU

MM

AR

Y

SYST

EMIN

PUTS

OUTP

UTS

SYST

EM FE

ATUR

ES

APPA

RATU

S, O

RAN

ALOG

GENE

RAL

AREA

POI

NTME

ASUR

EDCA

LC.

BINA

RYDI

GITA

LAN

ALOG

ALAR

MSPR

OGRA

MSSU

PPLE

MENT

ALDE

SCRI

PTIO

N

VA

V BO

XES








NOTE

S

GENE

RAL

X

DAMP

ERX

XX

X

SPAC

EX

X

VALV

EX

X

NOTE

S:

INP

UT

/OU

TP

UT

SU

MM

AR

Y

SYST

EMIN

PUTS

OUTP

UTS

SYST

EM FE

ATUR

ES

APPA

RATU

S, O

RAN

ALOG

GENE

RAL

AREA

POI

NTME

ASUR

EDCA

LC.

BINA

RYDI

GITA

LAN

ALOG

ALAR

MSPR

OGRA

MSSU

PPLE

MENT

ALDE

SCRI

PTIO

N

BA

SEBO

ARD

RADI

ATOR







TIME SCHEDULINGDEMAND LIMITINGDUTY CYCLESTART/STOP OPT.ENTHALPY OPT.SMOKE CONTROLTRENDALARM INSTRUCT.MAINT. WORK ORD.ECONOMIZERCAPACITY CONSUMEDOA TEMP. LOCKOUT

NOTE

S

GENE

RAL

X

OUST

IDE A

IRX

SPAC

EX

X

VALV

EX

XX

NOTE

S:

INP

UT

/OU

TP

UT

SU

MM

AR

Y

SYST

EMIN

PUTS

OUTP

UTS

SYST

EM FE

ATUR

ES

APPA

RATU

S, O

RAN

ALOG

GENE

RAL

AREA

POI

NTME

ASUR

EDCA

LC.

BINA

RYDI

GITA

LAN

ALOG

ALAR

MSPR

OGRA

MSSU

PPLE

MENT

ALDE

SCRI

PTIO

N

CA

BINE

T UNI

T HE

ATER








NOTE

S

GENE

RAL

XX

OUST

IDE A

IRX

XX

SPAC

EX

XX

XX

X

VALV

EX

XX

FAN

XX

X

NOTE

S:

INP

UT

/OU

TP

UT

SU

MM

AR

Y

SYST

EMIN

PUTS

OUTP

UTS

SYST

EM FE

ATUR

ES

APPA

RATU

S, O

RAN

ALOG

GENE

RAL

AREA

POI

NTME

ASUR

EDCA

LC.

BINA

RYDI

GITA

LAN

ALOG

ALAR

MSPR

OGRA

MSSU

PPLE

MENT

ALDE

SCRI

PTIO

N

UN

IT HE

ATER








NOTE

S

GENE

RAL

XX

OUST

IDE A

IRX

XX

SPAC

EX

XX

XX

X

VALV

EX

XX

FAN

XX

X

NOTE

S:

INP

UT

/OU

TP

UT

SU

MM

AR

Y

SYST

EMIN

PUTS

OUTP

UTS

SYST

EM FE

ATUR

ES

APPA

RATU

S, O

RAN

ALOG

GENE

RAL

AREA

POI

NTME

ASUR

EDCA

LC.

BINA

RYDI

GITA

LAN

ALOG

ALAR

MSPR

OGRA

MSSU

PPLE

MENT

ALDE

SCRI

PTIO

N

ME

CHAN

ICAL

RO

OM EF








NOTE

S

GENE

RAL

DAMP

ERX

SPAC

EX

XX

XX

X

FAN

XX

X

NOTE

S:

EASTERN DISTRICT POLICE STATION 15947 - 1 HVAC PIPING SYSTEMS CLEANING AND TREATMENT 28103.01 January 15, 2013

SECTION 15947 - HVAC PIPING SYSTEMS CLEANING AND TREATMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes water-treatment systems for the following:

1. Hot-water heating systems.

B. Related Sections

1. The following Sections contain requirements that relate to this Section: a. Section “Common Work Results for HVAC”

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Heating Season: October 15 - April 15.

B. Cooling Season: April 16 - October 14.

C. Point of Delivery is the outlet of the service meter assembly, or the outlet of the service regular (service shutoff valve when no meter is provided).

D. Hydronic Water Systems: A system of heating or cooling that involves a transfer of heat

by a circulating fluid, such as Heating Water. 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Performance Requirements

1. There shall be no nitrites, chromates, polyphosphates, or heavy metals in the chemical formulation.

2. Water treatment shall not in any way reduce the life expectancy of any part of the water cooling equipment, pipe, valves, fittings, and other appurtenances.

3. Water treatment system shall introduce chemicals into each system only when the system is operating.

4. Heating water systems shall maintain the following conditions: pH 8.0 to 10.5 Corrosion inhibitor 100 to 150 ppm as molybdate

1.5 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data for each type of product specified. Include manufacturer's technical product


data, rated capacities of selected equipment clearly indicated, water-pressure drops, weights (shipping, installed, and operating), furnished specialties, accessories, and installation and startup instructions. Provide a list of all chemicals and quantities, including material safety data sheets.

C. Shop drawings from manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and indicating

dimensions, weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

D. System diagram showing all piping, valving, tubing, treatment equipment, etc.

E. Wiring diagrams detailing power and control wiring and differentiating clearly between

manufacturer-installed wiring and field-installed wiring.

F. Field test reports indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance with specified requirements.

G. Maintenance data for chemical water treatment to include in the operation and

maintenance manual specified in Division 1. Include detailed manufacturer's instructions and parts list for each item of equipment, control, and accessory. Include troubleshooting maintenance guide.


A. Qualifications: A recognized chemical water treatment supplier with warehousing facilities within 30 miles from the project. The supplier shall employ an experienced consultant, available at reasonable times during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about water treatment.

1. Provide a list of at least five (5) projects of similar size and type, which have been

in operation for at least 5 years. 2. Supplier shall provide 24-hour emergency service, and shall be capable of being

on-site within 4 hours notice.

B. Chemical Standards: Meet state and local pollution-control regulations.

C. Comply with NFPA 70, “National Electrical Code,” for components and installation.

D. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.

1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code,

Article 100. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing

Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.

E. Provide cleaning of the piping systems and submit a certificate of compliance with the specification.

1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. Obtain water analysis from the local agency supplying water to the site, or by a test. In open recirculating systems, if alkalinity exceeds 125 ppm or hardness exceeds 300 ppm, include in the system an acid feed control system.


B. Service Period: Provide chemicals and service program to maintain the specified performance for a period of two years from startup date of equipment, including the following:

1. Perform an analysis at the time of each visit, or within 72 hours at the firm’s

laboratory, and submit report as required in “Submittals.” 2. Open system: Perform testing and adjusting at bi-monthly intervals, or more

frequently if required, during the cooling season, and at monthly intervals during the heating season, to adjust feeding equipment, apply chemicals, regulate bleed-off, and report results. a. Legionellae Test: Perform bi-monthly tests of open system water for

Legionella Pneumophila. Submit reports stating bacteria count per milliliter and the results from the previous tests. Submit separate report of test.

3. Closed systems: Perform testing and adjusting at monthly intervals to apply chemicals and report results. a. Make minor adjustments if required to correct chemical balance. b. If system conditions indicate significant leaks, notify Contractor. After

piping corrections or repairs, adjust system chemical balance. 1.8 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials

1. Furnish the following extra materials, matching products installed, packaged with protective covering for storage and with identification labels clearly describing contents.

2. Chemicals: Furnish quantity equal to 50 percent of amount initially installed. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS


1. Chemical Water Treatment Products:

a. Arc Water Treatment Co. b. Aqua-Chem, Inc. c. Ecolab. d. Olin Water Services e. Nalco Chemical Co.

2.2 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT

A. Positive Displacement Diaphragm Pump: Adjustable flow rate; thermoplastic construction; continuous-duty, fully enclosed electric motor and drive; and built-in relief valve.

B. Positive Displacement Piston Pump: Metal and thermoplastic construction; continuous-

duty, fully enclosed electric motor and drive; and built-in relief valve.

C. Chemical Solution Tanks: Chemical-resistant reservoirs fabricated from high-density opaque polyethylene with graduated markings; with molded fiberglass cover with recess for mounting pump, agitator, or liquid-level switch.


1. Capacity: 50 gal. (189 L)

.

D. Agitator: Fully enclosed electric motor, stainless-steel clamp and motor mount, with Type 316 stainless-steel shaft and propeller.

E. Liquid-Level Switch: Polypropylene housing, integrally mounted PVC air trap, receptacles

for connection to metering pump, and low-level alarm.

F. Packaged Conductivity Controller: Solid-state circuiting, 5 percent accuracy, linear dial adjustment, built-in calibration switch, ON-OFF switch and light, control function light, output to control circuit, and recorder.

G. Solenoid Valves: Forged-brass body, globe pattern, normally open or closed as required,

general-purpose solenoid enclosure, and continuous-duty coil.

H. Electronic Timers: Infinitely adjustable over full range, 150-second and 5-minute range, mounted together in cabinet with HAND-OFF-AUTOMATIC switches and status lights.

I. Automatic Boiler Blowdown

1. Automatic Boiler Blowdown Controller and Sensor Probe. 2. Electric boiler blowdown valves rated for boiler pressure.

2.3 CHEMICAL TREATMENT TEST EQUIPMENT

A. Test Cabinet: White-enamel cabinet with local fluorescent light, capable of accommodating 4- to 10-mL, zeroing, titrating burettes and associated reagents.

B. Kits: Provide the Owner with one (1) complete system kit. As recommended by water

treatment system manufacturer for determining water hardness and water characteristics, including carrying case and spare reagents. Provide the following test kits as necessary:

1. Alkalinity titration. 2. Chloride titration. 3. Sulfite titration. 4. Total hardness titration. 5. Low phosphate. 6. Conductivity bridge, range 0 to 10,000 microhms. 7. Creosol red pH slide complete with reagent. 8. Portable electronic conductivity meter. 9. High nitrite. 10. Molybdate.

2.4 CHEMICALS

A. Furnish chemicals recommended by water treatment system manufacturer for treating water to meet specified water quality. Provide only chemicals that are compatible with piping materials, seals, and accessories.

B. System Cleaner: Liquid alkaline compound with emulsifying agents and detergents to

remove grease and petroleum products.

C. Biocide: Chlorine release agents or microbiocides.



A. Install treatment equipment level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions, rough-in drawings, the original design, and referenced standards.

B. Connections

1. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. The

Drawings indicate the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements: a. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow servicing and maintenance. b. Hot Water Piping: Conform to applicable requirements of Section

"Piping, Valving, Fittings, and Specialties." c. Steam Piping: Conform to applicable requirements of Section "Piping,

Valving, Fittings, and Specialties." 2. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements of Division 16 Sections for

connecting electrical equipment. a. Install electrical devices furnished with boiler but not specified to be

factory mounted. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: A qualified independent testing agency employed and paid by Owner will perform field quality control testing.

3.3 CLEANING – HYDRONIC PIPING SYSTEMS

A. After completing system installation, including outlet fittings and devices, inspect exposed finish. Remove burrs, dirt, and construction debris; repair damaged finishes, including chips, scratches, and abrasions.

B. Before adding chemicals to the system, isolate coils of heating and cooling equipment,

and open bypasses.

C. Flushing portions of the system:

1. After a piping loop has been completed and prior to the installation of strainer baskets, flush that portion of the system. Connections shall be same size as piping being flushed or one size smaller.

2. When a major section of the building has been completed, repeat the same procedure, except that pipe connections shall be limited to 1.5 inch.

3. Flushing shall remove sediment, scale, rust and other foreign substances. 4. After flushing, install strainers and pressure test system and make it tight.

D. Flushing building system: After the various portions of the piping system have been tested

and flushed and system is substantially completed, fill the system completely with water, venting all trapped air, and operating the pump.

1. Open a drain at the low point of the system while replacing the water through the

make-up at the same rate. 2. Continue flushing until clean water shows at the drain, but for not less than two

hours.


3. After flushing, remove strainers and clean and replace them. Remove the bypass around the heat pump condensers and install control valves.

E. Chemical cleaning: Fill system with sufficient detergent and dispersant to remove dirt, oil, and grease.

1. Circulate for at least 48 hours. 2. Open a drain valve at the lowest point and bleed while the system continues to

circulate. Assure that the automatic make-up valve is operating. 3. Continue until water runs clear and all chemicals are removed. Sample and test

the water until pH is the same as pH of makeup water. 4. After chemical cleaning, remove strainers, clean and reinstall them. 5. Close bypasses and open valves to coils.

F. Submit certificate and test results.

3.4 SYSTEM START-UP

A. Startup Services: Provide the services of a factory-authorized service representative to provide startup service and to demonstrate and train Owner's maintenance personnel as specified below.

B. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

C. Startup Procedures: During boiler system startup, operate boiler water treatment system (after charging with specified chemicals) to maintain required steady-state characteristics of feedwater.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Provide services of supplier's technical representative for half a day to instruct Owner's personnel in operation, maintenance, and testing procedures of boiler water treatment system.

B. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup

and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance.

C. Review data in the operation and maintenance manuals. Refer to Section "Contract Closeout."

D. Schedule training with Owner, through the Architect, with at least 7 days' advance notice.

END OF SECTION

EASTERN DISTRICT POLICE STATION 15948 - 1 PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS CLEANING AND TREATMENT 28103.01 January 15, 2013

SECTION 15948 - PLUMBING PIPING SYSTEMS CLEANING AND TREATMENT PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes water-treatment systems for the following:

1. Potable Water Systems 2. Gravity Drains

1.3 DEFINITIONS

A. Gas Distribution Piping: Piping which conveys gas from the point of delivery to the points of usage.

B. Point of Delivery is the outlet of the service meter assembly, or the outlet of the service

regular (service shutoff valve when no meter is provided).

C. Domestic Water Systems: A system conveying domestic potable or non-potable water, such as Cold Water, Hot Water, Hot Water circulating, etc.

D. Gravity Drainage Systems: A system of gravity fed effluent conveying storm water,

sanitary, and laboratory acid waste, etc.

1.4 SUBMITTALS


B. Product data for each type of product specified. Include manufacturer's technical product

data, rated capacities of selected equipment clearly indicated, water-pressure drops, weights (shipping, installed, and operating), furnished specialties, accessories, and installation and startup instructions. Provide a list of all chemicals and quantities, including material safety data sheets.

C. Shop drawings from manufacturer detailing equipment assemblies and indicating

dimensions, weights, loadings, required clearances, method of field assembly, components, and location and size of each field connection.

D. System diagram showing all piping, valving, tubing, treatment equipment, etc.

E. Wiring diagrams detailing power and control wiring and differentiating clearly between

manufacturer-installed wiring and field-installed wiring.

F. Field test reports indicating and interpreting test results relative to compliance with specified requirements.


G. Maintenance data for chemical water treatment to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1. Include detailed manufacturer's instructions and parts list for each item of equipment, control, and accessory. Include troubleshooting maintenance guide.


A. Qualifications: A recognized chemical water treatment supplier with warehousing facilities within 30 miles from the project. The supplier shall employ an experienced consultant, available at reasonable times during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor, Architect, and Owner about water treatment.

1. Provide a list of at least five (5) projects of similar size and type, which have been

in operation for at least 5 years. 2. Supplier shall provide 24-hour emergency service, and shall be capable of being

on-site within 4 hours notice.

B. Chemical Standards: Meet state and local pollution-control regulations.

C. Comply with NFPA 70, “National Electrical Code,” for components and installation.

D. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.

1. The Terms "Listed" and "Labeled": As defined in the National Electrical Code,

Article 100. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A "Nationally Recognized Testing

Laboratory" (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.

E. Provide cleaning of the piping systems and submit a certificate of compliance with the specification.

1.6 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials

1. Furnish the following extra materials, matching products installed, packaged with protective covering for storage and with identification labels clearly describing contents.



1. Chemical Water Treatment Products:

a. Arc Water Treatment Co. b. Aqua-Chem, Inc. c. Ecolab. d. Olin Water Services e. Nalco Chemical Co.



A. Install treatment equipment level and plumb, according to manufacturer's written instructions, rough-in drawings, the original design, and referenced standards.

B. Connections

1. Piping installation requirements are specified in other Division 15 Sections. The

Drawings indicate the general arrangement of piping, fittings, and specialties. The following are specific connection requirements: a. Install piping adjacent to equipment to allow servicing and maintenance. b. Piping: Conform to applicable requirements of Section "Piping, Valving,

Fittings, and Specialties." 2. Electrical: Conform to applicable requirements of Division 16 Sections for

connecting electrical equipment. a. Install electrical devices furnished with boiler but not specified to be

factory mounted. 3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Testing Agency: Provide the services of a qualified independent testing agency to perform field quality control testing.

3.3 STERILIZATION OF DOMESTIC WATER SYSTEMS

A. Sterilization:

1. After final testing for leaks, all new potable water lines shall be thoroughly flushed by plumbing contractor to remove foreign material. Before placing the systems in service, contractor shall engage a qualified service organization, Arc Water Treatment Company of Maryland, Inc. or approved equal, to sterilize the new water lies in accordance with the following procedure: a. Through a ¾” hose connection in the main entering the building pump in

sufficient sodium hypochlorite to produce a free available chlorine residual of not less than 200 ppm. Plumbing contractor shall provide plumbing connections and power for pumping chlorine into the system.

2. Proceed upstream from the point of chlorine application opening all faucets and taps until chlorine is detected. Close faucets and taps when chlorine is evident.

3. When chlorinated water has been brought to every faucet and tap with a minimum concentration of 200 ppm chlorine, retain this water in the system for three (3) hours. CAUTION: Over-concentration of chlorine and more than three (3) hours retention may result in damage to piping system. It is not necessary to retain chlorine in any system for twenty-four hours to achieve sterilization. AWWA states that 200 ppm chlorine for three hours is sufficient.

4. At the end of the retention period, no less than 100 ppm of chlorine shall be present at the extreme end of the system.

5. Proceed to open all faucets and taps and thoroughly flush all new lines until the chlorine residual in the water is less than 1.0 ppm.

6. Obtain representative water sample from the system for analysis by a recognized bacteriological laboratory.

7. If the sample tested for coliform organism is negative, a letter and laboratory report shall be submitted by the service organization to the contractor, certifying successful completion of the sterilization.

8. If any samples tested indicate the presence of coliform organisms, the entire


sterilization procedure shall be repeated. 3.4 SYSTEM START-UP

A. Startup Services: Provide the services of a factory-authorized service representative to provide startup service and to demonstrate and train Owner's maintenance personnel as specified below.

B. Test and adjust controls and safeties. Replace damaged and malfunctioning controls and

equipment.

C. Startup Procedures: During boiler system startup, operate boiler water treatment system (after charging with specified chemicals) to maintain required steady-state characteristics of feedwater.

3.5 DEMONSTRATION

A. Provide services of supplier's technical representative for half a day to instruct Owner's personnel in operation, maintenance, and testing procedures of boiler water treatment system.

B. Train Owner's maintenance personnel on procedures and schedules related to startup

and shutdown, troubleshooting, servicing, and preventive maintenance.

C. Review data in the operation and maintenance manuals. Refer to Section "Contract Closeout."

D. Schedule training with Owner, through the Architect, with at least 7 days' advance notice.

END OF SECTION

EASTERN DISTRICT POLICE STATION 15949 - 1 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR PLUMBING 28103.01 January 15, 2013

SECTION 15949 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR PLUMBING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY

A. Coordinate work of this section with all trades.

B. Work covered in this Section shall be performed after completion of work specified in all Divisions as they related to this work.

C. Review of design drawings and specifications, and comment on potential problem areas.

D. Site inspections of ongoing sheet metal installation with written report from each visit.

E. Measurement and setting of all domestic hot water systems provided or specified in

accordance with these contract documents, recording data, making tests, and preparing reports, all as hereinafter specified.

F. Coordinate with all trades to provide all incidental items not indicated on drawings or in

specifications that belong to work described or are required for complete systems balancing, at no additional cost to Owner.

G. Refer to paragraph “Closeout Submittals” in Section “Common Work Results for

Plumbing.” 1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Agency Data:

1. Submit proof that proposed testing, adjusting, and balancing agency meets the qualifications specified within 30 days of award of contract.

B. Engineer and Technicians Data:

1. Submit proof that Test and Balance Engineer assigned to supervise procedures,

and technicians proposed to perform procedures meet qualifications specified within 30 days of award of contract.

C. Procedures and Agenda: Submit synopsis of testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures

and agenda proposed to be used for this project within 90 days of award of contract.

D. Document Review:

1. Submit certification in writing that all design drawings and specifications have been reviewed, and comment on potential problems within 90 days of award of contract.


E. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance and operating data that include how to test, adjust, and balance the building systems. Include this information in maintenance data specified in Division 1 and Section “Common Work Results for Plumbing.”

F. Certified Reports: Submit testing, adjusting, and balancing reports bearing the seal and

signature of Test and Balance Engineer. Reports shall be certified proof that systems have been tested, adjusted, and balanced in accordance with referenced standards; are an accurate representation of how systems have been installed; are true representation of how systems are operating at completion of testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures; and are accurate record of final quantities measured, to establish normal operating values of the systems. Follow procedures and format specified below:

1. Report Format: Report forms shall be those standard forms prepared by

referenced standard for each respective item and system to be tested, adjusted, and balanced. Bind report forms complete with schematic systems diagrams and other data in reinforced, vinyl, three-ring binders. Provide binding edge labels with project identification and a title descriptive of contents. Divide contents of binder into divisions listed below, separated by divider tabs: a. General Information and Summary b. Domestic hot Water Systems c. Automatic Temperature Controls

2. Report Contents: Provide following minimum information, forms and data: a. General Information and Summary: Inside cover sheet to identify testing,

adjusting, and balancing agency, Contractor, Owner, Architect, Engineer, and Project. Include addresses, and contact names and telephone numbers. Include certification sheet containing seal and name address, telephone number, and signature of Certified Test and Balance Engineer. Include in this division listing of the instrumentations used for the procedures along with proof of calibration.

b. Remainder of the report shall contain appropriate forms containing as minimum, information indicated on standard report forms prepared by AABC and NEBB, for each respective item and system. Prepare schematic diagram for each item of equipment and system to accompany each respective report form.

G. NIST Calibration Reports: Submit proof that all testing and balancing instruments and

equipment used for this project has been calibrated in accordance with NIST Standards, within period of six months prior to starting project.

H. Final submittal shall include but not be limited to following:

1. List of equipment used to perform test and procedures. 2. Equipment performance data and equipment curves with actual points of

performance indicated on curves as compiled during balancing. 3. Domestic hot water system components flow rates, pressures and temperatures. 4. On balance report documents record date and time of reading.


A. Agency Qualifications:

1. Employ services of independent testing, adjusting, and balancing agency meeting qualifications specified below, to be single source of responsibility to test, adjust, and balance the building domestic hot water system to produce design objectives. Services shall include checking installations for conformity to design,


measurement and establishment of fluid quantities of plumbing systems as required to meet design specifications, and recording and reporting results.

2. Certified by National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) or by Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) in those testing and balancing disciplines required for this project, and having at least one Professional Engineer registered in State in which services are to be performed, certified by NEBB or AABC as Test and Balance Engineer.

B. Work shall be accomplished in accordance with specifications. Procedures specified

shall be followed and, if not specifically described herein, in general, shall be in accordance with Associated Air Balance Council's National Standards or National Environmental Balancing Bureau's Procedural Standards.

C. Design Review:

1. Review all design drawings and specifications. Review shall include:

a. Control device location and balancing devices location in piping systems. b. Indicate additional balancing devices required for proper balancing. c. Specifications on all devices required for balancing. d. Note any potential noise problems.

2. Within 90 days of award of contract, meet with the Architect, Mechanical Contractor, and Building Automation System Contractor to review procedures and agenda and comments on design documents as to potential problem areas.

D. Shop Drawing Review:

1. Review “Automatic Temperature Control” shop drawing submittals noting any

potential balancing problems. Note comments on submittal, sign, stamp and return to General Contractor. All “Automatic Temperature Control” submittals must be reviewed by balancing agency prior to review by Architect.

E. Pre-Balancing Conference: Prior to beginning of testing, adjusting, and balancing

procedures, schedule and conduct conference with Architect and representatives of installers of mechanical systems. Objective of conference is final coordination and verification of system operation and readiness for testing, adjusting, and balancing.

F. During construction, balancing agency shall inspect the installation of pipe systems,

temperature controls, and other component parts of plumbing system. Inspections shall be performed periodically as work progresses. Minimum of two inspections are required as follows: (1) when 60 percent of piping is installed; (2) when 90 percent of equipment is installed. Balancing agency shall submit brief written report of each inspection to Owner and Architect.

G. Standards:

1. Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) Publication:

a. National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Systems, Latest Edition.

2. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) Publications: a. "ASHRAE Research Report No. 1162, "Air Flow Measurements at Intake

and Discharge Openings and Grilles," ASHVE Transactions, Volume 46. b. ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals, Latest Edition.

3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Publications: a. ANSI/AIHA Z9.5 American National Standard for Laboratory Ventilation,


Latest Edition. 4. National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB)

a. Procedural Standards for Testing-Balancing- Adjusting of Environmental Systems, Latest Edition.

5. Scientific Equipment & Furniture Association (SEFA) Standard SEFA1-1992 Laboratory Fume Hoods.

1.5 OWNER’S INSTRUCTIONS

A. Balancing contractor's technician along with his balancing engineer shall provide four (4) hours of instruction to Owner's engineers on balancing methods, procedures and equipment.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SYSTEM BALANCE - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Balance domestic hot water systems to obtain water quantities indicated and required for proper operation of system.

B. Field work performed under this Section shall be provided under direct supervision of a

Registered Professional Engineer.

C. Furnish services for complete adjustment of water system distribution and controls.

D. During all tests, it shall be demonstrated that systems shall be free from leaks and all parts of system will operate correctly. If not, report deficiencies to Contractor and Owner. Balancing Firm shall make final adjustments to system as may be required for proper operation, maintaining correct flow rates in all parts of the building.

E. Preliminary Work:

1. Inspect project site prior to starting adjustments to verify completion of trades,

including general construction, piping system, building automation systems, and electrical systems, as they relate to balancing work. Verification shall include but not be limited to following: a. Piping System (domestic hot water): b. Already cleaned and flushed by mechanical contractor. c. Chemical treatment operating, or applicable to system. d. System filled and vented of air under Division 15. e. Proper direction of rotation for motor-driven equipment and for proper

speed on multi-speed motors. f. Balancing devices are installed and accessible. g. Control device connections. h. Note problems in general construction of the building that might effect

systems performance such as sealing of windows, building joints, exhaust shafts, etc.

i. Problems discovered during this inspection shall be reported to General Contractor and Owner.

2. Contractor shall certify in writing that each piping system has been prepared as per this Section, indicating dates procedures were done and which contractor did work. Submit in writing to Architect before beginning balancing work.


F. Balancing of domestic hot water circulation systems and parts installed under this Contract to obtain water quantities and temperature drops in all parts of system shown on plans, in specifications on approved shop drawings or as required by Architect.

3.2 DOMESTIC HOT WATER SYSTEM BALANCE

A. In conjunction with Instrumentation and Controls System Technician, pumps shall be started per design sequence. With manual valves open, and control valves in normal position, adjust discharge balancing valve to obtain design flow. Compare data with pump submittal curve. If test point falls on curve, proceed with balancing. If recorded data does not fall on pump curve, plot new curve parallel with other curves on chart, from zero to maximum flow. Open discharge balancing valve to full and record discharge pressure, suction pressure and total head. Readjust balancing valve to obtain suction and discharge design flow and pressure, and record data. Check and record pump motor voltage and amperage. Pump motor shall not be overloaded.

B. With pump system adjusted, perform following tests, compile data and submit report:

1. Pumps:

a. Design Data 1) Flow and total dynamic head. 2) pump speed, and motor output.

b. Installed equipment 1) Manufacturer, size and model number. 2) Type drive. 3) Motor rating, voltage, and phase. 4) Full-load amperes.

c. Field Test 1) Discharge pressures: Full flow and zero flow. 2) Suction pressures: Full flow and zero flow. 3) Operating flow and total dynamic head 4) No-load amperes (where possible.) 5) Full-flow amperes, zero-flow amperes. 6) Calculated motor output.

C. With pump system properly adjusted, proceed with following tests adjustments and

compilation of data:

1. Pipe Mains and Branches: a. Adjust branch balancing valves to obtain pressure and flowrates required. b. Provide the following:

1) Manufacturer's model number, size of heat exchanger, number of passes.

2) Design and actual flow rate and pressure drop. c. Heat transfer equipment including domestic hot water.

1) Measured Parameters a) Flowrate. b) Heat transfer. c) Entering and leaving temperatures. d) Pressure drops.

2) Equipment data a) Manufacturer and model number. b) Motor output horsepowers. c) Serial numbers.


3) Design Data a) Include design data in submittal for comparison.

3.3 CALIBRATION

A. During testing and balancing, inspect temperature sensors, pressure sensors, digital indicators, and thermometers, etc. provided under Division 22. Report discrepancies to the Contractor for replacement or recalibration.

3.4 RE-BALANCE

A. After Architect's review of test and balance report submittal, make adjustment in any balancing point as required by Architect, to correct discrepancies between balance report and design, at no additional cost.

3.5 COMMISSIONING

A. Provide assistance and support for all Commissioning activities and functional testing as outlined in the Commissioning Plan and specifications.

END OF SECTION

EASTERN DISTRICT POLICE STATION 15950 - 1 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING FOR HVAC 28103.01 January 15, 2013

SECTION 15950 - TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING FOR HVAC PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY

A. Coordinate work of this section with all trades.

B. Work covered in this Section shall be performed after completion of work specified in all Divisions as they related to this work.

C. Review of design drawings and specifications, and comment on potential problem areas.

D. Site inspections of ongoing sheet metal installation with written report from each visit.

E. Air leak testing of ductwork system. See Section, “Leak Testing, Air Distribution and Duct

Systems.”

F. Measurement and setting of all air, domestic hot water and steam systems provided or specified in accordance with these contract documents, recording data, making tests, and preparing reports, all as hereinafter specified.

G. Coordinate with all trades to provide all incidental items not indicated on drawings or in

specifications that belong to work described or are required for complete systems balancing, at no additional cost to Owner.

H. Refer to paragraph “Closeout Submittals” in Section “Common Work Results for HVAC.”

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Agency Data:

1. Submit proof that proposed testing, adjusting, and balancing agency meets the qualifications specified within 30 days of award of contract.

B. Engineer and Technicians Data:

1. Submit proof that Test and Balance Engineer assigned to supervise procedures,

and technicians proposed to perform procedures meet qualifications specified within 30 days of award of contract.

C. Procedures and Agenda: Submit synopsis of testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures

and agenda proposed to be used for this project within 90 days of award of contract.

D. Document Review:

1. Submit certification in writing that all design drawings and specifications have been reviewed, and comment on potential problems within 90 days of award of contract.


E. Maintenance Data: Submit maintenance and operating data that include how to test,

adjust, and balance the building systems. Include this information in maintenance data specified in Division 1 and Section “Common Work Results for HVAC.”

F. Certified Reports: Submit testing, adjusting, and balancing reports bearing the seal and

signature of Test and Balance Engineer. Reports shall be certified proof that systems have been tested, adjusted, and balanced in accordance with referenced standards; are an accurate representation of how systems have been installed; are true representation of how systems are operating at completion of testing, adjusting, and balancing procedures; and are accurate record of final quantities measured, to establish normal operating values of the systems. Follow procedures and format specified below:

1. Report Format: Report forms shall be those standard forms prepared by

referenced standard for each respective item and system to be tested, adjusted, and balanced. Bind report forms complete with schematic systems diagrams and other data in reinforced, vinyl, three-ring binders. Provide binding edge labels with project identification and a title descriptive of contents. Divide contents of binder into divisions listed below, separated by divider tabs: a. General Information and Summary b. Air Systems c. Hydronic Systems d. Automatic Temperature Controls e. Special Systems f. Sound and Vibration Systems

2. Report Contents: Provide following minimum information, forms and data: a. General Information and Summary: Inside cover sheet to identify testing,

adjusting, and balancing agency, Contractor, Owner, Architect, Engineer, and Project. Include addresses, and contact names and telephone numbers. Include certification sheet containing seal and name address, telephone number, and signature of Certified Test and Balance Engineer. Include in this division listing of the instrumentations used for the procedures along with proof of calibration.

b. Remainder of the report shall contain appropriate forms containing as minimum, information indicated on standard report forms prepared by AABC and NEBB, for each respective item and system. Prepare schematic diagram for each item of equipment and system to accompany each respective report form.

G. NIST Calibration Reports: Submit proof that all testing and balancing instruments and

equipment used for this project has been calibrated in accordance with NIST Standards, within period of six months prior to starting project.

H. Final submittal shall include but not be limited to following:

1. List of equipment used to perform test and procedures. 2. Equipment performance data and equipment curves with actual points of

performance indicated on curves as compiled during balancing. 3. Air Devices including VAV Boxes (supply, return and exhaust) and all air outlets. 4. Duct traverse readings during balancing. 5. Room sound power levels where requested by Owner or Architect. 6. On balance report documents record date and time of reading.


A. Agency Qualifications:


1. Employ services of independent testing, adjusting, and balancing agency meeting

qualifications specified below, to be single source of responsibility to test, adjust, and balance the building heating, ventilating and air conditioning systems to produce design objectives. Services shall include checking installations for conformity to design, measurement and establishment of fluid quantities of mechanical systems as required meeting design specifications, and recording and reporting results.

2. Certified by National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB) or by Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) in those testing and balancing disciplines required for this project, and having at least one Professional Engineer registered in State in which services are to be performed, certified by NEBB or AABC as Test and Balance Engineer.

B. Work shall be accomplished in accordance with specifications. Procedures specified

shall be followed and, if not specifically described herein, in general, shall be in accordance with Associated Air Balance Council's National Standards or National Environmental Balancing Bureau's Procedural Standards.

C. Design Review

1. Review all design drawings and specifications. Review shall include:

a. Duct pressure classification b. Control device location and balancing devices location in duct systems

and piping systems. c. Indicate additional balancing devices required for proper balancing. d. Specifications on all devices required for balancing. e. Note any potential noise problems.

2. Within 90 days of award of contract, meet with the Architect, Mechanical Contractor, and Building Automation System Contractor to review procedures and agenda and comments on design documents as to potential problem areas.

D. Shop Drawing Review

1. Review “Instrumentation and Control System” shop drawing submittals noting any

potential balancing problems. Note comments on submittal, sign, stamp and return to General Contractor. All “Instrumentation and Control System” submittals must be reviewed by balancing agency prior to review by Architect.

E. Pre-Balancing Conference: Prior to beginning of testing, adjusting, and balancing

procedures, schedule and conduct conference with Architect and representatives of installers of mechanical systems. Objective of conference is final coordination and verification of system operation and readiness for testing, adjusting, and balancing.

F. During construction, balancing agency shall inspect the installation of pipe systems, sheet

metal work, temperature controls, and other component parts of heating, ventilating, and air conditioning systems. Inspections shall be performed periodically as work progresses. Minimum of two inspections are required as follows: (1) when 60 percent of ductwork is installed; (2) when 90 percent of equipment is installed. Balancing agency shall submit brief written report of each inspection to Owner and Architect.

G. Standards:

1. Associated Air Balance Council (AABC) Publication:

a. National Standards for Testing and Balancing Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning Systems, Latest Edition.


2. American Society of Heating, Refrigeration and air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) Publications: a. "ASHRAE Research Report No. 1162, "Air Flow Measurements at Intake

and Discharge Openings and Grilles," ASHVE Transactions, Volume 46. b. ASHRAE Handbook of Fundamentals, Latest Edition.

3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) Publications: a. ANSI/AIHA Z9.5 American National Standard for Laboratory Ventilation,

Latest Edition. 4. National Environmental Balancing Bureau (NEBB)

a. Procedural Standards for Testing-Balancing- Adjusting of Environmental Systems, Latest Edition.

5. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association Inc. (SMACNA) - Air Duct Leakage Test Manual, Latest Edition.

1.5 OWNER’S INSTRUCTIONS

A. Balancing contractor's technician along with his balancing engineer shall provide 8 hours of instruction to Owner's engineers on balancing methods, procedures and equipment.

PART 2 PRODUCTS (NOT USED) PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 SYSTEM BALANCE - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Balance heating, ventilating, and air conditioning to obtain air and water quantities indicated and required for proper operation of system.

B. Field work performed under this Section shall be provided under direct supervision of a

Registered Professional Engineer.

C. Furnish services for complete adjustment of water systems, steam systems and air handling and exhaust systems, water, steam and air distribution and controls.

D. During all tests, it shall be demonstrated that systems shall be free from leaks and all

parts of system will operate correctly. If not, report deficiencies to Contractor and Owner. Balancing Firm shall make final adjustments to equipment as may be required for proper operation, maintaining correct temperatures in all parts of the building. Controls shall be adjusted by “Instrumentation and Control System” technicians in conjunction with Balancing Firm. Coordinate setpoints and adjustments with “Instrumentation and Control System.”

E. Preliminary Work:

1. Inspect project site prior to starting adjustments to verify completion of trades,

including general construction, piping system, ductwork system, building automation systems, and electrical systems, as they relate to balancing work. Verification shall include but not be limited to following: a. Ductwork System:

1) Duct joints sealed. 2) Witness leakage tests required under sheet metal section. 3) Dampers and control devices installed.

b. Piping System (hydronic): 1) Already cleaned and flushed by mechanical contractor. 2) Chemical treatment operating, or applicable to system. 3) System filled and vented of air under Division 15.


c. Proper direction of rotation for motor-driven equipment and for proper speed on multi-speed motors.

d. Balancing devices are installed and accessible. e. Control device connections. f. Note problems in general construction of the building that might effect

systems performance such as sealing of windows, building joints, exhaust shafts, etc.

g. Problems discovered during this inspection shall be reported to General Contractor and Owner.

2. Contractor shall certify in writing that each piping system has been prepared as per this Section, indicating dates procedures were done and which contractor did work. Submit in writing to Architect before beginning balancing work.

F. Balancing of hydronic systems and parts installed under this Contract to obtain water

quantities and temperature drops in all parts of system shown on plans, in specifications, on approved shop drawings or as required by Architect.

G. Balancing of heating and air conditioning, special exhaust and ventilating systems to

achieve air quantities specified at each air inlet, outlet, or damper shown on plans at proper conditions of static pressure and temperature differential.

H. Study and report on excessive noise conditions, which may develop during system

balancing. Report shall be sent to Architect. 3.2 AIR SYSTEM BALANCE

A. In conjunction with Automatic Temperature Controls, equipment shall be started per design sequence. Determine fan airflow at rated speed. If airflow is not within 10% of design capacity at rated speed, review system conditions, procedures, and recorded data. Check and record pressure drops across filters, compensate for clean versus dirty filters, coils, sound traps, airflow sensors, etc., to indicate excessive pressure loss or leakage. Resolve problems with appropriate contractor. If systems are properly operating, and airflow is still unacceptable, adjust fan drive in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations to obtain proper airflow and static pressure. Systems shall be balanced and operated at lowest feasible static pressure with allowance for filter loading. Record fan suction pressure, fan discharge pressure, amperage and airflow measurement. Correct fan curves to indicate new points of balance. Fan motor shall not be overloaded.

B. With fan systems adjusted and dampers set to handle normal minimum outdoor air,

perform following tests and compile following information:

1. Air Handling Equipment a. Design Conditions

1) Supply, Return and Exhaust Airflow 2) Static and Total Pressure 3) Outdoor Airflow 4) Motor rating 5) Fan speed 6) Outlet Velocity

b. Installed Equipment 1) Manufacturer 2) Motor serial number 3) Motor type and efficiency, rating, voltage, phase, full-load

amperes. c. Field Test


1) Fan speed 2) No-load operating amperes 3) Fan motor operating amperes 4) Calculated motor output

d. Test for Total Air 1) Sum of discharge, exhaust, return air and outside air ducts. 2) Number and locations of velocity readings taken. 3) Duct average velocity 4) Total airflow

e. After completion of tests, adjustments, and balancing under minimum outdoor air conditions, set system for 100% outdoor air. Repeat the total airflow tests to check field versus design conditions. A result under 100% outdoor air cycle shall agree with conditions found under "minimum fresh air operation" before system is considered to be in balance. Adjustments of proper dampers shall be made to achieve balance.

C. With supply, return, and exhaust systems properly adjusted for airflow and static

pressure, conduct following test, adjustments and compilation of data:

1. Duct Mains and Branches: a. Adjust, measure and record airflow, static pressure of duct mains and

branch ducts to provide required pressure and airflow at terminal devices. 2. Terminal Devices:

a. Manufacturer, Model No. and Size of airflow control valves (supply, return and exhaust).

b. Inlet velocity, static pressure, minimum and maximum airflow setpoints of valves.

c. Outlet airflow of valve. d. Adjust minimum or maximum setting of valves as required to obtain

required airflow of outlets in accordance with manufacturer's procedures and recommendations.

e. In conjunction with “Instrumentation and Control System”, operate controls, i.e., thermostats, switches and pressure controls in accordance with design sequence to verify proper operation.

f. Report control problems in writing to the Contractor. Resolve sequence problems with Section “Instrumentation and Control System”, the Contractor and Architect at no additional cost.

3. Air Outlets (supply, return and exhaust registers diffusers and grilles) a. Manufacturer, model number, size of outlet and number of throw

directions. b. Design and actual airflow. c. Adjust outlets to obtain design airflow within +5%. d. Adjust direction of throw as required to match final installation location to

prevent drafts. e. With supply, return and exhaust balanced to design airflow, report room

pressurization, (positive or negative). Report pressure readings relative to adjacent spaces only where requested by Owner or Architect.

D. Sheaves And Belts:

1. Should the air balance not meet acceptable industry standard tolerances as

referenced herein, change and replace sheaves and belts to provide a final acceptable air balance. Replacement of sheaves and belts shall be provided at no additional cost.

3.3 HYDRONIC SYSTEM BALANCE


A. In conjunction with “Instrumentation and Control System”, pumps shall be started per

design sequence. With manual valves open, and control valves in normal position, adjust discharge balancing valve to obtain design flow. Compare data with pump submittal curve. If test point falls on curve, proceed with balancing. If recorded data does not fall on pump curve, plot new curve parallel with other curves on chart, from zero to maximum flow. Open discharge balancing valve to full and record discharge pressure, suction pressure and total head. Readjust balancing valve to obtain suction and discharge design flow and pressure, and record data. Check and record pump motor voltage and amperage. Pump motor shall not be overloaded.

B. With pump system adjusted, perform following tests, compile data and submit report:

1. Pumps

a. Design Data 1) Flow and total dynamic head. 2) pump speed, and motor output.

b. Installed equipment 1) Manufacturer, size and model number. 2) Type drive. 3) Motor rating, voltage, and phase. 4) Full-load amperes.

c. Field Test 1) Discharge pressures: Full flow and zero flow. 2) Suction pressures: Full flow and zero flow. 3) Operating flow and total dynamic head 4) No-load amperes (where possible.) 5) Full-flow amperes, zero-flow amperes. 6) Calculated motor output.

C. With pump system properly adjusted, proceed with following tests adjustments and

compilation of data:

1. Pipe Mains and Branches: a. Adjust branch balancing valves to obtain pressure and flowrates required

for terminal devices, i.e., coil, radiation, etc. b. Provide the following:

1) Manufacturer's model number, size of heat exchanger, number of passes.

2) Design and actual flow rate and pressure drop. 3) Record entering and leaving water temperatures. 4) In conjunction with “Instrumentation and Control System” adjust

steam control valve as required to obtain design temperatures at design flowrate.

c. Terminal Devices: 1) Manufacturer's model number, type of terminal device and rated

heat output. 2) Flowrate and differential pressure through component including

control device. 3) Adjust balancing device to obtain required flowrate through device,

in accordance with manufacturer's procedures and recommendations.

4) Record temperatures of fluid at inlet and outlet of device. Record temperatures of air entering and leaving coils. Compare data with design performance, if data is not in conformance with approved shop drawings or design intent, readjust water system to obtain


acceptable performance. 5) With air and water system balanced and in conjunction with

“Automatic Temperature Controls” operate controls, i.e., thermostats, switches, etc., in accordance with design sequence to verify proper operation.

6) Report control problems in writing to General Contractor. Resolve sequence problems with “Instrumentation and Control System”, the Contractor and Architect at no additional cost.

d. Heat transfer equipment including hot water, coils, etc. 1) Measured Parameters

a) Flowrate. b) Heat transfer. c) Entering and leaving temperatures. d) Pressure drops. e) Ambient dry and wet bulb (for cooling towers).

2) Equipment data a) Manufacturer and model number. b) Motor output horsepower. c) Serial numbers.

3) Design Data a) Include design data in submittal for comparison.

3.4 ACOUSTICS AND NOISE CRITERIA

A. Verify that mechanical systems comply with noise criteria as specified and indicated in Division 15. Where compliance is questionable or where requested by Owner, Architect or Contractor, take sound power level reading and record. Diagnose equipment causing deviations and report deviations to appropriate trade contractor and Contractor. Resolve noise problems with Contractor and appropriate Installer.

3.5 CALIBRATION

A. During testing and balancing, inspect temperature sensors, pressure sensors, humidity gauges, digital indicators, and thermometers, provided under Division 15. Report discrepancies to the Contractor for replacement or recalibration.

3.6 RE-BALANCE

A. After Architect's review of test and balance report submittal, make adjustment in any balancing point as required by Architect, to correct discrepancies between balance report and design, at no additional cost.

3.7 COMMISSIONING

A. Provide assistance and support for all Commissioning activities and functional testing as outlined in the Commissioning Plan and specifications.

END OF SECTION

EASTERN DISTRICT POLICE STATION 15955 - 1 LEAK TESTING, AIR DISTRIBUTION AND DUCT SYSTEMS 28103.01 January 15, 2013

SECTION 15955 - LEAK TESTING, AIR DISTRIBUTION AND DUCT SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section and the other Sections of Division 15.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This Section includes leak testing of the following systems:

1. Duct systems. 2. HVAC units.


1. Section: “Air Distribution.” 2. Section: “Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning.”

1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. General: Submit completed certified test reports for each item in this Section. 1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Testing shall be performed by Installer of system being tested in presence of the Owner’s representative. Provide seven (7) days advance notice prior to testing of systems.

PART 2 PRODUCTS: NOT USED PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. Duct Leak Testing:

1. Prior to installing insulation, conduct tests at static pressures equal to the maximum design pressure of the system or the section being tested. If pressure classifications are not indicated, test entire system at the maximum system design pressure. Do not pressurize systems above the maximum design operating pressure.

2. Determine leakage from entire system or section of the system by relating leakage to the surface area of the test section.

3. Maximum Allowable Leakage: As described in ASHRAE 1989 Handbook, “Fundamentals” Volume, Chapter 32, Table 6 and Figure 10. Comply with requirements for leakage classification 3 for round ducts, leakage classification 12 for rectangular ducts in pressure classifications less than and equal to 2 inches water gage (both positive and negative pressures), and leakages classification 6 for pressure classifications greater than 2 inches water gage and

EASTERN DISTRICT POLICE STATION 15955 - 2 LEAK TESTING, AIR DISTRIBUTION AND DUCT SYSTEMS 28103.01 January 15, 2013

less than and equal to 10 inches water gage. 4. Remake leaking joints as required and apply sealants to achieve specified

maximum allowable leakage.

END OF SECTION

EASTERN DISTRICT POLICE STATION 16050-1 COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL 28103.01 January 15, 2013

SECTION 16050 - COMMON WORK RESULTS FOR ELECTRICAL PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this and other sections of Electrical and Special Construction Divisions.

1.2 SUMMARY

A. This section includes qualification requirements of the installer and suppliers, submittal procedures, record keeping, required testing and general electrical procedures.


1. Additional submittal requirements. 2. Installer and product requirements. 3. Identification of equipment. 4. Firestopping for electrical installations. 5. Supporting devices for electrical components. 6. Concrete equipment pads. 7. Equipment bollards. 8. Fuses. 9. Equipment connections. 10. Cutting and patching for electrical construction. 11. Touch up painting. 12. Electrical demolition. 13. Project conditions. 14. Additional warranties. 15. Utility coordination.

C. Related Sections:

1. Section “Low Voltage Electrical Distribution” for concrete pad or bollard requirements.

2. Section “Low Voltage Transformers” for concrete pad requirements. 3. Section “Low Voltage Controllers” for motor control center concrete pad

requirements. 4. Section “Packaged Generator Assemblies” for concrete pad and bollard

requirements.

D. Products installed but not supplied under this Section:

1. Provide electrical connections and materials required for the installation of the following: a. Countertops, Casework & Cabinets. b. Modular office partitions and panels. c. Elevators. d. Kitchen equipment.

2. Coordinate electrical connections with installation requirements and manufacturers’ nameplates and written instructions.

3. Verify equipment nameplates and connection requirements prior to rough in.


E. Permits and Fees:

1. Apply, pay for and secure all permits, required by the Authorities Having Jurisdiction prior to start of work, in accordance with contract General Conditions and Division 1.

2. Deliver all certificates to the Owner prior to final acceptance of work.

F. Alternates: Provide pricing for all work identified as Alternate, Bid Alternate, Add Alternate, etc. Include Electrical Division work associated of other work of other Divisions identified as Alternates.

G. Conflicts:

1. Where variances occur within drawings and/or specifications, procedures of the

General Conditions shall be followed. 2. In cases where clarification is not requested, provide the item or arrangement of

better quality, greater value, or higher cost in the Contract Price. 3. Bring to the Architect's attention, any field conflicts or existing conditions, which

prevent the intended work as designed. 1.3 ACRONYMS

A. The following acronyms are used throughout the Electrical Division specifications, defined as follows:

1. AASHTO American Association of State Highway and Transportation

Officials 2. ADA Amer. With Disabilities Act 3. ANSI American National Standards Institute 4. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 5. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 6. IBC International Building Code 7. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers 8. ETL Electrical Testing Laboratory 9. FM Factory Mutual Research Corporation 10. NEC National Electrical Code 11. NECA National Electrical Contractors Association 12. NEMA National Equipment Manufacturers Association 13. NESC National Electrical Safety Code 14. NETA National Electrical Testing Association 15. NFPA National Fire Protection Association 16. NLPI Lightning Protection Institute 17. UL Underwriter’s Laboratories

1.4 DEFINITIONS


1. Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including

make or model number or other designation, shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that is current as of date of the Contract Documents.

2. New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility, except that products consisting of recycled-content materials


are allowed, unless explicitly stated otherwise. Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.

3. Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process, or where indicated as a product substitution, to have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

B. Substitutions: Changes proposed by Contractor in products, materials, equipment, and

methods of construction required by the Contract Documents.

C. Basis-of-Design Product Specification: Where a specific manufacturer's product is the only named manufacturer or is the “first” named manufacturer, or is accompanied by the words "basis of design," including make or model number or other designation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluating comparable products of other named manufacturers.

D. Manufacturer's Warranty: Preprinted written warranty published by individual manufacturer for a particular product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner

E. Extended Warranty: Written warranty required by or incorporated into the Contract

Documents, either to extend time limit provided by manufacturer's warranty or to provide more rights for Owner.

1.5 SUBMITTALS

A. Make all submittals in accordance with the General Conditions and Division 1 requirements of the contract.

B. General:

1. Material and Equipment List 2. Shop Drawings 3. Product Data 4. Installation and Coordination Drawings 5. Record Documents 6. Operation and Maintenance Manuals 7. Construction Phasing and Outage Schedule

C. Supporting Documentation:

1. In addition to the requirements of Division 1, each submittal shall be provided

with a completed “Shop Drawing Submittal Form.” 2. Shop drawings or product data submittals submitted without a completed Shop

Drawing & Product Data Submittal Form will be returned without review.

D. Basis-of-Design Comparable Products Submission:

1. Document each request with supporting data substantiating compliance of proposed product with Basis-of-Design product.




E. Product Substitutions: Comply with requirements of Division 1 and additional

requirements of this section.

F. Coordination of Submittals: Coordinate Electrical and Special Construction Division submittals with those of all other Divisions.

G. Electrical Division additional submittal requirements:

1. Clearly identify all submittals.

a. Indicating intended application, location, etc. b. Each product submittal shall indicate the associated specification

section, and paragraphs where applicable. Do not combine product data from different spec sections into a single submittal package. (i.e. submit section 16440 Panelboards separately from section 16480 starters, even though they are from the same distributor, vendor or part of a single material order.


d. Catalog spec sheets to completely describe proposed equipment. e. Factory order forms showing only required capacities, are not

acceptable. f. Identify all options furnished to meet specifications. g. The Architect shall not select equipment ratings and/or options.

Submittals not properly marked shall be returned without review. 2. Identify any discrepancies in the contract documents affecting submittals and

seek clarification. 3. Submittals shall explicitly identify any deviations from the drawings, specifications

or design intent.

H. Material and Equipment List:

1. Submit within 30 calendar days after the award of contract for preliminary review. 2. List all proposed materials and equipment. 3. Indicate proposed manufacturer(s). 4. No further submittals will be reviewed until this list has been submitted and

approved. 5. Identify missing items and the reason for their absence.

I. Product Data:

1. Manufacturer's specifications, data sheets. 2. Catalog cuts. 3. Dimensional drawings. 4. Installation Instructions. 5. Wiring & connection diagrams. 6. Capacity ratings, performance curves. 7. Information required indicating contract compliance. 8. Clearly indicate the exact size or rating proposed.

J. Shop Drawings:

1. All specially fabricated items. 2. Modifications to standard items. 3. Specially designed systems or products.


K. Coordination Drawings: Submit where required, requested by Architect, and for all areas

listed herein. Submit composite drawings to show proper coordination of Electrical Division work and that of other Divisions.

1. Submit Installation and Coordination Drawings for:

a. Mechanical Rooms. b. Chiller or Pump Rooms. c. Boiler Rooms. d. Generator Rooms. e. Electrical Rooms & closets. f. Telecommunication Rooms, Server Rooms, MDF and IDF Rooms, and

telecomm closets. g. UPS Rooms.

2. Drawing Requirements: a. Plan scale not less than 1/2 inch equals one foot. b. Sections and elevations, where necessary. c. Show work of other Divisions, i.e. piping, ductwork and walls, doors,

columns, beams, etc. d. Indicate all equipment outer dimensions. e. Indicate critical dimensions needed to show compliance with Code

clearances and/or equipment maintenance and access.

L. Closeout Submittals: Submit in accordance with the General Conditions and Division 1 requirements.

1. Electrical Division Operation and Maintenance Manuals:

a. Arrange material in sections according to Electrical Division spec sections.

b. Include a cover sheet, which contains the name and phone number of the Installer, Distributor, Supplier, Local Service Company, etc. for each system or product group.

c. O & M Manuals shall also include the following: d. Material and Equipment List. e. Copies of all approved submittals. f. Acceptance Test Reports (ground resistance, etc.) g. Manufacturer's Product Warranties. h. Factory data sheets, wiring diagrams, etc. i. Spare parts lists. j. All operation and instruction papers. k. Maintenance schedules.

2. Record Drawings:

a. During construction, maintain drawings on blue or black line white prints. b. Record all changes and alterations in red ink. c. Record the installed electric feeders, equipment, etc. d. Actual installed locations of panels, switchboards, transformers, etc. e. All feeders overhead, underslab or in chases. f. Pullboxes, handholes and splice box locations. g. All underground feeders, conduit, ducts, cables, handholes, manholes,

etc. with installed dimensions from permanent construction elements. h. All modifications, changes, deletions or additions made during

construction. i. Submit one (1) complete set of white prints with "as-built" information

neatly recorded at project completions.


M. Required Submittals: Submit the following items, as a minimum requirement for this

project:

1. Common Work Results for Electrical: a. Material and Equipment List b. Coordination Drawings for Electrical, Mechanical, IT Rooms, etc. c. Electrical Installer Qualifications d. Fire Stop materials e. Access Panels f. Copies of Electrical Inspection Reports g. Equipment Acceptance Test Reports h. Completed Punchlist with contractors’ initials/dates i. As-Built drawings j. O&M Manuals

2. Fire Detection System a. Bill of materials showing quantities and model numbers. b. Manufacturer's product data on all proposed equipment. c. System wiring schematic. d. List of all system program points with device ID. e. Device schedule matrix f. Written sequence of operation for all modes g. Graphic Annunciator Panel drawing h. Scaled Floor Plans i. Calculations for Battery power and Voltage drop j. Copy of AHJ Final Inspection / Approval

3. Grounding and Bonding for Electrical Systems a. Ground rods b. Ground buses

4. Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables a. Building wires and conductors. b. Cables and cable assemblies. c. Splices and connectors. d. Acceptance testing of conductors, feeders, etc.

5. Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems a. Conduits. b. Surface raceways. c. Countertop outlet boxes. d. Floor mounted devices. e. Cable trays.

6. Wiring Devices a. A/C switches. b. Receptacles. c. Device plates and covers.

7. Packaged Generator Assemblies a. Product data for Engine-generator assembly and all accessories b. Post installation startup test report. c. Post Installation Load Test report.

8. Low Voltage Electrical Distribution a. Current Transformer cabinets. b. Enclosed and automatic circuit breakers. c. Elevator Main Line Disconnects. d. Surge Protective Devices (SPD). e. Safety Disconnect Switches. f. Magnetic Contactors.


g. Time Clocks. h. Panelboards. i. Switchboards. j. Post Installation acceptance testing reports. k. Post Installation Infrared scanning reports.

9. Low Voltage Transformers a. Product data for transformers and all accessories/components b. Elevation and plan view drawings. c. 1-line diagram showing all internal/external components, connections,

accessories, etc. d. Post Installation acceptance testing report. e. Post Installation Infrared scanning report.

10. Low Voltage Controllers a. Thermal manual motor starter switches. b. Motor starters.

11. Transfer Switches a. Product Data for transfer switches, accessories and components

12. Lighting a. Product data for all Individual lighting fixtures. b. Ballast product data c. Occupancy sensors. d. Lighting poles. e. FC calculations(when request) f. Wiring diagrams for lighting controls, etc.

1.6 ELECTRONIC AUTOCADD DOCUMENTS A. Requests for electronic Autocadd documents will be accommodated to the contractors

and installers upon receipt of Kibart’s Electronic Document Release Form and payment for time and expense for document preparation: 1. Kibart’s document preparation fee is as follows:

a. First five (5) autocadd drawings: $250 b. Each additional drawing: $ 50 per drawing


A. Listing and Labeling: Provide products specified in this Section that are listed and labeled.

1. The Terms “Listed and Labeled”: As defined in the National Electrical Code,

Article 100. 2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A “Nationally Recognized Testing

Laboratory” (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7. 3. Where equipment consists of multiple components, the entire assembly or

product shall be UL Listed and Labeled, or Labeled by a testing organization acceptable to the Authority Having Jurisdiction per the NEC.

B. Field Certifications and Labeling:

1. Where products are not Listed and Labeled, provide services of a UL recognized

independent Electrical Testing Laboratory (ETL) to provide field inspection. Provide ETL labels for all such materials and equipment.

C. Install all components and equipment per manufacturer’s written instructions.


D. Installer Qualifications:

1. Provide proof of qualification. Submit the following, when requested: a. Five (5) comparable completed projects. b. Reference letters from minimum of three (3) registered professional

engineers, general contractors, or building owners, explaining proficiency, quality of work, or other attribute on projects of similar size or substance.

c. Copy of Master Electrician's License. d. Local or State license. e. NICET certification, as required in other Electrical Division sections.

2. Electrical installer shall utilize a full time project foreman in charge of all electrical work. a. Fully qualified and experienced in such work. b. Available, on site, at all times during construction. c. All communication shall be through this person.

3. Installer of specialized systems such as Fire Alarms, telecommunication systems, etc. shall meet the requirements of the associated spec section(s).

E. Installation Quality: In accordance with listed Codes, recognized trade organizations and

standards.

1. ADA Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines 2. ANSI/EIA/TIA American National Standards Institute 3. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 4. IEEE C2 “National Electrical Safety Code” 5. NEMA National Equipment Manufacturers Association 6. NECA National Electrical Contractors Association “Standards of

Installation” 7. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association 8. NETA National Electrical Testing Association 9. UL Underwriter’s Laboratories

F. Comply with the latest version of following Codes, Standards and regulations as adopted

by the Authority Having Jurisdiction, unless otherwise specified.

1. NFPA 2. NFPA 70 “National Electrical Code”. 3. IBC 4. COMAR (Code of Maryland Regulations). 5. State of Maryland Fire Prevention Code 6. Local Amendments to the above Codes


A. Packing, Shipping, Handling and Unloading:

1. Arrange for proper shipping methods for all materials. 2. Provide for handling and unloading of all materials at site or at offsite storage

facility. 3. Provide for proper transportation between offsite storage and project site. 4. Provide rigging and other handling services, when necessary.

B. Storage and Protection:


1. Store all materials in dry, heated areas, unless manufacturers permit other storage environments.

2. Store equipment according to manufacturers’ written instructions. 3. Protect materials subject to damage or corrosion from excessive moisture. 4. Protect equipment subject to damage from excessive heat or sunlight in

ventilated environments. 5. Protect equipment from dripping, splashing or sprayed materials.

C. Repair and Replacement of Damaged Equipment: Repair equipment damaged as a

result of improper storage or handling at no expense to Owner. If, in the opinion of the Architect, equipment cannot operate properly after repairs are made, replace at no cost to Owner.

1.9 SEQUENCING

A. General Sequencing:

1. Coordinate electrical work with other trades based on phasing and sequence of construction, as identified elsewhere in the contract documents.

2. Provide all scheduling, phased installation, etc. to coordinate with overall phasing plans.

B. Electrical Division Sequencing, Coordination, and Integration:

1. Coordinate systems, equipment, and materials installation with other building

components. 2. Verify all dimensions by field measurements. 3. Arrange for chases, and openings in other building components during progress

of construction, to allow for electrical installations. 4. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices, sleeves and conduit to

be set in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components, as they are constructed.

5. Sequence, coordinate, and integrate installations of electrical materials and equipment for efficient flow of the Work. Make provisions for large equipment requiring positioning prior to closing in the building.

6. Coordinate connection of electrical systems with exterior underground and overhead utilities and services. Comply with requirements of governing regulations, franchised service companies, and controlling agencies. Provide required connection for each service.

7. Install systems, materials, and equipment giving right-of-way priority to systems required to be installed at a specified slope.

C. Arrange for chases, slots, and openings in building structure during progress of

construction to allow for electrical installations.

D. Coordinate the installation of required supporting devices and set sleeves in poured-in-place concrete and other structural components as they are constructed.

E. Coordinate requirements for access panels and doors where electrical items requiring

access are concealed behind finished surfaces. 1.10 COMMISSIONING

A. Provide post-installation commissioning for particular products and systems, as specified within individual specification sections.


1.11 WARRANTY

A. Provide warranty in accordance with the General Conditions and Division 1 requirements, and as stated herein.

B. Special Warranties: Provide additional product and/or installation warranties for

particular products, as specified within individual specification sections.

C. Obtain all warranty papers and records from the Original Equipment Manufacturer (OEM) according to their warranty policy and deliver the same to the Owner. Fulfill all the OEM's requirements to validate the warranty at conclusion of project. Include copies of warranty papers with Closeout Submittals.

1.12 MAINTENANCE

A. Extra Materials: Provide extra, loose and/or spare materials, as required by individual specification sections.

B. Maintenance Service: Provide preventative maintenance services or maintenance

services as required by individual specification sections. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 PRODUCT SELECTION

A. General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with Contract Documents, which are undamaged and new at time of installation.

1. Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, safety guards, and other

devices and details needed for complete installation and intended use and effect. 2. Standard Products: Where available, provide standard products of types that

have been produced and used successfully in similar situations on other projects. 3. Where products are accompanied by the term as selected, Architect will make

selection. 4. Where products are accompanied by the term match sample, sample to be

matched is Architect's. 5. Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the

Specifications establish salient characteristics of products.

B. General Compliance Requirements: Compliance requirements for individual products, as indicated in Contract Documents, are multiple in nature and may include generic descriptions, performance requirements, compliance with reference standards, conformance with graphic details and other similar forms and methods of indicating requirements, all of which must be complied with.

C. Procedures for Selecting Products: Contractor's options for selecting products are limited

by Contract Document requirements, and are not controlled by industry traditions or procedures experienced by Contractor on previous construction projects.

D. Products specified by Reference Standards, Codes and Regulations: Select from among

products, which can be shown to comply to, referenced documents.



F. Products specified by Naming One Manufacturer's Product as the Basis-of-Design with

Reference to Other Manufacturers: Select either the specified Basis-of-Design product or an approved comparable product by one of the other named manufacturers.

1. Comply with provisions in Comparable Products Article to obtain approval for use

of a comparable product by one of the named manufacturers.

G. Products specified by Naming One Manufacturer's Product and Indicating Option of Selecting Comparable Products by stating or Approved Equivalent or similar language: Select either the specified product or an approved comparable product.

1. Comply with provisions in Comparable Products Article to obtain approval for use

of an unnamed comparable product by another manufacturer.

H. Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require matching an established Sample, select a product that complies with requirements and, matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final on whether proposed product matches satisfactorily.

I. Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase as selected from

manufacturer's standard colors, patterns, textures or similar phrase, select a product that complies with other specified requirements. Architect will select color, pattern, and texture.

1. Standard Range: Where Specifications include the phrase standard range of

colors, patterns, textures or similar phrase, Architect will select color, pattern, or texture from manufacturer's product line that does not include premium items.




1. Evidence that the proposed product does not require extensive revisions to the

Contract Documents, that it is consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it is compatible with other portions of the Work.




2.3 IDENTIFICATION PLATES

A. General:


1. Dimensions: Minimum of 1" H x 2 1/2" W. 2. Lettering: All capitals, 1/4"H x 1/16" stroke. Indicate circuit number, device

(EXHAUST FAN 1, PUMP No. 2, etc.). 3. Indoor Tags:

a. Laminated phenolic plastic. b. White with black engraved letters. c. Stainless steel attaching screws.

4. Outdoor Tags: a. Stainless steel tag. b. Stainless steel attaching screws.

5. Manhole/Handhole Cable Tags: a. Stainless steel tag. b. Nylon cable ties.

2.4 LOW VOLTAGE TERMINAL IDENTIFICATION

A. Permanent identification in accordance with the manufacturer’s shop drawings or product data.

B. Identify all control cables and wires:

1. All indoor locations:

a. Nylon, self-adhesive. b. Factory printed with permanent numerals/letters on white background.

2. LEM Wire Markers, or equal. 2.5 FIRE STOPPING MATERIALS

A. General:

1. UL 1479 Listed, Fire Tests For Through-Penetration

B. For large openings:

1. 2-part, RTV silicone elastomer expanding foam. 2. 3-4X expansion. 3. STI Pensil Series PEN Foam, Dow Corning Fire Stop Foam, or equal.

C. For small openings and voids (less than 1"):

1. 1-part, Intumescent sealant. 2. Permanent, flexible and resilient. 3. 5X free expansion. 4. STI Spec Seal Intumescent Sealant, or equal.

D. For openings around cable tray penetrations:

1. Intumescent pillows. 2. Compressible, lightweight, removable. 3. Sealed poly bags. 4. 1/2" expansion in all directions. 5. STI Spec Seal SSB Pillows, or equal.

2.6 TAMPER PROOF HARDWARE


A. Provide tamper proof hardware for all panels, devices, pullboxes, junction boxes, coverplates, and any other equipment or items accessible to inmates, as indicated on the drawings. Equipment requiring tamperproof hardware, includes but is not limited to:

1. Electrical Panels 2. Junction/pull boxes 3. Receptacles, switch, CATV or IT outlet coverplates 4. Light fixtures 5. Fire pull stations or wire guards covering detectors, horn/strobe units. 6. Speaker housings or grills 7. Fire alarm devices and protective grills 8. Intercom coverplates 9. CCTV cameras and housings

B. Hardware shall use standard manufactured design, using centerpin torx screws..

C. Provide Owner with two (2) sets of each size of hardware wrenches, drivers, etc. needed

for all hardware sizes installed on this project. 2.7 LOW VOLTAGE FUSES (0 - 600 VOLTS)

A. UL 248, “Low Voltage Fuses” Listed, 250 or 600 volt, ratings per drawings or protected equipment manufacturer's nameplate.

B. Class RK-1:

1. Current limiting, dual element, time delay. 2. Interrupting rating of 200,000 amps rms symmetrical. 3. Class R rejection clips. 4. Buss Low Peak LPS-RK (600 V) or LPN-RK (250 V), Littlefuse LLSRK (600 V)

LLNRK (250 V).

C. Blown Fuse Indication:

1. For all fuses 100A and larger. 2. Automatic indication of blown (open) fuse. 3. Viewing window or indicating light. 4. Buss SAMI fuse covers or Littelfuse Indicator.

D. Spare Fuses:

1. Provide spares for each installed type and rating. 2. Minimum of (3) for 1-9 installed, (6) for 10-18 and (10) spares where more than

18 are installed. 3. Deliver to OWNER at completion of contract.

2.8 SUPPORTING DEVICES

A. Channel and angle support systems, hangers, anchors, sleeves, brackets, fabricated items, and fasteners are designed to provide secure support from the building structure for electrical components.

1. Material: Steel, except as otherwise indicated, protected from corrosion with zinc

coating or with treatment of equivalent corrosion resistance using approved


alternative finish or inherent material characteristics. 2. Metal Items for Use Outdoors or in Damp Locations: Hot-dip galvanized steel,

except as otherwise indicated.

B. Steel channel supports have 9/16-inch diameter holes at a maximum of 8 inches o.c., in at least 1 surface.

1. Fittings and accessories mate and match with channels and are from the same

manufacturer.

C. Raceway and Cable Supports: Manufactured clevis hangers, riser clamps, straps, threaded C-clamps with retainers, ceiling trapeze hangers, wall brackets, and spring steel clamps or "click"- type hangers.

D. Sheet-Metal Sleeves: 0.0276-inch or heavier galvanized sheet steel, round tube, closed

with welded longitudinal joint.

E. Pipe Sleeves: ASTM A 53, Type E, Grade A, Schedule 40, galvanized steel, plain ends.

F. Expansion Anchors: Carbon-steel wedge or sleeve type.

G. Toggle Bolts: All-steel springhead type.

H. Powder-Driven Threaded Studs: Heat-treated steel. 2.9 CONCRETE EQUIPMENT PADS

A. Materials:

1. Interior Pads: 3000 PSI concrete at 28 days. 2. Exterior Pads: 3500 PSI concrete at 28 days; air entrained mix. 3. Steel mesh or rebar reinforcing, where required.

2.10 EQUIPMENT BOLLARDS

A. At outdoor generators, switchgear, transformers and other gear, where indicated, for damage protection by vehicles.

1. Standard Bollard: 5" rigid galvanized schedule 40 pipe, concrete filled. 2. Removable Bollard: 5" rigid galvanized schedule 40 pipe set in concrete, with 4"

pipe inside 5" pipe. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Site Verification of Conditions:

1. Examine site and existing conditions prior to submitting bids. 2. Carefully examine proposed locations where work will occur in existing buildings

and excavation near existing piping, conduit, cable, structures, etc. 3. Make required allowances for the conditions. 4. Request clarifications and or directions in writing, if required. 5. No allowance will be made for any errors, oversights or other negligence on the


part of the Installer. 3.2 PREPARATION

A. Protection:

1. Protect the structure, furnishings, finishes, and adjacent materials not indicated or scheduled to be removed.

2. Provide and maintain temporary partitions or dust barriers adequate to prevent the spread of dust and dirt to adjacent areas.

B. Construction Power:

1. Obtain and pay for temporary electrical service for construction power, trailers,

etc. 2. Provide all underground and/or overhead equipment, transformers, overcurrent

devices, wires, connections, etc. for obtaining power from utility company or Owner’s electrical lines.

3. Pay all charges for connections, accounts, metering and consumption charges for construction power.

C. Interface With Site Utility Companies:

1. Contact MISS UTILITY prior to any excavation or underground work. 2. Contact serving utility companies immediately upon award of contract. Do not

install related equipment until fully coordinated with appropriate utilities. 3. Provide all construction schedules, dates of requested services, outage windows,

equipment locations, etc. necessary for utility work. 4. Contractor shall contact each serving utility company to schedule the

performance of work by utility company(ies) when site conditions are ready (including raceways, handholes/manholes, backboards, etc. installed by contractors).

5. Electric Utility: a. Coordinate service entrance equipment and layout with power company

prior to ordering or installing any service entrance equipment. b. Furnish and install all incoming raceway, metering cabinets and meter

sockets. c. Coordinate cable, conduit, lug and C/T cabinet sizes for proper interface

between utility owned/installed equipment and contractor-installed equipment.

d. Provide concrete pad for utility company's transformer as required by Utility.

6. Telephone Utility: a. Coordinate raceways with telephone utility company. b. Coordinate for installation of pay phones. Provide sufficient notice for

phone procurement and installation. 3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General Requirements:

1. Install systems, materials, and equipment to conform with approved submittal data, including coordination drawings.

2. Install work, generally as shown. Carefully examine all contract drawings and fit the work in each location without substantial alteration. Where departures are


proposed or required, submit detailed drawings for acceptance. 3. Installation shall provide the maximum possible headroom where mounting

heights or other location criteria are not indicated. 4. Install all items level, plumb, and parallel and perpendicular to other building

systems and components, except where otherwise indicated. 5. Install equipment with proper service and access clearances as required by NEC

and manufacturers’ requirements. 6. Install such that future service or replacement shall not require interference with

or removal of other installations. 7. Provide access to all equipment, splice boxes, switches, controls and other

devices, without use of poles, ladders, scaffolding, etc. 8. Where equipment requiring access or service is concealed behind finished

surfaces, provide access panel(s) or door(s).

B. Miscellaneous Supports: Install metal channel racks for mounting cabinets, panelboards, disconnects, control enclosures, pull boxes, junction boxes, transformers, and other devices except where components are mounted directly to structural features of adequate strength.

C. Sleeves: Install for cable and raceway penetrations of concrete slabs and walls, except

where core-drilled holes are used. Install for cable and raceway penetrations of masonry and fire-rated gypsum walls and of all other fire-rated floor and wall assemblies. Install sleeves during erection of concrete and masonry walls.

D. Fastening: Unless otherwise indicated, securely fasten electrical items and their

supporting hardware to the building structure. Perform fastening according to the following:

1. Fasten by means of wood screws or screw-type nails on wood; toggle bolts on

hollow concrete masonry units; concrete inserts or expansion bolts on concrete or solid masonry; and by machine screws, welded threaded studs, or spring-tension clamps on steel.

2. Threaded studs driven by a powder charge and provided with lock washers and nuts may be used instead of expansion bolts, machine screws, or wood screws.

3. Welding to steel structure may be used only for threaded studs, not for conduits, pipe straps, or any other items.

4. In partitions of light steel construction use sheet-metal screws. 5. Drill holes in concrete beams so holes more than 1-1/2 inches (38 mm) deep do

not cut main reinforcing bars. 6. Drill holes in concrete so holes more than 3/4 inch (19 mm) deep do not cut main

reinforcing bars. 7. Fill and seal holes drilled in concrete and not used. 8. Select fasteners so the load applied to any fastener does not exceed 25 percent

of the proof-test load.

E. Rough-in:

1. Contract drawings are generally diagrammatic. 2. Provide all offsets, bends, fittings and accessories, required to fit the work to the

conditions, even though not specifically shown. 3. Verify final locations for rough-ins with field measurements and with the

requirements of the actual equipment to be connected. 4. Refer to equipment specifications in all other Divisions for rough-in requirements. 5. The Owner, and/or his/her representative, reserves the right to make reasonable

changes in location of equipment, conduit and wiring up to the time of rough-in or


fabrication.

F. Cutting and Patching: Provide all cutting and patching in accordance with Division 1 and per the following requirements.

1. Perform all required cutting, fitting, and patching necessary for installation of

Electrical Division work. 2. Cut, remove and legally dispose of selected electrical equipment, components,

and materials as indicated, including but not limited to removal of electrical systems and equipment as indicated on the drawings and specifications and other electrical items made obsolete by the new Work.

G. Tamper Proof Hardware:

1. Provide tamper proof hardware for all equipment, devices, cover plates, outlets,

and all other equipment provided under Electrical and Special Construction Divisions, where such equipment is accessible to inmates at any time. Such locations are indicated on the contract drawings.

3.4 CONCRETE EQUIPMENT PAD INSTALLATION

A. Interior Equipment Pads: Install concrete equipment (housekeeping) pads and bases for all transformers, switchgear, motor control centers, or other free-standing equipment.

B. Exterior Equipment Pads: Install concrete pads with foundations for all on-grade

transformers, switchgear, generators, control cabinets and other equipment.

C. Interior Pad Installation:

1. Steel dowel rods and bonding agent for anchoring to existing slabs. 2. 2" wider than equipment in all directions. 3. 1" x 45o chamfer on all sides.

D. Exterior Pad Installation:

1. 4" wider than equipment in all directions. 2. 1" x 45o chamfer on all sides. 3. Reinforce with steel mesh or rebar. 4. Provide minimum 30" deep (below grade) foundation on all sides. 5. Pour footings against undisturbed or compacted earth. Extend footings below

the frost line for the location where installed. 6. Turn down rebar or mesh into all foundation walls. 7. Lowest side minimum of 6" above final grade. 8. Install vapor barrier between earth and concrete. 9. Provide PVC sleeves for all cables, conductors, grounding, etc. to penetrate pad.

3.5 EQUIPMENT BOLLARD INSTALLATION

A. Install steel pipe bollards for all pad mounted, exterior transformers, switchgear, generators, control cabinets and other equipment to prevent damage from vehicles.

B. Installation:

1. Locations as indicated on drawings. 2. Coordinate installation:


a. Avoid ground rods, ground wires, etc. b. Permit full opening of enclosure door swings. c. Allow required access and clearances for maintenance and servicing.

3. Burial Depth 36" below grade. 4. Height: 42" above grade, unless noted otherwise. 5. 12" diameter concrete foundation to 36" deep. 6. Standard bollards: Fill with concrete and crown at top of pipe. 7. Removable bollards: Provide welded or threaded steel caps on removable pipe.

Embedded pipe shall extend 2-4” above concrete at grade. 8. Slope concrete at base for water drainage.

3.6 CONSTRUCTION

A. Connections to Existing Work:

1. Keep all existing systems in operation during the progress of the work. 2. Provide temporary connections, where necessary to maintain continuous

operation until the new systems and equipment are ready for operation. 3. Provide all necessary alterations, cuttings, fitting, etc. of existing work to make

satisfactory connections between the new and existing work. 4. Leave the complete work in a finished and workmanlike condition. 5. Relocate existing equipment, conduits, wiring, etc. required. Make changes to

existing work as may be required.

B. Interface with Other Work:

1. Mechanical and Plumbing Division Equipment and Systems: a. Provide the following for equipment furnished and/or installed under

mechanical/plumbing Divisions, unless specifically noted otherwise: b. Line voltage power wiring connections to equipment such as motors,

AHU’s, heaters, etc. c. Disconnect means per NEC. d. Manual or automatic starting contactors, starters, switches, etc. e. Furnish duct smoke detectors and sampling tubes. Install detectors into

bases, and make all wiring connections (mechanical Division to install sampling tubes into ductwork).

f. Provide power to all motor operated smoke dampers, furnished and installed under other Divisions. Coordinate control operation through fire alarm duct detectors, per Section “Fire Detection and Alarm”.

g. Furnish gas/oil burner emergency shutdown switches at boiler room exits per NFPA. Provide all wiring to gas or oil fired boilers and/or water heaters for manual shutdown. Final connections to equipment or associated control panels shall be by mechanical Division.

h. Mounting and connection of starters, speed controls, variable frequency drives and other such equipment furnished by mechanical Division.

i. Low voltage wiring between transformers and plumbing fixtures (faucets, toilets, urinals, etc.) for automatic controls, or line voltage wiring to fixtures, as required by equipment furnished under mechanical Divisions.

j. Mounting, connections and disconnects for power factor correction capacitors furnished with motors by mechanical Division.

2. All electrical work performed under mechanical Division shall be provided in accordance with Electrical Division. a. Work performed/provided by mechanical Division shall include the

following, unless specifically noted otherwise: b. All low voltage and line voltage control wiring including conduits, wiring,


branch circuit breakers, etc. c. EMS or ATC system wiring and connections. d. Line voltage connections to all motor operated dampers, automatic

valves, etc. e. Line voltage thermostats and associated wiring. f. All relays, contacts and other control equipment required for operation of

mechanical Division equipment. g. Fuses within equipment, switches, control panels, etc. furnished from the

factory with the equipment. h. Installation of duct smoke detector sampling tubes. Tubes furnished

under Section “Fire Detection and Alarm”. 3. It is the intent to provide a complete and operational system. The work between

mechanical and electrical Divisions is complementary and is meant to produce a single and operating system. Contractor shall make its own determination as to the distribution of responsibility among the various trades.

4. Equipment specified in other Divisions: a. Provide the following for equipment furnished and/or installed under

Divisions, unless specifically noted otherwise: b. Power wiring to all fume, grease and/or exhaust hoods. c. Field installation and wiring of equipment furnished loose with grease

extraction and/or fume hoods: 1) Lights 2) Receptacles 3) Toggle switches 4) Associated backboxes 5) Flexible conduit connections to pre-wired modular office furniture

and partition walls: 6) Conduit with power wiring. 7) Hardwired connections to kitchen equipment. 8) Hardwired connections to elevators and associated equipment.

C. Routing of Electrical Feeds to Roof Mounted Equipment:

1. Conduit routing to roof mounted equipment shall be made so as to minimize the

amount of conduit exposed above the roof. 2. Route conduit from building interior within roof curbs, where possible. 3. For condensing units and similar equipment, route conduit with refrigerant lines,

using common penetrations through roof, coordinated with piping. 4. Where conduit must be run horizontally on roof surface, follow other piping,

refrigerant lines, etc. Provide blocking, etc. to support conduit at regular intervals, per NEC. Secure conduit to blocks, supports, etc. to prevent movement.

D. Penetration of Waterproof Construction:

1. Minimize penetration of roofs, exterior walls and interior waterproof construction. 2. Provide necessary curbs, sleeves, shields, flashing, fittings and caulking to make

the penetrations watertight. 3. All penetrations shall comply with roof manufacturer’s recommended materials

and methods.

E. Penetration of Fire Rated Construction:

1. Seal all in and around conduits and other electrical materials penetrating or creating openings in fire-rated, fire resistant or fire-stopped walls, ceilings,


partitions and floors.

3.7 PAINTING

A. Refer to Section “Paints” for filed painting requirements of exposed conduits in public areas


A. General:

1. Provide all circuits free from ground faults, short circuits and open circuits 2. Perform tests specified or required to demonstrate that the work is installed and

operating properly. 3. Where specific tests are required, give proper notices and perform all necessary

preliminary tests to assure that the work is complete and ready for final test. 4. Other tests of a specific nature for special equipment shall be as specified under

the respective equipment.

B. Inspections:

1. Schedule, pay for (as applicable) and attend all inspections required by the Authorities Having Jurisdiction start of work.

2. Deliver all certificates to the Owner prior to final acceptance of work. 3. Notify Architect in advance of scheduled inspections. 4. An electrical foreman, superintendent or other supervisor shall be in attendance

for all scheduled electrical inspections. 5. Schedule preliminary and rough-in inspections in a timely manner. Any work

covered prior to any inspection in a manner which, in the inspector's opinion, precludes a complete inspection, shall be uncovered at the installer’s cost.

6. Uncover Work to provide for installation of ill-timed Work. 7. Disconnect installed work as specified for testing.

C. Acceptance Testing: Provide for acceptance testing of electrical equipment, as follows,

and as required in other electrical Division specification sections.

1. Pay for and schedule all required acceptance testing. 2. Testing shall be by independent electrical testing contractor, licensed and

certified by NETA. 3. Testing company shall be independent of installing company (i.e. no

subsidiaries). 4. All tests shall be performed in accordance with the National Electrical Testing

Association (NETA). 5. Notify Architect and Owner in advance of all testing. 6. Deliver all reports to Architect for approval. 7. Retest all failed equipment after adjustment, repairs, etc. 8. Provide all fuel, labor, etc. required for tests. 9. All costs associated with preparations for actual testing shall be borne by the

installer. 10. Provide letter or statement on Testing Agency letterhead attesting to the

satisfactory test results and suitability of the equipment to be energized and/or placed into service, as applicable. If testing reveals any problems or marginal results, the letter shall state these.

D. Replacement of Faulty Work or Materials:


1. Replace any equipment, which fails NETA test results at the direction of the

Owner. All replaced equipment shall be retested at no cost to Owner.

2. Remove and replace all defective Work or materials. 3. Remove and replace Work not conforming to requirements of the Contract

Documents. 4. Materials not installed per recognized standards, manufacturers’ instructions,

contract documents or design intent shall be removed and replaced when so directed by the Architect, at the Contractor's expense.

E. Project Punchout Inspection: Architect/Engineer will perform punch out reviews and will

provide the Contractor with a list of punch list items to be completed before contract close out. Each and every punch list item shall be initialed and dated by the Contractor when the work is complete. The Architect/ Engineer will not perform any punch list verification until all items have been completed, initialed, dated and the list returned to the Architect/Engineer. If any items have been initialed as being completed by the Contractor and the Architect/Engineer determines that the work is not complete, the Architect/Engineer shall be reimbursed by the Contractor at his regular hourly rate for any and all items requiring revisiting of the site by the Architect/Engineer. Reimbursement shall be made by deducting the Architect/Engineer’s fee from the Contractor's final payment.

3.9 ADJUSTING

A. General:

1. Lubricate, clean, adjust and test all equipment and systems in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions prior to initial operation.

2. Do not operate equipment unless proper safety devices and controls are operational.

3. Provide all maintenance and service for equipment, which is operated during construction, and protect the equipment.

4. Provide services of the manufacturer's factory-trained technicians to start up the equipment where required, or specified.

3.10 IDENTIFICATION

A. Permanently identify all equipment in accordance with the project nomenclature.

1. Panelboards - identify panel as per contract, voltage, and emergency or UPS power, as applicable.

2. i.e. PANEL RP1 a. 120/208 VOLTS b. EMERGENCY POWER

3. Starters, disconnects - identify fan, pump or load served, using contract nomenclature.

4. i.e. EXHAUST FAN N0. 1 5. Miscellaneous controls, terminal boards, etc. 6. i.e. FIRE ALARM POWER SUPPLY 7. General purpose receptacles - identify branch circuit panel and circuit number on

back of coverplate with permanent marker.

B. Identify all power conductors via colored insulation, or individual identification of phase wires with colored electrical tape at each junction box, panel or enclosure where


conductors are visible. Color coding as listed below, on all building wiring and feeders:

1. 208/120-V System: As follows: a. Phase A: Black. b. Phase B: Red. c. Phase C: Blue. d. Neutral: White. e. Ground: Green.

2. 480/277-V System: As follows: a. Phase A: Brown. b. Phase B: Orange. c. Phase C: Yellow. d. Neutral: Gray. e. Ground: Green.

C. Handhole Cable Identification:

1. Identify all individual cables and phases in all handholes and manholes.

a. Provide stamped stainless steel tags. b. Attach with nylon cable ties. c. Include feeder or circuit number, phase, etc.

3.11 LOW VOLTAGE TERMINATION IDENTIFICATION

A. Permanently identify all cables, wires, terminal boards, terminal blocks and other equipment in accordance with the manufacturer’s shop drawings or product data.

B. Identify all control cables and wires:

1. All indoor locations:

a. Length to permit a minimum of 2-3 revolutions around cable or wire.

C. Identification shall be applied to both ends of all control cables, wires, etc., within 2 inches of termination. Marking pens, embossed plastic tape markers or other temporary methods will not be acceptable.

3.12 EQUIPMENT MOUNTING

A. Disconnects & Control Equipment:

1. In sight of equipment served, with operating handle at 48-54" AFF. 2. As close as practical to motor, etc. 3. For large on-grade or roof mounted equipment, (i.e. chillers, ACU’s, etc.), mount

to equipment housing or frames.

B. Allow for proper clearance of electrical items and equipment served. 3.13 DEMONSTRATION

A. Provide for equipment manufacturers' established representatives to demonstrate to Owner, the correct operation, safety, adjustments and maintenance of all electrical equipment and systems under this contract.


SHOP DRAWING & PRODUCT DATA SUBMITTAL FORM (To be submitted with all Shop Drawings & Product Data Submittals)

TO: Wheeler Goodman Masek Architects PROJECT: Eastern District Police Station CONTRACTOR: DATE: SUB-CONTRACTOR: SUBMITTAL NO.: EQUIPMENT NAME: SPECIFICATION

SECTION:

BASIS OF DESIGN MFG.: (Shown on Drawing Schedule or Specifications)

SUBMITTED ITEM MFG.: SPECIFICATION PARAGRAPH

MODEL NO. TABLE OF COMPLIANCE: Attach complete technical data, including laboratory tests, if applicable, certifications and equipment warranties. FILL IN BLANKS BELOW: A. Does the submitted item affect the dimensions shown on the drawings? No __ Yes __

If Yes, explain: _________________________________________________________________ B. Does the submitted item require changes to drawings for proper installation? No __ Yes __

If answered Yes, include complete information on changes to drawings and specifications and sequence of controls which proposed submittal will require. List major features: ____________

C. What affect does the submitted item have on other trades? None ___

Explain affect: ____________________________________________________________ D. Will there be costs involved for changes in building design? No __ Yes __

If Yes, who will be responsible for costs, including engineering and detailing? ________________ E. Manufacturer’s Warranties: Same __ Different __ Explain if different: ______________________ The Undersigned states that the function, appearance, quality and performance are equivalent or superior to the “Basis of Design” item and that all required modifications have been coordinated with the other trades. SUBMITTED BY: ______________________________ ______________________________ (Sub Contractor) (General Contractor) ______________________________ ______________________________ (Signature) Date (Signature) Date ______________________________ ______________________________ (Name & Title) (Name & Title)




Shop Drawing & Product Data Submittal 1. The Contractor shall prepare a Table of Compliance Form similar in format to the sample shown

below to facilitate and expedite the Shop Drawing and Product Data Review. Failure to comply with this requirement will be basis for rejecting the Submittal.

2. The Table of Compliance Form will list and compare the performance parameters as the submitted equipment to that listed on equipment schedule and specifications as basis of design. All non-compliance items (differences) must be explained in full, indicating their impact, if any, on maintainability, durability, energy use, operating costs, code compliance and environmental considerations.




Input KW, amps, etc. Input Voltage range Efficiency rating Heat output (Btu/hr) Overload capability (%) Adjustable Range Battery backup (minutes)

NEMA rating or size Material thickness (ga) Interrupting Rating Cable Category (5e, 6) Etc. Specifications:

Quality assurance compliance

(NEMA) (UL) Specifications: List each and every specification paragraph

Etc. Other:

END OF SECTION

EASTERN DISTRICT POLICE STATION 16060-1 GROUNDING & BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 28103.01 January 15, 2013

SECTION 16060 - GROUNDING AND BONDING FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS

A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this section.

1.2 SUMMARY


1. Solid grounding of electrical systems and equipment. 2. Basic requirements for grounding for protection of life, equipment, circuits, and

systems.

B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Section “Fire Detection and Alarm.” 2. Sections “Elevators,” “Escalators,” and “Materials Handling” for bonding and

grounding requirements. 3. Section “Common Work Results for Electrical.” 4. Section “Low Voltage Power Conductors and Cables” for grounding conductors

and attachments. 5. Section “Low Voltage Electrical Distribution” for grounding, bonding and

interconnection of 600V class distribution equipment. 6. Section “Low Voltage Transformers” for grounding and bonding of equipment. 7. Section “Transfer Switches” for grounding, bonding and interconnection of neutral

conductors within transfer switches. 8. Section “Packaged Generator Assemblies” for grounding, bonding and

interconnection of generator and frames. 1.3 SUBMITTALS

A. Submittal Requirements of this section:

1. Ground Rods. 2. Exothermic Weld materials. 3. Grounding/bonding clamps. 4. Grounding busbars.



B. Installation Quality: In accordance with recognized trade organizations and standards.

1. NFPA 70, “National Electrical Code.” 2. UL 467, “Grounding & Bonding Equipment.” 3. IEEE. 4. ANSI/EIA/TIA 607, “Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements

for Telecommunications.” 1.5 SEQUENCING



1. Install all subsurface grounding equipment after completion of grading and

excavations to avoid disturbance of components. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURERS

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, manufacturers offering products that may be incorporated in the Work include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. A.B. Chance Co. 2. Cooper Power Systems 3. O-Z/Gedney Co. 4. Erico Cadweld 5. Harger

2.2 GROUNDING AND BONDING PRODUCTS

A. Products: Of types indicated and of sizes and ratings to comply with NEC. Where types, sizes, ratings, and quantities indicated are in excess of NEC requirements, the more stringent requirements and the greater size, rating, and quantity indications govern.

B. Conductor Materials: Copper.

2.3 WIRE AND CABLE CONDUCTORS

A. General: Comply with Section “Low Voltage Power Conductors and Cables.” Conform to NEC, except as otherwise indicated, for conductor properties, including stranding.

B. Grounding Electrode Conductor: Stranded cable.

C. Insulated Ground Wire:

1. Minimum sizes per NEC or larger as indicated. 2. Quantities and sizes as per drawings. 3. Green insulation.

D. Bare Ground Wires:

1. For equipment bonding jumpers, equipment enclosures to the ground bus or lug,

bonding conduit grounding fitting, and elsewhere as required. 2. # 6 AWG minimum for bonding jumpers. 3. Solid Conductors: Soft or annealed per ASTM B3, “Soft or Annealed Copper

Wire.” 4. Stranded copper per ASTM B8, “Concentric Lay Stranded Copper Conductors.”

2.4 MISCELLANEOUS CONDUCTORS

A. Ground Bus: Bare annealed copper bars of rectangular cross section.

B. Braided Bonding Jumpers: Copper tape, braided No. 30 gauge bare copper wire, terminated with copper ferrules.


C. Bonding Strap Conductor/Connectors: Soft copper, 0.05 inch thick and 2 inches wide,

except as indicated. 2.5 TELECOMM MAIN GROUND BUS BAR (TMGB)

A. TMGB shall serves as the main grounding point for incoming telephone/data service(s) and/or building telecomm system:

1. Tinned, plated annealed copper bars of rectangular cross section, dimensions as

noted below. 2. Pre-drilled per BICSI with the following holes for bolted 1-hole solderless lug

connections, as noted below. 3. 1/4" thick x 4" H x 20" L with 23 pair of 5/16” and 3 pair of 7/16” holes. 4. Insulated standoff mounting brackets with 1 1/2" insulators and 1" offset stainless

steel bolts for rigid support. 5. Erico Eritech #TMGBA**L**PT series, or comparable product by Harger or

Burndy. 2.6 TELECOMM GROUNDING BUS BAR (TGB)

A. TGB shall serve as the grounding point within each telephone, data, fiber or patch room or closet, or other similar areas serving as IDF points.

1. Tinned, plated annealed copper bars of rectangular cross section, dimensions as

noted below. 2. Pre-drilled per BICSI with the following holes for bolted 1-hole solderless lug

connections, as noted below. 3. 1/4" thick x 2" H x 18" L with 10 pair of 5/16” and 3 pair of 7/16” holes. 4. Insulated standoff mounting brackets with 1 1/2" insulators and 1" offset stainless

steel bolts for rigid support. 5. Erico Eritech #TGBA**L**PT series, or comparable product by Harger or Burndy.

2.7 CONNECTOR PRODUCTS

A. General: Listed and labeled as grounding connectors for the materials used.

B. Pressure Connectors: High-conductivity-plated units.

C. Bolted Clamps: Heavy-duty units listed for the application.

D. Exothermic Welded Connections: Provided in kit form and selected for the specific types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and other items to be connected.

2.8 GROUNDING ELECTRODES

A. Ground Rods:

1. One piece, copper-clad steel with high-strength steel core and electrolytic-grade copper outer sheath, molten welded to core.

2. Size: ¾ inch by 10 feet. 2.9 FLEXIBLE BONDING STRAPS


A. Flexible grounding/bonding straps for water meter jumpers, raised floor bonding, etc.

1. Flexible, tinned, pure copper braid. 2. Unplated, seamless pure copper rectangular ferrules at each end. 3. Burndy Type B, or equal.

PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION

A. Equipment Grounding Conductor Application: Comply with NEC Article 250, “Grounding” for sizes and quantities of equipment grounding conductors, except where larger sizes or more conductors are indicated.

1. Feeders and Branch Circuits: Install separate insulated equipment grounding

conductors with circuit conductors. Terminate on panelboard or switchboard grounding bus bar, or on ground lug or bus in equipment enclosure, cabinet, etc. Splicing of equipment grounding conductors is not permitted.

2. Panelboards: All equipment grounding conductors shall terminate on a single ground busbar within the equipment enclosure. Bus bar shall be bonded to enclosure.

3. Nonmetallic Raceways: Provide insulated equipment ground conductor in raceways with each branch circuit unless raceway is designated for telephone or data cables.

4. Air Duct Equipment Circuits: Provide insulated equipment grounding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices operating at 120VAC and above, including humidifiers, air cleaners, heaters, etc. Bond the grounding conductor to each such unit and to the air duct.

5. Water Heaters: Provide separate insulated equipment ground conductor to each electric water heater. Bond grounding conductor to water heater and connected piping.

B. Underground Conductors: Bare, stranded copper except as otherwise indicated.

C. Telecommunications: Provide ground at all closets, server or IS rooms, MDF, IDF and

equipment frame locations per ANSI EIA/TIA-607, “Commercial Building Grounding and Bonding Requirements for Telecommunications” and as specified herein.

1. Provide grounding system which bonds all remote equipment rooms, racks,

cabinets and/or frames to a ground bar in the main equipment room per ANSI. 2. Main telephone/data service room or MDF room:

a. Provide TMGB with insulated, standoff brackets. Mount 18" AFF. b. Bond TMGB via #3/0 AWG stranded, insulated copper wire to the

following: c. Building structural steel at nearest vertical column or beam via

exothermic weld. d. Electrical system grounding electrode system directly to the main

switchboard or panelboard ground bus, if accessible. e. Use hydraulic crimped lugs at TMGB and electrical ground bus

connections. f. Each radial Telephone Bonding Backbone conductor shall connect

directly to the TMGB. 3. All IDF and similar telephone/data room locations:

a. Provide TGB with insulated, standoff brackets. Mount 18" AFF. b. Bond directly to the TMGB via #3/0 AWG TBB conductor, following the

same route as the backbone or riser cables.


c. Provide additional bond to nearest vertical steel column via exothermic weld.

4. Provide a Telephone Bonding Backbone (TBB) conductor to link closet or room TGB’s which are located remote from the TMGB. The TBB shall consist of the following: a. #3/0 AWG stranded, insulated copper wire installed along the same path

as the telecomm riser or backbone cables. b. Bond directly to the TMGB. c. Bond to each TGB in closets or rooms through which the TBB passes.

5. All grounding and bonding conductors shall be stranded copper, with green insulation (or black with green identification at all connection points).

6. All connections to TMGB and TGB’s shall utilize hydraulic crimped copper lugs, with bolted connections to bus bars.

7. All connections to steel columns shall be made with exothermic weld process. 8. Split-bolt connectors are not permitted for any connections. 9. Bonding conductors shall be continuous between connection points. Do not splice

bonding conductors. 10. Do not install in metallic conduit. Where physical protection is required, utilize

PVC conduit (except in plenums).

D. Metal Lighting Poles: Ground pole to a local driven ground rod and bond to equipment grounding conductor run with supply branch circuit.

E. Building Structure & Grounding Electrode System Requirements:

1. Provide bonding jumpers to make all sections of building structural steel

electrically continuous per NEC Article 250, “Grounding and Bonding.” Connections shall be mechanical or exothermic weld type.

2. Bond building steel to foundation rebar by welding rebar to column, or 500 MCM stranded copper wire with exothermic weld connection to rebar and columns.

3. Provide driven ground electrode (rods). Spacing of multiple rods shall be at least twice the length of each rod.

4. Provide connections to building water services (domestic and fire) via mechanical clamps.

5. Provide UFER Ground (Concrete-encased electrode) at building footing or foundation, as required by NEC Article 250, “Grounding and Bonding.” a. Fabricate with minimum of 20 LF of 500MCM bare copper conductor laid

lengthwise in excavation for foundation or footings. b. Install conductor within 2 inches of the bottom of the concrete. c. Where base of foundation is less than 20 feet in length, coil excess

conductor at base of foundation. d. Bond conductor to reinforcing steel at four locations, minimum. e. Extend conductor below grade and connect to building grounding grid or

grounding electrode.

F. Transformer Grounding:

1. Ground all transformer components per NEC. a. Secondary neutral. b. Primary and secondary grounding conductors. c. Enclosure. d. Electrostatic shield (shielded units). e. Bond all together and to building steel per NEC Article 250 “Grounding

and Bonding”. f. Provide equipment ground conductor in primary feeder. Connect to

transformer ground lug or bus.


3.2 INSTALLATION

A. General: Ground electrical systems and equipment in accordance with NEC requirements except where the Drawings or Specifications exceed NEC requirements.

B. Ground Rods:

1. Locate a minimum of two-rod lengths from each other and at least the same distance from any other grounding electrode.

2. Interconnect ground rods with bare conductors buried at least 24 inches below grade.

3. Connect bare-cable ground conductors to ground rods by means of exothermic welds except as otherwise indicated.

4. Make connections without damaging the copper coating or exposing the rod steel. 5. Drive rods until tops are 6 inches below finished floor or final grade except as

otherwise indicated.

C. Metallic Water Service Pipe:

1. Provide insulated copper ground conductors, sized as indicated, in conduit from the building main service equipment, or the ground bus, to main metallic water service.

2. Connect ground conductors to the main metallic water service pipes by means of ground clamps.

3. Where a dielectric main water fitting is installed, connect the ground conductor to the street side of the fitting. Do not install a grounding jumper around dielectric fittings.

4. Bond the ground conductor conduit to the conductor at each end.

D. Water Meter Jumpers: Provide braided, flexible bonding straps to connect ground clamps on water meter piping to bypass water meters electrically.

E. Route grounding conductors along the shortest and straightest paths possible without

obstructing access or placing conductors where they may be subjected to strain, impact, or damage, except as indicated.

3.3 CONNECTIONS

A. General: Make connections in such a manner as to minimize possibility of galvanic action or electrolysis. Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible.

1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to assure high conductivity and

make contact points closer in order of galvanic series. 2. Make connections with clean bare metal at points of contact. 3. Aluminum to steel connections shall be with stainless steel separators and

mechanical clamps. 4. Aluminum to galvanized steel connections shall be with tin-plated copper jumpers

and mechanical clamps. 5. Coat and seal connections involving dissimilar details with inert material such as

red lead paint to prevent future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces. 6. Aluminum conductors shall have antioxidant coatings at all connections and shall

have UL Listed AL-CU lugs as needed. 7. Tighten grounding and bonding connectors and terminals, including screws and


bolts, in accordance with manufacturer’s published torque tightening values for connectors and bolts. Where manufacturer’s torque requirements are not indicated, tighten connections to comply with torque tightening values specified in UL 486A, “Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors” and 486B, “Wire Connectors for Use with Aluminum Conductors.”

B. Exothermic Welded Connections:

1. Use for connections to structural steel and for underground connections of

conductors and rods. 2. Install at connections to ground rods and plate electrodes. 3. Comply with manufacturer’s written recommendations. 4. Re-make any welds that are puffed up or that show convex surfaces indicating

improper cleaning.

C. Conductor Terminations:

1. Terminate insulated equipment grounding conductors for feeders and branch circuits with pressure-type grounding lugs.

D. Metallic Raceways:

1. Where metallic raceways terminate at metallic housings without mechanical and

electrical connection to the housing, terminate each conduit with a grounding bushing.

2. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding conductor to the ground bus in the housing.

3. Bond electrically non-continuous conduits at both entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare grounding conductors.

E. Compression-Type Connections:

1. Use hydraulic compression tools. 2. Use tools and dies recommended by the manufacturer of the connectors. 3. Provide embossing die code or other standard method to make a visible

indication that a connector has been adequately compressed on the ground conductor.

F. Moisture Protection:

1. Where insulated ground conductors are connected to ground rods or ground

buses, insulate the entire area of the connection and seal against moisture penetration of the insulation and cable.

3.4 PAD-MOUNTED EQUIPMENT GROUNDING

A. Padmounted Transformers and Switchgear:

1. Provide a minimum of two (2) driven rods, installed at opposite corners. 2. Interconnect with #4/0 AWG BCSD counterpoise at 24" depth. 3. Exothermic weld connections. 4. Provide ground conductor from one rods thru PVC conduit sleeve in bottom of

pad to equipment ground bus connection. 3.5 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL


A. General:

1. Before making tests, complete all connections at panels, fixtures and other equipment.

2. Install fuses and have all wiring continuous from service equipment to utilization outlets.

3. Correct all undesirable ground, open and short circuit conditions. 4. Arrange and pay for the services of a qualified independent electrical testing

organization to perform tests described below.

B. Acceptance Testing: Take and record the following readings on applicable systems, as described below:

1. Site Tests:

a. Provide tests of the completed grounding system using a megohmeter at each location where a maximum ground resistance level is specified.

b. Measure ground resistance at least 48 hours after any precipitation and without the soil being moistened by any other natural or artificial means.

c. Tests shall be performed without chemical treatment or other artificial means of reducing natural ground resistance.

d. Perform test by the Fall of Potential (3-point) method in accordance with IEEE 81 Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance and Earth Surface Potentials of a Grounding System.

2. Ground resistance maximum values shall be as follows: a. Building Grounding electrode driven rods: b. Rated 500 kVA and less: 10 Ohms c. Rated >>500 kVA: 5 Ohms d. Lighting pole grounds: 15 Ohms e. Utility pole arrester & transformer grounds: 10 Ohms. f. Emergency generator local ground: 10 Ohms

3. Feeder Equipment Grounding Conductor Tests:

a. Perform test by the 2-point method to verify impedance in the ground system between installed components, including, but not limited to the following: 1) Service switchgear, switchboard, panelboard or transformer and

main grounding busbar. 2) Branch panelboards to feeder source. 3) Dry transformers to primary feeder source. 4) Grounding equipment riser(s) (for transformers) from farthest

point to point of connection at building main grounding busbar, switchboard ground, or other source connection point.

4. Neutral-Ground Bond Testing: a. Test distribution system for presence of neutral-to-ground bonds at points

other than service entrance and/or separately derived sources. b. Remove permitted N-G bond at point of common coupling, and verify no

continuity between neutral and ground systems. c. Record the measured isolation (megohms) between the neutral and

ground systems. d. Where continuity is found, provide further investigation to locate and

remove such bonds. 3.6 ADJUSTING

A. General:


1. Make and perform all adjustments after all building grounding systems are complete.

B. Deficiencies of Service or Building Ground Systems:

1. Where ground resistance exceeds specified values, notify the Architect

immediately. 2. Modify the grounding system to reduce resistance values. 3. Provide additional ground rods, interconnected with the others, installed at least

10 feet between rods. 4. Retest ground resistance after modifications. 5. Where values still exceed those specified, the Architect will provide additional

direction.

C. Unintentional Bonding of Grounds, Neutrals, etc. of Service or Building Ground Systems:

1. Perform additional testing and measurements to locate the unintentional bonds. 2. Remove unintentional bonds. 3. Retest system(s) to prove desired isolation of systems.

D. Reports:

1. Prepare test reports, certified by the testing organization, of the ground resistance

at each test location. 2. Include observations of weather and other phenomena that may affect test

results. 3. Indicate measures taken to improve test results. 4. Provide all final measurements of system isolation tests (megohms).

END OF SECTION

EASTERN DISTRICT POLICE STATION 16120-1 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS AND CABLES 28103.01 January 15, 2013

SECTION 16120 - LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL POWER CONDUCTORS & CABLES



1.2 SUMMARY


1. Building wires and conductors. 2. Cables and cable assemblies. 3. Splices and connectors. 4. Acceptance testing of conductors, feeders, etc. 5. Load balancing.

B. Related Sections:

1. Section “Common Work Results for Electrical.” 2. Section “Grounding & Bonding for Electrical Systems” for coordination with

grounding equipment and attachments. 3. Section “Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems.”

1.3 REFERENCES

A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM):

1. ASTM B3 Soft or Annealed Copper Wire 2. ASTM B8 Concentric Lay Stranded Copper Conductors 3. ASTM B174 Standard Specification for Bunch-Stranded Copper Conductors

for Electrical Conductors 4. ASTM B230 Standard Specification for Aluminum 1350-H19 Wire for Electrical

Purposes 5. ASTM B231 Concentric-Lay-Stranded Aluminum Conductors 6. ASTM B496 Standard Specification for Compact Round

Concentric-Lay-Stranded Copper Conductors 7. ASTM 901 Standard Specification for Compressed Round Stranded

Aluminum Conductors Using Single Input Wire Construction

B. Underwriters Laboratory (UL):

1. UL 4 Standard for Armored Cable 2. UL 44 Standard for Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables 3. UL 62 Standard for Flexible Cord and Fixture Wire 4. UL 83 Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables 5. UL 486A Standard For Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use With

Copper Conductors. 6. UL 486B Standard For Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use With

Aluminum Conductors. 7. UL 854 Service-Entrance Cables 8. UL 910 Standard for Test for Flame-Propagation and Smoke-Density

Values for Electrical and Optical-Fiber Cables Used in Spaces


Transporting Environmental Air 9. UL 1424 Standard for Cables for Power-Limited Fire-Alarm Circuits 10. UL 1569 Standard for Metal-Clad Cables 11. UL 1479 Standard for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops 12. UL 1581 Reference Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables, and Flexible

Cords 1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Building wires and conductors. 2. Cables and cable assemblies.

B. Product data, including construction, materials, performance data, etc.

C. Product Test Reports: Certified copies of manufacturer's design and routine factory tests

required by the referenced standards.

D. Provide submittal data for each cable or conductor type.

1. To verify specifications have been met/exceeded. 2. Indicate UL listing for all products.

1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT


1. Deliver wire and cable according to NEMA WC-26, “Binational Wire and Cable Packaging Standard.”


1. Store wires and cables out of rain. 2. Protect from physical damage. 3. Guard against nicks and scratches.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 METAL CLAD CABLE (MC)

A. Type MC metal clad cable for branch circuit applications.

1. Interlocking aluminum or galvanized steel armor. 2. THHN insulation, 90oC rated. 3. Solid Conductors through #10 AWG: Soft or annealed per ASTM B3. 4. Stranded copper conductors for #8 AWG and larger, per ASTM B8. 5. Phase identified conductors. 6. Insulated (green) equipment grounding conductor. 7. Internal, overall, non-metallic tape shield around all conductors. 8. UL 83, 1479, 1569 and 1581 listed. 9. NEC 230, 300, 318, 321, 334, 518, 520, 530 and 645 compliant. 10. AFC MC, MC-Tuff, MC-Lite, or equal.

B. Type MC metal clad cable for feeder applications.

1. Interlocking aluminum alloy (AA-8000) armor.


2. XHHW insulation, 90oC rated. 3. Copper, compact stranded conductors per ASTM B8. 4. Phase identified conductors. 5. Bare equipment grounding conductor. 6. Internal, overall, non-metallic tape shield around all conductors. 7. UL 83, 1479, 1569 and 1581 listed. 8. NEC 230, 300, 318, 321, 334, 518, 520, 530 and 645 compliant. 9. MC Cable by Service Wire, Pirelli, Service Wire, Alcan, or equal.

2.2 SUPER-NEUTRAL METAL CLAD CABLE (MC)

A. Type MC metal clad cable with oversized neutral conductor:

1. Interlocking aluminum or galvanized steel armor. 2. Insulated equipment grounding conductor. 3. Internal approved bonding strip. 4. Oversized neutral conductor:

a. #10 neutral for 2 circuit #12 AWG cables b. #8 neutral for 3 circuit #12 AWG cables

5. Identifying green spiral stripe along entire armor. 6. UL 83, 1479, 1569 and 1581 listed. 7. NEC 230, 300, 318, 321, 334, 518, 520, 530 and 645 compliant. 8. Solid copper conductors (except stranded #8 neutral). 9. AFC, “SuperNeutral,” Type MC Cable.

2.3 FIRE ALARM METAL CLAD CABLE (MC)

A. Type MC metal clad cable with isolated ground conductor:

1. For use on fire alarm system circuits, as required. 2. Interlocking galvanized steel armor. 3. Continuous red identifying stripe. 4. TFN insulated, solid copper conductors. 5. Copper ground conductor(s). 6. UL Listed Fire Alarm Cable 7. Rated for use in plenums. 8. UL Listed for cable trays. 9. Rated for through penetrations of 1, 2 and 3-hour fire walls. 10. Individually twisted pairs and shielding, as required per fire alarm system

manufacturer. 11. Fire resistant and low smoke. 12. UL 62, 83, 910, 1424, 1479, 1569, and 1581 listed. 13. NEC 300-22, 318, 334, 518, 530, 645, 725, 760 compliant. 14. AFC Type MC Fire Alarm/Control Cable.

2.4 600 VOLT BUILDING WIRE

A. Copper Building Wire:

1. UL 44 and 854 Listed, 600 volt, 90oC: 2. All conductor sizes indicated are based on copper conductors. 3. Copper, stranded for #8 AWG, and larger.

a. Concentric per ASTM B3. b. Compact round per ASTM B496.

4. #12 AWG minimum conductor size. 5. Thermoplastic Insulation:


a. Interior #8 and smaller: THWN or THHN b. Interior #6 and larger: THWN or THW c. All exterior wiring: THWN or THW

6. Provide wires as manufactured by Pirelli, Service Wire Corp, Okonite Company, Southwire, Carol Cable, or equal.

B. Aluminum Alloy Conductors:

1. Permitted in lieu of copper for feeders, services or equipment branch circuits

rated 60 amps or greater, except as noted. 2. Aluminum not permitted for:

a. Final connection from starter or disconnect to: b. Motors, compressors, pumps, etc. c. Generators. d. Transformer primary and secondary lugs. e. UPS system input and output terminals.

3. Construction a. Aluminum alloy (AA-8000) conductors per ASTM B230. b. Compact stranded construction per ASTM 901. c. XHHW-2 cross-linked polyethylene insulation. d. UL Listed for wet (750C) or dry (900C) locations. e. Minimum size #4 AWG.

4. Alcan Cable, “Stabiloy XHHW-2” or approved equal. 2.5 SPLICES & CONNECTORS

A. Splices & Connectors for copper conductors:

1. Dry locations: a. #10 AWG and smaller: Insulated, solderless pressure type. b. #8 AWG and larger: Hydraulic pressure indentation type, Burndy

"Hy-dent", T&B or equal. 2. In handholes, manholes and direct buried locations:

a. Silicone filled wire-nuts (King, or equal). b. Compound filled splice or connectors. c. Suitable for immersion in water.

B. Splices & Connectors for aluminum conductors:

1. All locations: Use only with UL Listed bolted pressure or compression type

connectors. a. UL Listed, marked AL7CU or AL9CU per UL 486B. b. Use with oxide inhibiting compound. c. Use aluminum alloy hardware per ANSI requirements.

2.6 UNDERGROUND LIGHTING FEEDER TAPS & CONNECTORS

A. Feeder Tap Connection for tapping underground copper conductors:

1. General Construction: a. 3:1 heat shrink tubing, ANSI C119-1 Sealed Insulated Underground

Connector Systems Rated 600 Volts. b. Cross-linked polyolefin tubing, 600V insulation. c. Flame retardant per IEEE 383, “Standard for Type Test of Class 1E

Electric Cables, Field Splices, and Connections,” and ICEA S-19-81. d. Hot melt adhesive to form watertight seal.


2. Straight Splice: To splice underground feeder with no reduction in conductor sizes: a. Hydraulic crimp sleeve, Burndy or equal. b. Heat shrink splice kit, Raychem WCSM Tubing:

3. Wye-Splice: To split underground feeder with no reduction in conductor sizes: a. Hydraulic crimp sleeve to match conductors, Burndy or equal. b. Heat shrink splice kit, Raychem CRSM-CT Cable Tap Splice Kit:

4. Tap-Splice: To splice underground feeder with no reduction in through-conductor size and smaller tap conductor: a. Hydraulic crimp sleeve to match main and tap conductors, Burndy or

equal. b. Heat shrink splice kit, Raychem CRSM-CT Cable Tap Splice Kit:

2.7 LOW VOLTAGE CABLING

A. Cables for low voltage systems shall be as specified in other sections. If not specified, cables shall be per system manufacturer’s recommendations.

B. All low voltage cabling installed on this project shall be UL Listed, plenum rated cable,

unless installed in metal conduit. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 APPLICATION

A. Service Entrance:

1. Type THW or THWN, copper conductor, in raceway.

B. Feeders:

1. Type THW, THHN/THWN, XHHW copper conductor, in raceway. 2. Type MC, multi-conductor copper, 90C insulation, interlocked steel armor sheath.

C. Branch Circuits:

1. Type THHN/THWN, copper conductor, in raceway. 2. Type MC cable, copper conductor, 75C insulation.

D. Fire Alarm Circuits:

1. Type THHN/THWN, copper conductor, in raceway. 2. Type MC Fire Alarm cable, copper conductor, 90C insulation.

E. Class 1 Control Circuits:

1. Type THHN/THWN, copper conductor, in raceway.

F. Class 2 Control Circuits:

1. Power-limited cable, concealed in building finishes. 2. Type THHN/THWN, copper conductor, in raceway. 3. Type MC cable, copper conductors.

G. High harmonic current circuits, including Office environments, Modular furniture feeds,


Research and Electronics laboratories, Computer facilities and server rooms:

1. THWN/THHN in EMT conduit, with individual circuit neutral conductors. 2. THWN/THHN in EMT conduit, with oversized, shared neutral conductors. 3. Super Neutral MC cable. 4. Oversized neutral conductors:

a. #10 neutral for 2 circuit #12 AWG cables b. #8 neutral for 3 circuit #12 AWG cables

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Install wires and cables as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and the NECA “Standard of Installation.”

B. Remove existing wire from raceway before pulling in new wire and cable.

C. Pull conductors into raceway simultaneously where more than one is being installed in

same raceway.

1. Use pulling compound or lubricant where necessary; compound used must not deteriorate conductor or insulation.

2. Use pulling means, including fish tape, cable, rope, and basket-weave wire/cable grips that will not damage cables or raceway.

D. Install exposed cable, parallel and perpendicular to surfaces or exposed structural

members, and follow surface contours where possible.

E. Conductor Splices: Keep to minimum.

1. Install splices and tapes that possess equivalent or better mechanical strength and insulation ratings than conductors being spliced.

2. Use splice and tap connectors that are compatible with conductor material.

F. Wiring at Outlets: Install with at least 12 inches (300 mm) of slack conductor at each outlet.

G. Connect outlets and components to wiring and to ground as indicated and instructed by

manufacturer. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, per manufacturer's published torque values or per UL 486A.

H. AC and MC Cable Installation Requirements:

1. Installed concealed in finished areas. 2. Do not expose, except for final connections to modular furniture. 3. Group all AC and MC cables running together in bundles with nylon cable ties. 4. Route bundles neatly through ceiling cavities. 5. In high ceiling, or large plenum areas, install all MC and/or AC cables in groups,

tight to underside of deck, within steel joist webbing. 6. Avoid constant changes in direction and elevation of bundles. 7. Install perpendicular and parallel to column lines, except for final separation from

bundles. 8. Support bundles at regular intervals, per NEC, independent from ceiling hanger

wires. 9. Provide adequate clearance above accessible ceiling tiles, minimum of 18.” 10. Where circuits exit panelboards not located in electrical rooms or closets,

conductors shall be installed in EMT conduit to a wire trough above the panel and


finished ceiling, in an accessible location. MC cable shall then be permitted to extend to the branch circuit devices.

11. Where circuits exit panelboards located in electrical rooms or closets, conductors shall be installed in EMT conduit to a wire trough outside the electric room, above the finished ceiling in an accessible location. MC cable shall then be permitted to extend to the branch circuit devices.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION

A. Food Service Equipment connections: All power cord or sealtite conduit connections shall be of sufficient length to permit removal and unplugging of equipment. Cord/conduit length, however, shall not allow any cord or conduit to lay on the floor when equipment is in final operating position.

B. Generators, motors, vibrating or rotating equipment shall be stranded copper for all sizes.

Solid wire not permitted. 3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL

A. General:

1. Before making tests, complete all connections at panels, fixtures and other equipment.

2. Install fuses and have all wiring continuous from service equipment to utilization outlets.

3. Correct all undesirable ground, open and short circuit conditions. 4. Provide source of temporary power for making tests if normal building power is

not available at the time.

B. Acceptance Testing: Take and record the following readings on systems 600 volts and below:

1. Megger tests of all feeder circuit conductors, ground conductors, and conduit

ground. 2. Indicate measured Ammeter readings on all phases and neutral of each feeder to

indicate balance. 3. Ammeter readings on all phases of each polyphase motor. Include nameplate full

load current of each motor on data sheet.

C. Test Reports:

1. Certify that all overload devices have been set in accordance with data shown on the drawings and/or manufacturer's recommended setting.

2. Send final certified test reports and Certifications to Architect and Owner for approval, in accordance with Division 1 Section “Submittals.”

3.5 ADJUSTING

A. General:

1. Make and perform all adjustments after building distribution system and all branch circuits are installed and operating.

2. Make all ammeter measurements during regular working hours, when all personnel and equipment are working, to represent typical building conditions.

B. Feeder Balancing:


1. Make adjustments to branch circuit connections within branch circuit panelboards.

Balance the load between each phase, as practicable. 2. After branch panels are balanced, perform balancing of phase loads on

distribution panels and switchboards. 3. Report ammeter readings before and after adjustments for each panel or

switchboard.

END OF SECTION

EASTERN DISTRICT POLICE STATION 16130-1 RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS 28103.01 January 15, 2013

SECTION 16130 - RACEWAYS AND BOXES FOR ELECTRICAL SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY


1. Conduits. 2. Conduit fittings and supports. 3. Wireways. 4. Device and outlet boxes. 5. Pull and splice boxes. 6. Floor mounted devices. 7. Cable trays.

B. Related Sections: The following sections contain requirements that relate to this Section:

1. Section “Common Work Results For Electrical.” 2. Section “Low Voltage Power Conductors and Cables” for conductors to be

installed in raceways. 1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. Conduits. 2. Floor mounted devices. 3. Cable trays.

B. Descriptive Data:

1. To verify specifications have been met/exceeded. 2. Indicate UL listing for all products. 3. Manufacturer's specifications, data sheets. 4. Catalog cuts. 5. Dimensional drawings. 6. Capacity ratings. 7. Information required indicating contract compliance. 8. Clearly indicate the exact size or rating proposed.

C. Closeout Submittals: Submit in accordance with the General Conditions and Division 1

requirements. 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION OF EQUIPMENT


1. Transport and handle all equipment to prevent bending, distortion or damage to


products.


1. Store all materials out of rain. 2. Protect from physical damage. 3. Guard against nicks and scratches on finished surfaces.


A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named “Basis of Design” manufacturer and model (“Basis of Design” fixtures are indicated on the drawing fixture schedule), or a comparable product of one of the other following named manufacturers:

1. Steel Conduits & Fittings:

a. Allied Tube & Conduit b. American Electric/Steel City

2. Non-Metallic Conduits & Fittings: a. Carlon b. Cantex

3. Surface raceways & Multi-outlet assemblies: a. Wiremold b. MonoSystems, Inc. c. Hubbell

4. Floor mounted devices: a. Wiremold b. Hubbell c. MonoSystems, Inc.

5. Cable trays: a. Cooper/B-Line Systems b. MP Husky c. Chalfant d. Wiremold e. MonoSystems, Inc. f. Cablofil

2.2 METAL CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. Rigid Galvanized Steel Conduit (RGS):

1. ANSI C80.1 Rigid Steel Conduit, Hot dip Galvanized 2. UL 6 Electrical Rigid Metal Conduit - Steel. 3. Meets NEC Article 344, “Rigid Metal Conduit.” 4. Material: Steel heavy-wall, hot dip galvanized inside and outside. 5. Joints: Standard pipe thread; furnished with coupling; shipped with thread

protector through 2-inch size. 6. Minimum Size: 3/4 inch.

B. Intermediate Metal Conduit (IMC):

1. ANSI C80.6 Intermediate Metal Conduit - Zinc Coated. 2. UL 1242 Intermediate Metal Conduit. 3. Meets NEC Article 342 Intermediate Metal Conduit.


4. Material: Steel only, intermediate wall thickness, hot dipped galvanized. 5. Joints: Standard Pipe Thread, furnished with coupling, shipped with thread

protector through 2-inch size. 6. Minimum Size: 3/4 inch.

C. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT):

1. ANSI C80.3 Electrical Metallic Tubing - Zinc Coated. 2. UL 6 Rigid Metal Conduit. 3. Meets NEC Article 358, “Electrical Metallic Tubing.” 4. Material: Steel, thin-wall, electro-galvanized. 5. Minimum Size: 3/4 inch.

D. Flexible Metal Conduit (Greenfield):

1. Zinc-coated steel. 2. UL 1 Flexible Metal Conduit. 3. Meets NEC Article 350, “Flexible Metal Conduit.” 4. Material: Steel, hot dip galvanized. 5. Minimum Size: 3/4 inch.

E. Liquid tight Flexible Metal Conduit (Sealtite):

1. UL 360 Liquidtight Flexible Steel Conduit. 2. Meets NEC Article 351, “Liquidtight Flexible Metal Conduit and Liquidtight

Flexible Nonmetallic Conduit.” 3. Flexible steel conduit with PVC jacket. 4. Galvanized flexible steel core. 5. Extruded PVC jacket, gray or black. 6. Minimum Size: 3/4 inch.

2.3 NONMETALLIC CONDUIT AND TUBING

A. Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit (RNC):

1. Schedule 40 or 80 PVC. 2. Meeting NEMA publication TC-2, “Electrical Plastic Tubing” (EPT) and “Conduit”

(EPC-4 and EPC-80). 3. UL-651 Schedule 40 and 80, “Rigid PVC Conduit.” 4. Material complies with ASTM D 1784, “Standards for PVC compounds and CPVC

compounds.” 5. Meets NEC Article 347, “Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit.”

2.4 CONDUIT FITTINGS

A. All fittings to match conduit material and to be suitable for the purpose intended. All fittings shall be UL Listed.

B. Hazardous Location seal off fittings:

1. Compound filled, malleable iron. 2. Class & Division as required 3. 40% fill capacity. 4. Listed under UL 886, “Outlet Boxes and Fittings for Use in Hazardous (Classified)

Locations, “ vertical or horizontal application as required. 5. Crouse Hinds, OZ Gedney, Killark.


C. Expansion Fittings:

1. Weather tight construction. 2. Copper braid bonding strap & clamps. 3. Crouse Hinds, or equal.

D. RGS/IMC Fittings:

1. Threaded with insulated bushings. 2. Galvanized steel or malleable iron. 3. Double locknuts. 4. Crouse Hinds, Steel City, Bridgeport, or equal.

E. EMT Fittings:

1. Compression type "Concretight" or "Raintight.” 2. Zinc plated steel body and steel nut. 3. Insulated throats. 4. Setscrew fittings not permitted.

F. Sealtite Conduit Fittings:

1. Threaded ferrule, malleable iron compression nut and body. 2. Nylon sealing ring. 3. NEMA FB-1, “Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and

Cable Assemblies.”

G. Flexible Metal Conduit/MC Cable Fittings:

1. 360o squeeze type. 2. Malleable iron or cast zinc bodies. 3. Insulated throat.

H. PVC Conduit Fittings:

1. Formed PVC, sunlight and UV resistant, UL Listed. 2. Schedule 40 or 80 to match conduit or tubing type and material. 3. Material complies with ASTM D 1784, “Standards for PVC compounds and CPVC

compounds.” 4. Meets NEC Article 347, “ Rigid Nonmetallic Conduit.” 5. Meeting NEMA publications TC-3, “PVC Fittings for use with Rigid PVC Conduit

and Tubing.” 6. Fittings Listed under UL-514B, “Fittings for Cable and Conduit.” 7. Conduit and elbows with factory belled end. 8. Carlon Plus 40 conduit and fittings, or equal.

2.5 CONDUIT SUPPORTS

A. Single suspended feeder conduit:

1. 1/2" - 2" Conduit: Adjustable hangers with 3/8" rods. 2. >> 2" Conduit: Adjustable hangers with 1/2" rods. 3. Kindorf C-149 or C-150, B-line, or equal.

B. Groups of suspended conduits:


1. Steel channels with conduit straps. 2. 2" threaded rods, minimum. 3. Kindorf, B-Line, or equal.

C. Flexible metal conduit, MC Cable:

1. UL Listed Caddy Clips, or similar attachment methods.

D. Surface mounted conduit:

1. 1 or 2-hole pipe straps.

2.6 WIREWAYS

A. Material: Sheet metal sized and shaped as indicated.

B. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold-down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireway as required for complete system.

C. Wireway Covers: Hinged type, secured with stainless steel screws.

D. Finish: Manufacturer's standard enamel finish, ANSI 49 or 61 gray.

E. NEMA Rating:

1. NEMA 1 for dry, indoor locations. 2. NEMA 3R for outdoor or areas exposed to weather or severe moisture.

2.7 DEVICE & OUTLET BOXES

A. Indoor boxes - zinc-coated or cadmium plated steel, NEMA OS-1.

B. Unheated, "damp" and "wet" locations and outdoor locations:

1. NEMA 4X PVC. 2. Glue-in conduit hubs. 3. Gasketed coverplates. 4. Sunlight (UV) resistant.

C. Outlet boxes in un-plastered brick or block walls shall be provided with deep square-cut

device covers.

D. Furnished all boxes with appropriate covers.

E. No sectionalized boxes shall be used. 2.8 TELECOMMUNICATION OUTLET BOXES

A. Back boxes:

1. Recessed outlets: a. 4" x 4" x 2-1/2” deep steel, recessed device box.


b. Single-gang steel reducer plate (plaster ring). 2. Surface mounted outlets:

a. Single or multi-gang box as required by drawings and application. b. NEMA 1 smooth steel construction. c. Ivory finish to match surface raceways. d. Concealed knockouts for entry of surface raceway. e. No visible or open unused knockouts. f. Minimum 1 ¾ “ deep. g. Wiremold # V5748.

2.9 JUNCTION AND PULL BOXES

A. Dry locations:

1. 12 gauge galvanized sheet steel minimum. 2. Flat covers secured in position by round head brass or stainless steel 300 grade

machine screws. 3. NEMA OS-1, “Sheet Steel Outlet Boxes, Covers and Box Supports.”

B. Exterior and wet locations:

1. Cast aluminum or galvanized cast-iron type. 2. Threaded hubs. 3. Gasketed screw-on cover plates. 4. NEMA FB-1, “Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit and

Cable Assemblies.”

C. Boxes imbedded in concrete:

1. Galvanized cast iron. a. Glue-in conduit hubs. b. Gasketed coverplates. c. Sunlight (UV) resistant.

D. All boxes sized to meet the requirements of the NEC.

2.10 FLUSH MULTI-SERVICE FLOOR BOXES

A. Complete in-floor multi-service box consisting of floor box housing, flush removable cover, and wiring devices, as specified, all fittings, materials and labor.

1. Adjustable leveling and placement during rough in to accommodate structural and

architectural elements, and other equipment.

B. Construction:

1. Galvanized steel per ASTM 525 G-60. 2. Concrete-tight for in-floor use. 3. Hinged access lid with grommeted cable ports to allow lid closure with

receptacles in use. 4. UL scrubwater compliant. 5. ADA compliant. 6. Adjustable legs for leveling and adjustment prior to pour. 7. Knockouts for conduit entry and feed through use. 8. 4 compartment box, individually sectionalized. 9. 2 - Duplex 5-20R power receptacles.


10. 2 - Duplex data RJ45 jacks, Category 5. 11. UL Listed, with separation of power and low voltage. 12. Completely flush, rectangular, brass cover with hinged access lids. Floor

covering trim, as required.

C. Wiremold RFB4 Multi-service steel recessed floor boxes or MonoSystems Concrete Floor Boxes, or comparable product.

2.11 CABLE TRAY

A. Complete system including fittings, and accessories as defined by latest NEMA publications. UL Listed and Classified as Equipment Grounding Conductor.

B. Construction:

1. Extruded Aluminum Assoc. Alloy 6063 with fabricated parts of Alloy 5052. 2. Splice plates:

a. Aluminum tray: Wedge lock design, with four (4) square neck carriage bolts, serrated flange locknuts per plate.

C. Aluminum center-spine tray with aluminum rungs:

1. Center Spine: extruded 6063 T6 aluminum alloy. 2. Rungs: 1-piece, rectangular cross-section aluminum alloy with radiused edges. 3. Rung spacing: nine (9”) inches on center. 4. Minimum cable bearing surface: 1 inch. 5. Accessories: Horizontal and vertical pivot splice blocks, connectors, as required. 6. Stiffener bars: installed on all 18" wide sections to stabilize tray when loaded

unevenly.

D. Dimensions:

1. Tray width of six (6”), nine (9”), twelve (12”), eighteen (18”), twenty-four (24”) inches per drawings.

2. Side rail height inches/cable fill depth inches: (4/3”) (5/4”) (6/5”) (7/6”) inches.

E. Design Loading:

1. NEMA class 10 (A for 50 psf) (B for 75 psf) (C for 100 psf). 2. Safety factor of 1.5.

F. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a system by

one of the following named manufacturers:

1. Wiremold SpecMate A (Basis of Design). 2. Cooper B-Line Cent R Rail. 3. Monosystems Mono-Tray.

2.12 WIRE BASKET CABLE TRAY(located in MDF)

A. Complete system including wire basket cable tray, fittings, supports and accessories as defined by latest NEMA publications.

B. Description: Continuous, rigid, welded steel wire mesh cable management system for

installation:


1. Suspended above IT or server equipment racks.

C. Construction:

1. Mesh System: Permits continuous ventilation of cables and maximum dissipation

of heat. 2. Safety Edge: Continuous safety edge T-welded wire lip. 3. Wire Mesh: Welded at all intersections. 4. Material: Carbon steel wire, ASTM A 510, Grade 1008. Wire welded, bent, and

surface treated after manufacture. 5. Finish: Electro-Plated Zinc Galvanizing: ASTM B 633, Type III, SC-1. Finish

applied after welding and bending of mesh. 6. Nominal Dimensions:

a. Mesh: 2” x 4” inches. b. Straight Section Lengths: 80” inches and 118” inches. c. Width: 8” inches or 12” inches, per drawings. d. Depth: 4” inches. e. Wire Diameter: 0.177” inch, minimum.

D. Fittings:

1. Field fabricated in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions from straight

sections. 2. Grounding: GTA-2-2 grounding lugs for attachment on tray of continuous ground

conductor fixing system.

E. Fasteners: As required by tray widths. Furnished by manufacturer.

F. Support System:

1. Cablofil type FASP under-tray trapeze support for use with threaded rod hangers. Size to match tray width(s).

G. Hardware: Hardware, including splice connectors and support components furnished by

manufacturer.

H. Accessories: Horizontal, vertical, turn-up, turndown and angled fittings, connectors, as required. Provide above all IT or equipment racks, backboards, termination points above conduit sleeves, etc.

I. Design Loading:

1. Load Span Criteria: Install and support cable management system in accordance

with span load criteria of L/240.

J. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a system by one of the following named manufacturers:

1. Cablofil (Basis of Design). 2. Wiremold FieldMate. 3. MonoSystems Mono-mesh. 4. Cooper B-Line Wire Basket.

PART 3 EXECUTION


3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine surfaces to receive raceways, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets for compliance with installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the raceway system. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Examine areas to receive cable trays. Make adjustments to elevations, routing, etc. to

coordinate with other work including beams, lights, ducts, pipes, etc. 3.2 APPLICATION

A. General Exterior Conduit Applications:

1. Direct buried: PVC, RGS 2. Concrete ductbank: PVC 3. Above grade, building surfaces: IMC, RGS 4. Roof surfaces: IMC 5. Below covered roofs/overhangs: IMC, EMT 6. Motors, pumps, etc. Sealtite

B. General Interior Conduit Applications:

1. All panelboard feeders:

a. Above slab: EMT b. Below floor slab: RGS, PVC*

1) *RGS required where conduit penetrates through slab. c. Below raised access floors: EMT

2. HVAC equipment circuits: a. (>>30 amps): EMT b. (<< 30 amps): EMT, MC Cable c. Below floor slab: RGS, PVC*

1) *RGS required where conduit penetrates through slab. 3. Branch circuits (lighting, receptacles):

a. Above accessible ceilings: EMT, MC Cable b. Above inaccessible ceilings: EMT, MC Cable c. Concealed in CMU walls: EMT, PVC d. Within solid masonry walls: EMT, PVC e. Concealed within stud walls: EMT, MC Cable f. Surface mounted, finished areas: Wiremold *

1) *Only with Architect’s prior approval g. Surface mounted, unfinished areas: EMT h. Below raised floors: EMT, sealtite i. Surface mounted (kitchen areas): RGS

4. Final Connections to Lights, dry transformers, small motors, vibrating equipment: a. Indoor, dry locations: Greenfield b. Outdoor, damp locations: Sealtite

5. <<All inmate accessible areas: a. Above accessible ceilings: EMT, MC Cable b. Above inaccessible ceilings: EMT, MC Cable c. Surface mounted: IMC, RGS

3.3 INSTALLATION

A. General:


1. Coordinate layout and installation of all raceways, cable trays, boxes and other equipment with other construction elements to ensure adequate headroom, working clearance, and access and to eliminate interference problems.

2. Install raceways, boxes, enclosures, and cabinets as indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions.

3. Do not cut or drill structural members without permission of Architect. Provide reinforcing for opening as directed by Architect.

4. Pierce metal deck where required for installation of electrical equipment. 5. Support raceways and equipment as required by NEC, manufacturers, and as

specified elsewhere. 6. Provide grounding connections for raceway, boxes, and components as indicated

and instructed by manufacturer. 7. Tighten connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, per manufacturer's

published torque values, or per UL 486A, “Standard For Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use With Copper Conductors” where not specified.

B. Tamper Proof Hardware

1. Provide tamper proof hardware for all panels, pullboxes, junction boxes, coverplates, and any other equipment or items accessible to inmates, as indicated on the drawings.

3.4 CONSTRUCTION

A. Flexible Connections: Use maximum of 6 feet of flexible conduit for connections to equipment subject to vibration, noise transmission, or movement, and for all motors. Use liquid tight flexible conduit in wet or damp locations. Install separate ground conductor across flexible connections. Provide flexible connections as follows:

1. Connections to motors between rigid conduit and connection box on motor. 2. Connections to equipment containing motors. 3. Connections to equipment subject to movement caused by rotation, vibration or

oscillation. 4. Connections from rigid conduit system to recessed lights. 5. Connections to dry-type transformers. 6. Other applications as indicated.

B. Supports: Provide all supports, hangers, braces and attachments required for the work of

this section. 3.5 CONDUIT INSTALLATION

A. General Installation Requirements:

1. Install all conduit concealed, unless not possible. 2. Surface mounting only as approved by Architect. 3. Minimum size 3/4” inch, unless noted otherwise. 4. Minimum 6" clearance from flues, heating pipes, or other hot surfaces above

80oF. 5. Parallel and perpendicular to walls, structural members, ceilings and interior

surfaces; install plumb. 6. Polypropylene or nylon pull line in each empty conduit. 7. Use capped bushings or plugs during construction. 8. Clean and cap all conduits left empty for future use. 9. In masonry, install prior to wall construction and accurately set all outlets. 10. On walls below grade, use stand-off brackets. Maintain minimum 2" space


between conduit and wall surface. 11. Where conduit passes through exterior walls, floor or roof, install appropriate

fittings and materials to make openings watertight. Repair pierced vapor barriers vapor-proof. Provide flashing for each conduit piercing the roof.

B. Exposed Conduit in Exposed Ceiling Areas:

1. Install all conduit tight to underside of deck, above all ducts, piping, etc. 2. Install conduits within joist webbing and through spaces between steel beams

and structure, as high as possible. 3. Install parallel with building walls, beams and main structural elements. 4. Minimize offsets by coordinating with other trades prior to installation. 5. Install pull and junction boxes where least visible. Install on far side of ducts, etc.,

as visible from the majority of room viewpoints.

C. Raceways Embedded in Slabs: Install in slabs only where explicitly shown on drawings. Install in middle third of the slab thickness where practical, and leave at least 1” inch concrete cover.

1. Secure raceways to reinforcing rods to prevent sagging or shifting during concrete

placement. 2. Space raceways laterally to prevent voids in concrete. 3. Run conduit larger than 1” inch trade size parallel to or at right angles to main

reinforcement. When at right angles to reinforcement, place conduit close to slab support.

4. Transition rigid nonmetallic conduit to rigid steel conduit, or IMC before rising above floor.

5. Protect stub-ups from damage where conduits rise through floor slabs. Arrange so curved portion of bends is not visible above the finished slab.

6. Stub-Up Connections: Extend conduits through concrete floor for connection to freestanding equipment with an adjustable top or coupling threaded inside for plugs, and set flush with the finished floor. Extend conductors to equipment with rigid steel conduit; flexible metal conduit may be used 6” inches above the floor. Where equipment connections are not made under this Contract, install screwdriver-operated threaded flush plugs flush with floor.

D. Flexible Conduit Installation Requirements:

1. Group all flexible conduits running together in bundles with nylon cable ties. 2. Route bundles neatly through ceiling cavities. 3. Avoid constant changes in direction and elevation of bundles. 4. Install perpendicular and parallel to column lines, except for final separation from

bundles. 5. Support bundles at regular intervals, per NEC, independent from ceiling hanger

wires. 6. Provide adequate clearance above accessible ceiling tiles, minimum of 18.” 7. Where flexible conduit or MC cable is used for final connections to motors, lights,

etc., maximum length shall be 6” feet.

E. Conduit Installation Below Raised Floors:

1. General: a. Offsets for conduit crossings. b. Installed below Tele/comm cable tray, where applicable. c. Do not run power conduit near and parallel to telecomm cable tray or

cables. Maintain minimum of 24" clearance for parallel runs.


d. Make telecomm cables or cable tray crossings at 90° degree angles. 2. EMT Conduits below raised floor:

a. Run parallel and/or perpendicular to floor stringers. b. Support off of floor slab a minimum of 1/2" using kindorf channel or

similar spacers. c. Where crossing telecomm cable tray, EMT shall pass under the cable

tray. 3. Sealtite below raised floor:

a. Run parallel and/or perpendicular to floor stringers. b. Train neatly in parallel runs. Avoid crossovers of sealtite wherever

possible. c. Where crossing telecomm cable tray, sealtite shall pass under the cable

tray.

F. PVC Coated Rigid Steel Conduit: Patch all nicks and scrapes in PVC coating after installing conduit.

G. Fittings & Terminations:

1. Provide expansion fittings in all conduit where crossing building expansion joints. 2. Provide expansion fittings in all runs of PVC conduit, a minimum of 1 between

every 2 fixed points. 3. Tighten setscrews of threadless fittings with suitable tool. Tighten compression

fittings within wrenches. 4. Terminations: Use two locknuts, one inside and one outside the box. Provide

insulated bushings or throats. 5. Where terminating in threaded hubs, screw the raceway or fitting tight into the hub

so the end bears against the wire protection shoulder. Where chase nipples are used, align the raceway so the coupling is square to the box, and tighten the chase nipple so no threads are exposed.

6. Sealing Fittings: Install per manufacturer's instructions. Locate fittings at suitable, approved, accessible locations and fill them with UL-listed sealing compound. Install raceway sealing fittings on conduit at the following points and elsewhere as indicated: a. Entering/leaving hazardous locations. b. Passing from warm locations to cold locations, such as the boundaries of

refrigerated spaces. c. Where otherwise required by the NEC.

3.6 WIREWAY INSTALLATION

A. Install per NEC Article 362. Provide hinged connectors to join adjacent lengths. Connect all sections solidly to insure effective grounding of wireway system.

B. Mount wireway in accessible location, with hinged section facing in proper direction.

C. Use standard manufactured lengths to fit in available space. Do not cut standard lengths

in field. Provide cut-off fitting where non-standard length is required, and cut in field as required.

D. Clear all obstructions encountered in field. Provide offsets and appropriate fittings as

required to clear obstructions.

E. Provide closing plate at ends of wireway. Install wire retainers in wireway after conductors are in place. Provide adapter where wireway is connected to box and cabinet.


F. Use 12" section of wireway to pass through wall, to allow maximum accessible length on each side. Provide special escutcheon plate on each side of wall to finish opening neatly.

3.7 SURFACE RACEWAY & MULTI-OUTLET ASSEMBLY INSTALLATION

A. General:

1. Install level and plumb. 2. Install tight to mounting surface. 3. Cut ends of all raceways perpendicular. Leave no sharp edges or burrs. 4. Provide separate low voltage and power feeds to all multichannel raceways. 5. Securely mount wiring devices into raceways. 6. Provide manufacturer’s wire retaining clips to secure wires. 7. Provide manufacturers fittings for all corners, box entries, etc.

3.8 DEVICE & OUTLET BOX INSTALLATION


1. Install all boxes plumb and level. 2. Install boxes at heights required. Refer to Section “Wiring Devices.” 3. Install recessed boxes flush with final finished surface. 4. Secure all boxes such that no movement occurs during normal use. 5. Install ceiling mounted boxes with sufficient support and rigidity to prevent

movement during normal connecting and disconnecting procedures. 6. Install power and low voltage device boxes at same heights from floor or

counters.

B. Installation in Inmate Cells, Dayrooms and All Areas Accessible to Inmates.

1. Where installed in concrete, CMU or other masonry wall construction, box openings shall be carefully cut to size with no noticeable play or gaps.

2. Fill all voids behind and around boxes so that masonry prevents any and all movement in the box and attaching conduits.

3. Boxes shall be precisely set to the exact depth so that NO gaps exist between coverplate and wall surface, or between coverplate and box.

3.9 FLOOR MOUNTED DEVICE BOX INSTALLATION

A. Floor Mounted Devices - General:

1. Set floor boxes level and adjust to floor surface. 2. Make adjustments in fittings, lengths and placement during rough in to

accommodate structural and architectural elements, and other equipment. 3. Coordinate exact locations and orientation with Owner prior to concrete pour.

B. Flush In-Floor Device Boxes:

1. Set boxes prior to concrete pour. 2. Coordinate exact positions with Architect, Owner and related equipment. 3. Provide separate conduit connections for power and low voltage sections. 4. Protect housing with cover during concrete pour. 5. Adjust for final height and make level after pour. 6. Set trim rings and covers, adjust for flush fit with final floor covering or finish.


3.10 CABLE TRAY INSTALLATION

A. Above Ceiling Installations:

1. Support tray from building structure using threaded rod of size per manufacturer. 2. Use double nuts on threaded rod below tray or support devices. Cut excess rod

1/4" below bottom nut. 3. Coordinate mounting height with other utilities to provide the straightest

installation possible. 4. Bottom of tray shall provide a minimum of 6” inches to ceiling tiles to allow for tile

removal and easy access. 5. Do not install directly over lights, where possible. 6. Install level. Provide manufacturer’s vertical and horizontal pivot joints or fittings

to make changes to elevation and direction. 7. Tray shall be electrically continuous from end to end. 8. Bond metallic tray to building steel columns, a minimum of one bond for every

100LF of tray.

B. Fire stop penetrations through fire and smoke barriers, including walls, partitions, floors, and ceilings, after cables are installed.

3.11 REPAIR/RESTORATION

A. Restore all finishes, equipment and surfaces to original condition, where affected by the work of this section.

3.12 CLEANING

A. General:

1. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. 2. Touch up scratches and marred finishes to match original finishes. 3. Clean front of all coverplates, etc. using methods and materials recommended by

manufacturer.

END OF SECTION

EASTERN DISTRICT POLICE STATION 16140-1 WIRING DEVICES 28103.01 January 15, 2013

SECTION 16140 - WIRING DEVICES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY


1. A/C switches. 2. Receptacles. 3. Device plates and covers.


1. Section “Common Work Results for Electrical.” 2. Section “Raceways & Boxes for Electrical Systems” in which devices are to be

installed. 3. Section “Low Voltage Power Conductors and Cables” for connecting wiring,

cables and conductors. 4. Section “Lighting” for related dimming ballasts to be controlled by dimmer

switches. 1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. A/C switches. 2. Receptacles. 3. Device plates and covers.

B. Product data for each device type:

1. Manufacturer's specifications, data sheets. 2. Wiring & connection diagrams, for dimmers, etc. 3. Capacity ratings, NEMA configurations, etc. 4. Information required indicating contract compliance. 5. Device color. 6. UL Listing.

C. Closeout Submittals: Submit in accordance with the General Conditions and Division 1

requirements, Section “Common Work Results For Electrical.” 1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING

A. Storage and Protection:

1. Deliver and store wiring devices and accessories according to manufacturers’ instructions.

2. Do not store in unheated areas of high humidity, which might create corrosion or other deterioration.


3. Do not store in areas subject to high temperatures, which might cause deterioration or deformation of products.

1.5 SEQUENCING


1. Sequence installation of devices and equipment of this section such that damage to installed equipment is minimized.

2. Install device plates after all wall finishes have been completed.

B. Division 16 “Sequencing, Coordination, and Integration”:

1. Provide installation of wiring devices after supporting raceways and boxes are permanently installed.

2. Provide coordination of proposed wiring devices with actual cord/plug requirements of attached equipment.

3. Match wiring devices to plug connectors for Owner-furnished equipment. 4. Match wiring devices to plug connectors for equipment furnished under other

Divisions. 5. Do not install permanently wired flexible connectors and associated

cables/service cords until attached equipment is in place. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 WIRING DEVICES - GENERAL

A. Comply with NEMA Standard WD 1, "General Purpose Wiring Devices”

B. Color: Ivory except as otherwise indicated or required by Code.

C. Fed Spec grade (WC896) for switches and (WC596) for receptacles, UL Listed. All devices shall be of one manufacturer.

D. Prewired pigtail connectors that accommodate Fed Spec receptacles, GFCIs and

switches are approved. Must be crimped and welded terminal right angle application within the connector.

2.2 A/C SWITCHES

A. Toggle Switches:

1. Silent mechanical type rated 20 ampere, 120/277VAC. 2. Fed. Specification #WS896-E. 3. 1-piece Lexan cam and toggle. 4. 20 amp rating. 5. Single pole, 3-way or 4-way, per drawings. 6. Back and side wiring provisions. 7. Arrow-Hart #1991 Series, Leviton #1221 Series, Pass & Seymour PS20AC

series, Hubbell CS*120 series, or equal.

B. Wall box Dimmer Switches:

1. Vertical slide, preset type rated 20 ampere, 120/277VAC. 2. Wattage rating as required. 3. Adjustable low end trim.


4. Incandescent, low voltage or fluorescent application. 5. Compatible with proposed fixtures, ballasts, etc. 6. Single or 3-way operation in same switch. 7. Toroidal RFI filtering. 8. Separate on-off rocker switch. 9. Prescolite Element series, Lightolier Sunrise Preset, Pass & Seymour Titan

Dimmer series, or comparable product by Lithonia.

C. Digital Countdown Time Switches:

1. Ratings: a. 120VAC, 800 watts. b. 277VAC, 1200 watts. c. fluorescent.

2. 4 preset buttons for countdown period selection. 3. User selectable Timeout range from 5 minutes to 12 hours. 4. Adjustable in increments of 5 minutes (up to 1 hour) then 15 minutes (up to 12

hours). 5. Electroluminescent LDC display of time remaining. 6. User selectable audible signal every 5 seconds at 1 minutes prior to timeout. 7. User selectable visual flash of lights at 5 minutes and 1 minute prior to timeout. 8. Compatible with incandescent, fluorescent or inductive motor loads. 9. 5 year manufacturer’s warranty. 10. Watt Stopper Model TS-400. *Color to match adjacent wiring devices, or per

Architect.

D. Electronic Fluorescent Dimmer Switches:

1. Rated 20 ampere, 120/277VAC, fluorescent. 2. Preset, slide dimmer in decora style mounting. 3. On/Off button with LED indicator. 4. Full range 100%-1% dimming, flicker-free operation. 5. Switching at zero crossing of sine wave. 6. Wattage rating as required (600W, 1000W). 7. Color per Architect, to match other wiring devices in area. 8. Compatible with proposed fluorescent dimming ballasts, lamps, etc. 9. Lightolier Sunrise Preset series, Pass & Seymour Titan Dimmer Series, or

comparable product by Prescolite or Lithonia. 2.3 RECEPTACLES

A. Receptacles:

1. Duplex NEMA 5-20R, 120 volt, 20 amp, 3 wire, U-ground. 2. Federal Specification #WS596-F. 3. Lexan or nylon body, metal yokes. 4. Arrow Hart #5362, Leviton #5362, Pass & Seymour 5362A, Hubbell R20 series,

or equal.

B. Emergency Receptacles:

1. Emergency outlets to have RED bodies & cover plates.

C. Ground Fault Interrupting (GFI) Type as indicated.

1. Class A, UL943 listed, feed-thru type.


2. Screw terminal connections. 3. GFCI Receptacles shall have SafeLock protection. If critical components are

damaged and ground fault protection is lost or if mis-wired, power to receptacle is disconnected.

4. End-of-life provision shall render outlet incapable of delivering power upon failure of GFCI function.

5. Reverse Line Mis-wire: receptacle shall not provide power if the hot and neutral wires are reverse wired.

6. Arrow-Hart #GF5342, Pass & Seymour 2095, or comparable product by Hubbell, Cooper, Leviton.

D. Special Receptacles:

1. NEMA configurations per drawings. 2. Specification grade. 3. Lexan or nylon body, metal yokes. 4. Locking or straight-blade configurations, per plans. 5. Leviton V-0-MAX, Arrow Hart, Hubbell, or equal.

E. Tamper Resistant Duplex Receptacle (TR):

1. Duplex NEMA 5-20R, 120 volt, 20 amp, 3 wire, U-ground. 2. Dual spring-loaded shutters to block single object insertion into either H or N

openings. 3. Nylon or lexan body. 4. NEC Article 517-18 compliant. 5. UL Listed as “Tamper Resistant” with identifying "TR" label. 6. Arrow Hart TR82, Pass & Seymour TR5362, or equal.

F. Surge Protection Device /Transient Voltage Surge Suppression Receptacle (SPD/TVSS):

1. Duplex NEMA 5-20R, 120 volt, 20 amp, 3 wire, U-ground. 2. MOV based protection. 3. Protection Modes: L-N, L-G and N-G 4. UL 1449 clamping voltage: 420 volts 5. Maximum single pulse transient current: 13000A (L-N), 6500A (L-G and N-G). 6. RFI and EMI filtration: >> -35dB 7. Visible LED and audible alarm to indicate protection status. 8. Blue body for easy identification. 9. UL 1449 Cat. A, meeting ANSI/IEEE standards. 10. Leviton #8380, Pass & Seymour 8300BLSP or approved equal. 11.

2.4 CONNECTORS

A. Cord Receptacles & Connectors:

1. Spec grade, industrial duty, and impact resistant nylon construction. 2. High visibility yellow exterior. 3. Cord grip to prevent terminal strain. 4. Deep well wire terminals, captive brass screws. 5. Dead front, captive screws, NEMA configuration molded in. 6. Female: deep set, triple wipe brass contacts. 7. Males: Solid brass blades molded into body. 8. Leviton Industrial, or equal.


2.5 DEVICE PLATES & COVERS

A. Single and combination types that mate and match with corresponding wiring devices. Provide for every switch and outlet. Features include the following:

1. Color: Matches wiring device except as otherwise indicated. 2. Plate-Securing Screws: Stainless steel to match plate finish. 3. Material for Finished Spaces: 0.04-inch-thick, type 302, satin-finished stainless

steel with stainless steel screw, except as otherwise indicated. 4. Material for Unfinished Spaces: Galvanized steel. 5. Emergency outlets shall have red lexan or nylon plate with “EMERGENCY”

engraved in front. 6. Arrow-Hart, Leviton, Pass & Seymour, or equal.

B. Weatherproof Covers:

1. Non-Metallic Damp & Wet Location Covers:

a. Non-metallic, polycarbonate. b. Gasketed, self-closing. c. Clear, hinged lift lid. d. Weatherproof during operation per NEC Article 410-57. e. Eagle WeatherBox, Pass & Seymour, or equal.

C. Security/Detention/Prison covers for inmate accessible areas:

1. Plate-Securing Screws: Hardened stainless steel, tamper proof screws (torx-

center pin). 2. Backplate: 10 gauge galvanized steel with offset corners. 3. Wiring device attaches directly to steel backplate (not to outer coverplate). 4. Cover plate: Die formed, 14 gauge CRS with tamperproof securing screws at

each of four corners. 5. Switch coverplates shall have two vertical steel “fins” on each side of each toggle

switch, to protect toggle mechanism from damage 6. Finish: 5-stage polyester or Urethane powder coat. 7. UL Listed. 8. Provide one matching torx center pin driver for every 100 covers installed. 9. Kenall Mighty Mac or New Star Lighting NSH series.

D. Boiler Room Gas or Oil Emergency Shutoff Switches:

1. Factory Labeled: Black letters “EMERGENCY GAS SHUTOFF” or “EMERGENCY

OIL SHUTOFF” as applicable. 2. Color: Red. 3. Material:

a. Finished Areas: Lexan or nylon. b. Unfinished areas: Factory painted stamped steel.



1. Install all equipment plumb and level. 2. Install devices tight to boxes, etc. such that no movement occurs during normal

connecting and disconnecting procedures.


3. Install coverplates tight to surrounding surface. Coverplate shall not provide the only means of support for wiring devices.

B. Rough-in: Unless noted otherwise, the following mounting heights shall be used:

1. Wall receptacles: 18" AFF to center. 2. Counter top receptacles: 6" above counter to bottom of box. 3. Wall switches: 48" AFF to center. 4. Exterior receptacles: 24" above grade. 5. Roof receptacles: 24" above roof surface. 6. Boiler Emerg Off switch: 60" AFF to center. 7. Washer/dryer outlets: 42" AFF to center. 8. Full-size frig/freezer: 42" AFF to center.

C. Ceiling Mounted Outlets:

1. Install all ceiling mounted receptacles as follows:

a. Flush mounted back box, with stainless steel coverplate installed tight to ceiling tile, plaster, or GWB ceiling.

b. Support back box independently of ceiling, with rigid support from structure.

c. Twistlock outlets, unless noted otherwise.

D. Wallbox Dimmer Switches:

1. Install wallbox dimmer switches per manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Mount cooling fins per manufacturer, if applicable. 3. Install adjacent switches in individual backboxes, and with required spacing for

proper operation and cooling.

E. Identification:

1. Permanently identify all equipment in accordance with the project nomenclature. a. General purpose receptacles - identify branch circuit panel and circuit

number on back of coverplate with permanent marker.

F. Tamper Proof Hardware

1. Provide tamper proof hardware for all cover plates, device plates, outlets, switches, etc. installed under this Division where such equipment is accessible to inmates at any time. Such locations are indicated on the contract drawings.



3.3 CLEANING

A. General:

1. Clean all construction debris from within outlet boxes, prior to close up. 2. Remove all paint, joint compound and other marks from devices and coverplates.

END OF SECTION

EASTERN DISTRICT POLICE STATION 16230-1 PACKAGED GENERATOR ASSEMBLIES 28103.01 January 15, 2013

SECTION 16230 - PACKAGED GENERATOR ASSEMBLIES



1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section Includes: 1. Gaseous fuel generator(s). 2. Enclosures. 3. Fuel tanks. 4. Auxiliary equipment.


1. Section “Internal Combustion Engine Exhaust Piping” for coordination with exhaust piping systems, insulation, etc.

2. Section “Pipes and Tubes for Plumbing Piping and Equipment” for coordination with fuel supply piping systems and connections.

3. Section “Common Work Results For Electrical” for concrete pad requirements. 4. Section “Grounding & Bonding For Electrical Systems” for grounding, bonding

and interconnection of equipment. 5. Section “Raceways and Boxes for Electrical Systems” for raceways and conduit

requirements for generator connections, etc. 6. Section “Low Voltage Electrical Power Conductors and Cables” for grounding

conductors and attachments and conductors used of low voltage controls. 7. Section “Transfer Switches” for coordination with power switching and control

equipment.

C. Permits and Fees:

1. Apply, pay for and secure all permits, required by the Authorities Having Jurisdiction prior to start of work, in accordance with contract General Conditions and Division 1.

2. Deliver all certificates to the Owner prior to final acceptance of work. 1.3 REFERENCES

A. ANSI / IEEE:

B. National Equipment Manufacturers Association (NEMA):

1. NEMA Standards of Construction and Testing. 2. NEMA MG-1 Motors and Generators

C. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):

1. UL 508 Industrial Control Equipment 2. UL 2200 Standard for Safety for Stationary Engine Generator Assemblies


1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Engine-generator assembly. 2. Weatherproof enclosure. 3. Sound attenuating enclosure. 4. Engine muffler/silencer. 5. Engine control panel and instrumentation. 6. Remote status panel. 7. Engine jacket heater. 8. Battery charger. 9. Starting batteries. 10. Vibration spring isolators.


1. Clearly indicate or state options, etc.:

a. Manufacturer/cat. number. b. Manufacturer’s options. c. Accessories.

2. Manufacturer's specifications, data sheets. 3. Catalog cuts. 4. Dimensional drawings. 5. Drawing(s) to indicate muffler mounting location (in or on) enclosure). 6. Drawing(s) to indicate exhaust discharge direction and angle, pipe cap, etc. 7. Installation Instructions. 8. Wiring & connection diagrams. Indicate point of connections with other equipment

or systems. 9. Capacity ratings of all components and accessories.. 10. Manufacturer or vendor furnished load/starting calculations. 11. Clearly indicate the exact size or rating proposed.

C. Product Test Reports:

1. Prototype test reports for proposed engine-generator assemblies. 2. Certified copies of manufacturer's design and routine factory tests required by the

referenced standards. 3. Computer load acceptance, starting and running calculations, when requested,

performed by the manufacturer’s authorized vendor. 4. Sound level test results of assembled engine-generator and sound attenuating

enclosure. Demonstrate unenclosed sound levels versus enclosed levels. Provide calculations and test reports from the sound enclosure manufacturer or authorized vendor.

D. Closeout Submittals: Submit in accordance with the General Conditions and Division 1

requirements, spec section “Common Work Results For Electrical”, and as follows:

1. Original load acceptance, starting and running load calculations. 2. All post-installation inspection checklists. 3. Installer’s pre-startup checklist. 4. Post installation load test results. 5. Preventative maintenance schedule for each unit.



A. Manufacturer’s Requirements:

1. Coordinate the components of the system and their arrangements electrically and

mechanically. 2. Manufacturer shall be experienced in manufacturing equipment of the types and

capacities indicated that have a record of successful in-service performance for a minimum of 10 years.

3. Maintain, within 50 miles from site, a maintenance and service organization complete with parts inventory and repair facility. Service shall be available on a 24-hour basis.

4. Start up services and post installation tests, as specified. 5. Preventative Maintenance program as specified.

B. Single-Source Responsibility:

1. The complete performance of the assembled engine generator system, including

all accessories shall be the sole responsibility of the generator supplier. It is the installer’s responsibility to ensure that all factory and field installed accessories and loose components used in the system, meet these specifications, and perform up to the stated and tested standards.

2. For exterior units, the manufacturer shall be responsible for the proper fit and performance of the weatherproof enclosure, exhaust system, including attachment hardware, support of mufflers, etc.

C. Certification and Compliance with Standards: Comply with the following specific Code

and/or Standards requirements, and all other applicable Codes/standards of these agencies or publications.

1. Underwriters Laboratories (UL):

a. UL2200 Listed Generator Assembly, 1) Minimum working space requirements per UL2200. 2) Wire bending space per UL2200 and NEC. 3) Unit shall bear a UL2200 label.

b. UL Listing of loose components, individually, where such standards exist.

2. National Electrical Code (NFPA 70) a. NEC Article 700 Emergency Systems b. NEC Article 701 Legally Required Standby Systems. c. NEC Article 702 Optional Standby Systems.

3. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): a. NFPA 110 Emergency Power Systems


1. Has installed a minimum of five (5) generators of similar size and conditions. 2. Has installed a minimum of three (3) generators manufactured by the proposed

manufacturer.

E. Installation Quality: In accordance with recognized trade organizations and standards.

1. ANSI American National Standards Institute 2. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 3. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers 4. IEEE C2“ National Electrical Safety Code”


5. NEC National Electrical Code 6. NECA National Electrical Contractors Association “Standards of

Installation” 7. NEMA National Electrical Manufacturer’s Association 8. NETA National Electrical Testing Association 9. NFPA National Fire Protection Association 10. UL Underwriter’s Laboratories



1. Provide all transportation of unit(s) to site. 2. Provide for rigging needed for unloading, and setting into final position.


1. Where unit is to be installed indoors, without enclosure, store in covered building

or offsite to prevent exposure to weather, etc. 1.7 PROJECT CONDITIONS

A. The emergency power system level, classification and type shall meet the requirements of NFPA 110, as follows:

1. Level: 1 (critical to Life safety) 2. Classification: Class 2 (2 hour operation) 3. Type: 10 (power restored in 10 seconds)

B. The generator shall be capable of starting and operating the following loads in step

increments under the specified parameters.

C. Step Load 1:

1. Lighting; 6.1 kva, 0.95 pf 2. Misc loads; 2.6 kva, 0.90 pf 3. EF-3; 3hp, .65 pf

D. Step Load 2:

1. Lighting; 23.2 kva, .95pf 2. Receptacle; 16 kva, .85pf 3. RTU-2; 25 amps, .9pf 4. Condensing Unit; 18 amps, .9pf 5. Boiler 1; 10 amps, .87 6. Boiler 2; 10 amps, .87 7. Unit heaters; 2 amps, .87pf 8. CU-3; 16 amps, .87 9. FCU-1: 10 amps, .87

E. Step Load 2:

1. RTU-1; 49 amps, .9pf 2. Pump 1 & 2; 5hp, .85pf 3. Pump 3; 3hp, .85pf


4. Pump 4; 3hp, .85pf 5. Pump 5 & 6; 1/6hp, .68pf 6. Pump 7 & 8; 1/6hp, .68pf 7. Pump 9 & 10; 1/6hp, .68pf

F. Performance Parameters:

1. Max loading 85% of rated generator capacity. 2. Max frequency dip 5%. 3. Starting voltage dip max 25%. 4. Max running voltage dip max 5%.



1. Provide all transportation of unit(s), fuel tanks, enclosures and all components to site.

2. Provide for rigging needed for unloading generators and equipment. 3. Provide all rigging for setting equipment into final position.


1. Store generators and all accessories in covered building or in factory

weatherproof housing to prevent exposure to weather, etc. until building is weathertight and suitable for installation.

2. Maintain unit in factory shrink-wrap or similar protection until installed in final position.

3. After setting in final position, cover unit to protect from construction debris, fireproofing sprays, paint, etc. until ready for connections and startup.

4. Do not install control panels, PLC’s, or other electronic components or systems in buildings unless the room is stabilized with permanent or temporary HVAC and humidity control.

1.9 SEQUENCING


1. Coordinate generator installation with exterior grading, utilities and site construction.

2. Provide for sub-grade rough-ins. 3. Coordinate construction of concrete pads with final grading and underground

utilities. 1.10 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Extended product warranty over and above that required by General Conditions of this contract.

1. Covers complete standby power generation system:

a. Engine. b. Alternator. c. Controls. d. Accessories.


e. Transfer switches. f. Remote annunciation devices.

2. Warranty shall be by the manufacturer or authorized representative. 3. Warranty period of five (5) years or 1500 operating hours, whichever occurs first,

from initial start up. 4. Warranty includes all parts, labor, travel expenses, with no deductibles. 5. Installer shall complete and file all necessary documents to assure fulfillment of

warranty requirements. 6. Deliver warranty documents to Owner in O & M manuals.

1.11 SYSTEM STARTUP

A. Manufacturer's Services: Provide services of a factory-authorized service representative to supervise the field assembly and connection of generator, associated components and accessories, and the pre-startup adjustment of all settings, components and accessories.

1.12 MAINTENANCE

A. Provide all materials and services of factory authorized service company to return at the end of twelve (12) and twenty four (24) months following completion of original contract. Preventative maintenance and testing of each new generator shall be performed at each visit, including, but not limited to the following items:

1. 4 hour full rated load test with test loadbank, as specified previously. 2. Test and adjust all monitoring systems and annunciation devices. 3. Test and adjust all safety, starting and shutdown systems and devices, including

all manual and automatic controls. 4. Test and adjust operation of all associated ATS's, battery chargers, daytanks and

pumps, louvers, etc. 5. Replace all oil, air and coolant filters. Drain and replace associated fluids. 6. Adjust tension on all belts. Replace belts, as needed. 7. Check battery condition, specific gravity, electrolyte level. Add water as needed.

Clean all terminals and connections. Apply anti-corrosion treatment. 8. Make adjustments to engine, fuel and starting systems to insure optimum starting

and running efficiency.

B. Provide a full report on each engine-generator at each adjustment/testing visit listing all maintenance procedures performed, all filter/fluid changes, adjustments, replacements, etc. Report shall also document the load test, indicating, voltages, amperes, oil pressure, alternator amps, engine temperature, battery charging current/voltage, etc. every 15 minutes. Also indicate any changes to the normal readings and at which point it/they occurred.

PART 2 PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide a system by the named “Basis of Design” manufacturer, or a comparable product of one of the other following named manufacturers:

1. Cummins/Onan (Basis of Design) 2. Kohler 3. Generac 4. Caterpillar


2.2 RATINGS AND CONDITIONS

A. The following is based upon ONAN GTA855e

1. KW/kVA @ 0.8 PF: 250/312.5 2. Voltage: 277/480V 3. Phase: 3 φ 4. Wire: 4W

B. Engine Generator Specs:

1. Fuel Consumption @ Full Load: 3440 CFH 2. Housed/Wet Weight: 7466 lbs. 3. Motor Starting kVA: 904 skVA 4. Max. Voltage Dip for skVA 20%

2.3 ENGINE

A. Engine shall be specifically matched to the generator to provide specified performance.

1. Full pressurized lubrication system, gear driven pump. 2. Vertical, multi-cylinder. 3. Manufacturer's nameplate identifying engine type, serial number, etc. for proper

servicing. 4. Factory prototype testing, with test results available. 5. Engine shall not exceed greater than 10% lubricating oil consumption/loss over

100 hours of operation at any load (0-100%). 6. 7. 4 cycle, naturally aspirated, spark ignition. 8. Multi-fuel engine for use of natural gas. 9. Gas shutdown solenoid valve. 10. Gas regulator.

B. Emissions: Provide an engine certified to meet EPA Non-road Source Emissions

Standards, 40 CFR 89, Tier 3 or the appropriate Tier Schedules, based on engine kW and application. Contractor is responsible for providing proper Tier rating, coordination of manufacturing, shipping and startup dates. Owner will not accept incorrect Tier rating due to delays in installation, etc. which affect the required Tier rating.

C. Furnish engine with the following accessories:

1. Replaceable full flow oil filters. 2. Dry type air cleaners. 3. Fuel filter with replaceable element. 4. Battery charging alternator. 5. Isochronous governor to control engine speed. Frequency variation shall not

exceed + 0.25 % for constant loads from 0-100%. Cummins EFC or Woodward DSLC.

6. Heavy duty (24) volt starting system. 7. Gear driven starter motor. Cranking via gear drive. 8. Safety shutdown via control panel. 9. Water cooled oil cooler. 10. Coolant water pumps, centrifugal type, gear driven by engine, starting

simultaneously with engine. System shall be designed for operation up to 125°F without derating.


11. Engine mounted radiator, belt-driven fan, and thermostat. 12. No exposed moving parts. Guards installed on all rotating belts, blades, etc. per

UL2200, “Standard for Safety for Stationary Engine Generator Assemblies.” 13. Jacket water heater, thermostatically controlled, 4 KW (480V/60Hz/1φ) isolation

valves for servicing. Provide disconnect switch at generator. 2.4 GENERATOR

A. Generators shall be rated for continuous standby operation.

1. Heavy duty, single bearing, pre-lubricated type. 2. Temperature Rise: 125°C. 3. Self ventilating via direct drive blower. 4. Maximum speed not greater than 1800 rpm. 5. Flexible coupling of generator shaft to engine flywheel. 6. Self-regulating: Revolving field, 4-pole, brushless AC exciter with rotating

rectifiers or static-exciter regulator assembly. 7. Stator twice impregnated with varnish, skewed to minimize heating and

harmonics. 8. Excitor shall be full-wave rectified with silicon diodes mounted on rotor shaft.

Manual reset circuit breaker shall protect field circuit. 9. Class "H" for 150°C rise over a 40°C ambient, as defined by NEMA Standard

MG1-1.65, “Motors and Generators.” 10. 2/3 pitch. Subtransient Reactance: Maximum of 12%

B. Solid state automatic voltage regulator with manual digital voltage adjustment.

1. Terminal voltage regulation of +0.5% from 0-100% load. 2. Synchronous operation for immunity to SCR tracking. 3. Steady state output voltage maintained at +0.5% of rated voltage from 0-100% 4. Output voltage recovery to +1% of final voltage in less than 4 seconds after

adding/removal 25 % load increments. 2.5 OUTPUT CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. UL Listed output circuit breaker(s) on or at the generator.

1. Thermal magnetic, molded case type. 2. Rating as per drawings. 3. Breaker(s) shall meet requirements of Section “Low Voltage Electrical

Distribution.” 2.6 CONTROLS

A. Integrated Control System: Control shall be via integrated generator set control system

providing governing, voltage regulation, engine protection and operator interfacefunctions. Major features include: 1. Integral AmpSentry™ Protective Relay providing a full range of alternator

protection functions that are matched to the alternator provided. 2. Battery monitoring and testing features and smart starting control system. 3. Three phase sensing, full wave rectified voltage regulation system, with a PWM

output for stable operation with all load types. 4. Standard PCC Net™ and optional Echelon LONWORKS® network interface. 5. Control suitable for operation in ambient temperature from -40 °C to +70 °C (-40

°F to +158 °F) and altitudes to 5000 meters (13,000 feet).


6. Prototype tested; UL, CSA, and CE compliant. 7. Cummins PowerCommand, or approved equal.

B. Operator/display panel:

1. Off/manual/auto mode switch 2. Manual run/stop switch 3. Panel lamp test switch 4. Emergency stop switch 5. Alpha-numeric display with pushbutton access for viewing engine and alternator data

and providing setup, controls and adjustments 6. LED lamps indicating genset running, not in auto, common warning, common

shutdown. 7. Configurable LED lamps (5).

C. Engine protection:

1. Overspeed shut down 2. Low oil pressure warning and shut down 3. High coolant temperature warning and shut down 4. High oil temperature warning (some models) 5. Low coolant level warning or shut down 6. Low coolant temperature warning 7. High and low battery voltage warning 8. Weak battery warning 9. Dead battery shut down 10. Fail to start (overcrank) shut down 11. Fail to crank shut down 12. Redundant start disconnect 13. Cranking lockout 14. Sensor failure indication.

D. Engine data:

1. DC voltage 2. Lube oil pressure 3. Coolant temperature 4. Lube oil temperature (some models) 5. Engine speed AmpSentry.

E. AC protection: 1. Over current and short-circuit shut down 2. Over current warning 3. Single and three phase fault regulation 4. Over and under voltage shut down 5. Over and under frequency shut down 6. Overload warning with alarm contact 7. Reverse power and reverse Var shut down 8. Excitation fault

F. Alternator data:

1. Line-to-line and line-to-neutral AC volts 2. Three phase AC current 3. Frequency 4. Total and individual phase power factor, kW and Kva


G. Other Data:

1. Genset model data 2. Start attempts, starts, running hours 3. kW hours (total and since reset) 4. Fault history 5. Load profile (hours less than 30% and hours more than 90% load)

H. Governing:

1. Digital electronic isochronous governor 2. Temperature dynamic governing 3. Smart idle speed mode 4. Glow plug control (some models)

I. Voltage regulation:

1. Digital PWM electronic voltage regulation 2. Three phase line-to-neutral sensing 3. Suitable for PMG or shunt excitation 4. Single and three phase fault regulation 5. Configurable torque matching

J. Control functions:

1. Data logging on faults 2. Time delay start and cooldown 3. Cycle cranking 4. Configurable customer inputs (4) 5. Configurable customer outputs (4) 6. Remote emergency stop

K. Control Panel:

1. Generator mounted, microprocessor based control panel. 2. Sealed front panel with gasketed doors. 3. Meets requirements of NFPA 99, “Health Care Facilities,” NFPA 110, “Emergency

and Standby Power Systems” for Level 1 systems 4. Dead front type, NEMA 1 construction. 5. Separate customer interconnection/termination box, completely separate from

control panel. 6. Vibration absorbing mountings. 7. Listed under UL 508, and UL2200.

L. Control Panel Functions:

1. Cycle cranking control. 2. Emergency stop switch/button. 3. Idle mode control. 4. Panel backlighting with switch. 5. Reset switch. 6. Run-Off-Auto switch. 7. Lamp test switch. 8. Audible alarm sounder. 9. "NOT IN AUTO" light signal at generator and remote panels whenever if out of


"Automatic" position. 10. Automatic starting controls. 11. Auxiliary Run relays. 12. Common Failure Relays. 13. Spare pre-wired, Form C, dry contacts for remote monitoring, to indicate functions

listed under Remote Monitoring Panel.

M. Standard Gauges, Meters & Warnings:

1. Ammeter (Analog or digital). 2. AC Voltmeter (Analog or digital). 3. Ammeter and voltmeter phase selector switches (L-L, L-N). 4. Voltage adjusting rheostat. 5. Current and potential transformers. 6. Frequency meter (Analog or digital). 7. DC Voltmeter 8. Engine oil pressure gauge. 9. Engine temperature gauge. 10. Running time meter. 11. Indicator lamps for the following:

a. Overcrank b. Low Oil Pressure c. High Engine Temperature d. Overspeed e. Not In Auto f. System Ready g. Low Battery Voltage h. Battery Charger Fault i. Low Fuel j. Pre-Alarm - High Engine Temperature k. Pre-Alarm - Low Oil Pressure l. Low Water Temperature m. Auxiliary Alarm n. Auxiliary Pre-Alarm

N. Starting controls (Initiated via contact closure in ATS):

1. Starting control shall disconnect automatically after firing via speed sensing

switch. 2. Lock out of start control for start failure or any safety shutdown. Manual reset

required. 3. 3 start attempts of 15 seconds cranking each 4. 15 seconds between each attempt. 5. Total actual cranking time for the complete cranking cycle shall be 45 seconds

during a 90 second interval. 6. After the engine has stopped, the cranking control shall reset. 7. OVER-CRANK signal light shall energize, start system shall lock-out and

audio/visual alarm for failure.

O. Automatic Shutdown Controls:

1. Emergency Stop 2. Fail to Crank 3. High AC Voltage 4. High Coolant Temp 5. Low AC Voltage


6. Low Oil Pressure 7. Overcrank 8. Overspeed 9. Short Circuit 10. Underfrequency 11. Low Coolant Level

2.7 REMOTE MONITORING PANEL

A. Solid state remote monitoring panel with audible and LED visual alarm lamps to indicate the following functions:

1. Generator Running 2. Normal Power 3. Low Coolant Temperature (A) 4. High Coolant Temperature (A) 5. Pre-High Coolant Temp. (A) 6. Low Oil Pressure (A) 7. Pre-Low Oil Pressure (A) 8. Overcrank (A) 9. Overspeed (A) 10. Low Battery Voltage 11. Charger Fault (A) 12. Normal Battery Voltage 13. Low Engine Temp. (A) 14. Not in Auto Mode (A) 15. Emergency Stop (A)

(A) indicates audio/visual alarm. Others are visual only.

B. Panel test button shall be provided to check all indicator lights. An audible alarm with

silence button shall warn user of generator trouble in addition to visual lamps. 2.8 BATTERY CHARGER

A. The battery charger shall be furnished as part of the engine/generator package from the manufacturer.

1. NEMA 1 enclosure. 2. Automatic equalize-charge & float modes. 3. DC volt and ammeter. 4. On-Off" control switch. 5. Fused AC input and DC output, with terminals for input and output connections. 6. DC output of 12 or 24 volts, as required. 7. Dry output contacts for AC input or DC output failure. 8. Relays for high and low DC voltage. 9. Inherently self-protected against shorts, overloads and reversed leads. 10. Fuses accessible from the front of the charger.

2.9 BATTERIES

A. For engine starting, provide heavy duty battery.

1. Lead calcium type batteries. 2. 12 or 24 volt as required by engine. 3. Batteries shipped dry.


4. CCA rated per engine manufacturer for 0°F starting. 5. Non-metallic, corrosion resistant rack. 6. All cabling, connections and accessories. 7. Champion, Interstate, Exide, C&D Charter, or equal.

2.10 EXHAUST SYSTEM

A. Coordinate installation with Division “Pipes and Tubes for Plumbing Piping and Equipment” for field piping and connections.

B. Provide exhaust system including silencer, size per generator set manufacturer.

1. Critical (hospital) grade muffler. 2. Maximum noise level of 85 dBA at 300-3000Hz within 10 feet at 100 percent of its

specified KW/kVA rating. 3. Muffler sized per engine manufacturer. 4. Temperature warning labels on all surfaces which might exceed 158°F. 5. Exhaust gas leakage shall not exceed UL558, “Standard for Industrial Trucks,” for

the entire exhaust system. 6. Spark box for naturally aspirated engines.

C. Exhaust system components not furnished by the manufacturer shall be of the same

construction and quality as those sections furnished by same. 2.11 WEATHERPROOF ENCLOSURE

A. The generator set shall be housed in a weatherproof outdoor housing as follows:

1. Welded and bolted, reinforced sheet steel. 2. Weatherproof enclosure, electrostatically painted with paint inside and out. 3. Inspection doors located for access to control equipment and maintenance points. 4. Doors with continuous piano hinge (on units up to 350 KW) and key locking

handles. 5. Expanded metal louvers for air intake and radiator. 6. Exhaust piping and silencer mounting sealed or flanged to insure a weatherproof

installation. 7. Enclosure bolted to the generator set base. 8. Two lifting eyes. 9. Sized to house the various control components herein specified. Mounting of

components shall be accomplished in such a way that vibration effect is not an inherent problem.

2.12 SOUND ATTENUATING ENCLOSURE

A. Custom designed and constructed housing to enclose generator set, protect from weather and attenuate noise.

1. Weatherproof aluminum enclosure enclosing control panel, battery charger, circuit

breaker and all other generator-mounted devices. 2. Inspection doors located at all control and maintenance points. 3. Doors with full-height, continuous piano hinges, gasketing and key locking

handles. 4. Expanded metal louvers or hoods shall be located for cooling air inlet. 5. One-piece roof construction with provisions for exhaust pipe penetration. 6. Minimum of two lifting eyes shall be provided for hoisting of enclosure only. 7. A steel perimeter frame shall be provided for mounting onto the generator set skid


rails.

B. Sound attenuation enclosure shall be Quiet Level 2 2.13 VIBRATION CONTROL

A. Spring Isolators: spring type, vibration isolators with internal leveling bolts and ribbed rubber sound pads. The vibration isolators shall be Isolation Technology, Inc. Series C Vibro-Isolators, or equal.

2.14 FLUIDS

A. All fluids of type and rating per engine manufacturer:

1. Engine oil. 2. Ethylene Glycol Coolant with corrosion inhibitors.

2.15 WARNING LIGHTS

A. Provide two warning lights on exterior of generator housing, such that they are clearly visible from public areas. Lights shall consist of two stacked modules, one green and one red. Green light shall illuminate (steady illumination) whenever generator is running. Red light shall illuminate (flashing) for any alarm or trouble with generator or controls.

B. Green lights shall be 120 volt, steady burning, and weatherproof devices. Each light shall

contain a replaceable 12 watt lamp halogen lamp with 360 degree colored lens. Provide Federal Signal AdaptaBeacon # 104SINHG-N5. or equal mounted on 1/2" RGS conduit 6 inches above housing.

C. Red warning lights shall be 120 volt, red, flashing strobe, weatherproof devices. Each

light shall contain a strobe lamp, with 360 degree colored red lens. Provide Federal Signal AdaptaBeacon #104STR-N5, or equal mounted on 1/2" RGS conduit 6 inches above housing.

D. Power connections shall be made to the 120VAC battery charger branch circuit. Provide

contacts/relays for specified operation of lights. 2.16 REMOTE EMERGENCY SHUTDOWN SWITCH

A. Description: Remote Emergency Shutdown Switch for shut down of generator from each ATS location.

1. Mounted adjacent to ATS within each building’s electrical room. 2. With all required wiring, contacts, and interface for interrupting generator “run”

circuit to cause immediate engine/generator shutdown. 3. Yellow lexan housing, surface mounting. 4. Maintained position, red pushbutton (Turn to reset). PUSH label on center of

button. 5. Label as EMERGENCY GENERATOR SHUTOFF 6. Safety Technology International, Inc. #SS2-2-3-1, or equal.

2.17 CONCRETE EQUIPMENT PADS


A. As specified in Section "Common Work Results For Electrical.”


A. Site Verification of Conditions: Examine the conditions under which the equipment shall be delivered, installed, and operated. Make all allowances required for operation and maintenance of the equipment, per Codes and manufacturer.

3.2 INSTALLATION


1. Install all equipment, as indicated. 2. Maintain minimum working space at live parts according to manufacturer’s written

instructions. Provide all required access space per NEC for controls, fuses and items requiring maintenance access.

B. Rough-in:

1. Rough-in all underslab or below grade conduits, ducts, etc. prior to setting

generator in place. 2. Coordinate exact stub-ups with proposed manufacturer’s equipment installation

drawings. 3. Rough-in for all required circuits, controls, connections, etc. as required by

proposed equipment, even if not explicitly indicated on plans.

C. Generator Assembly:

1. Provide concrete foundation/equipment pad or housekeeping pad, per Section “Common Work Results For Electrical.”

2. Mount generator assembly steel skid, including sub-base tank where applicable, on a minimum of four spring type vibration isolators.

3. Provide ribbed rubber sound pads between vibration isolators and concrete. 4. Securely bolt spring isolators to concrete pad. 5. Adjust internal isolator leveling bolts for level installation. 6. Maintain 42" minimum width around entire generator set for maintenance access. 7. Construct concrete pads such that pad is a minimum of 6 inches above

surrounding grade. 8. Coordinate conduit and fuel line stub-ups within generator frame and/or sub-base

tank. No conduit is permitted outside of generator footprint. 9. Install generator so as to direct radiator airflow away from buildings, fences, walls,

etc. Maintain clear airflow for a minimum of 10 LF, or as per manufacturer. 10. Install exhaust discharge parallel to ground in same direction as radiator

discharge, or vertically upward, per drawings. 11. Ensure that all service access doors can be fully opened for access. 12. Seal all penetrations for conduit, piping, exhaust, etc. to maintain weatherproof

and/or sound attenuating properties.

D. Generator Exhaust:

1. Install flexible stainless steel exhaust coupling for first 18" between engine connection and silencer.

2. Install such that no exhaust system weight is supported by the turbocharger or generator.


3. Provide condensate drain with manual valve on muffler. 4. Provide flanges, gaskets, fittings, connectors, brackets and piping as required. 5. Provide insulation on exhaust system, as specified in Division 15. 6. Provide corrosion resistant rain cap on vertical discharge pipe tip. 7. For horizontal discharges, provide 45 degree backward slant cut on pipe tip.

E. Generator Fuel Line Connections:

1. Provide flexible stainless steel fuel lines in within first 18" between engine and all

rigid fuel supply and/or return line(s), sub-base tanks, skid mounted day-tanks, or 2. Complies with NFPA 58, “LP Gas Code,” NFPA 54, “National Fuel Gas Code,” as

applicable for gaseous engines. 3. UL Listed flexible gas lines for gaseous fuel units.

F. Fluids: Provide all fluids of type and rating per engine manufacturer, for initial starting,

testing and final delivery to Owner including:

1. Engine oil. 2. Completely fill entire system including radiator and all piping with coolant and

softened water in 50:50 ratio. Add corrosion inhibitor. 3. Fuel oil (provide as required for startup and testing, and completely fill storage

tanks, sub-base tank, and/or all daytanks prior to delivery to owner.

G. Electrical Accessories:

1. Provide local disconnecting means for all generator accessories for servicing, to comply with NEC: a. Battery Chargers - provide toggle switch. b. Jacket Heaters - provide non-fused safety switch.

H. Starting Batteries:

1. Fill dry battery cells with distilled water per manufacturer’s instructions. 2. Provide hold-downs for each battery cell to prevent movement. 3. Apply spray-on corrosion inhibitor with red dye to all battery terminals.

I. Remote Equipment: Install all remote equipment, as specified, indicated on contract

drawings, or required for proper operation of generator system. Provide all raceways, wiring, connections, testing of remote equipment:

1. Remote Monitoring Panels. 2. Emergency Generator Stop Buttons. 3. Connections to sensors and other equipment displayed and/or monitored by the

generator control system and status panel. a. Fuel leak detection sensors. b. High/low fuel level sensors. c. Daytank alarms. d. Battery charger failure.

4. Connections to automatic transfer switch(es) connected to the generator control system. a. Engine start/stop controls.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION

A. Connections to Existing Work:


1. Provide connections between generator and existing: a. Auto transfer switch(es). b. Panelboards, switchboards, etc. c. Fire alarm system. d. Fuel system.

B. Interface with Other Work:

1. Provide connections between generator and other work of this contract:

a. Auto transfer switch(es). b. Panelboards, switchboards, etc. c. Fire alarm system. d. Fuel oil system. e. Exhaust piping system.

C. Sequences of Operation: Where multiple automatic transfer switches are coupled to a

single generator, the starting control system shall be such that Engine Start contacts at any transfer switch will start the engine. Engines shall not shut down until all associated transfer switches have transferred back to normal source and all cool-down time delays have expired.

3.4 GROUNDING & BONDING

A. Connections: Ground generators, frame and enclosures per NEC Article 250, “Grounding” and as specified in Section “Grounding & Bonding for Electrical Systems.”

B. Ground generator system as follows:

1. Connect alternator equipment ground lug to generator frame and housing. 2. Provide grounding electrode conductor to bond generator ground bus to the

building ground system through the ATS ground lug. 3. Driven ground rod at the generator location for grounding frame and housing. 4. All sizes shall be as per NEC or as indicated on drawings, whichever is larger.

C. Provide a non-separately derived system:

1. The generator neutral bus shall be isolated from the generator ground and frame. 2. The size of the neutral conductor from the neutral bus to the circuit breaker shall

equal the size of the neutral conductor indicated on the plans on the load side of the circuit breaker.

3. Solidly connect this neutral to the normal AC power neutral conductor at the ATS isolated neutral bus.


A. Restore all finishes, equipment, surfaces and/or grade to original condition, where affected by the work of this section.


A. Independent Testing Agency: Provide services of an independent electrical testing agency, according to the requirements of Section "Quality Control” to perform tests on generator installations.

B. Test Objectives: To ensure generator installation complies with Contract Documents, is

operational within industry and manufacturer's tolerances, is adjusted to specific project


parameters, and is suitable for energizing.

C. Site Tests:

1. Schedule tests and provide notification at least one week in advance of test commencement.

2. Pre-Startup Testing: After completing system installation, perform the following preparations for tests: a. Make insulation-resistance tests for generator, output breaker(s). b. Make continuity tests of windings and remote alarm circuits. c. Provide a set of Contract Drawings to the testing agency. d. Provide manufacturer's installation and testing instructions to the testing

agency. e. Provide complete shop drawing data on all equipment.

3. Start-Up Services: a. The complete installation shall be initially started and checked for

operational compliance by factory trained manufacturer's representative(s).

b. Inspect accessible components for cleanliness, mechanical, and electrical integrity, for presence of damage or deterioration, and to ensure removal of temporary shipping bracing. Do not proceed with tests until deficiencies are corrected.

c. Inspect bolted electrical connections for tightness according to manufacturer's published torque values or, where not available, those of Standards 486A, “Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors.”

d. All settings, as specified in this section, shall be properly set and verified by start-up personnel.

e. Provide a written start-up and testing checklist, which verifies all settings and features are properly set and functioning. Written report shall indicate final setting of all adjustable features.

4. Generator Tests: After installing generator, perform the following tests, at a minimum: a. Phase rotation. Matched to load requirements. b. All protective and shutdown features tested. c. Complete integrated test of generator and automatic transfer switch and

control. d. Specified pickup, dropout, transfer, retransfer, engine start and cool

down, and exercise timer settings. e. Operation of transfer and retransfer operation, including failure of

emergency source. f. Operation of auxiliary contacts and devices. g. Operation of all gauges, displays and control equipment. h. Ground-Fault Systems: Perform inspections and tests stated in NETA

ATS, Section 7.14.

D. Remove and replace malfunctioning components with new, and retest.

E. Test Failures: Compare test results with specified performance or manufacturer's data. Correct deficiencies identified by tests and retest.

F. Load Testing:

1. Schedule and perform a post-installation load test to demonstrate the load

capacity of the unit. Installer shall be present during the start-up and testing. Notify Owner and Architect at least one week in advance of start up/test date.


2. A resistive load bank shall be used to test the generator. a. Load generator to nameplate rating. b. Maintain records for duration of test. Record: c. Time of day. d. Ambient air temperature e. Coolant temperature. f. Cranking time to start. g. Output voltage, frequency, current. h. Oil pressure. i. Battery charger rate at 5 minute intervals for the first 15 minutes and at

15 minute intervals thereafter. j. Load test shall be run as follows, recording load changes and the result

on voltage and frequency. k. 25% rated load for 20 minutes l. 50% rated load for 20 minutes m. 75% rated load for 20 minutes n. 100% rated load for 3 hours

3. Following running load test, allow generator to run unloaded for a cool down period of 5 minutes.

4. After shutdown and another 5 minute period (not running), apply full rated load (nameplate KW). Apply load in one increment of 100% full load pick-up immediately upon reaching rated RPM. Test shall be run at full load for 30 minutes. Allow all proper cool down periods.

3.7 ADJUSTING

A. General:

1. Set all field adjustable parameters to those as specified. 3.8 CLEANING

A. Inspect interior and exterior of installed generators and enclosures. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish.

3.9 DEMONSTRATION

A. Training: Arrange and pay for the services of a factory-authorized service representative to demonstrate generator and accessories and train Owner's staff. Include a minimum of 8 hours of training in operation and maintenance. Provide both classroom training and hands-on equipment operation covering the following:

1. Safety precautions. 2. Features and construction of project equipment and accessories. 3. Routine inspection, test and maintenance procedures. 4. Routine cleaning. 5. Changing of filters, fluids, etc. 6. Features, operation, and maintenance of unit and protective devices. 7. Interpretation of readings of indicating and alarm devices. 8. Coordination with transfer switch(es). 9. Ground fault protection systems.

B. Schedule training with at least 7 days' advance notice.


END OF SECTION

EASTERN DISTRICT POLICE STATION 16440-1 LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION 28103.01 January 15, 2013

SECTION 16440 - LOW VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL DISTRIBUTION PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY

A. Section includes:

1. Panelboards. 2. Enclosed and automatic circuit breakers. 3. Elevator Main Line Disconnects. 4. Contactors. 5. Disconnect switches. 6. Surge Protective Devices (SPD) 7. Metering equipment. 8. Other distribution and/or control equipment.


1. Section “Common Work Results For Electrical” for concrete pads, labeling, and

other general requirements. 2. Section “Low Voltage Power Conductors and Cables” for conductors. 3. Section “Grounding & Bonding For Electrical Systems” for grounding and bonding

requirements. 1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. Current Transformer cabinets. 2. Enclosed and automatic circuit breakers. 3. Elevator Main Line Disconnects. 4. Surge Protective Devices (SPD) 5. Pushbutton operators. 6. Safety Disconnect Switches. 7. Magnetic Contactors. 8. Panelboards.

B. Product data: Include dimensions, construction, materials, performance data, etc.

C. Provide submittal data for each product type.

1. To verify specifications have been met/exceeded. 2. Independent laboratory test data where requested. 3. Clearly indicate or state all options, etc.:

D. Submit the following for each Surge Protective Device:

1. Manufacturer/cat. number. 2. UL Listed and labeled per UL 1449 3rd Edition and UL 1283. 3. Designation Type of the SPD and Type 1 Device Listing


4. Indicate surface or integral panel/switchboard mounting. 5. System voltage & configuration. 6. Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR) 7. Voltage Protection Ratings (VPRs) for all modes 8. Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage rating (MCOV) 9. I-nominal rating (I-n) 10. Indicate options and/or accessories. 11. Suppression circuit design and components. 12. Proof of manufacturer’s 5 year warranty. 13. Manufacturer’s installation instruction manual. 14. Manufacturer’s recommended wire and breaker sizes clearly identified and

marked. 15. Clearly identify manufacturer’s required external OCP breaker or fuse ratings. 16. Additional information to show compliance with specifications or drawings. 17. Shop drawings including and 1-line drawings detailing dimensions and weight of

enclosure, internal wiring diagram illustrating all modes of protection in each type of SPD required, wiring diagram showing all field connections.

E. Submit the following for each panelboard:

1. Manufacturer/cat. number. 2. Surface or flush mounting. 3. Main lugs or breaker ratings. 4. Integral surge protection devices (SPD). 5. Special lug configurations (double main lugs, feed through lugs, etc.). 6. Non-linear ratings, oversized neutrals, etc. 7. Specific listing of all installed breakers, spares and spaces, including installed

position within panel or switchboard. 8. Interrupting rating of components and assemblies. 9. Bus materials and ratings. 10. Additional information to show compliance with specifications or drawings.

F. Submit the following for each switchboard:

1. Manufacturer/catalog number. 2. Elevation showing dimensions and sections. 3. 1-line diagram showing all components, connections, accessories, etc. 4. Incoming or metering sections. 5. Auxiliary wiring sections, as required. 6. Main lugs, switch, or breaker ratings. 7. Customer metering equipment. 8. Integral surge protection devices (SPD). 9. Specific listing of all installed breakers, spares and spaces, including installed

position within panel or switchboard. 10. Interrupting rating of components and assemblies. 11. Bus materials and ratings. 12. Full scale log-log graph of fuse or breaker curves, when requested. 13. Complete information for all adjustable features, settings, etc. Include setting

range and factory setting. 14. Ground fault protection system information including adjustable settings, ranges

and factory settings. 15. Additional information to show compliance with specifications or drawings.

G. Product Test Reports: Certified copies of manufacturer's design and routine factory tests



H. Closeout Submittals: Submit in accordance with the General Conditions and Division 1 requirements, Section “Common Work Results For Electrical”, and as follows:

1. All post-installation inspection checklists. 2. Installer’s pre-startup checklist. 3. Post installation load test results. 4. Preventative maintenance schedule for each unit.



1. The Terms “Listed and Labeled”: As defined in the National Electrical Code, Article 100.

2. Listing and Labeling Agency Qualifications: A “Nationally Recognized Testing Laboratory” (NRTL) as defined in OSHA Regulation 1910.7.

3. Where equipment consists of multiple components, the entire assembly or product shall be UL Listed and Labeled, or Labeled by a testing organization acceptable to the Authority Having Jurisdiction per the NEC.


1. The complete performance of assembled panelboards and/or switchboards,

including all integral accessories, shall be the sole responsibility of the equipment supplier. It is the installer’s responsibility to ensure that all factory and field installed accessories and loose components used in the system, meet these specifications, and perform up to the stated and tested standards.

C. Manufacturer/Vendor Requirements:





4. Start up services and post installation tests, as specified. 5.


1. Has installed a minimum of five (5) switchboards of similar size and conditions. 2. Has installed a minimum of three (3) switchboards manufactured by the proposed

manufacturer.


1. ANSI American National Standards Institute 2. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 3. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 4. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers 5. IEEE C2 “National Electrical Safety Code” 6. NEC National Electrical Code 7. NECA National Electrical Contractor’s Association “Standards of

Installation”.


8. NEMA National Equipment Manufacturers Association 9. NETA National Electrical Testing Association 10. NFPA National Fire Protection Association 11. UL Underwriter’s Laboratories



1. Provide all transportation of equipment to site. 2. Provide for rigging needed for unloading, and setting large panels or

switchboards into final position.


1. Where unit is to be installed indoors, without enclosure, store in covered building or offsite to prevent exposure to weather, etc.

2. Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer’s recommendations within enclosure of each switchgear or switchboard section throughout periods during which equipment is not energized and is not under normal control of temperature and humidity.


A. Electrical service to the facility:

1. 480Y/277 volt. 2. 3 phase, 4 wire. 3. Grounded wye.

1.7 SEQUENCING


1. Coordinate panelboard and switchboard installation with exterior and/or interior construction.

2. Provide for sub-grade or subslab roughins. 3. Coordinate construction of concrete pads with switchboard location. 4. Provide positioning and roughins such that required clearances are maintained

after final installation. 1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Extended product warranty over and above that required by General Conditions of this contract.**-

1. Surge Protective Devices:

a. Warranty shall be by the SPD manufacturer. 2. Warranty period of five (5) years from initial start up. 3. Warranty includes all parts, labor, travel expenses, with no deductibles. 4. Installer shall complete and file all necessary documents to assure fulfillment of


PART 2 PRODUCTS


2.1 MANUFACTURER


1. C/T Cabinets:

a. Approved for use by BGE for use on BGE systems. b. Hoffman Enclosures c. S.A.R. Sheetmetals d. Meter Devices, Inc. e. Atlantic Sheet Metal f. Square D

2. Automatic Circuit Breakers: a. Square D/Schneider Electric (basis of design) b. General Electric c. Siemens d. Cutler-Hammer

3. Surge Protective Devices: a. Advanced Protection Technologies, Inc. (basis of design) b. Current Technology c. Liebert d. Square D/Schneider Electric e. Siemens

4. Safety Disconnect Switches: a. Square D/Schneider Electric (basis of design) b. General Electric c. Siemens d. Cutler-Hammer

5. Contactors: a. Square D/Schneider Electric (basis of design) b. General Electric c. Siemens d. Cutler-Hammer

6. Panelboards: a. Square D/Schneider Electric (basis of design) b. General Electric c. Siemens d. Cutler-Hammer

2.2 CURRENT TRANSFORMER CABINETS

A. Current transformer (C/T) cabinet for power company’s metering equipment.

1. NEMA 3R cabinet. 2. UL Listed, Labeled “For Use on BGE Systems”. 3. Hinged doors with sealing studs. 4. Approved for use, and in accordance with BGE standards. 5. Rated 300 through 3000 amps of load. 6. 3-sided trough below for incoming conductors.

2.3 CABLE TAP BOX

A. Cable tap box cabinet for terminating power company’s incoming service conductors and tapping for feeding service equipment via individual feeders.


1. NEMA 1 cabinet. 2. UL Listed, Labeled. 3. Hinged doors with locking provisions. 4. Predrilled, aluminum bus bars for phases, neutral and ground conductors. 5. Standard NEMA hole configurations. 6. Hydraulic crimped, 2-hole lugs to accommodate a minimum of eight (8) incoming

sets per phase and eight (8) outgoing sets per phase of up to 500 MCM conductors.

7. Rated 2000 amps, continuous at 600VAC. 2.4 AUTOMATIC CIRCUIT BREAKERS

A. UL Listed, automatic circuit breakers for installation within panelboards and switchboards, or with enclosed cabinets and trim.

B. Circuit breakers:

1. Molded case, thermal magnetic, inverse time. 2. Ratings as per drawings. 3. Adjustable magnetic trip settings for breakers >>225 amps. 4. Accessories, as noted.

a. Mechanical kirk key interlocking. b. Shunt trip. c. Undervoltage trip. d. Solid state trip for ground fault, long time pick-up and delay, short time

pick-up and delay and instantaneous settings where indicated. 5. In elevator machine rooms:

a. For elevator motor disconnects. b. NEMA 12 enclosure with externally operable handle. c. Handle padlockable only in the "OFF" position. d. 120 VAC shunt trip for operation from heat detectors. e. Auxiliary contacts to operate with main contacts (open when breaker is

OFF). (Used for operation of battery lowering systems). 6. UL Listed Service Entrance use, where required. 7. Rated for 3φ delta systems where applicable. 8. Square D, or approved equal.

C. Ground Fault Interrupter (GFI) branch breakers:

1. Installed in branch circuit panelboards, where indicated. 2. Single or two pole, per panel schedule. 3. Class A protection, 6 mA trip for receptacle circuits. 4. Equipment ground fault protection, 30mA trip for heat trace or other non-

receptacle circuits.

D. Enclosure and trim:

1. NEMA 1 enclosure, unless noted otherwise. 2. Deadfront cover. 3. Padlock provisions for locking breaker handle in ON or OFF position. 4. Rust-inhibiting phosphatized primer. 5. Factory finish paint (ANSI 61 gray).

2.5 ELEVATOR MAIN LINE DISCONNECTS


A. UL Listed, automatic circuit breakers or fusible disconnect switches for installation within elevator machine rooms, with enclosed cabinets and trim, serving as main line disconnect for elevator(s).

B. General: 1. UL Listed, dead-front device, providing overcurrent and short circuit protection of

elevator motor. 2. Meets all requirements of NEC Article 620. 3. ANSI/ASME compliant for elevator main line disconnects. 4. Handle padlockable only in the "OFF" position. 5. Form C Auxiliary contacts to operate with main contacts (open when device is

OFF). (Used for operation of battery lowering systems). 6. Provides for shunt trip voltage monitoring.

C. Circuit breaker Disconnects:

1. Molded case, thermal magnetic, inverse time. 2. Ratings as per drawings. 3. Adjustable magnetic trip settings for breakers > 225 amps. 4. NEMA 12 enclosure with externally operable handle. 5. 120 VAC shunt trip for operation via fire alarm relay (heat detector activated). 6. Square D, or approved equal.

2.6 SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES

A. Minimum Design Standards, latest editions:

1. UL 1449 3rd Ed., “Surge Protective Devices” 2. UL 1283, “Standard for Electromagnetic Interference Filters Listed.” 3. ANSI/IEEE C62.33, “Standard Test Specifications for Varistor Surge-Protective

Devices.” 4. ANSI/IEEE C62.41, “Recommended Practice for Surge Voltages in Low-Voltage

AC Power Circuits.” 5. ANSI/IEEE C62.45, “Guide on Surge Testing for Equipment Connected to

Low-Voltage (1000 V and Less) AC Power Circuits.” 6. ANSI/NFPA 70, “National Electrical Code Article 285.”

B. Surge Protection:

1. SPD shall provide surge current paths for all modes of protection: L-N, L-G, and

N-G for Wye systems; L-L, L-G in Delta and impedance grounded Wye systems.

2. Minimum surge current capability (single pulse rated) per phase shall be: a. Service Panels/Swbd 200,000 A per phase b. Branch Panels 100,000 A per phase

3. UL 1449 Listed Voltage Protection Ratings (VPRs) shall not exceed the following: System Voltage L-N L-G L-L N-G 208Y/120 700V 700V 1200V 700V 480Y/277 1200V 1200V 1800V 1200V

4. UL 1449 Listed Maximum Continuous Operating Voltage (MCOV): System Voltage Allowable System Voltage Fluctuation (%) MCOV 208Y/120 25% 150V 480Y/277 15% 320V

5. SPD shall be UL labeled with 200kA Short Circuit Current Rating (SCCR). Fuse

ratings shall not be considered in lieu of demonstrated withstand testing of SPD,


per NEC 285.6. SPD shall be UL labeled as Type 1 (intended for use without need for external or supplemental overcurrent controls. Every suppression component of every mode, including N-G, shall be protected by internal overcurrent and thermal overtemperature controls. SPDs relying upon external or supplementary installed safety disconnects do not meet the intent of this specification.

6. SPD shall be UL labeled with 20kA I-nominal (I-n) for compliance to UL 96A Lightning Protection Master Label and NFPA 780.

7. SPD shall include a serviceable, replaceable module (excluding Branch Panel SPD’s).

C. EMI/RFI Filtering:

1. SPD shall have UL 1283 EMI/RFI filtering with minimum attenuation of -50dB at

100kHz. 2. Protection for common and normal mode noise.

D. Construction:

1. Stand-alone or integral panelboard/switchboard mounting, per drawings. 2. Separate enclosure mounting:

a. Unfinished areas: Surface mounted NEMA 1 steel enclosure, piano hinged cover.

b. Exterior installations: c. NEMA 4 gasketed housing, or SPD panel installed in NEMA 4 outer

housing. d. Integral main fused disconnect switch, service entrance rated.

3. SPD shall be provided with integral disconnect switch when 3-pole breaker is not available for connecting the suppressor

E. Internal connections:

1. Connected in parallel with wiring system. 2. All internal wiring subject to surge currents shall utilize low-impedance copper bus

bar and/or minimum #4 AWG copper conductor. 3. Compression solderless-type lugs bolted to bus bars. 4. No quick-disconnect terminals or PC boards permitted in surge current-carrying

paths. 5. Externally visible status LED's (Green – OK, Red-Service), 1 pair per phase. 6. Audible alarm sounder for module failure. 7. Test/silence switch for LED’s/audible alarm. 8. Integral test point for off-line diagnostic testing. 9. 1 set of NO/NC dry contacts (Service Entrance switchboard or service entrance

panelboard applications only) 10. Surge event counter with back up power source (Service Entrance switchboard or

service entrance panelboard applications only)

F. Manufacturer’s Warranty:

1. Five year unlimited module or unit replacement.

G. Manufacturer:

1. Advanced Protection Technologies, Inc., or comparable product by previously named manufacturers. Basis of Design is the following APT models: a. Service Entrance application: XAS20 series.


b. Distribution Panels: XDS15 series. c. Branch Panels: XDS10 series.

2.7 EMERGENCY FUEL SHUTOFF SWITCH

A. Description: Emergency Fuel Shutoff Switch for shut down of all fuel dispensing pumps.

1. Location as approved by local Authority. 2. With all required relays, wiring, N.C. contacts, switches, and interface for

interrupting power to fuel dispensing equipment by interrupting power circuits. 3. Red lexan housing, semi-flush mounting. 4. Maintained position pushbutton (Turn to reset). PUSH label on center of button. 5. Label as FUEL SHUTOFF. 6. Top-hinged, clear lexan cover to discourage tampering. Weatherproof mounting,

as required. 7. Safety Technology International, Inc. #SS2-0-5-1, or equal.

2.8 EMERGENCY POWER OFF SWITCH

A. Description: Emergency Power Off (EPO) Switch for shut down of all equipment in the area, room, etc.

1. Location(s) as indicated on the drawings. 2. With all required relays, wiring, contacts, switches, and interface for interrupting

power to computers, manufacturing equipment, etc. via contactors or shunt trip circuits, as indicated.

3. Yellow lexan housing, semi-flush mounting. 4. Maintained position, red pushbutton (Turn to reset). PUSH label on center of

button. 5. Label as EMERGENCY SHUTOFF 6. Top-hinged, clear lexan cover to discourage tampering. 7. Safety Technology International, Inc. #SS2-2-3-1, or equal.

2.9 ELEVATOR SHUNT TRIP TEST BUTTONS

A. Shunt trip test pushbutton stations for testing operation of shunt trip breakers serving elevator feeders. Provide one test button for each shunt trip breaker.

1. Pushbutton operators, contact blocks, & mounting base. 2. Rated 120V, momentary contacts. 3. Recessed mounting in finished areas. 4. 1" diameter, black pushbutton with metal ring guard. 5. Contact blocks with (1) N.O. and (1) N.C. rated 10 Amps. 6. Square D, or equal.

2.10 SAFETY DISCONNECT SWITCHES

A. Provide safety disconnect switches as shown on the drawings and where required by the National Electrical Code.

1. Horsepower rated for motor applications. 2. Solid neutral terminals where applicable. 3. Shielded phase conductor terminals. 4. Heavy duty type; 200kA Interrupting rating. 5. Enclosure ratings (unless indicated otherwise):

a. NEMA 1 for interior.


b. NEMA 3R for exterior, damp, or wet locations, on roof or on grade. 6. Cover interlock to prevent operation with cover open. 7. Rejection feature (Class R) fuses, for fused units. 8. Externally operated, with all current carrying parts silver or tin plated. Side

handle, quick-make, quick-break operation. 9. Padlockable, minimum of 2. 10. Disconnects for boilers shall comply with ASME CSD-1-1998, “Controls & Safety

Devices for Automatically Fired Boilers.” 11. Square D, or comparable product by previously named manufacturers.

2.11 LIGHTING CONTACTORS

A. UL listed for tungsten, fluorescent and/or HID ballast lighting application, 600 VAC.

1. Electrically operated, electrically held. 2. 120V control power transformer with prim/sec fusing. 3. 120 volt coil, controlled as indicated. 4. Number of poles per drawings. 5. Minimum 30 Amp rating without derating for load. 6. Enclosure: NEMA 1 for dry, indoor areas; NEMA 3R for damp, wet or exterior

locations. 7. HOA switch installed on enclosure door. 8. Square D, or comparable product by previously named manufacturers.

2.12 PANELBOARDS

A. UL Listed, factory assembled, circuit breaker panelboards with cabinets and trim, branch breakers.

B. Enclosure and trim:

1. NEMA 1 enclosure unless noted otherwise. 2. Front-hinged door with lock.

a. All panels keyed alike. b. Factory finish paint (ANSI 61 gray) on all surfaces. c. Rust-inhibiting phosphatized primer. d. Provide minimum (2) keys per lock.

3. Galvanized back box. 4. Recessed or surface mounting as indicated.

C. Ratings:

1. Fully rated interrupting ratings as per schedules. 2. UL Listed for Service Entrance, where applicable.

a. Provide neutral to ground bonding. 3. Amp ratings as per drawing schedules.

D. Construction:

1. Main lugs or breaker per drawing schedules. 2. Main breakers with additional line side lugs or termination lugs for connection of

line side Type 1 SPD. 3. All phase, neutral and ground bus bars shall be copper 4. Interior equipment ground bar bonded to enclosure. Fully sized per NEC and UL,

with sufficient lugs to accommodate all incoming and outgoing equipment


grounding conductors. 5. Bolt-on branch breakers, unless noted.

a. Use of connecting links, bars, etc. not permitted. 6. Sequence (A-B-C) bussing. 7. Double width panels for >> 42 poles.

a. Separate back boxes and front cover for each section. b. Poles equally divided between sections.

8. Molded case, thermal magnetic branch and main breakers.

E. Non-Linear Panelboards - Additional Requirements:

1. Provide for panels, as indicated on plans or schedules. 2. 200% neutral bus. 3. Lugs to accommodate 200% neutral feeder conductor(s). 4. Square D type NQOD-NL or NF-NL as required.

F. Accessories:

1. Typewritten directory on panel door interior. 2. Internal or external SPD protection, for panels indicated on drawing riser diagram.

G. Panelboard types (Square D models, or comparable product by previously named

manufacturers):

1. 277/480V distribution (600A) I-Line 2. 277/480V branch circuit (<<500A) NF 3. 120/208V distribution (<<600A) NQOD 4. 120/208V branch circuit NQOD

2.13 DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARD

A. Circuit breaker type distribution panelboard (drawings may indicate "switchboard") with circuit breaker branch circuit devices.

B. Enclosure and trim:

1. NEMA 1, dead front enclosure, unless noted otherwise. 2. Factory assembled frame and cover plates. 3. Front-hinged door(s) with lock.

a. All panels keyed alike. b. Provide minimum (2) keys per lock.

4. Galvanized back box. 5. Factory finish painted front cover (ANSI 61 gray). 6. Recessed or surface mounting as indicated.

C. Ratings:

1. Fully rated interrupting ratings as per schedules. 2. UL Listed for Service Entrance, where applicable.

a. Provide neutral to ground bonding. 3. Amp ratings as per drawing schedules.

D. Construction:

1. Main lugs or breaker per drawing schedules. 2. Main breakers with additional line side lugs or termination lugs for connection of


line side Type 1 SPD. 3. All phase, neutral and ground bus bars shall be copper 4. Tin-plated bus at joints and connections. 5. Interior equipment ground bar bonded to enclosure. 6. 100% neutral bus. 7. Removable solid bar neutral link to permit disconnecting neutral bus from

incoming neutral conductor on "Service Entrance" rated switchboards. 8. Plug-on bus connection breakers (I-Line).

a. Use of connecting links, bars, etc. not permitted. b. Panel shall be capable of accepting branch breakers up to the frame size

of the main lug or breaker rating. 9. Sequence (A-B-C) bussing. 10. Molded case, thermal magnetic branch and main breakers. 11. Adjustable magnetic trip for all breakers > 225 Amps.

E. Spare Breakers and Spaces:

1. Provide each distribution panelboard with no less than one (1) 3P-225A frame

space for future branch circuit breakers. 2. Provide each distribution panelboard with no less than two (2) 3P-100A frame

spaces for future branch circuit breakers.

F. Accessories:

1. Permanent ID plates for each breaker.

G. Square D I-Line,or comparable product by previously named manufacturers. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Site Verification of Conditions: Examine the conditions under which the equipment shall be delivered, installed, and operated. Make all allowances required for operation, access and maintenance of the equipment, per Codes and manufacturers.

3.2 INSTALLATION



instructions and NEC. 3. Provide all required access space per NEC for controls, fuses and items requiring

maintenance access.

B. Rough-in:

1. Roughin all underslab or below grade conduits, ducts, etc. prior to setting panels, switchboards or other equipment in place.

2. Coordinate exact stubups with proposed manufacturer’s equipment installation drawings and the work of other trades in this contract.

3. Roughin for all required circuits, controls, connections, etc. as required by proposed equipment, even if not explicitly indicated on plans.

4. Make minor adjustments to locations so as to maintain required front working clearances and clearance above and below per NEC.


C. Current Transformer Cabinet Installation:

1. Comply with all requirements of the serving utility company. 2. Mount CT cabinet securely to building wall or other solid surface. 3. Train incoming conduits to enter below cabinet footprint, unless noted otherwise. 4. Provide meter socket directly above CT cabinet, with short conduit section

between for utility wiring (minimum of 1-1/4").

D. SPD Panel Installation:

1. Comply with all requirements of NFPA 70, “National Electrical Code,” and “Article 285,” Transient Voltage Surge Suppressors.”

2. Mount as close as practicable to protected panel or equipment. 3. Close nipple conduit connection to panel or switchboard. 4. Minimize conductor lengths (maximum of 24” lead lengths). 5. Coordinate location of breaker serving SPD.

a. Mount breaker directly adjacent to SPD conduit/conductor entry. 6. Install conductors with few or no bends if possible.

a. Utilize sweeping bends, where bending is required. b. Gently twist conductors together between SPD and breaker.

7. Mount SPD unit adjacent to panel or switchboard at 6' AFF, if space permits. Mount directly above or below panel or switchboard if necessary.

8. Field connections: a. Full size for each phase, neutral and ground. b. #4 AWG for service entrance and distribution panel SPD applications. c. #8 AWG for Branch Circuit Panel SPD connections.

9. At Service Entrance and Transfer Switch applications, a UL approved disconnect switch shall be provided as a means of servicing disconnect if a 60A breaker is not available. SPD shall be installed on the load side of the main service disconnect.

10. At Distribution, MCC and Branch panels, SPD shall have an independent means of servicing disconnect such that the protected panel remains energized. A 30A breaker (or larger) may serve this function available.

11. Before energizing, installer shall verify service and separately derived system Neutral to Ground bonding jumpers are installed per NEC

E. Customer/Tenant Submeter Installation:

1. Comply with all requirements of NFPA 70, “National Electrical Code,” and

manufacturer. 2. Mount meters, as indicated on plans, generally adjacent to metered equipment. 3. Label each submeter as to tenant, floor, and application. 4. Provide overcurrent protection for voltage sensing leads, connected to metered

panel per manufacturer’s instructions. 5. Install CT’s in panelboard enclosure, per manufacturer’s instructions. 6. Install CT and voltage conductors from sensing location to meter location in EMT

or flexible metal conduit. 7. Provide wiring type and size per manufacturer. 8. Do not install wiring from separate meters in common conduit.

F. Panelboard Installation:

1. Comply with all requirements of NFPA 70, “National Electrical Code,” Article 110,

“Requirements for Electrical Installations,” and Article 408, “Switchboards and Panelboards.”


2. Install panels with sufficient support from structure to prevent movement. 3. Arrange for blocking in stud walls, as required. 4. For multiple section panels, provide all nipples, conduit and conductors to

continue the full feeder size between sections. For sections not installed side by side, provide extended feeder length, as required in rigid metallic raceway.

5. Install conduits for recessed panels 2" back from front edge of panel. 6. Provide recessed panelboards with 1" empty conduits installed from the

panelboard top to accessible ceiling space as below:

TOTAL NUMBER OF SINGLE POLE NUMBER OF 1" EMPTY SPARES AND SPACES CONDUITS 1 - 5 Two 6 - 10 Four 11 - 20 Five More than 21 Ten

7. Balance loading on all panelboards as closely as possible and to the satisfaction

of the Architect, after all branch circuits are connected and loads energized. 8. Provide typed panelboard directories in each section to properly identify the

circuits. Labeling shall include: a. Type of circuit: Lights, Outlets, etc. b. Room or rooms served, by room name or number. c. Special equipment: Fire alarm, copier, etc.

G. Circuit Breaker Installation:

1. Install circuit breakers in panelboards, or with enclosure, as required. 2. GFI and AFI circuit breakers: Provide circuits with dedicated neutral conductors.

Connect neutral through breaker at panelboards, per manufacturer’s instructions. 3. Provide labels on all protected outlet coverplates to indicate “GFI PROTECTED”

or “AFI PROTECTED”, as applicable.

H. Elevator Main Line Circuit Breaker Installation:

1. Comply with all requirements of ANSI/ASME 17.1, “Elevators and Escalators.” 2. Provide elevator fused safety switch for each elevator in Elevator Machine Room. 3. Install on EMR wall on strike side of door, per State Elevator Code requirements. 4. Provide phenolic ID label to clearly indicate which elevator the breaker supplies.

Label as “ELEVATOR DISCONNECT, ELEVATOR.” 5. For shunt trip breakers, install shunt trip test button immediately adjacent to

elevator breaker in Elevator Machine Room. a. Mounting height 48", directly adjacent to the elevator main line breaker.

6. Provide engraved red ID plate with white letters, at the shunt trip test button(s), to read: a. ELEVATOR # SHUNT TRIP TEST

7. Connect shunt trip wiring through fire alarm system relay or heat detectors, as indicated.

8. Provide all interconnecting wiring between pushbutton, fire alarm relay and shunt trip breaker.

I. Switchboard Installation:

1. Comply with all requirements of NFPA 70, “National Electrical Code,” Article 110,

“Requirements for Electrical Installations,” and Article 408, “Switchboards and Panelboards.”

2. Provide concrete foundation/equipment pad or housekeeping pad, per Section


“Common Work Results For Electrical”. 3. Mount switchboard assembly, including all sections, on a concrete housekeeping

pad. 4. Securely bolt switchboard frame sections to concrete pad. 5. Maintain 42" minimum clearance in front of all sections of switchboard. 6. On switchboards on exterior, below-grade walls, maintain a minimum of 4 inches

of clearance between wall and rear of switchboard. 7. Provide engraved phenolic plastic nameplates, installed adjacent to each feeder

breaker, to identify the load served.

J. Tamper Proof Hardware

1. Do not install any distribution or control equipment where accessible to inmates. 2. Where equipmen is located in areas which are accessible to inmates,

a. All equipment shall be lockable. b. Provide tamper proof hardware for all panels, switches etc. and any

other equipment or items accessible to inmates, as indicated on the drawings.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION

A. Interface with Other Work:

1. Provide connections between proposed distribution equipment and other work of this contract: a. Underground services and feeders. b. Automatic transfer switches.

B. Grounding: Ground switchboards, panelboards, all metallic service and distribution

equipment frames and enclosures per NEC and as specified in Section “Grounding & Bonding For Electrical”.

C. Connections: Tighten joints, connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in

accordance with manufacturer’s published torque tightening values for connectors and bolts. Where manufacturer’s torque requirements are not indicated, tighten connections to comply with torque tightening values specified in UL 486A, “Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors,” and 486B, “Wire Connectors for Use with Aluminum Conductors.”


A. General:

1. Perform inspections and testing to ensure installation complies with Contract Documents, is operational within industry and manufacturer's tolerances, is adjusted to specific project parameters, and is suitable for energizing.

2. Acceptance Testing: Provide for acceptance testing of electrical equipment specified in this section, as follows, and as required in Section “Common Work Results for Electrical”.


4. Provide a set of Contract Drawings to the testing agency. 5. Provide manufacturer's installation and testing instructions to the testing agency. 6. Provide complete shop drawing data on all equipment. 7. Provide written results of all tests. Include date, equipment ID, name of testing

company and technician, and results of each individual test. Provide pass/fail


indication for each test.

B. Pre-Testing Inspections:

1. Inspect accessible components for cleanliness, mechanical, and electrical integrity, for presence of damage or deterioration, and to ensure removal of temporary shipping bracing. Do not proceed with tests until deficiencies are corrected.

2. Inspect bolted electrical connections for tightness according to manufacturer's published torque values or, where not available, those of UL Standards 486A and 486B.

3. All settings, as specified in this section, shall be properly set and verified prior to equipment testing.

C. Acceptance Testing:

1. Switchboard and Panelboard Tests: After installing equipment, perform the

following tests, at a minimum: a. Perform insulation resistance tests, phase-phase and phase-ground for

all buses and main breaker(s). b. Perform continuity tests of all grounds, and bonded components. c. Perform tests to confirm proper bonding of neutrals to ground, where

intended. d. Perform tests to confirm isolation of neutrals and grounds, except at

intended locations. e. Perform tests to confirm isolation of isolated grounds and equipment

grounds, except at single intended location. f. Perform overpotential tests per ANSI 37.20c. g. Operation of auxiliary contacts and devices. h. Operation of all gauges, displays and control equipment.

D. Test Failures: Compare test results with specified performance or manufacturer's data.

Correct deficiencies identified by tests and retest. Remove and replace malfunctioning components with new, and retest.

E. Test Labeling: Upon satisfactory completion of tests for each transformer, attach a dated

and signed "Satisfactory Test" label to the unit. 3.5 ADJUSTING

A. General:

1. Set all field adjustable parameters to those as specified. 2. Set field adjustable pickup and time delay ranges of Ground Fault Systems and

solid state breakers as indicated. 3.6 CLEANING

A. General:

1. Inspect interior and exterior of installed equipment and switchgear. 2. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. 3. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish. 4. Remove protective films, etc. from all devices, controls, etc. 5. Remove debris, insulation and wire clippings, dirt, etc. from interior of all

equipment.


6. Remove dirt, debris, etc. from top of all equipment. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION

A. Owner Demonstrations: Provide a factory trained representative for each system and type of equipment, for the purpose of training owner's personnel:

1. Discuss proper operation, maintenance, and use of all equipment. 2. Demonstrate periodic Owner testing and/or inspection of equipment. 3. Demonstrate adjustment to Owner-accessible equipment and systems. 4. Instructors shall be fully knowledgeable of the installed equipment and all

components. 5. Training shall be completed at the project site following Owner occupancy, at

Owner’s discretion. 6. Schedule after all final tests, adjustments and Owner's acceptance. 7. Training shall consist of a minimum of (4) hours of training and instruction,

including use of delivered O&M manuals for each system or equipment.

END OF SECTION

EASTERN DISTRICT POLICE STATION 16460-1 LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS 28103.01 January 15, 2013

SECTION 16460 - LOW VOLTAGE TRANSFORMERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY


1. Low Voltage dry type transformers. 2. K-rated, shielded isolation transformers.


1. Section “Common Work Results For Electrical.” 2. Section “Low Voltage Power Conductors and Cables” for conductors. 3. Section “Grounding & Bonding For Electrical Systems” for grounding and bonding

requirements. 4. Section “Commissioning of Electrical Systems” for specific commissioning and

functional performance testing requirements of the transformer(s). 1.3 SUBMITTALS


1. Low Voltage dry type transformers. 2. K-rated, shielded isolation transformers.

B. Provide submittal data for each product type.

1. To verify specifications have been met/exceeded. 2. Independent laboratory test data where requested. 3. Clearly indicate or state all options, etc.

C. Submit the following for each dry type transformer:

1. Overall dimensions. 2. Weight. 3. Winding materials. 4. Insulation materials and Class. 5. Bus and lug materials. 6. Capacity rating. 7. Primary and secondary voltages and phases. 8. Winding configurations, delta, wye, etc. 9. Wiring diagrams. 10. Efficiency at full and part loads. 11. Total watts lost to space (BtuH). 12. Temperature rise rating. 13. Tap quantities and ratings. 14. Sound ratings.


15. Efficiency ratings, compliant with NEMA TP-1. 16. Enclosure and NEMA rating. 17. UL Listing.

D. Submit the following for each K-rated, shielded isolation transformer, in addition to items

required for standard dry type:

1. UL K rating. 2. Shielding details and capacitance ratings. 3. Neutral bus and lug design and ratings. 4. Noise attenuation ratio. 5. Temperature rise rating at stated harmonic load.

E. Submit the following for each drive isolation transformer, in addition to items required for

standard dry type:

1. Manufacturer’s harmonic load calculations for use with proposed motor or load. 2. Noise attenuation ratio. 3. Temperature rise rating at stated load.

F. Product Test Reports: Certified copies of manufacturer's design and routine factory tests


1. Sound Level Test Reports: Certified copies of manufacturer's sound level tests applicable to equipment for this Project.

G. Closeout Submittals: Submit in accordance with the General Conditions and Division 1

requirements, Section “Common Work Results For Electrical”, and as follows:

1. All post-installation inspection checklists. 2. Post installation load test results. 3. Preventative maintenance and testing schedule for each unit.





B. Manufacturer/Vendor Requirements:





4. Start up services and post installation tests, as specified.

C. Installation Quality: In accordance with recognized trade organizations and standards.



Installation.” 8. NEMA National Equipment Manufacturers Association 9. NESC National Electrical Safety Code 10. NETA National Electrical Testing Association 11. NFPA National Fire Protection Association 12. UL Underwriter’s Laboratories



1. Provide all transportation of unit(s) to site. 2. Provide for rigging needed for unloading, and setting into final position.


1. Where unit is to be installed indoors, store in covered building or offsite to prevent

exposure to weather, etc. until building is suitable for transformer installation. 2. Temporary Heating: Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer's

recommendations within the enclosure of each ventilated type unit throughout periods during which equipment is not energized and is not in a space that is continuously under normal control of temperature and humidity.

1.6 SEQUENCING


1. Coordinate transformer installation with exterior and/or interior construction. 2. Provide for sub-grade or subslab roughins. 3. Coordinate construction of concrete pads with transformer locations.

B. Sequencing, Coordination, and Integration:

1. Provide positioning and unit roughin such that required clearances are maintained

after final installation of all finishes, surface treatments, ceilings, ducts, etc. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER


1. Low Voltage. Drive Isolation, Buck-Boost and Control Transformers:

a. Square D/Schneider Electric (basis of design) b. General Electric c. Siemens


d. Cutler-Hammer e. Sola/Hevi-Duti f. Olsun Electrics Corp. g. Acme

2. K-Rated, Shielded Isolation Transformers: a. Square D/Schneider Electric (basis of design) b. General Electric c. Siemens d. Cutler-Hammer e. Sola/Hevi-Duti f. Olsun Electrics Corp. g. Acme h. Liebert Corp.

2.2 MATERIALS

A. General:

1. Comply with NEMA Standard ST 20, “Dry-Type Transformers for General Applications.”

2. Sound levels shall comply with NEMA Standard TR 1, “Transformers, Regulators, and Reactors” for dry type transformers.

3. Life expectancies as defined by ANSI/IEEE C57.96, “IEEE Guide for Loading Dry Type Distribution and Power Transformers.”

4. Design, manufacture and testing per ANSI, NEMA and IEEE. 5. Efficiency ratings shall meet or exceed NEMA TP1-2002.

B. Finishes:

1. Indoor Units: Manufacturer's standard paint over corrosion-resistant pretreatment

and primer. 2. Outdoor Units: Comply with "Enclosure Coating System" Article of ANSI/IEEE

Standard C57.12.28, “Switchgear & Transformers - Pad Mounted Equipment Enclosure Integrity.”

C. Insulation:

1. Non-hygroscopic materials. 2. Self-extinguishing, non-flammable construction.

2.3 LOW VOLTAGE DRY TYPE TRANSFORMERS

A. Two-winding type, 3-phase units using 1 coil per phase in primary and secondary, unless noted otherwise on drawings.

B. General:

1. UL Listed, general purpose, 600 volt class. 2. 480 volt, 3 phase delta primary, unless noted. 3. 208/120 volts, 3 phase, grounded wye secondary, unless noted. 4. Self-cooled, two winding type with NEMA 2 drip proof enclosures. 5. Floor mounted, wall mounted, or suspended per drawings. 6. Internal rubber vibration isolation mounts to minimize noise. 7. Heavy gauge steel, primed and finished in ANSI 61 gray weather resistant

enamel. 8. Efficiency ratings shall meet or exceed the requirements of NEMA TP-1.


C. Construction (3 kVA through 25 kVA):

1. Epoxy resin encapsulated. 2. Completely enclosed. 3. Class H insulation, 185°C rated for 115°C temperature rise over a 40°C ambient. 4. (4) 22% taps, two (2) taps FCAN and two (2) taps FCBN.

D. Construction (30 kVA and above):

1. Ventilated housing with epoxy laminated windings. 2. Class H insulation, 220°C rated for 150°C temperature rise over a 40°C ambient. 3. Temperature Rise:

a. 150°C maximum rise above 40°C, 4. (6) 22% taps, two (2) taps FCAN and four (4) taps FCBN. 5. 30 kVA units and larger shall be constructed of self-extinguishing Class 1

materials.

E. Cores:

1. High grade, grain oriented silicon steel. 2. Low hysteresis and eddy current losses.

F. Coils:

1. Aluminum or copper windings. 2. Impregnated with cured, non-hygroscopic epoxy resin. 3. Brazed or pressure connection of windings.

2.4 K-RATED SHIELDED ISOLATION TRANSFORMERS

A. UL Listed K-rated, shielded, isolation type, dry type transformer. Units shall comply with specifications for standard dry-type transformers, as specified in this section, with additional construction and/or features as listed below:

1. Comply with requirements of ANSI. IEEE C57.110 IEEE Recommended Practices

for Establishing Transformer Capability When Supplying Non-sinusoidal Load Currents.

2. Grounded and insulated metallic Faraday shield between HV and LV windings. a. Capacitance: Shield shall provide a maximum of 33 pf

primary-to-secondary capacitance over a frequency range of 20 Hz to 1 MHZ.

3. Noise attenuation ratio exceeding 100:1. 4. Efficiency ratings shall meet or exceed the requirements of NEMA TP-1. 5. Designed for non-linear loads.

a. Secondary neutral lugs to terminate (2) 100% neutral conductors. b. Unit shall have 200% neutral bus.

6. UL Listed, K-rating designed for high harmonic current applications. a. K-13 Rated.

7. Square D Class 7400 NLP Series, or comparable product by previously named manufacturers.

2.5 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL:

A. Tests & Inspections: Manufacturer shall provide inspections and tests of transformers, as required by referenced standards.




3.2 INSTALLATION


1. Comply with all requirements of NFPA 70, National Electrical Code, Article 110 “Requirements for Electrical Installations,” and Article 450, “Transformers and Transformer Vaults.”



maintenance access. 5. Maintain all required clearances for cooling, per manufacturer, and as per NEC.

B. Rough-in:

1. Roughin all underslab or below grade conduits, prior to setting transformers in

place. 2. Coordinate exact stubups with proposed manufacturer’s equipment installation

drawings and the work of other trades in this contract.

C. Make minor adjustments to locations so as to maintain required front working clearances and clearance above and below per NEC.

D. Floor Mounted Units:

1. Bolt to floor or concrete pad, with concrete anchors. 2. Rubber vibration isolation pads under mounting surfaces. 3. All wiring connections to use flexible metal conduit. 4. Mount a minimum of 6 inches from walls.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION

A. Grounding: Ground transformers, all equipment frames and enclosures per NEC and as specified in Section “Grounding & Bonding For Electrical Systems.”

B. Connections: Tighten all connectors, terminals, lugs, etc. including screws and bolts, in

accordance with manufacturer’s published torque tightening values for connectors and bolts. Where manufacturer’s torque requirements are not indicated, tighten connections to comply with torque tightening values specified in UL 486A, “Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors” and 486B, “Wire Connectors for Use with Aluminum Conductors.”


A. Restore all finishes, equipment, surfaces and/or grade to original condition, where


affected by the work of this section.

B. Comply with all requirements as specified in Section “Common Work Results For Electrical.”


A. General:


2. Acceptance Testing: Provide for acceptance testing of electrical equipment specified in this section, as follows, and as required in Section “Common Work For Electrical.”


4. Provide a set of Contract Drawings to the testing agency, where applicable. 5. Provide manufacturer's installation and testing instructions to the testing agency,

where applicable. 6. Provide complete shop drawing data on all equipment. 7. Provide written results of all tests. Include date, equipment ID, name of testing

company and technician, and results of each individual test. Provide pass/fail indication for each test.


1. Inspect accessible components for cleanliness, mechanical, and electrical

integrity, for presence of damage or deterioration, and to ensure removal of temporary shipping bracing. Do not proceed with tests until deficiencies are corrected.


C. Acceptance Tests: Perform the following minimum tests according to the manufacturer's

instructions and NETA recommendations. Conform to ANSI C57.12.91, “ IEEE Standard Test Code for Dry-Type Distribution and Power Transformers” for dry-type units, test method, and data correction factors.

1. Ratio tests at rated voltage connection and all tap connections. 2. Polarity and phase-relation tests at rated voltage. 3. Applied potential tests. 4. Induced potential tests. 5. Temperature Correction: 6. No-load and excitation current at rated voltage. 7. A.C. over-potential test on all HV and LV windings. 8. Power Factor (Dielectric absorption) test, winding-winding and winding-ground.

Polarization index test results shall be calculated and shown.

D. Test Failures: Compare test results with specified performance or manufacturer's data. Correct deficiencies identified by tests and retest. Remove and replace malfunctioning components with new, and retest.


and signed "Satisfactory Test" label to the unit.


3.6 ADJUSTING

A. Adjust transformer taps to provide optimum (nominal) voltage conditions at utilization equipment throughout the normal operating cycle of the facility. Record voltages and tap settings to submit with test results.

3.7 CLEANING

A. General:

1. Inspect interior and exterior of installed transformers. 2. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. 3. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish. 4. Remove labels, stickers, and protective films, etc. from all enclosures. 5. Remove debris, insulation and wire clippings, dirt, etc. from interior of all

equipment. 6. Remove dirt, debris, etc. from top of all equipment.

B. Finish Touch Up: After completing installation, cleaning, and testing, touch up scratches

and mars on finish to match original finish.

END OF SECTION

EASTERN DISTRICT POLICE STATION 16480-1 LOW VOLTAGE CONTROLLERS 28103.01 January 15, 2013

SECTION 16480 - LOW VOLTAGE CONTROLLERS PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY


1. Thermal manual motor starter switches. 2. General purpose relays. 3. Full voltage motor starters.


1. Section “Motor Requirements” for motor types and specifications. 2. Section “Variable Frequency Drives” for VFD’s to be furnished with pumps and

motors. 3. Section “Common Work Results Fore Electrical”. 4. Section “Grounding & Bonding For Electrical Systems” for grounding and bonding

requirements. 5. Section “Low Voltage Power Conductors and Cables” for conductors. 6. Section “Raceways & Boxes For Electrical Systems” for required connections of

motors.

C. Products Installed But Not Supplied Under This Section:

1. Variable frequency drives furnished under mechanical Section “Variable Frequency Drives”.

2. Speed control switches furnished under mechanical divisions for control of small motors, fans, etc.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. National Electrical Code:

1. NEC 430 Motors, Motor Circuits and Controllers

B. NEMA:

1. NEMA AB 1 Molded Case Circuit Breakers 2. NEMA ICS 2 Industrial Control and Systems: Controllers, Contactors, and

Overload Relays Rated 600 Volts 3. NEMA ICS 6 Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems 4. NEMA KS 1 Enclosed Switches

C. Underwriters Laboratory:

1. UL 845 Standard for Motor Control Centers 2. UL 508 Standard for Industrial Control Equipment


1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Thermal manual motor starter switches. 2. Full voltage motor starters. 3. Multi-speed motor starters. 4. Reduced voltage motor starters. 5. Soft start solid state motor starters. 6. 600VAC motor control centers.


1. Manufacturer's specifications, data sheets. 2. Catalog cuts. 3. Dimensional drawings. 4. Installation Instructions. 5. Wiring & connection diagrams. 6. Capacity ratings, performance curves. 7. Information required to indicate contract compliance. 8. Clearly indicate the exact size or rating proposed.

C. Submit for all motor starters:

1. Material list for each starter indicating:

a. NEMA rating/size. b. NEMA enclosure rating and overall dimensions. c. Overload protection type and ranges. d. Auxiliary components such as pushbuttons, pilot lights, control

transformers, etc. e. Switch, fuse or circuit breaker ratings for combination starters. f. Type, relays and controls for multi-speed starters. g. Type, relays and steps for reduced voltage starters.

D. Closeout Submittals: Submit in accordance with the General Conditions and Division 1

requirements, Section “Common Work Results For Electrical”, and as follows:

1. All post-installation inspection checklists. 2. Installer’s pre-startup checklist. 3. Post installation test results. 4. Preventative maintenance schedule for each MCC starter unit.








1. The complete performance of the assembled system, including all accessories shall be the sole responsibility of the supplier. It is the installer’s responsibility to ensure that all factory and field installed accessories and loose components used in the system, meet these specifications, and perform up to the stated and tested standards.






4. Start up services and post installation tests, as specified.

D. Installation Quality: In accordance with recognized trade organizations and standards.


Installation”. 8. NEMA National Equipment Manufacturers Association 9. NESC National Electrical Safety Code 10. NETA National Electrical Testing Association 11. NFPA National Fire Protection Association 12. UL Underwriter’s Laboratories

1.6 COORDINATION

A. General: Coordinate features of controllers and control devices with pilot devices and control circuits provided under mechanical Division covering control systems.

B. Coordinate controllers provided under electrical Divisions with motors provided under

mechanical Divisions. Coordinate electrical Division product and installation requirements with approved mechanical Division equipment shop drawings, to include, but not limited to:

1. Coordinate multi-speed, or multi-step starters with motor winding requirements (2

windings, wye-delta, etc.) 2. Coordinate control circuit voltages of coils and control transformers with control

systems and/or circuits provided under Division 15. 1.7 SEQUENCING


1. Coordinate MCC installation with interior construction. 2. Provide for sub-grade or subslab roughins. 3. Coordinate construction of concrete pads with MCC location(s).


4. Provide positioning and roughins such that required clearances are maintained after final installation.



1. 600VAC motor controllers.

a. Square D/Schneider Electric (basis of design) b. General Electric Co. c. Cutler-Hammer

2.2 MOTOR CONTROLLERS, GENERAL

A. Coordinate the features of each motor controller with the ratings and characteristics of the supply circuit, the motor, control sequence, motor duty cycle, motor load, pilot device(s), and control circuit affecting controller functions. Provide controllers that are horsepower rated to suit the motor controlled, per drawings.

B. Contacts shall open each ungrounded connection to the motor.

C. Provide solid state overload protection on all individual full voltage, reduced voltage and

solid state controllers, and on controllers furnished as part of an assembly or Motor Control Center.

1. Overload circuit shall provide for 3:1 FLA range. 2. Adjustable dial marked in true amperes (those marked with percentage of

nominal or other relative scales are not acceptable. 3. 2% tripping accuracy. 4. True single phase protection by detecting loss of, or low voltage and tripping

within 3 seconds. 5. Inherently protection from short circuit damage by saturation of current sensors. 6. Square D Motor Logic Overload Relay, or comparable product from one of the

previously listed manufacturers.

D. Enclosures: For individually mounted motor controllers and control devices, comply with NEMA 250, “Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).” Provide enclosures suitable for the environmental conditions at the controller location, as follows, (unless indicated otherwise):

1. NEMA 1 for interior. 2. NEMA 3R for exterior, damp, or wet locations, on roof or on grade. 3. NEMA 4X Stainless Steel for specific locations as indicated on drawings or

schedules. 2.3 THERMAL MANUAL MOTOR STARTING SWITCHES

A. Provide for fractional HP motors (1 HP and less) without factory overload protection, and as indicated.

1. NEMA ICS 2, AC general purpose, Class A, manually operated, full-voltage

controller with overload element.


2. Manual operated toggle switch type. Quick make and break type with self indicating trip free handle.

3. Melting alloy thermal overload, interchangeable type. 4. Switch shall not operate without thermal unit. 5. Size thermal unit per motor FLA's. 6. Enclosure: NEMA 1 for interior use and NEMA 4 stainless steel or cast iron for

exterior, damp, or wet locations. 7. Handle guard with locking provisions. 8. Flush mounted in finished areas. 9. HOA switches: Where indicated. 10. Pilot light (red) mounted in the same enclosure.

a. Switches more than 25 feet from motor or out of sight from motor. b. Where indicated.

11. Square D Class 2510, or comparable product by previously named manufacturers.

B. For motors 1 HP, manual starters shall be as above except;

1. Square D Class 2510 Type M, or comparable product by previously named

manufacturers. 2.4 GENERAL PURPOSE RELAYS

A. For control of small fans, pumps, etc. as indicated, from ATC or HVAC control circuits.

1. Plug-in type with blade type connections. 2. Matching base for screw terminations of control and power wiring. NEMA 1

enclosure for mounting of relay and base. 3. Power contacts rated 120 volt, 10 amps, SPST, SPDT as required, rated for

motor duty through 2 HP. 4. Coil voltage per Division 15 for proper interface between control wiring and relay

coils. 5. Square D Class 8501, or equal.

2.5 FULL VOLTAGE MAGNETIC MOTOR STARTERS

A. NEMA ICS 2, ac general-purpose Class A magnetic controller for induction motors, full-voltage, magnetic type, non-reversing, across-the-line, controller, except where another type as indicated.

1. NEMA horsepower rated, 600 VAC, 3 pole, 60 Hz. 2. NEMA Size as per drawings. Minimum Size 0.

B. Provide all starters with the following accessories unless noted otherwise:

1. Red "RUNNING" pilot light. 2. N.O./N.C. auxiliary contacts. 3. Control Power Transformer with Prim/Second Fusing. 4. Hand-Off-Automatic selector switches.

C. Provide starters with the following accessories, as indicated on drawings:

1. Start-stop pushbuttons. 2. Green "OFF" pilot light


D. Full voltage, non-reversing AC magnetic starters.

1. Square D Company Class 8536 Type S, or comparable product by previously named manufacturers.

E. Combination starters with fused disconnect switches.

1. Factory wired NEMA KS 1, enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle

and visible blades. 2. Quick-make, quick-break switch with external operator handle 3. Interlock switch with unit cover or door. 4. Rejection clip fuse holder and UL Class R fuses, as indicated. 5. Square D Class 8538 Type S, or comparable product by previously named

manufacturers. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.1 EXAMINATION


3.2 INSTALLATION - INDEPENDENT CONTROLLERS

A. General:

1. Install independently mounted motor control devices in accordance with manufacturer’s written instructions.



maintenance access.

B. Location:

1. Locate controllers as indicated and within sight of motors controlled. 2. Install with proper clearances as required for access, operate, service and/or

adjust, per manufacturer and NEC requirements.

C. Mounting:

1. Wall mounting: Bolt units to wall or mount on light-weight structural steel channels bolted to the wall.

2. For controllers not at walls, provide freestanding racks fabricated of structural steel members and slotted structural steel channels. Use channel manufacturer’s standard L mounting plates, bolted to the floor. Connect the posts with horizontal slotted steel channels and bolt the control equipment to the channels.

3. For rooftop equipment, it shall be acceptable to mount controllers to equipment frames, etc. where suitable support is available.

3.3 IDENTIFICATION

A. Identify motor control components and control wiring in accordance with Section


“Common Work Results For Electrical”.

1. Provide engraved nameplate for each individual controller, and each MCC cubicle, which identifies the motor or load per project nomenclature.


A. Install wiring between motor control devices and control/indicating devices as specified in Section “Low Voltage Power Conductors and Cables” for hard-wired connections.


3.5 CONSTRUCTION


1. Provide connections between proposed motor control equipment and other work of this contract: a. Motors b. Automatic temperature control systems. c. Remote pushbuttons, HOA switches, or other manual control points.

B. Grounding: Ground motor controllers and motor control center equipment frames and

enclosures per NEC and as specified in Section “Grounding & Bonding For Electrical Systems”.

C. Connections: Tighten all connectors, terminals, lugs, etc. including screws and bolts, in

accordance with manufacturer’s published torque tightening values for connectors and bolts. Where manufacturer’s torque requirements are not indicated, tighten connections to comply with torque tightening values specified in UL 486A, “Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors” and 486B, “Wire Connectors for Use with Aluminum Conductors.”


A. Install and test all motor control devices per NEMA ICS 2.

B. Reports: Prepare written reports certified by testing organization of tests and observations. Report defective materials and workmanship and unsatisfactory test results. Include records of repairs and adjustments made.

C. Schedule visual and mechanical inspections and electrical tests with at least one week’s

advance notification to Owner and Architect.

D. Pretesting: On completing installation of the system, perform the following preparations for tests:

1. Provide insulation resistance tests of conducting parts of motor control

components; and of connecting supply, feeder, and control circuits. For devices containing solid-state components, use test equipment and methods recommended by the manufacturer.

2. Make continuity tests of all circuits.

E. Visual and mechanical inspection: Include the following inspections and related work.

1. Overload protection and control settings:


a. Set solid state overload settings based on motor FLA’s, service factor and temperature rise, per NEC

b. Provide proper setting of all current and time acceleration and deceleration ramps, overload protection devices, current limitation, etc. as determined by ATC system installer and/or control system installer. Programmer shall work in conjunction and with the ATC system installer to provide proper settings for motor operation.

2. Inspect for defects and physical damage NRTL labeling, and nameplate compliance with current project drawings.

3. Exercise and perform operational tests of mechanical components and other operable devices in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions.

4. Check tightness of electrical connections of devices with calibrated torque wrench. Use manufacturer’s recommended torque values.

5. Clean devices using manufacturer’s approved methods and materials. 6. Verify proper fuse types and ratings in fusible devices.

F. Electrical Tests: Perform the following in accordance with manufacturer’s instructions:

1. Insulation resistance test of motor control devices conducting parts to the extent

permitted by the manufacturer’s instructions. Insulation resistance less than 100 megohms is not acceptable.

2. Use primary current injection to check performance characteristics of motor-circuit protectors and for overload relays of controllers for motors 15 horsepower and larger. Trip characteristics not within manufacturer’s published time-current tolerances are not acceptable.

3. Test auxiliary protective features such as loss of phase, phase unbalance and undervoltage to verify operation.

4. Check for improper voltages at terminals in controllers that have external control wiring when controller disconnect is opened. Any voltage over 30 V is unacceptable.

5. Test ground fault protection devices by current injection method. 6. Test for proper phasing of all motors, controllers, etc. 7. Retesting: Correct deficiencies and retest. Verify by the retests that specified

requirements are met. 3.7 ADJUSTING

A. General:

1. Set all field adjustable parameters to those as specified. 2. Set solid state overload sensors and devices to 115%-125% of motor nameplate

FLA’s, per NEC Art. 430. 3. Select and install thermal, melting alloy type overload protection at 115%-125% of

motor nameplate FLA’s, per NEC Art. 430. 4. Set field adjustable pickup and time delay ranges of Ground Fault Systems, as

indicated, for coordination with upstream protection devices. GFP pickup settings for motors feeder protection shall not exceed 80% of the value of the upstream overcurrent protection device setting.

3.8 CLEANING

A. General:

1. Inspect interior and exterior of installed equipment. 2. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. 3. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish.


4. Remove protective films, etc. from all devices, controls, etc. 5. Remove debris, insulation and wire clippings, dirt, etc. from interior of all

equipment. 6. Remove dirt, debris, etc. from top of all equipment.

3.9 DEMONSTRATION




Owner’s discretion. 6. Schedule after all final tests, adjustments and Owner's acceptance. 7. Training shall include sufficient time for owner training and instruction, including

use of delivered O&M manuals for each system or equipment.

END OF SECTION

EASTERN DISTRICT POLICE STATION 16495-1 TRANSFER SWITCHES 28103.01 January 15, 2013

SECTION 16495 - TRANSFER SWITCHES PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY


1. Automatic transfer switches.


1. Section “Common Work Results for Electrical”. 2. Section “Grounding & Bonding for Electrical Systems” for grounding, bonding and

interconnection of equipment. 3. Section “Low Voltage Power Conductors and Cables” for conductors and

attachments. 4. Section “Packaged Generator Assemblies” for coordination with generators for

interface and control requirements.

C. Submittal Requirements of this section:

1. Automatic transfer switches. 2. Remote shutoff switches.

D. Descriptive Data:

1. Clearly indicate or state options, etc.:

a. Manufacturer/cat. number. b. Manufacturer’s options. c. Accessories.

2. Information on all adjustable features including adjustment range and manufacturers’ settings.

3. Manufacturer's specifications, data sheets. 4. Catalog cuts. 5. Dimensional drawings. 6. Installation Instructions. 7. Wiring & connection diagrams. Indicate point of connections with other equipment

or systems. 8. Capacity ratings. 9. Clearly indicate the exact size or rating proposed.

E. Product Test Reports:

1. Prototype test reports for proposed switches. 2. Certified copies of manufacturer's design and routine factory tests required by the

referenced standards.

F. Closeout Submittals: Submit in accordance with the General Conditions and Division 1 requirements, Section “Common Work Results For Electrical”, and as follows:


1. All post-installation inspection checklists. 2. Installer’s pre-startup checklist. 3. Preventative maintenance and testing schedule for each unit.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. IEEE:

1. IEEE 241 IEEE Recommended Practice for Electric Power Systems in Commercial Buildings

2. IEEE 446 IEEE Recommended Practice for Emergency and Standby Power Systems for Industrial and Commercial Applications

B. National Electrical Code:

1. NEC 700 Emergency Systems 2. NEC 701 Legally Required Standby Systems

C. Underwriters Laboratory:

1. UL 1008 Standard for Transfer Switch Equipment

1.4 SUBMITTALS


1. Automatic Transfer Switches.

B. Product data: Include dimensions, construction, materials, performance data, etc.

C. Provide submittal data for each product type.

1. To verify specifications have been met/exceeded. 2. Independent laboratory test data where requested. 3. Clearly indicate or state all options, etc.:

D. Submit the following for each transfer switch unit:

1. Manufacturer/cat. number. 2. Listed and labeled per UL 1008. 3. System voltage & configuration. 4. Surge withstand ratings. 5. Indicate all options and/or accessories. 6. Indicate field adjustable settings, setpoint ranges, and factory setpoints. 7. Bus materials and ratings. 8. 1-line diagram showing all components, connections, accessories, etc. 9. Additional information to show compliance with specifications or drawings.

E. Product Test Reports: Certified copies of manufacturer's design and routine factory tests


F. Closeout Submittals: Submit in accordance with the General Conditions and Division 1 requirements, Section “Common Work Results For Electrical, and as follows:

1. All post-installation inspection checklists.


2. Installer’s pre-startup checklist. 3. Final setpoint of all adjustable parameters. 4. Post installation load test results. 5. Preventative maintenance schedule for each unit.






B. Manufacturer’s Requirements:





4. Start up services and post installation tests, as specified. 5. Preventative Maintenance program as specified.

C. Installer Qualifications:

1. Has installed a minimum of five (5) switches of similar size and conditions. 2. Has installed a minimum of three (3) switches manufactured by the proposed

manufacturer.

D. Installation Quality: In accordance with recognized trade organizations and standards.


Installation”. 8. NEMA National Equipment Manufacturers Association 9. NESC National Electrical Safety Code 10. NETA National Electrical Testing Association 11. NFPA National Fire Protection Association 12. UL Underwriter’s Laboratories




1. Provide all transportation of equipment to site. 2. Provide for rigging needed for unloading, and setting large switches into final

position.


1. Store in covered building or offsite to prevent exposure to weather, etc. until building is protected from the elements.

2. Apply temporary heat according to manufacturer’s recommendations within enclosures of large each switches, throughout periods during which equipment is not energized and is not under normal control of temperature and humidity.

1.7 SEQUENCING


1. Coordinate switch installation with exterior and/or interior construction. 2. Provide for sub-grade or subslab roughins. 3. Coordinate all power and control conduit locations, roughins and destinations with

switch location. 1.8 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Extended product warranty over and above that required by General Conditions of this contract.

1. Covers complete automatic transfer system:

a. Auto-transfer switches. b. Controls. c. Accessories. d. Remote annunciation devices.

2. Warranty shall be by the manufacturer or authorized representative. 3. Warranty period of five (5) years or 1500 operating hours, whichever occurs first,

from initial start up. 4. Warranty includes all parts, labor, and travel expenses, with no deductibles. 5. Installer shall complete and file all necessary documents to assure fulfillment of


1.9 SYSTEM STARTUP

A. Manufacturer's Services: Provide services of a factory-authorized service representative to supervise the field connections with normal and emergency sources, associated components and accessories, and the pretesting and adjustment of all settings, components and accessories.

PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.1 MANUFACTURER


B. Automatic Transfer Switch sets shall be manufactured by one of the following:


1. Onan/Cummins(basis of design) 2. Automatic Switch Company (ASCO) 3. Zenith 4. Kohler 5. Generac 6. Caterpillar

C. Manual Transfer Switch sets shall be manufactured by one of the following:

1. Automatic Switch Company (ASCO) (basis of design) 2. Zenith 3. Square D Co. 4. General Electric.

2.2 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHES

A. General Construction:

1. NEMA 1 enclosure, key lockable. 2. Microprocessor control panel. 3. Voltage and Ampere ratings as indicated. 4. 3-pole switch with solid neutral for use in a non-separately derived system. 5. Listed per UL 1008. All accessories for the transfer switch (and/or control panel)

shall be UL recognized. 6. 100% continuous current rated. 7. Comply with IEEE 241-1990 and IEEE 446-1995. 8. Comply with NEC Articles 700 and 701. 9. Surge Withstand ratings to Category B3, per IEEE C62.41. 10. DPDT Engine start contacts, 10 amps, 32 VDC. 11. Silver or tin plated copper bus, and UL Listed lugs. 12. Spring-loaded, over-center main contacts, silver alloy plated. 13. Equipment ground lug. 14. Flash memory storage of all programmed settings. 15. Integral battery backup of real-time clock settings.

B. Operation:

1. Mechanically held. 2. Electrically operated from source being transferred to. 3. Mechanical and electrical interlocks to prevent paralleling sources. 4. Single linear motor operator, momentarily energized. Capacitors, fuses, or

thermal protection in the main operator control circuit is prohibited.

C. Adjustable Settings: Range Setting

1. Under-Voltage Sensing (3-phase normal, 1-phase emergency):

Pickup (% of nominal): 85%-90% 95% Dropout (% of pickup): 75%- 98% 95% Dropout Time Delay: 0.1-1.0 sec 0.5 sec

2. Over-Voltage Sensing (3-phase normal, 1-phase emergency): Pickup (% of nominal): 105%-135% 115% Dropout (% of pickup): 95%- 99% 95% Dropout Time Delay: 0.5-120 sec 30 sec

3. Over/Under Frequency sensing:


Pickup (% of nominal): +5 - +20% +5% Dropout: (% beyond pickup): +1% +1% Dropout Time Delay: 0.1-15 sec 5

D. Accessories:

1. Status pilot lights.

a. Green = normal source available. b. Red = emergency source available. c. Green = connected to normal source.

2. Digital Display: Displays load conditions, review transfer events, adjusting switch parameters.

3. Momentary test switch to simulate normal source failure. 4. Control panel disconnect plug. 5. In-Phase monitor:

a. Transfer/retransfer between live sources only when the two sources are approaching synchronism and the two sources are within 15 electrical degrees maximum.

b. Function over a frequency difference range of up to + 2.0 Hz. c. Maximum operating transfer time of 1/6 second. d. If the voltage of the load carrying source drops below 75%, the in-phase

function shall be automatically bypassed. e. Monitor shall not require interwiring with the generator controls, or active

control of the governor.

E. Exercise timer.

1. Solid state, with battery reserve power supply. 2. With Load/No-Load selector switch (set for No-Load). 3. Adjustable for day, time and duration. 4. 30 minutes every 7 days.

F. All delays and functions shall be field adjustable and shall maintain accuracy within �1%

of set values of frequency, �2% for voltages, and �10% on time delays. Control panels for each switch shall be solid state and shall include an isolating disconnect plug. Controls switches and related devices shall operate over a temperature range of -20°C to +50°C.

G. ATS surge withstand ratings shall be as per UL 1008. Fault withstand and closing ratings

of ATS' shall be as follows when used with molded case circuit breakers:

1. 30 to 125 Amps 14,000 AIC 2. 150 to 260 Amps 30,000 AIC 3. 300 to 1000 Amps 65,000 AIC

H. Manual Operation: ATS shall have permanently attached, insulated handle for manual

operation. Handles shall manually operate the same contacts used for automatic operation.

I. System shall be Cummins Power Command Automatic Transfer with solid state control

panel, or comparable product by previously named manufacturers, as follows:

1. Cummins OPTC Open Transition Transfer Switch. PART 3 EXECUTION


3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Site Verification of Conditions: Examine the conditions under which the equipment shall be delivered, installed, and operated. Make all allowances required for operation and maintenance of the equipment, per Codes and manufacturer.

3.2 INSTALLATION




maintenance access. 4. Maintain isolation of load, normal and emergency conductors, except within the

switch enclosure(s). 5. Install freestanding equipment on concrete housekeeping pads as per Section

“Common Work Results For Electrical”, and as indicated. 6. On switches on exterior, below-grade walls, maintain a minimum of 1 inch of

clearance between wall and rear of switch enclosure.

B. Rough-in:

1. Rough-in all underslab or below grade conduits, ducts, etc. prior to setting switches or other equipment in place.

2. Coordinate exact stubups with proposed manufacturer’s equipment installation drawings and the work of other trades in this contract.

3. Roughin for all required circuits, controls, connections, etc. as required by proposed equipment, even if not explicitly indicated on plans.

4. Make minor adjustments to locations so as to maintain required front working clearances and clearance above and below per NEC.

C. Remote Equipment: Install all remote equipment, as specified, indicated on contract

drawings, or required for proper operation of transfer switch system. Provide all raceways, wiring, connections, testing of remote equipment: 1. Connections to engine/generator(s) for engine start/stop controls.

3.3 CONSTRUCTION


1. Provide connections between transfer switch(es) and other work of this contract:

a. Building electrical system. b. Emergency generator.

B. Sequences of Operation: Where multiple automatic transfer switches are coupled to a

single generator, the starting control system shall be such that Engine Start contacts at any transfer switch will start the engine. Engines shall not shut down until all associated transfer switches have transferred back to normal source and all cool-down time delays have expired.

C. Grounding: Ground switchboards, panelboards, all metallic service and distribution

equipment frames and enclosures per NEC and as specified in Section “Grounding & Bonding For Electrical Systems”. Ground transfer switch system as follows:


1. Connect transfer switch ground lug to enclosure and to normal, emergency and load circuit equipment grounding conductors.

2. All sizes shall be as per NEC or as indicated on drawings, whichever is larger. 3. Maintain isolation of all grounded equipment conductors (neutrals) within the

transfer switch enclosure from ground.

D. Connections: Tighten joints, connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in accordance with manufacturer’s published torque tightening values for connectors and bolts. Where manufacturer’s torque requirements are not indicated, tighten connections to comply with torque tightening values specified in UL 486A, “Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors” and 486B, “Wire Connectors for Use with Aluminum Conductors.”


A. Restore all finishes, equipment, surfaces and/or grade to original condition, where affected by the work of this section.


A. General:


2. Test all system functions, operations, and protective features according to manufacturer’s written instructions.

3. Acceptance Testing: Provide for acceptance testing of electrical equipment specified in this section, as follows, and as required in Section ““Common Work Results For Electrical.”


5. Provide a set of Contract Drawings to the testing agency. 6. Provide manufacturer's installation and testing instructions to the testing agency. 7. Provide complete shop drawing data on all equipment. 8. Provide written results of all tests. Include date, equipment ID, name of testing

company and technician, and results of each individual test. Provide pass/fail indication for each test.


1. Inspect accessible components for cleanliness, mechanical, and electrical

integrity, for presence of damage or deterioration, and to ensure removal of temporary shipping bracing. Do not proceed with tests until deficiencies are corrected.


3. Inspect to confirm proper isolation of neutrals to ground. 4. All settings, as specified in this section, shall be properly set and verified prior to

equipment testing.

C. Acceptance Testing:

1. Transfer Switch Tests: After installing equipment, perform the following tests, at a minimum:


a. Perform inspections and tests stated in NETA ATS, “Acceptance Testing Specifications for Electrical Power Distribution Equipment and Systems,”

b. Tests shall be performed with switch in both normal and emergency positions.

c. Set & calibrate all settings per specifications. d. Perform insulation-resistance tests for all buses and contactor

assemblies. e. Perform insulation resistance tests, phase-phase and phase-ground. f. Perform continuity tests of all grounds, and bonded components. g. Perform overpotential tests per ANSI 37.20c. h. Phase rotation. Matched to load requirements. i. All protective and shutdown features tested. j. Specified pickup, dropout, transfer, retransfer, engine start and cool

down, and exercise timer settings. k. Operation of transfer and retransfer operation, including failure of

emergency source. l. Operation of all warning and safety shutdown features, annunciation

panels and lights, by simulating failure of each component. m. Operation of isolation bypass switch, where so equipped, in normal and

emergency source mode. n. Operation of auxiliary contacts and devices. o. Operation of all gauges, pilot lights, test switches, and other control

equipment.

D. Test Failures: Compare test results with specified performance or manufacturer's data. Correct deficiencies identified by tests and retest. Remove and replace malfunctioning components with new, and retest.


and signed "Satisfactory Test" label to the unit.

F. Manufacturer’s Field Services:

1. Provide on-site, post installation by factory-trained manufacturer's representative(s).

2. Assist installer and verify that all adjustable parameters are set, as specified in this section.

3. Provide a written start-up and testing checklist, which verifies all settings and features are properly set and functioning.

3.6 ADJUSTING

A. General:

1. Set all adjustable parameters to those as specified. 2. Provide written report, included in O&M Manuals, to indicate final setting of all

adjustable features. 3.7 CLEANING

A. Inspect interior and exterior of installed switches. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish.

3.8 DEMONSTRATION

A. Training: Arrange and pay for the services of a factory-authorized service representative


to demonstrate transfer switch operation and accessories to Owner's staff. Include discussion on all conditions of operation and maintenance. Provide hands-on equipment operation using the actual installed switch(es), covering the following:

1. Safety precautions. 2. Features and construction of project equipment and accessories. 3. Routine inspection, test and maintenance procedures. 4. Routine cleaning. 5. Adjustable parameters, how and why to adjust. 6. Features, operation, and maintenance of unit and protective devices. 7. Manual switch operation. 8. Setting of exercise timer and load/no load selection. 9. Use of test switch to test switch and generator operation. 10. Coordination with generators.

B. Schedule training with at least 7 days' advance notice, and in conjunction with generator

discussions, where applicable.

END OF SECTION

EASTERN DISTRICT POLICE STATION 16500-1 LIGHTING 28103.01 January 15, 2013

SECTION 16500 - LIGHTING PART 1 GENERAL 1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS


1.2 SUMMARY


1. Lighting fixtures 2. Ballasts 3. Lamps 4. Photocells 5. Occupancy sensors


1. Section “Finishes” for coordination with mounting surfaces and materials. 2. Section “Common Work Results For Electrical.” 3. Section “Grounding & Bonding For Electrical Systems” for grounding and bonding

requirements. 4. Section “Low Voltage Power Conductors and Cables” for conductors. 5. Section “Raceways & Boxes For Electrical Systems” for connecting conduits,

cables, etc. 6. Section “Wiring Devices” for control switches, wallbox dimmers, etc.

1.3 REFERENCES

A. ANSI

1. ANSI C78.1 American National Standard for Fluorescent Lamps- Rapid-Start Types -Dimensional and Electrical Characteristics

2. ANSI C82.4 Ballasts for High Intensity Discharge and Low-Pressure Sodium Lamps

3. ANSI C82.6 Reference Ballasts for High Intensity Discharge Lamps - Methods of Measurement

4. ANSI C82.11 High-Frequency Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts 1.4 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION

A. Performance Requirements: Performance of the lighting fixtures and controls is based on the specified and/or indicated products. It is the full responsibility of the installer to insure that any differences in products do not deviate from the intended design or performance.

1.5 SUBMITTALS



1. Individual lighting fixtures. 2. Energy Star compliance for exit lights. 3. Fluorescent ballasts. 4. HID ballasts. 5. Emergency battery inverter ballasts. 6. Low voltage contactor panels. 7. Occupancy sensors. 8. Lighting poles. 9. Certain fixtures have been selected based not only on performance, but on

appearance, finish, shape, etc. Any substitutions shall be equal in performance and construction, as well as in appearance, as judged by the Owner or Architect. Where no equals are available, as determined by the Architect, submit the specified fixture.


1. Manufacturer's specifications, data sheets. 2. Catalog cuts. 3. Dimensional drawings. 4. Installation Instructions. 5. Wiring & connection diagrams. 6. Capacity ratings, performance curves. 7. Information required to indicate contract compliance. 8. Clearly indicate and/or mark options, etc.:

a. Manufacturer/cat. number. b. Lamp type, number of lamps, etc. c. HID ballast type, PF, data, etc. d. Fluorescent ballast data. e. Coefficient of Utilization (C.U.) charts. f. Isofootcandle curves for exterior fixtures. g. Construction data, materials, lens type, reflector material, housing, as

applicable. h. Warranty data. i. Color charts, where applicable. j. Fixture samples when requested.

C. Calculations:

1. Computer footcandle calculations, for any area when requested, and for the

following areas: a. High bay warehouse storage areas. b. Gymnasiums c. Auditoriums/Cafeterias d. Parking Lots e. Representative Classroom areas f. Media Center/Libraries g. Open Office areas

2. Calculations, shall utilize the following parameters:

a. <<0.80 >> maintenance factor. b. 80/50/20 reflectances. c. Work plane – 30 inches AFF. d. Include racks or other solid obstacles, as shown.

3. Calculations, shall indicate the following information: a. Fc printout showing fc levels at 2 ft intervals, throughout illuminated areas

(10 ft intervals for exterior calculations).


b. Average, maximum and minimum fc levels. c. Ave/min and Ave/max ratios. d. Total quantity of fixtures. e. Total input watts for lighting system.

D. Wiring Diagrams:

1. Inverter ballasts, confirming the proposed wiring/control method. 2. Occupancy sensors. 3. Low voltage control systems. 4. Low voltage contactor panels.

E. Shop Drawings:

1. Low voltage contactor panels.

F. Samples:

1. Provide fixture samples, when requested. 2. Sample shall be identical to the proposed fixture in color, lamp, physical size, etc. 3. Sample shall have a cord and plug, for connection to 120V, 20A wall receptacle.

G. Closeout Submittals: Submit in accordance with the General Conditions and Division 1

requirements, Section , and as follows:

1. Provide relamping chart of all fixtures used on project and the corresponding lamp information.

2. Include lamp manufacturer, catalog number, color temperature and any special features (i.e. quartz restrike HID).

3. Control system programming, setup and user controls.

1.6 ELECTRONIC AUTOCADD DOCUMENTS

A. Requests for electronic Autocadd documents will be accommodated to the contractors and installers upon receipt of Kibart’s Electronic Document Release Form and payment for time and expense for document preparation. Refer to Section “Common Work Results for Electrical” for additional information and costs.







1. The complete performance of the assembled fixtures, mounts, poles, etc.

including all accessories shall be the sole responsibility of the supplier. It is the installer’s responsibility to ensure that all factory and field installed accessories and loose components used in the system, meet these specifications, and


perform up to the stated and tested standards. 2. Insure that the complete fixture assembly complies with all individual component

specifications, including ballasts, lamps, etc. 3. Pole mounted fixtures: The manufacturer shall be responsible for the proper fit

and performance of the fixture and pole, including attachment hardware, support arms, etc.


1. Manufacturer shall have a minimum 5 year record of fixture manufacturing and in

service products of similar product. 2. Furnish lighting fixtures indicated, complete with lamps, ballasts and mounting

and/or suspension hardware. 3. Furnish interior lighting fixtures with proper trim kits, framing kits, supports, etc. 4. Furnish exterior fixtures mounted on the building with required backboxes to

match mounting surfaces. Also include all pole mounted fixtures with pole standards.

5. Drawing fixture schedule generally indicates required features and/or performance. Manufacturers' catalog numbers are noted for reference and may not include all suffixes and prefixes of required features. Provide fixtures with all the features of the base catalog number provided and all additional options indicated.

6. Verify that proposed controls and other components which are to interface with the fixtures, ballasts, etc. are fully compatible with the fixture, ballast and lamp manufacturers’ written instructions.


1. Experienced in the installation and connection of all proposed fixture types,

control components, and all other specified equipment.


1. ANSI American National Standards Institute 2. ASME American Society of Mechanical Engineers 3. ASTM American Society for Testing and Materials 4. IEEE Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers 5. NEC National Electrical Code 6. NECA National Electrical Contractor’s Association “Standards of

Installation.” 7. NEMA National Equipment Manufacturers Association 8. NETA National Electrical Testing Association 9. NFPA National Fire Protection Association 10. UL Underwriter’s Laboratories



1. Provide all transportation of unit(s) to site. 2. Provide for rigging needed for unloading poles, crossarm assemblies, and other

large equipment, and setting into final position.



1. Store all fixtures in original packaging, as recommended by manufacturer. 2. Store all fixtures in covered storage or building, out of the weather, until

installation. 3. Protect fixtures from physical damage and deterioration due to excessive heat,

moisture, etc. 4. Do not store electronic or sensitive components (i.e. occupancy sensors, control

systems, etc.) in areas of high heat or humidity, which might create corrosion or other deterioration.

5. Provide covers for all aluminum blade louvered fixtures to prevent dirt, fingerprints, etc.

6. Store poles in horizontal position, on-grade with proper supports to prevent sagging and scratches.


A. Fire Rated Ceilings: Fixtures shall be compatible with ceiling or ceiling assembly fire rating per Architectural drawings. Provide rated fixtures or tenting of light fixtures to maintain rating of ceiling. Refer to Architectural drawings and specifications for locations and rating requirements.

B. Inmate/Prisoner Detention Areas: Project includes work and equipment to be installed in detention environments. All materials and methods shall be suitable for such “Maximum Security” environment. This includes requirements for heavy duty equipment construction, tamperproof equipment and hardware and special construction tolerances/workmanship, as specified herein.

1. Detention facilities shall have “maximum security” correctional grade fixtures,

unless indicated otherwise. 1.10 SEQUENCING


1. Coordinate layout and installation of fixtures with other installations. 2. Provide input to coordinated construction layout drawings to insure fixtures are

installed as designed. Revisions to locations and elevations from those indicated shall be made only after consulting the Engineer/Architect, as required to suit field conditions and as approved by the Owner.

3. Coordinate actual fixture depths and locations with piping, ductwork, cable trays, bulkheads, and other ceiling mounted equipment, etc. prior to rough-in.

1.11 WARRANTY

A. Special Warranty: Extended product warranty over and above that required by the Contract and General Conditions of this contract.

1. Linear fluorescent ballasts: 5 years parts and labor replacement. 2. Emergency fluorescent inverter ballasts: 5 years. 3. Fluorescent dimming ballasts: 3 years. 4. Exterior HID fixtures: 5 years. 5. HID ballasts: 3 years 6. Vandal-resistant fixture housing/lenses: Lifetime. 7. Exterior pole finishes: 5 years.

1.12 SYSTEM STARTUP


A. Manufacturer's Services: Provide services of a factory-authorized service representative to supervise the field assembly and connection of the following system, associated components and accessories, and the pretesting, programming and/or adjustment of all settings, components and accessories.

1. Low voltage control systems.


A. Available Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide the named “Basis of Design” manufacturer and model (“Basis of Design” fixtures are indicated on the drawing fixture schedule), or a comparable product of one of the other following named manufacturers:

1. Interior Lighting Fixtures:

a. Columbia Lighting b. Lithonia Lighting c. Cooper Lighting d. General Electric Co. e. Prescolite f. Lightolier g. Kenall Lighting h. New Star i. Fine Lite j. Guth Lighting

2. Exterior Lighting Fixtures: a. Lithonia Lighting b. Cooper Industries - Crouse Hinds Lighting c. General Electric Co. d. Prescolite e. Kenall Lighting f. New Star g. Spaulding

3. Vandal Resistant Lighting Fixtures: a. Columbia Lighting b. Lithonia Lighting c. Cooper Industries d. Kenall Lighting e. New Star f. Northern

4. Ballasts: a. Advance Ballast (Philips Lighting Electronics) b. Magnetek c. General Electric Co. d. Lightolier e. Lithonia f. Venture

5. Battery Inverter Ballasts: a. Bodine (basis of design) b. Prescolite c. Lithonia

6. Lamps: a. General Electric b. Sylvania


c. Philips Lighting Electronics d. Osram e. Venture Lighting

7. Occupancy Sensors a. Watt Stopper b. Hubbell c. Square D

2.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS

A. Listing/Labeling:

1. UL listed and labeled fixtures and wiring. 2. UL Damp or Wet location listed, as indicated or required. 3. UL hazardous area listed for Class, Division, and Group.

B. Mounting Accessories:

1. Fixture schedule generally indicates catalog number for lay-in tile ceilings. 2. Refer to Architectural drawings for ceiling types. 3. Provide fixture surface mounting kits, recessed framing kits, hardware, etc., as

required. 2.3 CONSTRUCTION FEATURES

A. Fluorescent Fixtures:

1. Die formed steel housing of 22 gauge, minimum. 2. Post fabrication painting with baked white enamel, unless otherwise indicated.

Pre-painted steel is not permitted. 3. Minimum reflectance of 87%. 4. Diffusers - 1/8" acrylic, unless noted. 5. Specification grade, unless noted.

B. Exterior Fixtures:

1. Cast aluminum housing, unless noted. 2. Dark bronze finish, or as selected by Architect. 3. UL Listed for Damp or Wet Location, as required. 4. Weatherproof gasketing. 5. Corrosion resistant hardware and materials. 6. Photocell as indicated.

C. Exit Light Fixtures:

1. All exit light fixtures shall comply with the US EPA’s “Energy Star Program

Requirements for Exit Signs" developed effective January 1, 1999.

D. Tamper Proof Hardware

1. Provide tamper proof hardware for all fixtures, housings, fixture guards, etc. installed under this Division where such equipment is accessible to inmates at any time. Such locations are indicated on the contract drawings.

2.4 FLUORESCENT BALLASTS


A. General Ballast requirements:

1. UL Listed. 2. CBM certified by ETL to ANSI C82.11 and C78.1. 3. Class "A" or greater sound rating. 4. Class P, auto reset, thermal protection. 5. Quick-disconnect electrical connectors for all double-ended fluorescent lamps

and multi-wire circuit supplied fixtures, to meet requirements of NEC 410.73 (G) Disconnecting Means.

B. 1 Lamp T5 Linear Electronic Fluorescent Ballasts:

1. Solid state, electronic ballasts 2. 5 year manufacturer’s warranty to cover parts & labor. 3. Programmed start with precise filament heating and starting voltage application. 4. Compatible with frequent on/off operations (i.e. occupancy sensors). 5. Series lamp operation for 2-lamp ballasts. 6. Constant light output for voltage ranges 120V or 277V +10%. 7. Minimum starting temperature: 0°F 8. Audible noise above 16dB Ambient <2 db (A sound rating) 9. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) <10% 10. Crest Factor <1.7 11. Input Power Factor >98% lagging 12. Ballast factor >1.0 13. Maximum Input watts (ANSI) for F28T5 lamp applications:

a. 1 lamp 30 watts 14. Single ballast for operation of 1 lamps. 15. Provide multiple ballasts where multi-level switching or inverter ballasts are

indicated (per drawings and/or schedule). 16. Low profile type. 17. Sylvania Quicktronic PROStart, or equal

C. 2 Lamp T5 Linear Electronic Fluorescent Ballasts:

1. Solid state, electronic ballasts 2. 5 year manufacturer’s warranty to cover parts & labor. 3. High –frequency programmed start with precise filament heating and starting

voltage application. 4. Compatible with frequent on/off operations (i.e. occupancy sensors). 5. Series lamp operation for 2-lamp ballasts. 6. Constant light output for voltage ranges 120V or 277V +10%. 7. Minimum starting temperature: 0°F 8. Audible noise above 16dB Ambient <2 db (A sound rating) 9. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) <10% 10. Crest Factor <1.7 11. Input Power Factor >98% lagging 12. Ballast factor fixed output >9 13. Maximum Input watts (ANSI) for F28T5 lamp applications:

a. 2 lamps 54 watts 14. Single ballast for operation of 1 or 2 lamps. 15. Provide multiple ballasts where multi-level switching or inverter ballasts are

indicated (per drawings and/or schedule). 16. Low profile type. 17. Sylvania Quicktronic Premier XP PROStart, or equal


D. Compact Fluorescent Lamp Ballasts:

1. Solid state, electronic ballasts 2. 5 year manufacturer’s warranty to cover parts & labor. 3. Programmed start with precise filament heating and starting voltage application. 4. Compatible with frequent on/off operations (i.e. occupancy sensors). 5. Series lamp operation for 2-lamp ballasts. 6. Constant light output for voltage ranges 120V or 277V +10%. 7. Minimum starting temperature: 0°F 8. Audible noise above 16dB Ambient <2 db (A sound rating) 9. Total Harmonic Distortion (THD) <10% 10. Crest Factor <1.7 11. Input Power Factor >98% lagging 12. Ballast factor >1.0 13. Single ballast for operation of 1 or 2 lamps. 14. Provide multiple ballasts where inverter ballasts are indicated (per drawings

and/or schedule). 15. Ballast shall provide multiple voltage auto-sensing (108-305 V) and proper

operation on either 120 or 277V. Advance SmartMate - Intellivolt, or equal.

E. Fluorescent Emergency Battery Inverter Ballasts:

1. For 48" linear and U-shaped fluorescent lamps: a. Inverter ballasts for operation of (1) lamp. b. Dual voltage 120/277 volt input. c. Maintenance free, sealed nickel cadmium battery. d. Charger and circuitry in UL Listed metal case. e. Installed in, or on top of, fixture housing. f. Battery shall provide 1100-1200 lumen initial light output, for 90 minutes. g. Test button and charge indication LED on fixture. h. 5 year full warranty. i. Bodine B50 (basis of design).

2. Compact fluorescent downlights. a. Similar to 48" lamp unit above, except: b. Single compact PL, twin tube or quad tube fluorescent lamp. c. Bodine (basis of design).

2.5 HIGH INTENSITY DISCHARGE BALLASTS

A. General Requirement:

1. Compliance with the following ANSI standards: a. ANSI C78 document, as applicable to the lamp type and wattage.

Compliance for lamp current crest factor, starting currents, open circuit voltages and operating conditions.

2. Copper windings. 3. Outdoor ballasts suitable for starting and operation at -20°F (-40°F for HPS)

throughout the input voltage range. 4. Maintain lamp watts within prescribed limits throughout rated lamp life, per ANSI

(HPS lamps). 5. Lamp wattage regulation and dip tolerance shall be as defined by ANSI C82.4

and 82.6. 6. Hi-Pot test at 2,500 volts for one minute and a 10 kV transient insulation test as

described in ANSI C82.4 and ANSI C82.6.


B. Metal Halide Ballasts:

1. General Requirements for All Metal Halide Ballasts: a. Pulse-start ignitor. b. Starting down to -40°F.

2. Pulse Start Constant Wattage Auto-regulator (CWA) type ballasts. a. Maximum current crest factor of 1.6. b. High (minimum 0.90) power factor. c. Dip tolerance of 50 % of line voltage. d. Lamp wattage regulation of +10 %. e. Line Voltage regulations of +10 %. f. Minimum start temperature: -20oF g. Advance SuperCWA, or equal.

2.6 LAMPS:

A. T5 Linear Fluorescent Lamps (F28T5):

1. Reduced mercury content. Bulbs shall have passed the EPA Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) tests.

2. Rated as non-hazardous waste, requiring no special disposal requirements. 3. 0.625" diameter (T5). 4. Miniature bipin (G5) base. 5. Tri-phosphor coating. 6. CRI of 85 (minimum). 7. 3125 initial lumens @ 35 degree C. 8. 111 lumens/watt (initial) 9. 20,000 hours rated life. 10. 3500K color Temperature. 11. Sylvania Pentron premier XP Eco, GE or Philips.

B. Compact Fluorescent Lamps:

1. Reduced mercury content. Bulbs shall have passed the EPA Toxicity Characteristic Leaching Procedure (TCLP) tests.

2. Rated as non-hazardous waste, requiring no special disposal requirements. 3. Double, quad, or triple tube, per fixture schedule. 4. 2 or 4-pin base, as required. 5. Tri-phosphor coating. 6. CRI of 82 (minimum). 7. 10,000 hours rated life. 8. 3500K color Temperature. 9. General Electric Biax, Philips, or Osram/Sylvania.

C. Metal Halide Lamps:


1. Medium or mogul base to match lamp wattage. 2. Universal burn position, unless required otherwise. 3. Clear lamp, unless noted otherwise. 4. CRI of 65 (minimum). 5. 10,000 (V), 6,000 (H) hours rated life, minimum. 6. 4000K color Temperature. 7. General Electric Multi-Vapor, Venture, Philips, or equal. 8.

D. PULSE START Metal Halide Lamps:

1. Medium or mogul base to match lamp wattage. 2. Universal burn position, unless required otherwise. 3. Clear lamp, unless noted otherwise. 4. CRI of 68 (minimum). 5. 20,000 hours average rated life, minimum. 6. Corrected Color Temperature. 4000K (clear), 3700K (coated). 7. Pulse start ignitor.

E. All fluorescent lamps and all HID lamps on the project shall be of the same manufacturer

and color temperature to avoid variations in light and color between different manufacturers.

2.7 PHOTOCELLS

A. For single fixture control:

1. Integral with fixture where applicable. 2. Control only fixture where mounted. 3. Separately mounted photocells, not acceptable, unless otherwise indicated.

B. For multiple fixture/contactor control:

1. Permanently wired & mounted in weatherproof box. 2. 1/2" threaded fitting for knockout or threaded hub. 3. Omni-directional via threaded fitting. 4. UV treated translucent dome. 5. Adjustable photocell shield. 6. 2000W tungsten, 1800 VA ballast load. 7. 120, 208 or 277 V, as required. 8. Tork Model 2000, or equal.

C. All Photocells:

1. Delayed action on and off to prevent false switching. 2. Positive, snap action switching to prevent on-off cycling at dawn and dusk. 3. Integral photocells by the fixture manufacturer, installed at the factory. Integral

twist-lock type photocells are acceptable if installed as a permanent part of the fixture.

2.8 OCCUPANCY SENSORS

A. Sensor requirements:


1. 120V or 277V operation, as applicable. 2. Sensitivity adjustment with LED for calibration. 3. 5 year warranty from manufacturer. 4. Adjustable time delay.

B. Wall Switch PIR Sensor:

1. Passive infrared. 2. 180° coverage. 3. Coverage: 900 sq. ft. maximum, 300 sq. ft. for desktop activity. 4. Maximum load (incand. or fluor); 800W @ 120V, 1200W @ 277V. 5. 2 level, 36 segment fresnel lens. 6. Adjustable 3-300 fc daylight sensor to maintain illumination (remains off when

above set fc level). 7. Individual manual buttons for dual-circuit or bi-level controls, where indicated. 8. WattStopper WA-200 (single circuit) or WA-300 (dual circuit) series.

C. Wall/Ceiling Mounted PIR Sensor:

1. Passive infrared. 2. 180° (wall) or 360° (ceiling) coverage. 3. Interchangable lenses (patterns) for corridors. 4. Coverage: 1500 sq. ft. maximum, 500 sq. ft. for desktop activity. 5. Complete with power pack, relays. 6. Internal auxiliary contact for misc. functions. 7. Ganging of 1-3 sensors per power pack for large areas. 8. Adjustable 3-430 fc daylight sensor to maintain illumination (remains off when

above set fc level). 9. WattStopper CI-100 (wall) or CI-200 (ceiling) series.

D. Ceiling Mounted Ultrasonic Sensor:

1. Ultrasonic, 25kHz +0.005% 2. 360° coverage. 3. Complete with power pack, relays. 4. 500, 1000, or 1500 sq. ft. coverage, as required. 5. Ganging of 1-3 sensors per power pack for large areas. 6. WattStopper W500A/1000A/1500A/2000H series.

\ E. Dual Technology Sensor:

1. PIR and Ultrasonic. 2. Universal wall/ceiling mounting bracket. 3. Complete with power pack, relays. 4. Internal auxiliary contact for misc. functions. 5. Ganging of 1-3 sensors per power pack for large areas. 6. Adjustable 3-430 fc daylight sensor to maintain illumination (remains off when

above set fc level). 7. WattStopper DT-100L series.


A. Site Verification of Conditions: Examine the conditions under which the equipment shall


be delivered, installed, and operated. Make all allowances required for operation, access and maintenance of the equipment, per Codes and manufacturers.

3.2 INSTALLATION

A. Fixture installation - General:

1. Support all fixtures independent of ceiling systems, ducts and piping. 2. Provide hangers from purlins, joists, beams, etc., for support of all boxes and

fixtures. 3. Provide trapeze hanger supports for fixtures under ducts, large pipes, etc. 4. Galvanized steel for all hangers, channels, bolts, etc. 5. No fixtures shall be supported solely by grid or gypsum board ceilings. 6. Maintain required clearances around fixtures according to manufacturer’s written

instructions.

B. Recessed fixture frames:

1. Support recessed fixtures with galvanized tie wires, at two opposite corners of fixture.

2. Provide framing for all recessed fixtures. 3. Plaster frames for plaster or GWB ceilings. 4. Provide sloped ceiling adapters, where applicable. 5. Make electrical connections using flexible conduit, concealed above finished

ceilings.

C. Surface Mounted fixture:

1. Install fixtures tight to ceiling or wall surface with no visible gaps. 2. Support fixture using rigid rods, channels, etc. Do not support from ceiling grid

system or with wires. 3. Tighten attaching hardware evenly and per manufacturer’s instructions to prevent

warping or distortion of fixtures. 4. Provide recessed backbox to allow fixture mounting tight to surface. 5. Make electrical connections through rear of fixture, concealed as practicable.

D. Suspended fixture:

1. Provide hangers, rods, suspension cables, etc. for suspended fixtures, per

drawings. 2. Install fixtures level and will all support rods or cables plumb. 3. Securely attach fixture to rigid supports, where applicable, to prevent wobble. 4. For continuous row fixtures, install rows straight and level. Provide supports at

intervals, per manufacturer. 5. Make electrical connections from above, through top of fixture(s). Minimize

visible cable or hollow rod wiring drops by using through wiring of continuous row fixtures, as permitted by manufacturer.

E. Security, Detention and Inmate Area Fixture Installation:


1. Fixtures shall be installed per manufacturer’s instructions to prevent any and all movement of fixture.

2. Fixtures shall be substantially supported and attached to the building structure or secure ceiling structure.

3. All fixtures shall have tamperproof hardware (torx center pin). 4. Recessed fixtures shall not permit upward movement such that contraband or

items can be inserted between fixture and surrounding ceiling or trim. 5. Surface fixtures shall be installed to prevent any gaps between fixture and

mounting surface. Fixture shall be sealed to permanent surfaces (drywall, security ceiling or concrete) with permanent sealant/adhesive to prevent insertion of paper or other objects between fixture housing and mounting surface.

F. General Coordination:

1. Even, symmetrical spacing of fixtures. 2. Coordinate with diffusers, grilles and access panels in ceilings to establish a

symmetrical pattern. 3. Drawings are general in nature and show approximate mounting locations of

exterior lights. Coordinate during construction to center fixtures where applicable and coordinate with other wall mounted materials (downspouts, etc.).

G. Pole Mounted Fixtures:

1. Coordinate pole lights and foundations, anchor bolts and fixture orientations. 2. Properly aim all fixtures per the specified distribution patterns. 3. Provide driven rod at each foundation for grounding each lighting pole. 4. Determine exact pole base location prior to excavation or drilling. 5. Mark all pole locations and verify coordinate with all other trades prior to

installation. 6. Repair damage to new or existing utilities, caused during installation, shall at no

cost to Owner. 7. Provide foundations for all light poles. 8. Poured in place concrete with reinforcing steel and PVC conduit wiring sleeves. 9. Foundation reinforcing shall be per drawings, or as follows, if not indicated:

Footings Rebar Size

Pole Hgt Depth Diam Vert Ties H<<15' 48" 18" #5 #3 15'<<H<<20' 48" 24" #6 #3

10. Bases shall extend a minimum of 4" above finished grade (exposed), or as

indicated on drawings. 11. Sonotube bases shall be bagged and rubbed. 12. Grout all spaces between top of foundation and bottom of pole base with non-

shrink grout. Taper grout for water runoff.

H. Occupancy Sensor Installation:

1. Install in ceiling or wall, per actual manufacturer’s instructions. Drawings are not to be used for exact placement.

2. Infrared only sensors: a. Maintain maximum distance from heating registers, convectors, unit

heaters, and other moving hot air sources. b. Do not aim sensing elements at open doors or windows.

3. Ultrasonic only sensors: a. Do not aim sensing elements at open doors or windows.


3.3 CONSTRUCTION

A. Grounding: Ground fixtures, housings, poles, and supporting equipment frames and enclosures per NEC and as specified in Section “Grounding & Bonding For Electrical Systems.”

B. Connections: Tighten joints, connectors and terminals, including screws and bolts, in

accordance with manufacturer’s published torque tightening values for connectors and bolts. Where manufacturer’s torque requirements are not indicated, tighten connections to comply with torque tightening values specified in UL 486A, “Wire Connectors and Soldering Lugs for Use with Copper Conductors”.



3.5 ADJUSTING

A. General:

1. Adjust aiming of all fixtures with adjustable optics or housings. 2. Rotate downlight trims for proper orientation of louver blades or wall wash

reflectors.

B. Occupancy Sensor Adjustments:

1. Provide masking or blocking of PIR sensors, as required to limit sensitivity to within the intended room/area only.

2. Provide field adjustments to sensitivity and range, appropriate to the activity planned in the area, coverage area, etc.

3. Provide shielding to limit sensitivity to nearby illumination sources, as required. 4. Re-adjust any sensors for improved operation per Owner direction. 5. Adjust footcandle level settings for sensors with daylight sensing. 6. Set “Time Delay Off” adjustments, as follows:

a. Toilet Rooms: 30 minutes b. Individual Offices: 15 minutes c. Open Office Areas: 30 minutes d. Conference Rooms: 15 minutes e. Other areas not listed: 30 minutes

C. Photocell Sensor Adjustments:

1. Where possible, set photocell “direction” toward North sky. 2. Provide field adjustments to lighting sensitivity, appropriate to the activity planned

in the area. 3. Provide shielding to limit sensitivity to any nearby illumination sources, as

required. 4. Re-adjust any sensors for improved operation per Owner direction.

3.6 CLEANING

A. General: Clean all fixtures after work of all trades is complete, and prior to turnover to Owner.


1. Remove paint splatters and other spots, dirt, and debris. 2. Touch up scratches and mars of finish to match original finish. 3. Remove protective films, etc. from all devices, controls, etc. 4. Remove all wire clippings, etc. from interior of fixtures. 5. Adjust louvers, shielding, etc. for proper and consistent orientation. 6. Thoroughly wipe clean all surfaces with degreaser/cleaner, suitable for material. 7. Leave no visible dirt or fingerprints on lenses, louvers, housings, reflectors,

lamps, etc. 3.7 DEMONSTRATION




Owner’s discretion. 6. Schedule after all final tests, adjustments and Owner's acceptance. 7. Training shall include use of delivered O&M manuals for each system or

equipment.

B. Occupancy Sensor Demonstration:

1. Provide working demonstration for each type of sensor installed. 2. Explain function, delay settings, adjustments, etc.

END OF SECTION